Falancs User en

LMS FALANCS User
Manual
A Part of the
LMS FALANCS Documentation
F-ii
LMS FALANCS User Manual
Copyright Notice
Copyright 1998-2002 by LMS Deutschland GmbH. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronically, mechanicallly, by photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the written permission of LMS Deutschland GmbH, Luxemburger Strae 7, D-67657 Kaiserslautern, Germany.
Registered Trademarks
TecWare, LMS TecWare FatiCount, LMS TecWare AutoAnalyze, LMS TecWare RainEdit, LMS TecWare RainExtra, LMS TecWare MultiRain, LMS TecWare CombiTrack,
LMS TecWare RP-Filter, LMS FALANCS LifeStat, LMS TecWare GIDAS, LMS FALANCS, LMS FALANCS/FEM, LMS FALANCS/FSE and LMS TecWare TimeEdit are
registered trademarks of LMS International NV.
ANSYS is a registered trademark of ANSYS Inc.
I-DEAS and I-DEAS Master Series are registered trademarks of Structural Dynamics
Research Corporation.
NASTRAN is a registered trademark of the National Aeronautics and Space Administration.
PATRAN and MSC/NASTRAN are registered trademarks of MacNeal-Schwendler Corporation.
Pro/MECHANICA is a registered trademark of Parametric Technology Corporation.
CATIA is a trademark of Dassault Systmes.
Open Software Foundation, OSF, OSF/Motif and Motif are trademarks of The Open
Software Foundation, Inc.
UNIX is a registered trademark of Novell Inc.; licensed exclusively through X/Open
Company, Ltd.
DEC, VAX, VMS are registered trademarks of Compaq Computer.
HP and HP 9000 are registered trademarks of Hewlett.Packard Company.
SGI and IRIX are registered trademarks of Silicon Graphics Inc..
SUN and Solaris are registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc..
All other product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective manufacturers.
Preliminary Notice
LMS Deutschland GmbH aims to deliver software of high quality which conforms to the
specifications agreed with licensees, but cannot guarantee that all features will perform
exactly as described. Those who use the program do so on the understanding that the
results from analysis software are dependent on the inputs. In any case, the program
should be used in accordance with the instructions contained in the documentation and
other information provided with the program supplied by LMS Deutschland GmbH. LMS
Deutschland GmbH does not warrant that any specific feature will produce specific results, and does not accept liability for any losses, direct, consequential or otherwise, resulting from the use of the program.
Authoring notes
Prof. M.E. Barkey, Ph.D., University of Alabama: author
Dr. Michael Hack, LMS Deutschland GmbH: author
Dr. Michael Speckert, LMS Deutschland GmbH: author
Dr. Frank Zingsheim, LMS Deutschland GmbH, author
Gabi Schfer, LMS Deutschland GmbH, author and editor
LMS FALANCS features and benefits
F-iii
LMS FALANCS features and benefits

Features
z Import of FEM results from all popular packages; loads
from kinematic simulations, test environments.
z Calculates fatigue-life using stress-life and strain-life approaches.
z Supports both uniaxial and multiaxial loading and calculates response for local multiaxial stress states using critical
plane approaches and local plasticity models.
z Provides dedicated approaches for both seam welds and spot
welds.
z Modal superposition to handle situations in which the lowest natural frequency of the component is close to the loading frequency.
z Automatic node-elimination and clustering.
z Displays results in your FEM post-processor as damage contours.
z Supports multiple platforms and parallel processing.
Benefits
z Helps the design team to find critical locations and time to
failure without guesswork.
z Identifies potential fatigue problems and evaluates the fatigue performance between design changes before hard
prototyping.
z Advanced yet proven technology validated by test.
z Open solver that works with most FEM packages no need
to learn new post-processor.
z Easy to use for occasional user, yet sophisticated enough to
handle the most advanced applications.
z Handles industrial-size tasks with 1,000,000+ nodes and
100+loads.
F-iv
z Speed of calculation enables practical design troubleshooting.

z Allows test and analytical departments to work together.
Overview of the LMS FALANCS documentation
F-v
Overview of the LMS FALANCS

documentation
The documentation of the LMS FALANCS fatigue analysis tool
is split in several manuals:
Remark: Some of the manuals are available as printable Adobe
pdf files and/or as a online html version, only.
LMS FALANCS User Manual (this manual)

The LMS FALANCS User Manual describes the fatigue
analysis tool LMS FALANCS developed by LMS Deutschland GmbH. This users manual is addressed to new LMS
FALANCS users as well as to persons who already have
worked with former versions of LMS FALANCS. It is intended to explain the basic steps as well as to give detailed
information on the user interaction.
LMS FALANCS Theory Manual
The objective of the theory manual is to present and define
the fatigue analysis approaches and methods that are available in LMS FALANCS. The reader is assumed to have
some prior background with basic fatigue analysis methods.
For readers interested in an in-depth discussion about fatigue analysis, there are several introductory and advanced
texts on fatigue analysis listed in the reference section in
addition to citations to relevant literature.
LMS FALANCS Examples & Verification
The intention of the Examples & Verification manual is to
assist the user in the first steps with LMS FALANCS. It
guides the user from standardized fatigue tests to complex
analysis runs.
Each example explains particular fatigue analysis tasks and
describes the necessary steps in detail.
The verification parts explain in detail how the individual
results are calculated by hand. It is clear that those verifi-
F-vi
cation parts are only available for examples with simple

loads.
Getting started
F-vii
Getting started
The LMS FALANCS User Manual describes the fatigue analysis
tool LMS FALANCS developed by LMS Deutschland GmbH. It
guides the user from standardized fatigue tests to complex
analysis runs.
This users manual is addressed to new LMS FALANCS users
as well as to persons who already have worked with former
versions of LMS FALANCS. It is intended to explain the basic
steps as well as to give detailed information on the user interaction.
The manual describes the capabilities of a full LMS FALANCS
installation. Some of the features may be not available in your
installation. See the part about licensing options in Part 1.
Part 1 Purpose of LMS FALANCS and related tools
gives an introduction to LMS FALANCS and fatigue analysis.
Part 2 First Steps
helps the user who already has worked with fatigue analysis tools how to perform his requests with LMS FALANCS.
Part 3 Reference Graphical User Interface
explains the graphical user interface of LMS FALANCS in
detail including the error and information messages.
Part 4 Reference Batch Mode Interface
gives detailed information about the batch mode and the
batch command files of LMS FALANCS.
Part 5 Reference General Settings
describes the contents of the configuration files and explains
the use of some additional programs provided by the LMS
FALANCS installation.
F-viii
Part 6 Reference Interfaces to Finite Element Tools

helps the user of LMS FALANCS/FEM in the use of his finite element tool in connection to LMS FALANCS.
Part 7 Databases
gives detailed information on the configuration of databases
in LMS FALANCS and the used database formats..
Part 8 Seam Weld Databases
describes the provided seam weld catalogues.
Part 9 Installation
gives hints on the installation of LMS FALANCS
Part 10 Frequently Asked Questions
answers some of the most commonly ask questions.
Part 11 LMS FALANCS for Microsoft Windows
describes the peculiarities of the Microsoft Windows version
of LMS FALANCS.
Appendix: File Formats
Here some ASCII data formats are described in detail.
Appendix: Data Representations of Stress-Life Curves
and Dang Van Data
gives detailed information on the relations between the different data representations.
Appendix: Windows in LMS FALANCS
describes the windows used in LMS FALANCS in detail
Appendix: References, Glossary, Index
contains references on further readings on fatigue and
welding, a glossary and the index of the LMS FALANCS
User Manual and the LMS FALANCS Theory Manual.
Table of Contents
F-xiii
Table of Contents
LMS FALANCS features and benefits ..................................... F-iii
Overview of the LMS FALANCS documentation ......................F-v
Getting started .......................................................................... F-vii
Table of Contents ...................................................................... F-ix
Table of Illustrations ............................................................... F-xix
Part 1 Purpose of LMS FALANCS and related tools
F-1
Virtual Prototyping for Durability........................................... F-3

3 steps for durability processing ................................................ F-3
LMS FALANCS: basic product and optional parts,
licensing .......................................................................................... F-5
Interactive and batch mode ....................................................... F-7
Related LMS FALANCS tools..................................................... F-9
LMS FALANCS LifeStat ............................................................ F-9
Related LMS TecWare tools ..................................................... F-11
LMS TecWare MultiRain ......................................................... F-11
LMS TecWare Time Edit and TimeView................................. F-13
LMS TecWare RainView .......................................................... F-14
Part 2 First Steps
F-17
Introduction to LMS FALANCS............................................... F-19

Starting LMS FALANCS ......................................................... F-19
Exiting LMS FALANCS ........................................................... F-21
Concepts of the Graphical User Interface ............................... F-22
Geometry Work Sheet............................................................... F-24
Common Analysis Steps ............................................................ F-27
Parameter Databases ............................................................... F-27
Database selection .................................................................... F-28
F-xiv
File selection.............................................................................. F-29

Channel selection...................................................................... F-29
A standard Non-FEM stress life analysis .............................. F-31
Collecting Input Data for Non-FEM Analyses........................ F-32
Starting and Modifying the GWS for a non-FEM stresslife analysis................................................................................ F-40
Starting an analysis from the Geometry Work Sheet ............ F-49
Interpreting results for the Non-FEM stress approach .... F-53
A standard Non-FEM strain life analysis.............................. F-57
Interpreting results for the Non-FEM strain approach .... F-61
Basic concepts of FEM-based analysis .................................. F-65
FEM concepts: element sets, node vs. element stresses......... F-65
A standard FEM-based stress life analysis........................... F-67
Collecting Input Data for FEM-based Analyses ..................... F-68
Starting and Modifying the GWS for a FEM-based stresslife Analysis ............................................................................... F-75
Starting a FEM-based Analysis ............................................... F-77
A standard FEM-based Strain-life Analysis ......................... F-79
Interpreting results for the FEM-based analysis................ F-81
Estimating Cyclic Material Properties.................................. F-83
Which data needs to be used for which process ................. F-85
Stress-life Approach.................................................................. F-86
Strain-life Approach ................................................................. F-87
Part 3 Reference Graphical User Interface
F-89
Overview ....................................................................................... F-91

Menus............................................................................................. F-93
Overview.................................................................................... F-93
Menu: File ................................................................................. F-95
Menu: Stress-life Approach ...................................................... F-98
Menu: Strain-life Approach.................................................... F-103
Menu: Tools ............................................................................. F-108
Table of Contents
F-xv
Menu: Configuration............................................................... F-113

Menu:Help ............................................................................... F-114
Common Operations ................................................................ F-117
Selection Windows in LMS FALANCS.................................. F-118
Working with Databases ........................................................ F-131
Operations on Data Sets......................................................... F-132
Viewing Load Channels.......................................................... F-154
Fatigue Analysis with the windows "Geometry Work
Sheet" and "Geometry Cell" ................................................... F-157
Monitoring Analysis Progress with Computation Status .... F-170
Printing Datasheets or Graphs .............................................. F-177
Management of Non-FEM Results ........................................ F-183
Loading Non-FEM Results..................................................... F-186
Saving Non-FEM Results ....................................................... F-187
Removing Non-FEM Results from the Result
Management............................................................................ F-188
Exporting the List of Non-FEM Results................................ F-189
Management of FEM Results ................................................. F-193
Viewing Results......................................................................... F-197
Viewing Non-FEM Results..................................................... F-198
Viewing FEM Results ............................................................. F-214
LMS FALANCS Methods ......................................................... F-221
Local Time Series (LTS) ......................................................... F-222
LTS Tensor Analysis............................................................... F-224
Transient Analysis.................................................................. F-225
History Reduction ................................................................... F-226
Data Sheets................................................................................. F-231
The Data Sheet for Stress-Life Curves and Dang Van
Data .............................................................................................. F-233
The Data Sheet ....................................................................... F-235
Window "Define Stress-life Data Sheet" ............................... F-236
The Data Sheet for Solution Parameters............................ F-251
Window "Define Solution Parameter Set"............................. F-252
The Data Sheet for Material Data......................................... F-273
The Window "Define Material Data Sheet" .......................... F-274
F-xvi
The Data Sheet for Method Parameters ............................. F-283

Window "Define Method parameter"..................................... F-285
Error and Information Messages.......................................... F-305
LMS FALANCS Main Program and Graphical User
Interface .................................................................................. F-306
Geometry Work Sheet and Cell.............................................. F-309
Non FEM methods .................................................................. F-314
FEM based analysis................................................................ F-317
Licensing problems ................................................................. F-319
Process communication problems .......................................... F-320
Part 4 ReferenceBatch Mode Interface
F-321
Starting a Batch Process......................................................... F-323

Start from the command line ................................................. F-323
Start from the Geometry Work Sheet.................................... F-324
Generating Batch Command Files ....................................... F-327
Using the Geometry Work Sheet File menu ......................... F-327
Converting Geometry Worksheets to a Batch Command
File ........................................................................................... F-327
Write a new or edit an old Batch command File................... F-328
The Batch Command File ....................................................... F-329
Path Specification ................................................................... F-329
Job Section [Job]................................................................... F-330
Task Section [Tasks] ........................................................... F-332
Method Parameter Section [MethodParam]....................... F-333
SN-Curve section [SNCurve]............................................... F-346
Material Section [Material] .............................................. F-356
Solution Parameter Section [SolParam]................................ F-366
Element Sets Section [ElementSets]................................. F-385
Channel Definition Section [Channels].............................. F-387
Test Schedule Definition Section [TSD] ............................... F-391
Calibration Section [Calibration] .................................... F-392
Load Case section [LoadCases]........................................... F-393
SigmaE section [SigmaE] .................................................... F-396
Le section [Le] ...................................................................... F-397
Table of Contents
F-xvii
Differences between Interactive and Batch

Processing................................................................................... F-398
The database handling for the references only version........ F-398
The database handling for the full version. .......................... F-399
Lack of job control ................................................................... F-399
License needed for parallel batch jobs................................... F-399
Part 5 Reference General Settings
F-401
System Level and User Specific Settings............................ F-403

Structure of a TecWare installation ...................................... F-403
The different locations for configuration files ....................... F-404
The Syntax of the Configuration Files .................................. F-405
The most important settings .................................................. F-406
Settings Specific to LMS FALANCS: falancs.ini ................ F-407
Overview.................................................................................. F-408
Parameters directly influencing the fatigue analysis........... F-410
Parameters for spot weld calculation .................................... F-418
Database configuration........................................................... F-419
Parameter Section for LMS FALANCS Methods result
specification............................................................................. F-422
LMS FALANCS Data Formats .............................................. F-429
Graphic Display Parameters.................................................. F-432
Parameters for multi processing controllers ......................... F-443
Parameters that should only be changed by system
administrators......................................................................... F-444
Parameters that should only be changed by your LMS
support person......................................................................... F-445
General TecWare Settings ...................................................... F-447
Shell Scripts ............................................................................... F-449
The tecware shell script.......................................................... F-449
Logging LMS FALANCS operations ..................................... F-451
FEM related shell scripts ....................................................... F-454
Part 6 ReferenceInterfaces to Finite Element Tools
F-457
Overview on Supported Interfaces ...................................... F-459
F-xviii
NASTRAN.................................................................................... F-461
Supported Versions, Analysis Types and Elements ............. F-461
Limitations and solutions....................................................... F-462
Sample-Load deck ................................................................... F-462
Output written by LMS FALANCS ....................................... F-463
Procedures for post-processing............................................... F-465
Using the PATRAN Tool Menu.............................................. F-467
Modal Transient Analysis ...................................................... F-471
Spot Weld Analysis ................................................................. F-472
ANSYS .......................................................................................... F-475
Procedures for post processing............................................... F-478
Generating element sets......................................................... F-480
I-DEAS ......................................................................................... F-481
Limitations .............................................................................. F-482
Pro/MECHANICA ...................................................................... F-487
Limitations ...........................................................................FF--488
ABAQUS ...................................................................................... F-491
Sample input file..................................................................... F-492
CAT/FALANCS ........................................................................... F-497
The CAT/FALANCS philosophy ............................................ F-498
The CAT/FALANCS command window................................. F-499
Viewing Results ...................................................................... F-501
Table of Contents
F-xix
Generating Element Sets ....................................................... F-503
Part 7 Databases
F-505
Shared or Private Databases ................................................. F-507

The Database Configuration Tool ........................................ F-509
Starting the DCT from LMS FALANCS ............................... F-510
Starting the DCT as stand alone program ............................ F-511
The window "Database Configuration Tool" ......................... F-513
Syntax of Database Definition ............................................... F-518
Description of The Database Formats................................. F-525
SN-Curves ............................................................................... F-526
Material Data.......................................................................... F-528
Method Parameter .................................................................. F-530
Solution Parameter................................................................. F-532
Part 8 Seam Weld Databases
F-535
Seam Weld Database Types .................................................... F-537

R1MS Materials Properties.................................................... F-538
Eurocode 3 ............................................................................... F-540
Structures and Detail Categories ......................................... F-543
Non-welded details ................................................................. F-544
Welded build up sections ........................................................ F-545
Transverse butt welds ............................................................ F-547
Welded attachments with non load carrying welds.............. F-549
Welded joints with load-carrying welds ................................ F-551
Hollow sections........................................................................ F-554
International Institute of Welding ....................................... F-559
Structures and Fatigue Classes ............................................. F-561
Part 9 Installation
F-587
Installation Instructions ......................................................... F-589

Operating Systems: Supported Versions ............................ F-591
F-xx
UNIX Systems......................................................................... F-591

Microsoft Windows.................................................................. F-591
Installation of CAT/FALANCS ............................................... F-593
Installation .............................................................................. F-594
Special Features for FEM Postprocessors.......................... F-595
ANSYS Post Processing Toolbar ............................................ F-595
Installing the PATRAN Tool Menu ....................................... F-598
Predefined Directories for Temporary Storage and for
Input Files .................................................................................. F-601
LMS FALANCS Temporary Directory .................................. F-601
Predefined Directories for Input Data................................... F-602
Necessary Storage Space ........................................................ F-603
Storage Space Needed for LMS FALANCS Software........... F-603
Temporary Storage Space Needed During LMS
FALANCS Execution .............................................................. F-603
Permanent Storage Needed for LMS FALANCS Results .... F-604
Prepare Batch Processing ...................................................... F-605
Queuing outside of LMS FALANCS ...................................... F-606
Queuing from the graphical user interface ........................... F-607
Part 10 Frequently Asked Questions
F-609
What is the polarity (sign) of load channels?..................... F-611

There are different entries in the Rainflow matrix and
the corresponding Damage matrix. Is that possible? ...... F-612
I increase the eL settings in my FEM analysis but the
damage gets smaller................................................................. F-613
I have made an ANSYS static analysis then performed
a fatigue calculation and can no longer find my static
stress results. Where are they?.............................................. F-614
I get high stresses at the points where the loads are
applied. Does this have influence on the fatigue
analysis? ...................................................................................... F-615
Table of Contents
Part 11 LMS FALANCS for Microsoft Windows
F-xxi
F-617
LMS FALANCS for Microsoft Windows ............................... F-619

Installation .............................................................................. F-619
Starting LMS FALANCS ....................................................... F-619
Pathnames for databases ....................................................... F-619
Global and local configuration ............................................... F-620
Restrictions.............................................................................. F-620
Appendix: File Formats
F-621
Directory names........................................................................ F-623

Unix ......................................................................................... F-623
Supported Data Formats ........................................................ F-625
List of load data formats ........................................................ F-625
List of FEM result data formats ............................................ F-626
List of FEM set file formats ................................................... F-626
List of GWS file formats ......................................................... F-627
The Data Format ASCII for Time Series ............................. F-629
ASCII File Format of Load-Notch Strain Curves.............. F-631
The ASCII Data Format For Element Sets ......................... F-633
Appendix: Data Representations of Stress-Life Curves and Dang

Van Data
F-635
Data Representation of SN curves (Woehler type ............ F-637
Data Representation of Stress-Life Bastenaire Curves .. F-639
Data Representation of Dang Van Data .............................. F-641
Appendix: Windows in LMS FALANCS
F-643
Window "Computation status" ............................................... F-645

Window "Constant Amplitude Life-curve(s) / Stressstrain curve(s)" .......................................................................... F-647
F-xxii
Window "Creation of synthetic SN curves"......................... F-651

Window "Damage Selection"................................................... F-655
Window "Estimation Based on Uniform Material Law"... F-659
Window "Exit LMS FALANCS" ............................................... F-661
Window "Geometry Cell" ......................................................... F-663
Window "Geometry Work Sheet" ........................................... F-667
Window "History Reduction ................................................... F-685
Window "Info"............................................................................. F-689
Window "Job Setup Window................................................... F-691
Window "Load History Calibration" ..................................... F-693
Window "Load History Channel Information" ................... F-695
Window "Test Schedule Segments - Info" ............................ F-697
Window "Options"...................................................................... F-699
Window "result selection"........................................................ F-703
Window "Setup information" .................................................. F-707
Window "Stress-life Approach - Stress-life Curve(s)" ....... F-709
Appendix: References, Glossary, Index
F-713
References .................................................................................. F-715

General textbooks on fatigue ................................................. F-715
General references on fatigue ................................................ F-716
Fatigue of Welds ..................................................................... F-717
Glossary....................................................................................... F-719
LMS FALANCS - General Index ............................................ F-731
Table of Illustrations
F-xxiii
Fig. 1:
Fig. 2:
Fig. 3:
Fig. 4:
Fig. 5:
Fig. 6:
Fig. 7:
Fig. 8:
Fig. 9:
Fig. 10:
Fig. 11:
Fig. 12:
Fig. 13:
Fig. 14:
Fig. 15:
Fig. 16:
Fig. 17:
Fig. 18:
Fig. 19:
Fig. 20:
Fig. 21:
Fig. 22:
Fig. 23:
Fig. 24:
Fig. 25:
Fig. 26:
Display of a rainflow matrix: "bubbles" and "3D solid

bars".......................................................................................F-15
Display of a rainflow matrix: "3d lines" and "numbers"......F-16
Starting LMS FALANCS on Microsoft Windows ................F-20
The message window when exiting LMS FALANCS ..........F-21
The Geometry Work Sheet (non-FEM stress-life
analysis).................................................................................F-40
The window "Geometry Cell" (non-FEM stress-life
analysis).................................................................................F-41
Editing a task number in the GWS......................................F-42
Editing a channel geometry in the GWS .............................F-43
Editing a channel calibration in the GWS ...........................F-43
Changing a stress-life curve in the GWS .............................F-44
The analysis in the window "Computation status" .............F-49
The jobs in the window "Info"...............................................F-50
The Geometry Work Sheet (FEM-based stress-life
analysis).................................................................................F-75
The window "Geometry Cell" (FEM-based stress-life
analysis).................................................................................F-76
LMS FALANCS main window..............................................F-93
Window "LMS FALANCS File Menu"..................................F-95
Menu Stress-life Approach ...................................................F-98
Menu Strain-life Approach .................................................F-103
Menu Tools ..........................................................................F-108
Window "Starting FALANCS tool: ASCII fil file ->
FALANCS Element sets"....................................................F-108
Window "Starting FALANCS tool: I-DEAS static
groups -> FALANCS Element sets" ...................................F-109
Window "Starting FALANCS tool: ABAQUS ->
FALANCS Element sets"....................................................F-109
Window "Starting FALANCS tool: Time Series
NASTRAN bulk data" .........................................................F-110
Window "Starting FALANCS tool: NASTRAN Punch
file Time Series ".............................................................F-110
Window "Starting FALANCS tool: Time series ->
ABAQUS input" ..................................................................F-111
Window "Starting FALANCS tool: ABAQUS .fil
Time Series " .......................................................................F-111
F-xxiv
Fig. 27:
Fig. 28:
Fig. 29:
Fig. 30:
Fig. 31:
Fig. 32:
Fig. 33:
Fig. 34:
Fig. 35:
Fig. 36:
Fig. 37:
Fig. 38:
Fig. 39:
Fig. 40:
Fig. 41:
Fig. 42:
Fig. 43:
Fig. 44:
Fig. 45:
Fig. 46:
Fig. 47:
Fig. 48:
Fig. 49:
Fig. 50:
Fig. 51:
Fig. 52:
Fig. 53:
Fig. 54:
Fig. 55:
Fig. 56:
Fig. 57:
Fig. 58:
Fig. 59:
Window "Starting FALANCS tool: IDEAS unv file

Time Series " .......................................................................F-112
Window "Computation Status "..........................................F-112
Menu Configuration............................................................F-113
Menu Help ...........................................................................F-114
The window giving information on the LMS FALANCS
version .................................................................................F-115
The file selection window (single file) ................................F-119
The file selection window (several files) ............................F-120
The Directory Selection window.........................................F-121
Channel selection window ..................................................F-123
The Lower list box in the window "Selection of load
cases" ...................................................................................F-124
Database selection window.................................................F-127
Database selection window.................................................F-133
The menu item Method Parameters... after loading
a parameter set ...................................................................F-135
The menu item Load Histories... in the Stress-life
Approach..............................................................................F-136
The window "Load History Selection"................................F-137
The menu item is ticked off. ...............................................F-137
The menu item FEM: Load Cases... in the Stress-life
Approach..............................................................................F-138
The window "Selection of load cases". ................................F-139
The selected load cases .......................................................F-140
The load history channels are added .................................F-140
The menu item is ticked off. ...............................................F-141
The window "Test Schedule Segments" .............................F-142
The menu item Test Schedule Segments... is ticked
off. ........................................................................................F-143
The window "Selection of element sets".............................F-144
The menu item FEM: Sets... is ticked off..........................F-145
Defining a new data set ......................................................F-147
Updating the data sheet of the SN-curve "Sample
Steel" in the database Default............................................F-150
Viewing the data sheet of the SN-curve "Sample Steel"
in the database Default ......................................................F-153
Start viewing load channels ...............................................F-154
Viewing three time series ...................................................F-155
Viewing a rainflow matrix ..................................................F-156
The GWS of a Non FEM - fatigue analysis ........................F-158
The GWS of a Non FEM - tensor analysis .........................F-158
Fig. 60:
Fig. 61:
Fig. 62:
Fig. 63:
Fig. 64:
Fig. 65:
Fig. 66:
Fig. 67:
Fig. 68:
Fig. 69:
Fig. 70:
Fig. 71:
Fig. 72:
Fig. 73:
Fig. 74:
Fig. 75:
Fig. 76:
Fig. 77:
Fig. 78:
Fig. 79:
Fig. 80:
Fig. 81:
Fig. 82:
Fig. 83:
Fig. 84:
Fig. 85:
Fig. 86:
Fig. 87:
Fig. 88:
Fig. 89:
Fig. 90:
Fig. 91:
Fig. 92:
Fig. 93:
Fig. 94:
F-xxv
The GWS of a FEM - fatigue analysis................................F-159

The GWS of FEM - local time series ..................................F-159
The window "Geometry Cell" in the FEM approach .........F-169
The window "Computation status".....................................F-170
Information on jobs .............................................................F-171
The window "Print" in Microsoft Windows ........................F-177
Window "Print" ...................................................................F-180
Window "List of Printers" ...................................................F-180
Management of Non-FEM results......................................F-184
list of results........................................................................F-184
The window "Export(csv)..."................................................F-189
The list of results in a result management window ..........F-190
The list of results exported into a csv-file (Excel)..............F-190
The window "Computation status" for a FEM-based
analysis................................................................................F-193
The window "Info" for a FEM-based analysis....................F-194
Selecting two Non-FEM result tasks for viewing ..............F-198
Displaying a Non-FEM result task ....................................F-199
overlayed material property curves ...................................F-201
cumulative load amplitude histograms..............................F-202
variable amplitude life curves ............................................F-203
Design points of Non-FEM result tasks.............................F-204
List of life points .................................................................F-205
Displaying weighted results of Non-FEM result tasks .....F-207
Displaying the block version of Non-FEM result tasks.....F-208
Displaying a Non-FEM result task as Rainflow-matrix ...F-209
Displaying the damage matrix of a Non-FEM result
task ......................................................................................F-211
Displaying the load-notch strain relations of Non-FEM
result tasks..........................................................................F-212
Displaying the P constant amplitude life curves of
Non-FEM result tasks ........................................................F-213
Pressing Down adds the selected task to the lower list
box........................................................................................F-227
The window "Damage selection" ........................................F-227
Defining the damage reduction ..........................................F-228
Defining the result directory ..............................................F-228
The window "Define Stress-life Data Sheet" .....................F-236
The area General Data for SN-Curves in the
window "Define Stress-life Data Sheet".............................F-239
The window "Define Solution Parameter Set" in the
Stress-life Approach............................................................F-252
F-xxvi
Fig. 95:
Fig. 96:
Fig. 97:
Fig. 98:
Fig. 99:
Fig. 100:
Fig. 101:
Fig. 102:
Fig. 103:
Fig. 104:
Fig. 105:
Fig. 106:
Fig. 107:
Fig. 108:
Fig. 109:
Fig. 110:
Fig. 111:
Fig. 112:
Fig. 113:
Fig. 114:
Fig. 115:
Fig. 116:
Fig. 117:
The area Element in the window "Define Solution

Parameter Set"....................................................................F-253
The area Strain-life Approach in the window
"Define Solution Parameter Set"........................................F-254
The area Stress-life Approach in the window
"Define Solution Parameter Set"........................................F-257
The area Spot welds in the window "Define Solution
Parameter Set"....................................................................F-260
The area General in the window "Define Solution
Parameter Set"....................................................................F-262
The area Design Point in the window "Define
Solution Parameter Set" .....................................................F-264
The area Computed Points in the window "Define
Solution Parameter Set" .....................................................F-266
The area FEM/LTS: Local Stress State in the
window "Define Solution Parameter Set" ..........................F-268
The window "Define Material Data Sheet"........................F-274
The area Element in the window "Define Material
Data Sheet" .........................................................................F-275
The area Manson-Coffin-Morrow Relation in the
window "Define Material Data Sheet" ...............................F-276
The area Static Failure Data in the window "Define
Material Data Sheet" ..........................................................F-277
The area Endurance Limit in the window "Define
The area Ramberg-Osgood Relation in the window
"Define Material Data Sheet".............................................F-279
The area Measurement in the window "Define
The area Multiaxial material model (Jiang) in the
window "Define Material Data Sheet" ...............................F-281
The panel General in the window "Define Method
parameters" .........................................................................F-285
The panel NP FEM in the window "Define Method
parameters" .........................................................................F-288
The panel FEM Results in the window "Define
Method parameters" ...........................................................F-291
The panel RP Filter in the window "Define Method
parameters" .........................................................................F-296
The panel Hot Spots in the window "Define Method
parameters" .........................................................................F-298
The panel LTS in the window "Define Method
parameters" .........................................................................F-300
Window "Job Setup Window" .............................................F-324
Table of Illustrations F-xxvii
Fig. 118:
Fig. 119:
Fig. 120:
Fig. 121:
Fig. 122:
Fig. 123:
Fig. 124:
Fig. 125:
Fig. 126
Fig. 127:
Fig. 128:
Fig. 129:
Fig. 130:
Fig. 131:
Fig. 132:
Fig. 133:
Fig. 134:
Fig. 135:
Fig. 136:
Fig. 137:
Fig. 138:
Fig. 139:
Fig. 140:
Fig. 141:
Fig. 142:
Fig. 143:
Fig. 144:
Fig. 145:
Fig. 146:
Fig. 147:
Fig. 148:
Fig. 149:
Fig. 150:
Fig. 151:
Fig. 152:
Fig. 153:
Fig. 154:
Links to the description of supported elements.................F-461

The PATRAN 75 Stress Result Menu ................................F-465
The PATRAN 75 Plot Option submenu..............................F-466
PATRAN Tool Menu ...........................................................F-467
PATRAN Tool Menu: Groups Wizard ................................F-467
PATRAN Tool Menu: Properties Wizard ...........................F-468
PATRAN Tool Menu: Materials Wizard ............................F-469
ANSYS Toolbar ...................................................................F-478
The CAT/FALANCS command window .............................F-499
The images available in CAT/FALANCS ...........................F-502
Database directory does not exist ......................................F-510
Error message when starting the DCT stand alone
without parameter ..............................................................F-511
The window "Database Configuration Tool" ......................F-513
Define names of databases used in listings .......................F-524
FULL FILE SPECIFICATION of a path name under
UNIX....................................................................................F-623
The simple Dang Van approach .........................................F-641
The multiple points Dang Van definition ..........................F-642
Window "Computation Status"...........................................F-645
Window "Constant Amplitude Life-curve(s) / Stressstrain curve(s) .....................................................................F-647
Window "Creation of synthetic SN curves"........................F-651
Window "Damage Selection" ..............................................F-655
Window "Estimation Based on Uniform Material Law" ...F-659
Window: Exit Confirmation................................................F-661
Window "Geometry Cell Non FEM" ...................................F-663
Window "Geometry Cell FEM" ...........................................F-663
Window "Geometry Work Sheet Non FEM" ......................F-667
Window "Geometry Work Sheet FEM" ..............................F-668
The menu File in the window "Geometry Work Sheet"....F-668
The menu Initialize in the window "Geometry Work
Sheet"...................................................................................F-669
The window "Parameter Definition" ..................................F-669
The window "Taskname initialization" ..............................F-670
F-xxviii LMS FALANCS User Manual
Fig. 155:
Fig. 156:
Fig. 157:
Fig. 158:
Fig. 159:
Fig. 160:
Fig. 161:
Fig. 162:
Fig. 163:
Fig. 164:
Fig. 165:
Fig. 166:
Fig. 167:
Fig. 168:
Fig. 169:
Fig. 170:
Fig. 171:
Fig. 172:
Fig. 173:
Fig. 174:
Fig. 175:
Fig. 176:
Fig. 177:
Fig. 178:
Window "Strain gage rosettes" ...........................................F-670

The menu Edit in the window "Geometry Work Sheet" ...F-672
The menu Check in the window "Geometry Work
Sheet"...................................................................................F-674
The menu Navigate in the window "Geometry Work
Sheet"...................................................................................F-675
The menu Select in the window "Geometry Work
Sheet"...................................................................................F-676
The menu OptionsTable Layout in the window
"Geometry Work Sheet" ......................................................F-678
The menu OptionsGeometry Cell Window in the
window "Geometry Work Sheet" ........................................F-678
The menu OptionsCheck for Duplicates in the
The menu OptionsEdit Orientation in the
The icon bar in the window "Geometry Work Sheet" ........F-680
The table field in the window "Geometry Work Sheet
Non FEM"............................................................................F-682
The table field in the window "Geometry Work Sheet
FEM"....................................................................................F-683
The window "history reduction" .........................................F-685
list of results........................................................................F-686
The window "Info" ...............................................................F-689
Window "Job Setup Window" .............................................F-691
Window "Load History Calibration"...................................F-693
Window "Load History Channel Information"...................F-695
The window "Test Schedule Segment- Info" ......................F-697
Panel "General" ...................................................................F-699
Panel "FEM"........................................................................F-701
Window "result selection " ..................................................F-703
Window "Setup information" ..............................................F-707
Window "Stress-life Curve(s)" ............................................F-709
Purpose of LMS FALANCS and related tools
F-1
Part 1
Purpose of LMS FALANCS and

related tools
F-2
LMS FALANCS User Manual - Purpose of LMS FALANCS and related tools
Virtual Prototyping for Durability
F-3
Virtual Prototyping for Durability

This chapter describes the three steps for durability processing
expected by LMS FALANCS.
3 steps for durability processing

LMS FALANCS supports the engineer during the virtual
prototyping process by indicating the critical parts in the structure with respect to durability, so that fatigue analysis can be
taken into account in early stages of development.
This helps to shorten the durability development process by
avoiding physical tests during the design phase.
Step 1: From external loads to internal forces

To be able to perform a fatigue analysis on virtual components,
it is necessary to know the forces that will act on the components.
This means, that as a first step in virtual prototyping for durability internal forces acting on the components have to calculated from given external loads (e.g. spindle forces).
At this point nonlinear effects in geometry and elements such
as dampers and springs have to be considered.
For this first step a multi body simulation of a dynamic finite
element analysis (FEA) has to be performed.
Step 2: From internal forces to local stress tensor

histories
The forces acting on the component lead to local pseudo stress
tensor histories that are based on the theory of elasticity. In
this step two cases have to be identified:
F-4
z The loading frequency lies below the lowest natural frequency:

Use quasi static superposition.
z The loading frequency lies above the lowest natural frequency:
Use modal superposition.
Step 3: From stress tensor histories to damage

Fatigue damage is caused by initiation and the growth of short
cracks in the structure. But the given application determines
the individual damage model to be used.
LMS FALANCS supports the following approaches/fatigue
models
z
z
z
z
Stress-life approach for long life (high-cycle fatigue)

Strain-life approach for shorter life (low-cycle fatigue)
Seam weld analysis
Spot weld analysis
LMS FALANCS: basic product and optional parts, licensing
F-5
LMS FALANCS: basic product and

optional parts, licensing
LMS FALANCS and related LMS products for virtual
prototyping serve the engineer in different places and for different purposes. Therefore you may decide which parts you
need and want to license.
In this manual the basic component and all the options of LMS
FALANCS are described.
Please refer to your local LMS office for individual options we
can offer you and the pricing of the different modules.
F-6
Interactive and batch mode
F-7
Interactive and batch mode

The calculation times for non-FEM or proportional analysis
runs are short. In these cases, it is most convenient to use LMS
FALANCS interactively by starting the analysis and immediately analyzing the results. However, the non-proportional
FEM analysis runs for large structures may take some time
and require more computational resources. Hence these runs
may be put in batch queues and the results may be analyzed
after completion.
LMS FALANCS offers batch processing from the command
line, e.g. for standard analysis runs. But the batch process may
also be initiated from an interactive LMS FALANCS run. This
means you can define your analysis using the graphical user
interface just the same way as in the interactive analysis. The
only difference is that the analysis job is not started immediately but instead is queued as a batch process. The queuing
process may be customized to your local computing facilities.
F-8
Related LMS FALANCS tools
F-9
Related LMS FALANCS tools

This chapter contains general information on the tool LMS
FALANCS LifeStat.
LMS FALANCS LifeStat

LMS FALANCS LifeStat is a program to administrate, present
and evaluate data, which are documented within the scope of
durability tests.
The data types supported by the LMS FALANCS LifeStat include
z Fatigue-life data
z Stress-life data
z strain-life material data.
For the different data types several selection methods are
available in LMS FALANCS LifeStat. E. g., stress-life data is
used to calculate SN-Curves.
With the LMS FALANCS LifeStat the data and the calculated
distributions and the SN-Curves can be displayed graphically
as 2D diagrams. The data can be revised and printed with the
linked program LMS GIDAS.
SN-Curves, calculated with LMS FALANCS LifeStat can be
exported directly into the LMS FALANCS data base. The SNCurves can be used in the "stress-life approach for fatigue-life
data in LMS FALANCS.
F-10
Related LMS TecWare tools
F-11

This chapter gives general inforation on the LMS TecWare
tools used in LMS FALANCS.
LMS TecWare MultiRain

LMS TecWare MultiRain provides methods for analysis and
synthesis of multiaxial, non-proportional load histories using
rainflow methods, which account for the phasing between load
channels to maintain proper crack initiation locations and fatigue life in complex structures.
The methods provided in LMS TecWare MultiRain are based
on the unique rainflow counting. This method, which is the
most accurate data reduction method available for durability
load data analysis, has been extended to account for the phasing between load channels by monitoring cycles not just for the
load channels itself, but also for linear combinations of the load
channels (rainflow projections) - effectively monitoring locations on a virtual component.
F-12
Based on this approach, rainflow counting methods for up to 6

input channels are available in LMS TecWare MultiRain. The
multiaxial rainflow matrices can be used for analysis, monitoring and comparison of multiaxial loading events. Interactive
visual analysis of the load data is made possible with overview
displays - the unique LMS Load Influence Sphere or a bar
chart display - and a drill down capability showing rainflow
matrices for any linear combination of the load channels as
well as range-pair and level crossing displays and damage distribution by load level.
LMS TecWare MultiRain Extension allows extrapolation, superposition and reconstruction of multiaxial rainflow matrices.
Based on short measurements, the corresponding rainflow matrices can be extrapolated to more repetitions of the same
event. Different sets of multiaxial rainflow matrices can be
combined (superposition) and the resulting matrices can be
used for reconstructing representative time histories for multiaxial fatigue testing.
F-13
LMS TecWare Time Edit and TimeView

LMS TecWare TimeEdit is a tool for viewing and editing time
series. LMS TecWare TimeView is a restricted version of LMS
TecWare TimeEdit. In LMS FALANCS the tools are used to
visualize load history channels when loading them (see the
paragraph Viewing Load Channels).
You may scale the axis using the mouse or enter the scaling in
windows.
You may page though the data or scroll through it.
The colors, line thickness, line type, maker type and the size of
the markers may be changed.
If you updated your Kernel to the LMS TecWare Kernel, you get the tool LMS
TecWare TimeEdit that enables you to not only view but also to alter the
loads.
For further information on LMS TecWare TimeEdit and

TimeView see the paragraph LMS TecWare TimeEdit in the
manual LMS TecWare - Volume II. You may view this chapter
in the online-help or in the pdf-version. The online-help is
opened by selecting the menu item HelpOverview in the
LMS FALANCS main window "LMS FALANCS" and choosing
the corresponding entry. The pdf-version is located in the subdirectory manual of your LMS TecWare installation directory
and is named tecware_volume_2_en.pdf.
F-14
LMS TecWare RainView

LMS TecWare RainView is a restricted version of LMS
TecWare RainEdit for displaying rainflow matrices. In LMS
FALANCS it is used to view single input rainflow matrices and
to visualize the result of a Non-FEM analysis as rainflow matrix in the window "RAINFLOW Matrix"(see the paragraphs
Viewing Load Channels and Rainflow-Matrix).
There are a variety of features for displaying rainflow matrices
including
z zooming
z scrolling
z display of residue
z several marker types
z 3D-display
The rainflow matrix is surrounded by two sets of axes with different scales. The left and the upper axis are scaled according
to the number of bins. The right and the lower axis are scaled
according to the physical units of your data. The unit is also
displayed next to these axes, if it was stored together with your
data.
The available display modes of rainflow matrix elements are as
follows:
z
z
z
z
z
z
Squares
Bubbles of different sizes in color or b/w
3D solid bars in color or b/w
3D grid bars in color or b/w
3D lines in color or b/w
numbers.
You can also have the residue displayed. It is displayed by

means of asterisks at the corresponding positions.
Fig. 1:
F-15
Display of a rainflow matrix: "bubbles" and "3D solid bars"
F-16
Fig. 2:
Display of a rainflow matrix: "3d lines" and "numbers"
If you updated your Kernel to the LMS TecWare Kernel, you get the tool LMS
TecWare RainEdit that enables you to not only view but also to alter the
loads
The part Visualization of Rainflow Matrices in the manual

LMS TecWare - Volume II describes the window "RAINFLOWMatrix" in detail. You may view this chapter in the online-help
or in the pdf-version. The online-help is opened by selecting the
menu item HelpOverview in the LMS FALANCS main
window "LMS FALANCS" and choosing the corresponding entry. The pdf-version is located in the subdirectory manual of
your LMS TecWare installation directory and is named
tecware_volume_2_en.pdf.
F-17
Part 2
First Steps
This part introduces the main concepts of the LMS FALANCS
user interface.
F-18
LMS FALANCS User Manual - First Steps
Introduction to LMS FALANCS
F-19

This chapter contains information on
z starting and exiting LMS FALANCS
z the Graphical User Interface and
z the Geometry Work Sheet..
For a more detailed description of the user interface refer to
the Part 3 Reference Graphical User Interface of this manual; for the background of fatigue refer to the LMS FALANCS
Theory Manual and textbooks on this topic.
Starting LMS FALANCS

LMS FALANCS can be started in different ways:
z from the LMS TecWare Desktop by selecting the entry
FALANCS in the menu Modules.
z from the command line by using the tecwareshell script by
entering:
tecware falancs
once an alias to the script or a path has been set to the

tecware home directory (this is typically set during the installation process). For a detailed description of the tecware
shell script see section Shell Scripts.
It is important to use the supplied shell script to start LMS
FALANCS, since the program relies on a specific environment to run in.
z from Finite Element Tools by clicking on the LMS FALANCS button in available finite element codes such as ANSYSor postprocessors like MSC/PATRAN
z from the CAT/FALANCSpackage by applying the Start
FALANCS button.
F-20
z by batchfiles, which are discussed in detail in Part 4

ReferenceBatch Mode Interface, by entering
tecware falbatch <batch-file-name>
[<program>]
z on Microsoft Windows by pressing the Start button and selecting the menu entry ProgramsLMS TecWareLMS
FALANCS:
Fig. 3: Starting LMS FALANCS on Microsoft Windows
F-21
Exiting LMS FALANCS

You exit LMS FALANCS by selecting the menu item File
Exit and confirming your choice in the appearing message window.
Fig. 4:
The message window when exiting LMS FALANCS
Using the radio buttons you can decide what to do with the
created temporary results:
z Select the default value Remove temporary data, if you
want to delete all the result files that have been written
during the LMS FALANCS run.
z If you want to use the data outside of LMS FALANCS
choose the option Keep temporary data.
Remark: The temporary files are described in the section Parameter Section for LMS FALANCS Methods Result Specification in Part 5 Reference
General Settings of this manual. The directory where these files are written to is displayed by choosing the Setup item in the Help menu (See the
paragraph Menu item Help->Setup).
Select Yes on the message window to close all currently opened

windows of LMS FALANCS and exit the program, or select No
to return to the main window.
F-22
Concepts of the Graphical User Interface

The Graphical User Interface (GUI) of LMS FALANCS is designed to support various types of usersto perform a fatigue
life analysis. The main idea is to give a uniform and easy access to the necessary data. Material and analysis parameters
are stored in databases such that it is possible to define them
once and just reuse them for an analysis.
The same type of GUI is provided for the stress-life and the
strain-life approach for both non-FEM and FEM analysis. The
database entries can be used for both analysis types.
Different types of usage

The LMS FALANCS GUI is designed to support both the expertand the non-expert user. The different approaches are
shown in this section.
Perform the same analysis for different loads

In this case the complete analysis should be defined once and
the Geometry Work Sheet should be saved. To perform an
analysis with new loads, the user only has to
1. load the new load histories from the menu File
2. load this Geometry Work Sheet from the menu File and
3. replace the load channels by using the Geometry Cell.
Reuse material, solution and method parameters

In this case the LMS FALANCS main window supports the
user to choose all the necessary data.
1. follow the File menu:
load the necessary load histories and for FEM analysis
the FEM result and set files. A bullet before the menu items
indicates which selections are already done. For these file
selections the same GUI-window is used for all the selections.
F-23
2. follow the menu of the approach to use for the analysis (i.e.
stress-life approach or strain-life approach):
The parameter sets are selected by the database selection
windows, and the load histories by the channel selection.
Again, the bullets indicate which sets have already been
selected.
3. After all necessary data has been chosen, it is possible to
open a Geometry Work Sheet initialized with the selected
data by selecting the menu item for the desired analysis.
Edit the Geometry Work Sheet using the Geometry Cell if
necessary and start the fatigue analysis by selecting the OK
or Apply button in the Geometry Work Sheet.
Perform a new analysis with different material and

fatigue parameters
In this case, you have to follow the same steps as above but instead of reusing the same parameter sets, other database entries have to be selected or generated.
First check in the chapter Which data needs to be used for
which process which parameters are necessary for a fatigue
analysis. After collecting the entries, select the according parameter sets in the databases or create them following the instructions in the chapter Operations on Databases in this
manual.
F-24
Geometry Work Sheet

Selecting one of the menu items
z Non-FEM: Fatigue Analysis
z Non-FEM: LTS Tensor Analysis
z FEM: Fatigue Analysis
z FEM: Local Time Series (LTS)
z FEM: transient analysis
brings up the windows "Geometry Work Sheet" and "Geometry
Cell".
GWS for Non FEM Fatigue Analyses

For a non FEM fatigue analysis, the Geometry Cell contains
one row listing the task, material data file name, solution parameter set and load influence factor c for the analysis. The c
factor can be thought of as a stress concentration factor that
multiplies the load sequence file after the offset and factor
have been applied. This can be modified by -clicking on the cell
and changing the values in the "Geometry Cell" window.
Applying the factor and the to the load sequence in the window
"Load History Calibration" can be thought of as converting a
load sequence (that is proportional to elastic stress) with any
units, into a nominal stress history with units of MPa. The c
factor is then the stress concentration factor that is used to
relate the nominal stress history to the local stress history,
which is then used in the fatigue analysis.
GWS for FEM Fatigue Analyses

The interface for an FEM fatigue analysis is quite similar. In
this case the stresses induced by normalized loads are read
from a result file written by an FEM analysis tool. The whole
structure can be analyzed for fatigue even if the structure contains several parts made of different materials, or is connected
by seam welds. The individual parts are put into element sets
and individual material parameters and solution parameters
can be applied.
F-25
Starting an Analysis from the GWS

Select OK in the "Geometry Work Sheet" to start the fatigue
analysis. You will be asked if you would like to keep the geometry table field. You may find it useful to keep the geometry table field until you have viewed the results.
Saving GWS
Geometry work sheets can be saved and reused for similar
analysis runs.
See the paragraphs Perform the same analysis for different
loads and Perform a new analysis with different material and
fatigue parameters for further information.
F-26
Common Analysis Steps
F-27

Analyses are defined by a set of parameters and performed on
a couple of load history channels. The according Geometry
Work Sheets (GWS) may be saved for further usage and
printed for documentation. All analysis results may be saved
and on Non-FEM results a history reduction may be performed.
The selection of load histories, parameter sets, Geometry Work
Sheets (GWS) and computed results is done in several selection
windows. In the following general information on parameter
databases and the various selection types in LMS FALANCS is
given.
Parameter Databases
In LMS FALANCS the parameters that define an analysis are
organized in parameter databases.
LMS FALANCS delivers some default databases located in the
subdirectory \pdb of your TecWare installation directory. Additionally the user may create his own databases and save
them in any directory. He may use the parameter data sets of
the default databases, modify existing parameter data sets and
define new parameter data sets.
The solution parameters and the material parameters (resp.
SN curves) are assigned to individual tasks, whereas the
method parameters are the same for a complete analysis run.
The parameters used may be stored and printed with the Geometry Work Sheet to document the analysis.
There are three categories of parameter databases:
z General global databases
F-28
are defined in the file falancs.ini located in the subdirectory \data of your LMS TecWare installation directory.
They are available for all LMS FALANCS users on your
system. Here you find the standard databases delivered by
LMS Deutschland GmbH.
z Global databases
are defined in the file falancs.ini located in the subdirectory \custom of your LMS TecWare installation directory.
They are available for all LMS FALANCS users on your
system.
z Local databases
are defined in your personal file falancs.ini located in
your local directory (as defined in the general global initialization file tecware.ini located in the subdirectory \data
of your LMS TecWare installation directory). They are
available for your access only.
See the Part 7 Databases for detailed information on database
configuration
Database selection
The selection procedures of stress-life curves, material parameters, solution parameters and method parameters have a uniform user interface.
The data set management is done from the database selection
windows
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
loading existing data sets

creating new data sets
editing existing data sets
saving data sets
viewing the properties of a data set in a data sheet
displaying stress-live curves and material data graphically
deleting data sets
F-29
See the paragraphs Selection of Data from a Database and

Operations on Data Sets for a detailed description of the database selection windows and the data set management.
File selection
The file selection is used for all operations that need to read or
write to the file system. It has facilities to check the input format of the load and the directory browser can handle standard
directories that can be defined in the tecware.ini configuration file. There exist versions for single file selection and multiple file selection.
For each file type (i.e. load history files, FE result files, etc.)
you can specify your favorite file format that is preselected
when entering the file selection window.
See the paragraph Selection Windows in LMS FALANCS for a
detailed description of the file selection windows.
Channel selection
The channel selection, load case selection, test schedule segment selection and element set selection have a uniform user
interface. Channels to select can also be previewed.
See the paragraph Selection Windows in LMS FALANCS for a
detailed description of the channel selection windows.
F-30
A standard Non-FEM stress life analysis
F-31
A standard Non-FEM Stress-life

Analysis
To perform a non-FEM stress-life analysis you
1.
2.
3.
4.
collect the input data

start the Geometry Work Sheet (GWS)
modify the GWS if necessary
start the calculation.
The following paragraphs describe these steps in detail for a

very simple damage calculation. The used data is stored in
subdirectories of your LMS TecWare installation directory:
data
subdirectory
load histories
\demo\general
stress-life curves
\pdb\examples\snc
method parameter sets
\pdb\examples\mparam
solution parameter sets
\pdb\examples\sp_stress
Remark: This chapter describes only a very simple damage calculation. See
the LMS FALANCS Examples & Verification Manual for additional and
more advanced example calculations.
F-32
Collecting Input Data for Non-FEM Analyses

A non-FEM stress-life analysis requires the following input:
load history channels

one or more stress-life curves
one method parameter set
one or more solution parameter sets
See the chapter Which data needs to be used for which process for a more detailed list.
The analysis is performed on all possible combinations (tasks)
of the loaded input channels, solution parameters and stresslife curves using the selected method parameter set.
How to load some load history channels
Load history channels are stored in load history files. Thus you
have to load a load history file before you may select one or
more of its channels. You may mix channels of time series and
Rainflow matrices.
You load a load history channel by performing the following
steps:
1. Select the menu item FileOpen Load History Files in
the window "LMS FALANCS".
The file selection window "Load History File Selection" appears.
2. Select:
File type
Search in
File
RPC-III
DEMO_General
plate_high_frq.rsp
F-33
3. Press Open
The file selection window is closed and the menu item File
Open Load History Files is ticked off.
4. Select the menu item Stress-life ApproachLoad Histories in the window "LMS FALANCS"
The channel selection window "Load History Selection" appears.
5. Select:
File
Channel
plate_high_frq.rsp
001_ANTISYM
F-34
6. Press OK
The channel selection window is closed and the menu item

Stress-life ApproachLoad Histories is ticked off.
F-35
How to load a stress-life curve

You load a stress-life curve by performing the following steps:
1. Select the menu item Stress-life ApproachStress-life
Curves in the window "LMS FALANCS"
The database selection window "Selection of Stress-life Data
Sheets" appears.
2. Select:
Database
SN Curve
Examples
plate_example
3. Press OK
The database selection window is closed and the menu item
Stress-life ApproachStress-life Curves is ticked off.
F-36
How to load solution parameters

You load a solution parameter set by performing the following
steps:
1. Select the menu item Stress-life ApproachSolution
Parameters in the window "LMS FALANCS"
The database selection window "Selection of Solution Parameter Sets" appears.
2. Select:
Database
Solution parameter
Examples
Default
F-37
3. Press OK
Stress-life ApproachSolution Parameters is ticked
off.
F-38
How to load method parameters

You load a method parameter set by performing the following
steps:
1. Select the menu item Stress-life ApproachMethod Parameters in the window "LMS FALANCS"
The database selection window "Selection of Method Parameter Sets" appears.
2. Select:
Database
Method parameter
Examples
Default
F-39
3. press OK
Stress-life ApproachMethod Parameters is ticked off.
F-40
Starting and Modifying the GWS for a nonFEM stress-life analysis

After collecting the input data for an analysis you
z start the GWS
z may modify the input data if necessary (e.g. the channel
calibration)
z may add and delete tasks and columns if required
z may define the job name
z may save the GWS for further usage if desired
z may print the GWS for job documentation if desired.
How to start the GWS for a non-FEM stress-life analysis

1. Select the menu item Stress-life ApproachNon-FEM:
Fatigue Analysis in the window "LMS FALANCS"
The windows "Geometry Work Sheet" and "Geometry Cell"
appear. The selected load history file and channel, stresslife curve and solution parameter set are entered at the corresponding fields in the GWS and the tasks are numbered:
Fig. 5: The Geometry Work Sheet (non-FEM stress-life analysis)
The method parameters are not listed in the GWS but the
channel calibration is additionally given. The window title
F-41
"Stress life Approach - Geometry Work Sheet" indicates the

used approach.
Marking a table entry or the fourth column head fills the
according fields in the window "Geometry Cell":
Fig. 6: The window "Geometry Cell" (non-FEM stress-life analysis)
The method parameters are not listed in the window "Geometry Cell" but the channel calibration and the Geometry
are given for each channel.
How to change entries in the GWS
To modify an entry in the GWS you
1. select the entry
The background color of the selected field changes to black
and the corresponding field in the window "Geometry Cell"
is filled accordingly and gets sensitive.
2. perform the changes in the window "Geometry Cell"
by entering directly the new value in the sensitive text
box
(the background color of a sensitive text box is white)
or
by pressing the sensitive Search button near the field
F-42
and selecting another data in the appearing selection

window (data sets and load histories) or setting new values in appearing parameter windows (e.g. for channel
calibration)
3. press Apply
The GWS is updated.
Remark: The currently selected method parameter is applied to all tasks of a
GWS. It's name is not displayed in the GWS. You change the method parameter by selecting the menu item InitializeMethod parameter... and
selecting another data set in the appearing database selection window "Selection of Method Parameter Sets".
Examples for editing the GWS

Two examples for modifying GWS entries by editing the corresponding text boxes:
z task number
old entry
new entry
nonFEMstress1
Fig. 7: Editing a task number in the GWS
z channel geometry
old entry
new entry
Fig. 8: Editing a channel geometry in the GWS
Two examples for modifying GWS entries by selecting other

values or data in selection windows:
z channel calibration
old entry
new entry
O:0 F:1
O:100 F:1
Fig. 9: Editing a channel calibration in the GWS
F-43
F-44
z stress-life curve
old entry
new entry
plate_example
Sample Steel
Fig. 10: Changing a stress-life curve in the GWS
How to add a column to the GWS

To add a column to a GWS you
Single
Column
Copy
1. activate the selection mode Column Selection by choosing

the menu item SelectSingle Column or selecting the
corresponding icon Single Column.
2. click at a column
The column is marked.
3. copy the marked column into the clipboard by selecting the
menu item EditCopy or selecting the corresponding icon
Copy
4. define the insert mode by selecting the menu item Edit
Insert Before or EditInsert After
Paste
F-45
5. insert the copied column by clicking on a column and selecting the menu item EditPaste or selecting the corresponding icon Paste Selection
Depending on your selection in step 4 the copied column is
inserted before or after the marked column.
6. change the entries of the inserted column to desired values
as described above.
Adding several columns by performing the described steps for
each of them may take a lot of time. Creating a new GWS by
collecting the desired input data and starting the GWS may be
the shorter way.
How to add a task to the GWS
To add a task to a GWS you
Single
Row
Copy
Paste
1. activate the selection mode Row Selection by choosing the

menu item SelectSingle Row or selecting the corresponding icon Single Row
2. click at a task row
The task is marked.
3. copy the marked task into the clipboard by selecting the
menu item EditCopy or selecting the corresponding icon
Copy
4. define the insert mode by selecting the menu item Edit
Insert Before or EditInsert After
5. insert the copied task by clicking on a task and selecting the
menu item EditPaste or selecting the corresponding icon
Paste Selection
Depending on your selection in step 4 the copied task is inserted before or after the marked task.
6. change the entries of the inserted task to desired values as
described above.
Adding several tasks by performing the described steps for
each of them may take a lot of time. Creating a new GWS by
collecting the desired input data and starting the GWS may be
the shorter way.
F-46
How to delete tasks from a GWS

To remove a task from the GWS you
Single
Row
Cut
1. activate the selection mode Row Selection by choosing the

menu item SelectSingle Row or selecting the corresponding icon Single Row
2. click at the task row
The task is marked.
3. select the menu item EditDelete Row or the corresponding icon Cut
The marked task is removed from the GWS.
How to define the job name for an analysis

The job name of a just opened GWS depends on the GWS:
GWS
job name
new GWS
unnamed
reopened GWS with specified job name
saved job name
reopened GWS without specified job name
unnamed
z If you define resp. redefine a job name before starting the

analysis, this name is used to identify the analysis in the
result management (window "result selection") and displayed in the window "Computation status".
z Without defining a job name the default name unnamed is
used.
You specify the job name by
1. selecting the menu item InitializeJob
The window "Job Setup Window" appears.
2. entering a name at the text box Job Name
F-47
3. pressing OK
The entered text is added to the title of the GWS.
How to save the GWS

You save a new GWS the first time by
1. selecting the menu item FileSave as ...
The file selection window "Save Geometry Work Sheet" appears where you define the path and name for saving the
GWS.
You save a formerly saved GWS (i.e. a loaded GWS) by
1. selecting the menu item FileSave
The GWS is saved under the formerly defined path and
name.
F-48
How to print the GWS

You print a GWS by
1. pressing Print
The window "Print" appears where you define the printer
device and the print properties.
See the paragraph Printing the Geometry Work Sheet for further information on the printed data.
F-49
Starting an analysis from the Geometry

Work Sheet
You may start an analysis several times with different combinations of parameters and load channels. In the following it is
described
z how to start an analysis in general
z how to start an analysis several times with the same load
channels but different parameters
z how to start an analysis several times with the same parameters on different load channel sets
z how to start an analysis several times with the same load
channels and parameters but different method parameter
sets.
Starting an Analysis
An analysis is started from the GWS by pressing OK. The
GWS is closed and a question window asks for permission to
delete it's table field entries. The analysis is started on all
tasks of the GWS.
Remark: Alternatively you may press Apply. In this case the analysis is
started without closing the GWS.
After starting the analysis the job is entered at the window

"Computation status". If no job name is defined the default unnamed is used to identify the analysis.
Fig. 11:
The analysis in the window "Computation status"
F-50
Pressing Info opens the window "Info" where more detailed information on the job is given. You may save it for job documentation. This is espescially usefull for FEM-calculations, where
more details are given.
Fig. 12:
The jobs in the window "Info"
See the chapter Monitoring Analysis Progress with Computation Status for detailed information.
If the job is finished the results are available in the Result
Management for interpreting them.
Starting an analysis with the same load channels

but different parameters
If you want to check the parameter influence on the results of
an analysis you may perform the analysis several times on the
same set of load channels but with different parameter combinations.
This paragraph explains how to work with different combinations of solution parameter sets and stress-life curves. How to
start analyses with different method parameter sets is described below.
To perform an analysis several times on the same load channel
set with different parameters you
1. load the method parameter set and the load history channels for the analysis
F-51
2. load all stress-life curves and solution parameter sets that

are to be checked
3. start the GWS
All possible combinations of load channels and loaded parameters are entered as tasks. You may delete some tasks if
the according parameter combination is not to be checked.
4. define a unique job name and unique task names
Unique and self-explanatory names ease the identification
of the jobs and tasks in the result management when viewing the results.
5. save the GWS with the menu item FileSave as... under a
unique name and print it for job documentation if desired
6. start the analysis from the GWS with Apply
The job is added to the computation status
If the job is finished you may interpret the task results and
save the job information displayed in the Window "Info" for
documentation.
This procedure creates a single job with a lot of tasks that is
running for a long time. Alternatively you may split the job by
repeating the steps 2 to 6 with smaller subsets of the parameters.
Starting an analysis with different load channels

but the same parameters
To perform an analysis several times with the same parameters on different load channel sets you
1. load the method parameter set, solution parameter sets and
stress-life curves for the analysis
2. load the first set of load channels
3. start the GWS
F-52
The job is added to the computation status
7. repeat the steps 2 to 6 for all load channel sets that are to
be checked
If all jobs are finished you may interpret the results and save
the job information displayed in the Window "Info" for documentation.
Starting an analysis with different method

parameter sets
To perform an analysis several times with different method parameter sets you
1. load the solution parameter sets, load history channels and
stress-life curves for the analysis
2. load the first method parameter set
3. start the GWS
The job is added to the computation status.
7. repeat the steps 2 to 6 for all method parameter sets that
are to be checked
If all jobs are finished you may interpret the results and save
the job information displayed in the Window "Info" for documentation.
Interpreting results for the Non-FEM stress approach
F-53
Interpreting Results for the Non-FEM

Stress Approach
At this point, you should have already performed a Stress-life
Approach fatigue analysis. The results are kept as temporary
data and available in the result management.
1. Open the window "result selection" (menu item Stress-life
ApproachNon-FEM: Results...) , select up to four tasks
to be displayed and open the display window "Results" by
pressing Apply or OK.
2. The initial plot will have load amplitude on the vertical axis
and cycles on the horizontal axis, with three curves for each
task selected. Each curve will be discussed in detail.
The constant amplitude life curve is the material property curve defined via the menu Stress-life Approach
Stress-life Curves. It has units of cycles on the horizontal axis and the input unit on the vertical axis. For the
stress-life approach, the input unit may or may not be
units of stress, depending on how the constant amplitude life curve was defined. It is plotted to serve as a reference line.
The cumulative load amplitude histogram is a histogram
of load amplitudes, that is, one-half the range of a cycle.
It is plotted for one repeat of the load history.
The histogram has units of cycles on the horizontal axis
and load sequence on the vertical axis. Units of load are
obtained by applying the offset and factor to the load
history. The value of the c factor, which is specified in
the window "Geometry Cell", does not affect the scaling
of the vertical axis.
The variable amplitude Life Curve is composed of the
Design Point and other Computed Points as specified
in the Solution Parameter set. It has units of cycles on
the horizontal axis and units of load on the vertical axis.
These cycles are the accumulated number of cycles in all
F-54
repeats of the load sequence at that load amplitude level.

The load amplitude in this case refers to the maximum
load amplitude in the load sequence, that is, one-half the
maximum cycle range in the load sequence. Units of load
are obtained by applying the offset and factor to the
load history. The value of the c factor, which is specified
in the "Geometry Cell" window, does not affect the scaling of the vertical axis. It is, however, applied when performing the fatigue calculation (the result of e~ (t) =
c*(factor*(original history + offset))).
Basically, the calibration factor can be thought of as
converting a time history with any units (directly proportional to elastic stress) into a nominal stress history. The
c factor can then be thought of as a stress concentration
factor. The units of the nominal stress history are plotted
on the vertical axis for the cumulative load histogram
and for the Life Curve.
3. From the Action menu, select Blocks to view a plot of the
Life Curve in blocks (repeats) of the stress history.
4. The design point that you specified will appear on the plot
with a symbol (you can modify the symbol type in the initialization file falancs.ini). If you specified the life in
blocks with the intent to back-calculate the stress, it is
possible that your design point can not generate a cyclic
failure. In this case, the point on the Life Curve closest to
your design point is marked with a symbol, and during the
calculation an Information box will appear to inform you if
this happens. For multiple channel analyses, the stress
level shown in the curve will be based on the first contributing channel.
5. Using the mouse, click on some positions along the Life
Curve. The load Amplitude and the corresponding number
of Blocks will appear in the fields near the bottom of the
window (on UNIX only).
Recall that the Load Amplitude is one-half the maximum
cycle range of the load sequence after the offset and factor
have been applied (but before the c factor was applied).
Thus, the value in the Amplitude field is related to how
much the factor could be increased or decreased for a given
Interpreting results for the Non-FEM stress approach
F-55
number of blocks to failure with a given c factor (or stress

concentration), with reference to your design point.
Or, an alternative interpretation is that for a given value for
the factor, the value in the Amplitude field is related to
how much the c factor (stress concentration) could be increased or decreased for a given number of blocks to failure,
with reference to your design point.
6. The Weighted Results, Rainflow Matrix and Damagematrix can be also be viewed.
See the chapter Management of Non-FEM Results for further
information on loading and saving Non-FEM result folders and
the chapter Viewing Non-FEM Results for additional information on the result plots.
F-56
A standard Non-FEM strain life analysis
F-57
A standard Non-FEM Strain-life

Analysis
Using the strain-life approach in LMS FALANCS is very similar to the stress-life approach:
z In the strain-life approach so called "cyclic material data" is
required as input for calculating the fatigue life. Thus no
stress-life curves are to be loaded as input data but material
data sets (see instruction How to load material data sets
below).
z The load history files are still selected via the menu item
FileOpen Load History Files....
z All other input data are loaded by selecting the corresponding items in the menu Strain-life Approach (e.g.
Strain-life ApproachMethod Parameters instead of
Stress-life ApproachMethod Parameters).
z The Geometry Work Sheet (GWS) of a Non-FEM strain life
analysis is started by selecting the menu item Strain-life
ApproachNon-FEM: Fatigue Analysis.... You may
modify the GWS in the same way as in the stress-life approach (see paragraph Starting and Modifying the GWS for
a non-FEM stress-life analysis).
z Also starting the analysis is done as in the stress-life approach (see paragraph Starting a non-FEM stress-life
analysis from the Geometry Work Sheet).
F-58
For an example calculation

z load the following data:
Load history file
Load channels
Solution parameter
Method parameter
File type
Search in
File
Channel
Database
Data set
Database
Data set
RPC-III
DEMO_General
race.rsp
001_FORCE_vert
002_FORCE_vert
003_FORCE_vert
Examples
Default
Examples
Default
z load the material data set as described below.

z define the job name nonFEMstrain in the GWS
z save the GWS as ex-nonFEM-strain.fal
z start the analysis from the GWS.
Remark: See the LMS FALANCS Examples & Verification Manual for additional example calculations.
How to load material data sets

You load a material parameter set by performing the following
steps:
1. Select the menu item Strain-life ApproachMaterials
Data in the window "LMS FALANCS"
The database selection window "Selection of Material Data
Sheets" appears.
2. Select:
Database
Material data
Examples
30_CrMo_2
A standard Non-FEM strain life analysis
F-59
3. Press OK
Strain-life ApproachMaterials Data is ticked off.
F-60
Interpreting results for the Non-FEM strain approach
F-61
Interpreting Results for the Non-FEM

Strain Approach
At this point, you should have already performed a Strain-life
Approach fatigue analysis. The results are kept as temporary
data and available in the result management.
1. Open the window "result selection" (menu item Strain-life
ApproachNon-FEM: Results...) , select up to four channels to be displayed and open the display window "Results"
by pressing Apply or OK.
2. The initial plot will have load amplitude on the vertical axis
and cycles on the horizontal axis, with two curves for each
channel selected. Each curve will be discussed in detail.
The cumulative load amplitude histogram is a histogram
of load amplitudes, that is, one-half the range of a cycle.
It is plotted for one repeat of the load history.
The histogram has units of cycles on the horizontal axis
and load sequence on the vertical axis. Units of load are
obtained by applying the offset and factor to the load
history. The value of the c factor, which is specified in
the "Geometry Cell" window, does not affect the scaling
of the vertical axis.
The variable amplitude Life Curve is composed of the
Design Point and other Computed Points as specified
in the Solution Parameter set. It has units of cycles on
the horizontal axis and units of load on the vertical axis.
These cycles are the accumulated number of cycles in all
repeats of the load sequence at that load amplitude level.
The load amplitude in this case refers to the maximum
load amplitude in the load sequence, that is, one-half the
maximum cycle range in the load sequence. Units of load
are obtained by applying the offset and factor to the
load history. The value of the c factor, which is specified
in the "Geometry Cell" window, does not affect the scaling of the vertical axis. It is, however, applied when per-
F-62
forming the fatigue calculation (the result of e~ (t) =

c*(factor*(original history + offset))). For the superposition of multiple time histories, e~ (t)=
ci*(factori*(original history + offseti)).
Basically, the calibration factor can be thought of as
converting a time history with any units (directly proportional to elastic stress) into a nominal stress history. The
c factor can then be thought of as a stress concentration
factor. The units of the nominal stress history are plotted
on the vertical axis for the cumulative load histogram
and for the Life Curve.
3. From the Action menu, select Blocks to view a plot of the
Life Curve in blocks (repeats) of the stress history.
4. The design point that you specified will appear on the plot
with a symbol (you can modify the symbol type in the initialization file falancs.ini). If you specified the life in
blocks with the intent to back-calculate the stress, it is
possible that your design point can not generate a cyclic
failure. In this case, the point on the Life Curve closest to
you design point is marked with a symbol. For multiple
channel analyses, the stress level shown in the curve will be
based on the first contributing channel.
5. Using the mouse, click on some positions along the Life
Curve (on UNIX only). The load Amplitude and the corresponding number of Blocks will appear in the near the bottom of the window.
Recall that the Load Amplitude is one-half the maximum
cycle range of the load sequence after the offset and factor
have been applied (but before the c factor was applied).
Thus, the value in the Amplitude field is related to how
much the factor could be increased or decreased for a given
number of blocks to failure with a given c factor (or stress
concentration), with reference to your design point.
Or, an alternative interpretation is that for a given value for
the factor, the value in the Amplitude field is related to
how much the c factor (stress concentration) could be increased or decreased for a given number of blocks to failure,
with reference to your design point.
Interpreting results for the Non-FEM strain approach
F-63
6. The Weighted Results, Rainflow Matrix, Damagematrix, Load-notch strain relation and Damage parameter life curve can also be viewed by selecting the corresponding items in the menu Action.
See the chapter Management of Non-FEM Results for further
information on loading and saving Non-FEM result folders and
the chapter Viewing Non-FEM Results for additional information on the result plots.
F-64
Basic concepts of FEM-based analysis
F-65
Basic concepts of FEM-based

Analysis
This chapter explains the basic concepts of FEM-based calculations.
FEM concepts: element sets, node vs.

element stresses
In case of static FE analyses, the stress results are organized
in load cases, for modal analyses they are organized in modes.
For the fatigue analysis the correct combination of loads and
load cases resp. modal participation factors and modes have to
be defined.
In order to be able to restrict the fatigueanalysis to a part of
the structure element sets can be used. For each set a task can
be defined and individual material data or solution parameters
ca be assigned to a task.
Materials, Solution Parameters and Element Sets

An element set is a group of elements from a finite element
mesh.
A complete structure may be made up of several parts, each
with different material properties. The elements in these parts
must be separated in different element sets and the individual
properties must be assigned to the corresponding sets.
Element sets can also be used to distinguish parts of a structure in which solution parameters for fatigue analysis might
differ. Important examples are for different materials at different locations in the structure, or for welded joints.
F-66
Spot welds having different fatigue behavior may also be separated into different element sets.
The user can split the finite element model into as many element sets as necessary. The individual procedure to produce
element sets depends on the finite element tool and is described in Part 6 Reference - Interfaces to Finite Element
Tools of this manual.
Element Sets and Point Loads

If the loads in an FEM analysis are concentrated to a small set
of nodes, the results around these loads are usually unreliable
and too high. If a non proportional fatigue analysis is conducted using LMS FALANCS these regions may mislead the
automatic detection of fatigue critical locations.
In this case these regions should be excluded from a fatigue
analysis by defining element sets for the analysis that exclude
the elements around point loads.
Stress results
When an FEM based analysis is to be done, the results that are
stored in the finite element result files are used.
Element stresses have been averaged by the finite element
program, and in general, have less resolution than element
nodal stresses. Fatigue calculations with element stresses will
generally take less time than with element nodal stresses because elements typically have multiple nodes.
If calculations are done using element nodal stresses, fatigue
damage at each node is calculated. In cases where elements
share nodes, the graphical post-processor will do averaging of
the fatigue damage at the time the data is displayed.
LMS FALANCS expects nodal stresses at elements. Nodal averaged
stresses may not be processed.
A standard FEM-based stress life analysis
F-67
A standard FEM-based Stress-life

Analysis
To perform a stress-life analysis on FE-results you
1.
2.
3.
4.
collect the input data

start the Geometry Work Sheet (GWS)
modify the GWS if necessary
start the calculation.
The following paragraphs describe these steps in detail for a

damage calculation. The used data is stored in subdirectories of
your LMS TecWare installation directory:
data
subdirectory
load histories
\demo\general
stress-life curves
\pdb\examples\snc
method parameter sets
\pdb\examples\mparam
solution parameter sets
\pdb\examples\sp_stress
FE-result files
\demo\falancs\qstat
FE-set files
\demo\falancs\qstat
F-68
Collecting Input Data for FEM-based

Analyses
A FEM-based stress-life analysis requires the following input:
load history channels or test schedule segments
one or more stress-life curves
one method parameter set
one or more solution parameter sets
as for a non-FEM analysis and additional
one or more FE-result files
none or more FE-set files.
See the chapter Which data needs to be used for which process for a more detailed list.
The number of accepted stress-life curves and solution parameter sets depends on the number of loaded element sets:
z if no FE-set is loaded exactly one stress-life curve and one
solution parameter set are accepted. A single task is created
combining the stress-life curve and the solution parameter
set with the selected load components (load channel and
load cases).
z if one FE-set is loaded exactly one stress-life curve and
one solution parameter set are accepted. A single task is
created combining the element set, the stress-life curve and
the solution parameter set with the selected load components (load channel and load cases).
z if several element sets are loaded, the same number of
stress-life curves and of loaded solution parameter sets have
to be loaded. The element sets, stress-life curves and solution parameter sets are combined with the load components
according the selection order:
first element set, first stress-life curve and first solution
parameter set with all load components
second element set , second stress-life curve and second
solution parameter set with all load components
etc. For each combination a task is created.
F-69
The selection of
z load history files and channels
z stress-life curves
z method parameter sets and
z solution parameter sets
is done in the same way as for a Non-FEM analysis and is described in detail in the paragraph Collecting Input Data for
Non-FEM Analyses.
For an example calculation load the following data:
Load history file
File type
Search in
File
RPC-III
DEMO_General
plate_high_frq.rsp
Load channels
Channel
001_ANTISYM
Stress-life curves
Database
Data set
Examples
plate_example
Solution parameter
Database
Data set
Examples
Default
Method parameter
Database
Data set
Examples
Default
and the FE-result files, element sets and load cases as described in the following instructions.
Remark: See the LMS FALANCS Examples & Verification Manual for additional example calculations.
How to load FE-load cases

Load cases are stored in FE-result files. Thus you have to load
a result file before you may select one or more of its load cases.
You load FE load cases by performing the following steps:
1. Select the menu item FileOpen FE-Result Files... in the
window "LMS FALANCS"
The database selection window "Selection of result file" appears.
F-70
2. Select:
ANSYS (*.rst)
File type
DEMO_FALANCS_qstat
Search in
plate_quasistatic_ansys.rst
File
The File type depends on your FE interface. If you use another interface select the corresponding File type entry and
an according result file.
3. Press Open
Open FE-Result Files... is ticked off.
4. Select the menu item Stress-life ApproachFEM: Load
Cases in the window "LMS FALANCS"
The selection window "Selection of load cases" appears.
F-71
5. Select:
File
Channel
plate_quasistatic_ansys.rst
Plate/force_antimetric
6. Press get load histories
All currently selected load history channels and rainflow

matrices are entered in the left part of the Lower Listbox.
If test schedule segments are selected use the button get
F-72
test sched. to insert them. Each row in the Lower Listbox

defines the assignment of a load channel or test schedule
segment to a load case.
7. Press OK
How to load element sets

Element sets (node sets) are stored in FE set files. Thus you
have to load a FE set file before you may select one or more of
its element sets.
You load a element set by performing the following steps:
1. Select the menu item FileOpen FE Set Files in the window "LMS FALANCS".
The file selection window "Selection of component file" appears.
2. Select:
File type
Search in
File
ELEMENT SETS (*.tsi)

DEMO_FALANCS_qstat
plate_quasistatic_ansys.tsi
F-73
3. Press Open
Open FE Set Files is ticked off.
4. Select the menu item Stress-life ApproachFEM: Sets
in the window "LMS FALANCS"
The selection window "Selection of element sets" appears.
5. Select:
File
Element set
plate_quasistatic_ansys.tsi
I_RIGHT (196 elements)
F-74
6. Press OK
The channel selection window is closed and the menu item

Stress-life ApproachFEM: Sets is ticked off.
F-75
Starting and Modifying the GWS for a FEMbased stress-life Analysis

After collecting the input data for an analysis you
z
z
z
z
z
z
start the GWS

modify the input data if necessary
delete tasks if required
define the job name
save the GWS for further usage
print the GWS for job documentation.
How to start the GWS for a FEM-based stress-life analysis

1. Select the menu item Stress-life ApproachFEM: Fatigue Analysis in the window "LMS FALANCS"
appear. The selected element set, stress-life curve and solution parameter set and the load history file and channel
with the assigned load set are entered at the corresponding
fields in the GWS:
Fig. 13: The Geometry Work Sheet (FEM-based stress-life analysis)
The method parameters are not listed in the GWS but the
channel calibration is additionally given. The window title
"Stress life Approach FEM prop.- Geometry Work Sheet"
indicates the used approach.
F-76
Marking a table entry or the fourth column head fills the

according fields in the window "Geometry Cell":
Fig. 14: The window "Geometry Cell" (FEM-based stress-life analysis)
The method parameters are not listed in the window "Geometry Cell" but the channel calibration is given for each
channel.
How to modify the GWS for a FEM-based analysis
In the GWS of a FEM-based analysis you may edit table entries, define the job name and save and print the GWS. You
modify it in the same way as the GWS of a non-FEM analysis.
See the paragraphs:
z
z
z
z
z
How to change entries in the GWS

Examples for editing the GWS
How to define the job name for an analysis
How to save the GWS
How to print the GWS
in the chapter Starting and Modifying the GWS for a non-FEM

stress-life analysis for detailed information on these modifications.
In a GWS of a FEM-based analysis you can not delete, copy
and insert tasks and columns!
F-77
Starting a FEM-based Analysis

A FEM-based analysis is started from the GWS by pressing
OK or Apply like a non-FEM analysis (see the paragraph
Starting an Analysis).
The analysis may be started several times with different combinations of parameters, element sets, load channels and load
cases. The paragraphs
z Starting an analysis with the same load channels but different parameters
z Starting an analysis with different load channels but the
same parameters
and
z Starting an analysis with different method parameter sets
describe some possible combinations.
Additionally, in FEM-based analyses the same set of load
channels may be combined with different load cases and element sets accordingly.
F-78
A standard FEM-based Strain-life Analysis
F-79
A standard FEM-based Strain-life

Analysis
As in the Non-FEM analyses using the strain-life approach for
FEM based analyses is very similar to the stress-life approach:
z In the strain-life approach so called "cyclic material data" is
required as input for calculating the fatigue life. Thus no
stress-life curves are to be loaded as input data but material
data sets (see the instruction How to load material data
sets for Non-FEM analyses).
z The load history files (or test schedules), result files and
element sets are still selected via the menu items File
Open Load History Files..., FileOpen FE Result
Files... and FileOpen FE Set Files....
z All other input data are loaded by selecting the corresponding items in the menu Strain-life Approach (e.g.
Strain-life ApproachFEM: Load Cases... instead of
Stress-life ApproachFEM: Load Cases...).
z The Geometry Work Sheet (GWS) of a FEM-based strain
life analysis is started by selecting the menu item Strainlife ApproachNon-FEM: Fatigue Analysis.... You may
modify the GWS in the same way as in the stress-life approach (see paragraph How to modify the GWS for a FEMbased analysis).
z Also starting the analysis is done as in the stress-life approach (see paragraph Starting a non-FEM stress-life
analysis from the Geometry Work Sheet).
See the LMS FALANCS Examples & Verification Manual for
detailed example calculations.
F-80
Interpreting results for the FEM-based analysis
F-81
Interpreting Results for the FEMbased Analysis

After a fatigue calculation based on finite element analysis is
started, the window "Computation status" appears that shows
information on the current analysis. From that window you
may open the info box "Info" displaying the location and value
of the element or node with the maximum damage and the location of the written results as well. See the chapter
Management of FEM Results for further information.
Damage results for fatigue analyses based on finite element
analysis for all elements can be displayed by your graphical
post-processor. Results are typically written into a dummy load
case of the static FE analysis as pseudo stress results. Therefore you have to view the individual components of this result
tensor.
The property sheet [FEM Results] of the method parameters
is used to adapt the written output to your needs. All results
computed by LMS FALANCS are arranged in four groups (Result 1,..., Result 4). You specify for each of these result groups
the one that is written:
z Result 1: the Miner sum, the value 1.0 / (number of sustainable repetitions) or the number of sustainable repetitions.
z Result 2:the ratio of the design life value (N_Design) and
the computed life (N) or the elimination run number
z Result 3: the load design factor, the maximum absolute
stress encountered during the loading, the maximum stress
amplitude encountered during the loading or the safety factor
z Result 4: the RF-norm, the task numbers or the hot spot
number.
Since the common postprocessors distribute the bins for contour plotting linearly, LMS FALANCS writes by default the
F-82
base 10 logarithm of the damage to the result file. The user can
define a value that marks elements below the endurance limit.
This value is given by the parameter Value to indicate
infinite life in the property sheet [FEM Results] of the
method parameters.
Typically, values for
design
, the
Rainflow-Projector-Norm,
N design
N
damage on the top of shell elements, damage on the bottom of

shell elements, maximum damage, the filter run at which
nodes were eliminated can be selected for graphical display.
For more information about the structure of the result vector
for your finite element program, see the appropriate section in
Part 6 Reference - Interfaces to finite Element Tools of this
manual. For information on how to plot results, refer to the
manuals for your graphical post-processor.
Please refer to section Viewing FEM Results in Part 3
Reference Graphical User Interface for a detailed explanation of the individual plots.
Estimating Cyclic Material Properties
F-83
Estimating Cyclic Material Properties

LMS FALANCS offers the option to estimate strain life material properties from empirically derived relations instead of
selecting existing material properties from a material database.
You have to specify the Ultimate Tensile Strength and
Youngs Modulus of the material in MPa and to chose the approximation for Unalloyed or Low-Alloy Steel or for Aluminum or Titanium Alloy. Using these basic parameters
LMS FALANCS estimates the corresponding values of the
other material parameters and displays an according material
data sheet. You may edit this data sheet and save it for further
usage or delete it.
This method is described in detail in the LMS FALANCS Theory Manual
How to estimate cyclic material properties
Perform the following steps to estimate strain-life material
properties:
1. Select the menu item Strain-life ApproachMaterials
Data ... in the LMS FALANCS main window.
The database selection window "Selection of Material Data
Sheets" appears.
2. Select the menu item ActionUniform Material Law.
The database selection window "Estimation Based on Uniform Material Law" appears.
3. Enter the tensile strength and the Young's modulus of the
given material to the corresponding fields.
4. Decide whether to use the approximation for Unalloyed or
Low-Alloy Steel or for Aluminum or Titanium Alloy by
applying the corresponding radio button.
5. Press OK.
F-84
The data sheet "Define Material Data Sheet" opens with the
data approximated by the uniform material law.
6. Specify a name in the field Material and make some
changes to the data if you feel it to be necessary.
7. Accept the data by pressing OK.
The data sheet is saved under the specified name and
closed. It is now available in the database selection window
"Selection of Material Data Sheets" to be selected as material data for an anlaysis.
When pressing Apply the data sheet is saved but not
closed.
Which data needs to be used for which process
F-85
Which Data needs to be used for

which Process
In this section, the input for each non FEM method is described. The only difference in input between the FEM and non
FEM methods is that the FEM methods require FE Result
Files and possibly FE Set Files, in addition to the information
described below. Please refer to the LMS FALANCS Theory
Manual for the description of the individual parameters.
F-86
Stress-life Approach
The data needed for a Stress-life Approach analysis is listed
below:
z A Load History File, with at least one Channel or Rainflow
matrix.
z A stress-life curve, with the following information:
Tensile Strength,
Compressive Strength,
and the physical units of each;
the R-ratio at which the S-N curve was determined,
the slopes of the S-N curve, or defining points of the S-N
curve.
z A Solution parameter set, with the following information:
Mean stress correction method,
damage accumulation rule,
surface correction factor,
size correction factor,
limit damage sum,
local stress state parameters (FEM or LTS-analysis
only),
and how to handle situations involving multiple channels
with different channel lengths;
for Design Curve and Design Point calculations, the Load
Variable, Unknown Variable, and Life Load Level can be
specified.
z A method parameter set, with the following information
Number of rainflow bins
FEM result information (FEM only)
Nonproportional FEM filter information (FEM nonproportional only)
z In the Geometry Work Sheet and Cell,
the offset and factor that should be applied to the load
history,
and the values of e~ (non FEM only) and e L~ for the load
history.
Which data needs to be used for which process
F-87
Strain-life Approach
The data needed for a Strain-life Approach analysis is listed
below:
z A Load History File, with at least one Channel.
z A strain-life material parameter set, with the following information:
Manson-Coffin-Morrow relation
Fatigue Strength Coefficient,
Fatigue Ductility Coefficient,
Fatigue Strength Exponent, and
Fatigue Ductility Exponent.
Endurance Limit specified by one of
Number of Cycles,
Stress Amplitude,
Strain Amplitude.
Stress-Strain relation (Ramberg-Osgood)
Youngs Modulus,
Cyclic Hardening Coefficient,
Cyclic Hardening Exponent,
Tensile Strength,
Compressive Strength, and
the Strain Ratio of the test data.
Remark: The above material data can also be estimated by using the uniform material law.
z A Solution parameter set, with the following information:

Load-notch strain curve,
Limit-load ratio,
Damage Parameter, and
Residual stress level.
The surface correction factor,
size correction factor,
limit damage sum,
F-88
local stress state parameters (FEM or LTS-analysis

only),
and how to handle situations involving multiple channels
with different channel lengths;
for Design Curve and Design Point calculations, the Load
Variable, Unknown Variable, and Life Load Level can be
specified.
z A method parameter set, with the following information
FEM result information (FEM only)
Nonproportional FEM filter information (FEM nonproportional only)
z In the Geometry Work Sheet and Cell,
the offset and factor that should be applied to the load
history,
and the values of e~ (non FEM only) and e L~ for the load
history.
Reference Graphical User Interface
Part 3
Reference Graphical User

Interface
In this part of the manual the main parts of the Graphical
User Interface (GUI) and basic operations are introduced.
F-89
F-90
LMS FALANCS User Manual - Reference Graphical User Interface
Overview
F-91
Overview
The part Reference Graphical User Interface contains the
chapters:
z Menus
The functions of every menu item in the LMS FALANCS
main window "LMS FALANCS" are explained.
z Common Operations
Commonly used user interaction is described, such as file
operations, operations on data sets, selecting input data,
monitoring, printing and working with the Geometry Work
Sheet.
z Management of Non-FEM Results
The loading, saving and exporting of Non-FEM results is
described in detail.
z Management of FEM Results
The handling of FEM results is described.
z Viewing Results
The windows for viewing Non-FEM and FEM results are
explained.
z LMS FALANCS Methods
LMS FALANCS offers some methods beside the Fatigue
Analysis. These methods are described in this chapter. Additionally the procedure for performing the history reduction on results is described.
z Data Sheets
General information on data sheets in LMS FALANCS is
given. The data sheets for defining, updating and viewing
data sets are explained in detail.
z Error and Information Messages
The major information and error messages of LMS FALANCS and some hints for solving the respective problems
and failures are listed.
F-92
Menus
F-93
Menus
When LMS FALANCS is started, the main window titled "LMS
FALANCS" appears.
Fig. 15:
LMS FALANCS main window
Overview
The menu items from the main window are:
z
z
z
z
z
z
File
Tools
Configuration
Help.
Each of these menu items and subsequent sub-menus will be

described in detail.
The basic way to perform a fatigue calculation is outlined below:
How to perform a fatigue calculation
1. Open load sequence files (such as time histories or rainflow
matrices) and any finite element results and set files that
may be needed by using the File menu.
2. Select either the stress-life approach or strain-life approach for fatigue analysis.
F-94
3. Select the appropriate material property data for the analysis in the Stress-life Curves or Materials Data submenus.
4. Select the channels from the load sequence files using the
Load Histories sub-menu.
5. Select the appropriate solution parameters (for example,
damage parameters) from the Solution Parameters submenu.
6. Select the appropriate method parameters (for example, for
spot weld calculation) from the Method Parameters submenu.
7. If using finite element data, select the FEM:Load Cases
and FEM:Sets to define what load cases or finite element
sets to use in the analysis.
8. Select either a non FEM: Fatigue Analysis or FEM: Fatigue Analysis.
9. Modify the Geometry Work Sheet and start the calculation.
10.View the results with the Results sub-menu.
11. Conduct fatigue sensitive editing with History Reduction
if the fatigue sensitive editing option was selected in the
fatigue analysis.
Menus
F-95
Menu: File
The purpose of the File menu item is to access sub-menus that
allow the user to select the name, location and type of files that
contain load sequence information and finite element results,
or to exit the program.
Fig. 16:
Window "LMS FALANCS File Menu"
Menu item FileOpen Load History Files...

The file selection window "Load History File Selection" appears where you specify name, location and type of files that
contain load sequence information to be used for either the
Stress-life Approach or the Strain-life Approach fatigue
analysis methods. You can select one or several files.
Possible file types are FUNKTION, RPC-III, TDF, ASCII,
IDX, IBMI2, Pias, RIGSYS, Universal Binary,
Skalar20, EDASWIN and STRUKTUR. Which of these types
are available depends on your system and the configuration
in the file tecware.ini.
Menu item FileOpen Test Schedule File...
The file selection window "Test Schedule Definition" appears. Its purpose is to specify name, location and type of a
file that contains test schedule information to be used for either the Stress-life Approach or the Strain-life Approach fatigue analysis methods. You can select one file.
The only available file type is Test schedule definition (*.tsd).
F-96
Menu item FileOpen FE Result Files...

The file selection window "Selection of result file" appears.
Its purpose is to specify name, location and type of files that
contain finite element load case information to be used for
either the Stress-life Approach or the Strain-life Approach
fatigue analysis methods for FE (finite element) data.
Possible FE data formats are ANSYS, NASTRAN, I-DEAS,
Pro/MECHANICA., ABAQUS and CATIA.The selected files
are checked to make certain they conform to the format that
has been specified.
Remark: If you use the CAT/FALANCS tool within CATIA this step is not
necessary since the information is transferred during the writing process.
Only those formats the user has licensed are available. See
section LMS FALANCS: basic product and operational
part, licensing for more information on licensing. The supported element types and methods to obtain these result
files are described in the corresponding section of Part 6
Reference - Interfaces to Finite Element Tools.
Menu item FileOpen FE Set Files...
The file selection window "Selection of component file" appears. Its purpose is to specify the name, location and type
of files that contain finite element node or element set information to be used for either the Stress-life Approach or
the Strain-life Approach fatigue analysis methods for FE
(finite element) data.
The only available file type is ELEMENT SETS (*.tsi).
The selected files are checked to make certain they conform
to the format. See the section about your FE-interface in
Part 6 Reference - Interfaces to Finite Element Tools on
how to produce such set-files.
Menu item FileOpen GWS File ...
The file selection window "Load Geometry Work Sheet" appears. Its purpose is to reopen a Geometry Work Sheet
stored in a former analysis run. LMS FALANCS automatically detects whether this folder was created in the stresslife approach or in the strain-life approach and opens the
corresponding folder.
Menus
F-97
Available file types are GWS-Folder(Binary) (*.fol)

and GWS-Folder(ASCII) (*.fal). The binary format is
the internal format of LMS FALANCS. The ASCII format is
user readable and editable. The procedure reading the ASCII-folder automatically detects, whether the folder was
stored in the full or in the references only version.
Menu item FileExit...
The menu item FileExit is selected to exit LMS FALANCS and close the "LMS FALANCS" main window. If this
item is selected, a message window appears to confirm the
choice to quit the program. Select Yes on the message window to exit LMS FALANCS, or select No to return to the
main window.
Using the radio buttons the user can decide what to do with
the created temporary results. Select the default value Remove temporary data, if you want to delete all the result
files that have been written to the tempory directory during
the LMS FALANCS run. The files are described in the section Parameter Section for LMS FALANCS Methods Result
Specification in Part 5 of this manual. If you want to use
the data outside of LMS FALANCS choose the option Keep
temporary data. The directory where the temporary files
are written to is displayed by choosing the Setup item in
the Help menu (See the paragraph Menu "HelpSetup").
F-98
Menu: Stress-life Approach

The purpose of the Stress-life Approach menu item is to access sub-menus that allow the user to select stress-life material
properties, load history channels and stress-life solution parameters from databases. The stress-life fatigue calculations
are also executed from this menu, the results can be displayed
and exported and history reduction can be performed, if applicable.
Some of the options available in this menu will not initially be
accessible, until the user has specified the appropriate information, such as completing panels in the menu FileOpen
FE Result Files or selecting Stress-life Curves.
Fig. 17:
Menu Stress-life Approach
Menu item Stress-life ApproachStress-life Curves..."

The database selection window "Stress-life Approach - Selection of Stress-life Data Sheets" appears.
Its purpose is to choose an existing material property file
from a database, or to Define, Update and Erase stress-life
material properties through the Action sub-menu. In this
panel, the user is also able to graphically display and interrogate up to four stress-life curves at the same time.
Menus
F-99
You can use the Database Configuration Tool to define the

databases where you select the SN curves from or specify
them manually in the section [DB:SNCurve] of the configuration file falancs.ini. See the chapters The Database Configuration Tool and Settings Specific to LMS
FALANCS:FALANCS.INI for further information.
Menu item Stress-life ApproachSolution Parameter...
The database selection window "Stress-life Approach - Selection of Solution Parameter Sets" appears.
Its purpose is to choose an existing solution parameters file,
or to Define, Update and Erase solution parameter files.
databases where you select the solution parameter sets
from or specify them manually in the section
[DB:SolpStress] of the configuration file falancs.ini.
See the chapters The Database Configuration Tool and
Settings Specific to LMS FALANCS:FALANCS.INI for further information.
Remark: The solution parameter database directories have the subdirectories stress and strain. The parameters for the stress-life approach are stored in the subdirectories stress.
Menu item Stress-life ApproachMethod Parameters...

The database selection window "Selection of Method Parameter Sets" appears.
Its purpose is to choose an existing method parameters set,
or to Define, Update and Erase method parameter sets.
See the paragraph Selecting Method Parameters for further information on selecting method parameters.
databases where you select the method parameters from or
specify them manually in the section [DB:MethodParam]
of the configuration file falancs.ini. See the chapters The
Database Configuration Tool and Settings Specific to LMS
F-100
Menu item Stress-life ApproachLoad Histories...

The channel selection window "Stress-life Approach - Load
History Selection" appears.
Its purpose is to choose channels in files (previously specified from the File menu) to use in the next fatigue analysis.
In this panel, the user is also able to graphically display and
interrogate the time histories.
See the paragraph Channel Selection to find out how this
window works.
Menu item Stress-life ApproachTest Schedule Segments...
The channel selection window "Stress-life Approach - Selection of Test Schedule Segments" appears.
Its purpose is to choose a sequence of segments out of the
selected test schedule definition file (previously specified
from the File menu) to use in the next fatigue analysis. In
this panel, the user is also able to get further information on
the selected test schedule.
See the paragraph Selecting a Test Schedule Sequence for
further information.
Menu item Stress-life ApproachNon FEM: Fatigue
Analysis
appear.
In this case the purpose of these windows is to execute a fatigue analysis without referring to finite element data.
Menu item Stress-life ApproachNon FEM: LTS Tensor
Analysis
appear.
In this case the purpose of these windows is to start a tensor
analysis on the selected triples of load channels.
See the paragraph LTS Tensor Analysis for further information.
Menus
F-101
Menu item Stress-life ApproachNon FEM: Results

The window "result selection" appears where you select
computation results for displaying, exporting or saving
them.
Menu item Stress-life ApproachNon FEM: History reduction
The window "history reduction" appears.
Its purpose is to interactively edit the load sequence by
eliminating cycles that do not contribute much to the total
damage of the history.
Remark: The history reduction is performed only on results based on
method parameter sets for that the option fatigue sensitive editing is
set. This option is set in the window "Method parameter" that appears
after selecting the method parameter set in the selection window "Selection of Method Parameter Sets" and selecting the menu item Action
Define.
Menu item Stress-life ApproachFEM: Load Cases...

Its purpose is to choose which finite element load cases from
the finite element results file (previously specified from the
File menu) are to be used in the fatigue analysis.
Menu item Stress-life ApproachFEM: Sets..."
Its purpose is to choose which finite element sets from the
finite element set files (previously specified from the File
menu) are to be used in the fatigue analysis.
If no finite element sets are chosen, the fatigue calculation
will be done on all elements in the finite element results file
(refer to the Part 6 Reference - Interfaces to Finite Element
Tools for a list of supported elements).
F-102
Menu item Stress-life ApproachFEM: Fatigue Analysis"

appear.
In this case the purpose of these windows is to execute a fatigue analysis without based on finite element data.
Menu item Stress-life ApproachFEM: Local time series
(LTS)"
appear.
In this case the purpose of these windows is to write local
results of the FEM Analysis and external loads to new local
time series.
See the paragraph Local Time Series (LTS) for further information.
Menu item Stress-life ApproachFEM: transient analysis"
appear.
In this case the purpose of these windows is to execute a
transient damage analysis.
See the paragraph Transient Analysis for further information.
Menus
F-103
Menu: Strain-life Approach

The purpose of the Strain-life Approach menu item is to access sub-menus that allow the user to select strain-life material
properties, load history channels and strain-life solution parameters. The strain-life fatigue calculations are also executed
from this menu, the results can be displayed and exported and
history reduction can be performed, if applicable.
Some of the options available in this menu will not initially be
accessible, until the user has specified the appropriate information, such as completing panels in the menu FileOpen
FE Result Files or selecting Materials Data.
Fig. 18:
Menu Strain-life Approach
Menu item Strain-life ApproachMaterials Data...

The database selection window "Strain-life Approach - Selection of Material Data Sheets" appears.
Its purpose is to choose an existing material property file
from a database, or to Define, Update and Erase strain-life
material properties through the Action sub-menu.
databases where you select the material data from or specify them manually in the section [DB:Material] of the
configuration file falancs.ini. See the chapters The Database Configuration Tool and Settings Specific to LMS
F-104
Menu item Strain-Life...Solution Parameters...

The database selection window "Strain-life Approach - Selection of Solution Parameter Sets" appears.
Its purpose is to choose an existing solution parameters file,
or to Define, Update and Erase solution parameter files.
databases where you select the solution parameter sets
from or specify them manually in the section
[DB:SolpStrain] of the configuration file falancs.ini.
See the chapters The Database Configuration Tool and
Settings Specific to LMS FALANCS:FALANCS.INI for further information.
Remark: The solution parameter database directories have the subdirectories stress and strain. The parameters for the strain-life approach are stored in the subdirectories strain.
Menu item Strain-Life...Method Parameters...

The database selection window "Selection of Method Parameter Sets" appears after selecting the menu item
Strain-life ApproachMethod Parameters....
Its purpose is to choose an existing method parameters set,
or to Define, Update and Erase method parameter sets.
See the paragraph Selecting Method Parameters for further information on selecting method parameters.
databases where you select the method parameters from or
specify them manually in the section [DB:MethodParam]
of the configuration file falancs.ini. See the chapters The
Database Configuration Tool and Settings Specific to LMS
Menu item Strain-Life...Load Histories...
The channel selection window "Strain-life Approach - Load
History Selection" appears.
Its purpose is to choose channels in files (previously specified from the File menu) to use in the next fatigue analysis.
In this panel, the user is also able to graphically display and
interrogate the time histories.
Menus
F-105
See the paragraph Channel Selection to find out how this

window works.
Menu item Strain-life ApproachTest Schedule Segments...
The channel selection window "Strain-life Approach - Selection of Test Schedule Segments" appears.
Its purpose is to choose a sequence of segments out of the
selected test schedule definition file (previously specified
from the File menu) to use in the next fatigue analysis. In
this panel, the user is also able to get further information on
the selected test schedule.
See the paragraph Selecting a Test Schedule Sequence for
Menu item Strain-life ApproachNon FEM: Fatigue
Analysis
appear.
In this case the purpose of these windows is to execute a fatigue analysis without referring to finite element data.
Menu item Strain-life ApproachNon FEM: LTS
appear.
time series.
Menu item Strain-life ApproachNon FEM: LTS Tensor
Analysis
appear.
In this case the purpose of these windows is to start a tensor
analysis on the selected triples of load channels.
See the paragraph LTS Tensor Analysis for further information.
F-106
Menu item Strain-life ApproachNon FEM: Results

The window "result selection" appears where you select
computation results for displaying, exporting or saving
them.
Menu item Strain-life ApproachNon FEM: History reduction
Its purpose is to interactively edit the load sequence by
eliminating cycles that do not contribute much to the total
damage of the history.
Remark: The history reduction is performed only on results based on
method parameter sets for that the option fatigue sensitive editing is
set. This option is set in the window "Method parameter" that appears
after selecting the method parameter set in the selection window "Selection of Method Parameter Sets" and selecting the menu item Action
Define.
Menu item Strain-life Approachsynthetic stress-life

curve
The purpose of the sub-menu synthetic stress life curve
is to produce stress-life material data sheets using strainlife material parameters. The stress-life curves are created
for all combinations of strain-life solution parameters set
and material data sets selected for an analysis (either an
FEM or non FEM analysis).
The window "Creation of synthetic SN curves" appears that
informs you of how many stress-life curves will be created.
At this point you can create the curves or cancel the operation.
Menu item Strain-life ApproachFEM: Load Cases...
Its purpose is to choose which finite element load cases from
the finite element results file (previously specified from the
File menu) are to be used in the fatigue analysis.
Menu item Strain-life ApproachFEM: Sets..."
Menus
F-107
Its purpose is to choose which finite element sets from the

finite element set files (previously specified from the File
menu) are to be used in the fatigue analysis.
If no finite element sets are chosen, the fatigue calculation
will be done on all elements in the finite element results file
(refer to the Part 6 Reference - Interfaces to Finite Element
Tools for a list of supported elements).
Menu item Strain-life ApproachFEM: Fatigue Analysis
appear.
In this case the purpose of these windows is to execute a fatigue analysis based on finite element data.
Menu item Strain-life ApproachFEM: Fatigue Analysis
The purpose of the sub-menu FEM: Fatigue Analysis is to
execute a fatigue analysis using data obtained directly from
reading finite element data. When this item is selected, the
windows "Geometry Work Sheet" and "Geometry Cell" appear.
Menu item Strain-life ApproachFEM: Local time series
(LTS)"
appear.
time series.
Menu item Strain-life ApproachFEM: transient analysis
appear.
In this case the purpose of these windows is to execute a
transient damage analysis.
See the paragraph Transient Analysis for further information.
F-108
Menu: Tools
The entries of the menu Tools depend on your configuration.
Some converting tools for the FEM analysis may be accessed
from the Tools menu. You can also view the window
"Computation Status" from this menu.
Remark: When starting the tools from the Tools menu exact one file is converted. Use the corresponding shell script for converting several files.
Fig. 19:
Menu Tools
Menu item ToolsASCII fileFALANCS Element sets

Selecting this item will open the LMS FALANCS tool start
window to select an ASCII element file to be converted into
a element file in the LMS FALANCS internal format. The
name of the output file and the target directory may also be
selected.
See the corresponding chapter in the Appendix: File Formats for a description of the ASCII format of element sets.
Note that using this tool only one set per output file is written.
Fig. 20: Window "Starting FALANCS tool: ASCII fil file -> FALANCS Element sets"
Menus
F-109
Menu item ToolsI-DEAS static groupsFALANCS

Element sets
window to select an I-DEAS universal file to write a element file in the LMS FALANCS internal format. The name
of the output file and the target directory may also be selected.
The groups defined in I-DEAS are converted to element sets
in the output file. Be sure the group definitions are written
to the universal file.
Fig. 21: Window "Starting FALANCS tool: I-DEAS static groups ->
FALANCS Element sets"
Menu item ToolsABAQUS fil filesFALANCS Element

sets
window to select an ABAQUS result file and convert it into
an element set.
Fig. 22: Window "Starting FALANCS tool: ABAQUS -> FALANCS

Element sets"
F-110
Menu item ToolsTime seriesNASTRAN bulk data

window to select a time series that will be converted to a
NASTRAN input file for modal transient analysis (SOL
112). This file can be used to calculate modal transient participation factors.
Fig. 23: Window "Starting FALANCS tool: Time Series NASTRAN

bulk data"
Menu item ToolsNASTRAN Punch filesTime series

window to select the resulting punch file written by a NASTRAN modal transient analysis. This file contains the modal participation factors. Using this tool this file is converted to a LMS FALANCS readable "load history file" containing the modal participation factors. The channels will
get named MODE1, MODE2, up to the maximal calculated
mode MODEn.
Fig. 24: Window "Starting FALANCS tool: NASTRAN Punch file

Time Series "
Menus
F-111
Menu item ToolsTime seriesABAQUS input file

window to select a time series that will be converted to a
ABAQUS input.
Fig. 25: Window "Starting FALANCS tool: Time series -> ABAQUS
input"
Menu item ToolsABAQUS fil fileTime series

window to select an ABAQUS result file that will be converted to a time series in the Universal Binary format.
Fig. 26: Window "Starting FALANCS tool: ABAQUS .fil Time Series "
F-112
Menu item ToolsIDEAS unv filesTime series

window to select an IDEAS result file that will be converted
to a time series in the Universal Binary format.
Fig. 27: Window "Starting FALANCS tool: IDEAS unv file Time
Series "
Menu item ToolsFALANCS .damMEDINA

window to select a FALANCS result file (*.dam) that will be
converted to MEDINA format.
Menu item ToolsComputation Status
You can view the "Computation Status" window by activating this item. This window is usually popped up when
starting an analysis. However if you perform a long analysis
like a nonproportional FEM analysis, it can get overlayed by
other windows on your desktop and you can directly access
it by this menu item.
Fig. 28: Window "Computation Status "
See the chapter Monitoring Analysis Progress with Computation Status for further information.
Menus
F-113
Menu: Configuration
The menu Configuration helps you by the local configuration of
LMS FALANCS. It currently contains the items Method Parameters and Databases.
Fig. 29:
Menu Configuration
Menu item ConfigurationMethod Parameters

Selecting the menu item starts up the interactive configuration of Method Parameters contained in your local configuration file falancs.ini.
Remark: Do not mess up the configuration entries with the method parameter sets chosen for each job individually.
The values that are displayed are the currently valid entries. These are either default values or values that have
been changed in the system configuration file or your local
configuration file.
If any parameter is changed and the OK or Apply button is
pressed this value is changed in the local configuration file
falancs.ini. The corresponding entries are automatically
generated.
See the description of the window "Options" for further information.
Menu item ConfigurationDatabases...
Selecting the menu item starts up the interactive Database
Configuration Tool for creating and modifying user defined
databases.
See the paragraph The Database Configuration Tool for detailed information on using the DCT.
F-114
Menu:Help
Selecting this item you can display this help information or get
Information on the version of LMS FALANCS you are currently running. The LMS FALANCS installation provides the
Netscape browser to view the help information. You can choose
another html-browser by changing the corresponding entries in
the configuration file tecware.ini.
Fig. 30:
Menu Help
Menu item HelpOverview"

This item opens the help browser and displays the contents
of all available tecware on-line help files. If the browser is
already opened, then the displayed information is changed
to the overview.
Menu item HelpMasterindex
This item opens the help browser and displays the alphabetical index to all available tecware on-line help files. If the
browser is already opened, then the displayed information
is changed to the masterindex.
Menu item HelpContents
This item opens the help browser and displays the contents
of this manual. If the browser is already opened, then the
displayed text is changed to the Contents. From here you
can choose the section of your interest.
Menu item HelpIndex"
This item opens the help browser and displays the alphabetical index of this manual. If the browser is already
opened, then the displayed text is changed to the Index.
From here you can choose the keyword of your interest.
Menus
F-115
Menu item HelpOn-Version

Displays information of the version of LMS FALANCS
which is running. This is the same information as given at
startup.
Fig. 31: The window giving information on the LMS FALANCS version
To remove the window press the OK button.

Pressing System-Info opens the window "LMS System information" where you get information on your LMS TecWare
and LMS FALANCS installation. This window is described
in detail in the Volume I of the LMS TecWare documentation.
Menu item HelpSetup"
This menu item opens the setup information window that
gives helpful information about the running LMS FALANCS process. See the description of the window "Setup information" for further information.
F-116
Common Operations
F-117
Common Operations
This chapter describes the commonly used user interaction in
LMS FALANCS.
The chapter contains the paragraphs:
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Selection Windows in LMS FALANCS

Working with Databases
Operations on Data Sets
Selecting Input Data and Parameters
Selecting Method Parameters
Selecting Load History Channels
Selecting FEM Load Cases or Mode Shapes
Selecting a Test Schedule Sequence
Selecting FEM Sets
Viewing Load Channels
Fatigue Analysis with the windows "Geometry Work Sheet"
and "Geometry Cell"
Monitoring
Printing Datasheets or Graphs
F-118
Selection Windows in LMS FALANCS

In LMS FALANCS several types of selection windows are in
use:
z the common file selection windows for loading files from a
directory and storing them in a directory.
z the channel selection windows for selecting channels from
opened load history files
z the database selection windows for loading data from a database.
z the directory selection windows for specifying a save or load
directory.
File Selection
The common file selection windows are equivalent to the file
selection windows used in LMS TecWare.
There are windows to select one and to select multiple files.
Both versions have the same look and functionality. You can
use a set of predefined directories (default directories) to have
easy access to your project data. In the multiple file selection
you may select files from several directories and files with different file types.
See the individual description in the paragraph Menu: File for
the available selection formats (file types).
Remark: The file selection windows and the working with default directories
are described in detail in the part Data Management in LMS TecWare of the
manual LMS TecWare - Volume I. You open it by selecting the menu item
HelpOverview and selecting the corresponding entry in the appearing online help.
Single file selection windows in LMS FALANCS

Windows of this type are used to load a single file from a directory or to save it there in.
The windows
z "Test Schedule Definition"
Common Operations
z
z
z
z
z
z
F-119
"Load Geometry Work Sheet"

"Save results"
"Export (csv)"
"Export (ASCII)"
"Save Information Messages"
"Save as"
and some others are single file selection windows.
Fig. 32:
The file selection window (single file)
You load (save) a single file by

1. selecting a directory in the option menu Search in
2. selecting the file entry in the list or entering the file name
in the field File name
3. pressing Open (Save)
Multiple file selection windows in LMS FALANCS

Windows of this type are used to load one or more files from a
directory. You may load files from several directories and files
with different file types at the same time.
The windows
z "Load History File Selection"
z "Selection of component file"
z "Selection of result file"(multiple file selection)
and some others are multiple file selection windows.
F-120
Fig. 33:
The file selection window (several files)
You load several files by
Accept

2. selecting one or more file entries in the upper list
3. adding the selected entries to the lower list by selecting the
icon Accept or double clicking the entries
4. repeating the steps 1. to 3. for another directory
5. pressing Open
The icon Delete removes selected entries from the lower list.
Delete
Selection of a Directory
The common directory selection windows are equivalent to the
directory selection windows used in LMS TecWare.
Remark: The directory selection windows and the working with default directories are described in detail in the part Data Management in LMS
TecWare of the manual LMS TecWare - Volume I. You open it by selecting
the menu item HelpOverview and selecting the corresponding entry in the
appearing online help.
Search
Directory selection windows are used to specify a directory for

loading files from there or saving results there in. They appear
after pressing a Search button near a field defining a load or
save directory or selecting an according menu item.
Common Operations
F-121
The windows
z "Result directory selection"
z "Load Results"
and some others are directory selection windows.
Fig. 34:
The Directory Selection window
You specify a load or save directory by

2. selecting the directory entry in the list or entering the directory path and name in the field Folder
3. pressing OK
Channel Selection
Channel selection windows are used for a more specific element
selection from already loaded files:
loaded file
load history file
test schedule definition
component file
FE result file
elements
load history channels (time
series or rainflow matrices)
test schedule segments
element sets
load cases.
The channel selection windows are

z "Load History Selection"
for selecting single channels from load history files (stresslife and strain-life approach)
F-122
z "Test Schedule Segments"

for selecting single test schedules segments from test
schedule definition sets (stress-life and strain-life approach)
z "Selection of element sets"
for selecting single element sets from FE set files (stresslife and strain-life approach)
and
z "Selection of load cases"
for selecting single load cases from FE Result files (stresslife and strain-life approach)
Additionally you may get information on load history channels
and test schedule segments and start the graphical display of
load history channels. Use your FEM tool for visualizing load
cases.
A channel selection window is opened by selecting the menu
item
z Stress-life ApproachLoad Histories... or Strain-life
ApproachLoad Histories...
for loading load history channels
z Stress-life ApproachTest Schedule Segments...or
Strain-life ApproachTest Schedule Segments...
for loading test schedule segments
z Stress-life ApproachFEM: sets or Strain-life ApproachFEM: sets
for loading FEM sets.
or
z Stress-life ApproachFEM: Load Cases... or Strainlife ApproachFEM: Load Cases...
for loading load cases.
Remark: The menu items for opening channel selection windows are sensitive only if an according file is already loaded. The loaded elements are used
in the stress-life approach as well as in the strain-life approach as input for
further analyses.
Common Operations
Fig. 35:
F-123
Channel selection window
A channel selection window contains the following elements:

Upper list box
The Upper list box displays all files already loaded via the
menu File (e.g., load histories) and their elements. For each
element an entry is listed containing the name of the file
and the name of the element. (e.g., the name of a load history file on the left and the name of a channel stored in this
file on the right). Hence a filename may be listed several
times.
For easy access, the set of all elements of the last file previously selected from the file-selection are pre-selected.
Use the button Remove to delete single selected channel
entries from the list.
Remove
One or more entries selected in the Upper list box are deleted.
The corresponding file elements are no longer loaded. Use
this feature to decrease the number of loaded elements.
F-124
Down
Up
Down
All selected elements are added to the Lower list box.
Up
One or more entries selected in the Lower list box are removed from the list.
Lower list box
The Lower list box contains all selected elements. For
each element the path and name of the file it is stored in
and the name of the element are listed.
The Lower list box in the window "Selection of load cases"
contains an additional list on the left:
Fig. 36: The Lower list box in the window "Selection of load cases"
The list is filled with the currently loaded load channels

(button get load histories) or test schedules (button get
test sched.) Use the arrow buttons on the right to move a
load case entry up and down for assigning it to a load channel resp. test schedule. The number of load channels resp.
test schedules on the left and the number of selected load
cases on the right has to be equal when pressing OK. Otherwise a corresponding warning appears.
Info
The button Info is not available in all channel selection
windows.
You may use it for getting general information on
load history channels (e.g. maximum and minimum
channel values, channel length). This information is displayed in the window "Load History Channel Information".
Common Operations
F-125
and
test schedule segments: this information is displayed in
the window "Test Schedule Segments - Info".
No detailed information on FEM sets and load cases is
available.
Graphics
Selecting this button will plot Rainflow matrices and load
history channels that are highlighted in the Lower list
box.
The display tools are defined in the section [LoadHistoryView] of the configuration file falancs.ini by the parameters:
RF-Matrices = RainView
Rainflow matrices are plotted in the window
"RAINFLOW Matrices" by the tool LMS TecWare RainView. Only one matrix at a time can be displayed. For
viewing several matrices select and display one rainflow
matrix after the other.
TimeSeries = TimeEdit
Time series are displayed using LMS TecWare TimeEdit.
You may edit the selected time series and perform the
LMS TecWare methods on them.
TimeSeries = TimeView
Time series are displayed using the view-only version
LMS TecWare TimeView. Editing the time series is not
possible.
Displaying time series and rainflow matrices in the same
display is not possible. But you may open LMS TecWare
TimeEdit/TimeView and the window "RAINFLOW Matrix"
concurrently.
The button Graphics is visible only when loading load history channels. The visualization of test schedules, FEM sets
and load cases is not available from the channel selection
window. Use your FEM tool for visualizing load cases.
F-126
OK
All elements listed in the Lower list box are accepted for
fatigue analysis. They are used as input for each further
analysis in the stress-life approach as well as in the strainlife approach until other elements are loaded.
The menu item calling the channel selection window is
ticked off.
Cancel
The channel selection window is closed without loading new
elements for the next fatigue analysis. If any elements were
loaded before opening the channel selection window, they
will be used again in the next analysis as input.
Help
The LMS FALANCS online help system is opened.
Selection of Data from a Database

Windows of this type are used to select elements saved in databases. LMS FALANCS supports the concurrent selection of
elements of the same type from several databases (e.g. two
stress-life curves from different databases).
The windows
z "Selection of Stress-life Data Sheets" (stress-life approach)
z "Selection of Solution Parameter Sets" (stress-life and
strain-life approach)
z "Selection of Method Parameter Sets" (stress-life and
strain-life approach)
z "Selection of Material Data Sheets" (strain-life approach)
are database selection windows.
Common Operations
Fig. 37:
F-127
Database selection window
The window contains the menu Action, the area Search, two
List boxes and some Buttons.
Menu: Action
The menu Action contains menu items for the working with
data sheets.
ActionUniform Material Law
This menu item is only available in the database selection
window "Selection of Material Data Sheets". It calls the
window "Estimation Based on Uniform Material Law"
where you specify the parameters for estimating strain life
material properties.
ActionDefine
The data sheet for creating a new element of the currently
selected database appears.
F-128
If a single data set is currently marked in the Lower list

box, its parameter settings are used as preset for the data
sheet fields.
If the Lower list box is empty or several data sets are
marked there in, the data sheet is filled with the LMS
FALANCS default parameters.
ActionUpdate
The data sheet for updating the data set currently selected
in the Upper list box appears.
ActionErase
A question window appears that asks for your confirmation
for deleting all currently selected data sets in the Upper
list box.
Use this menu item with care! If you give the confirmation,
the data sets are physically deleted and can not be restored.
Search
In the area Search you specify the database and the criterion
for the data set search.
Database
All defined databases are available via the option menu Database.
You may select successively several databases and select
data sets of them all.
Search Field
The field can be filled with the name of an existing data set.
The user may enter a search string to search the database
for matching data sets.
The default entry is an asterisk "*" matching all data sets of
a database.
Search
The selected database is searched for data sets matching
the entered Search String. All found data sets are listed in
the Upper list box.
Common Operations
F-129
Pressing [Return] after entering a search string has the

same effect.
List boxes
The list boxes in the middle of the window display all data sets
found in a specified database and matching your selection.
You may select data sets from several databases by changing
the entry in the field Database, loading the data sets of the
new database into the Upper list box and adding one or more
of these entries to the Lower list box.
Upper list box
Data sets that match the search criteria are listed.
One or more marked data sets are added to the Lower list
box when pressing the Down button. Double clicking on
the single entries has the same effect.
A single marked data set may be updated by using the
menu item ActionUpdate.
One or more marked data sets may be erased by using the
menu item ActionErase.
Down
Down
All elements marked in the Upper list box and the databases they are stored in are added to the Lower list box.
Double clicking on a single entry in the Upper list box has
the same effect.
Up
Up
Elements marked in the Lower list box are removed from
the list.
Double clicking on a single entry in the Lower list box has
the same effect.
Lower list box
Data sets selected for an analysis, are listed in this box. For
each data set its name and the database it is stored in is entered to the list.
F-130
To remove one or more data sets from the list mark them
and press the Up button. Double clicking on the single entries has the same effect.
A single marked data set may be used as template for creating a new data set by using the menu item ActionDefine.
Buttons
Below the list boxes the following buttons are visible:
Data Sheet
Pressing Data Sheet opens the data sheet of the data set
that is currently selected in the Lower list box. You may
view but not change the parameters of the data set.
See the chapter Data Sheets for a description of the appearing window.
Graphics
The button Graphics is not visible in all database selection
windows. If available you may use it for displaying graphically the data set, that is currently selected in the Lower
list box.
OK
The window is closed. The data sets listed in the Lower list
box are selected for further computations. Former selections are no longer valid.
Cancel
The window is closed without selecting any elements. The
last done selection is still valid.
Help
The online help to the data selection window is opened.
Pressing [F1] has the same function.
See the paragraph Operations on Data Sets for further information on database operations and performing them.
Common Operations
F-131
Working with Databases

All the data used for fatigue analysis (i.e. stress-life curves,
material parameters, solution parameters and method parameters) are organized in databases to have easy access to data the
user once entered. Hence one can easily perform the same
analysis to different load histories. The database management
is the same for all the databases, such that one has to learn it
only once.
Since LMS FALANCS Version 2.11 every user can have multiple databases for each parameter type. These databases are defined in the initialization files of LMS FALANCS. Use the Database Configuration Tool (DCT) to define and maintain your
own databases.
Remark: The format of the databases and the DCT are described in the Part
7 Databases. If you are used to work with LMS FALANCS and LMS
TecWare configuration files, you may edit your personal falancs.ini to
configure the databases. See the manual LMS TecWare - Volume I for detailed information on the initialization files and the use of them.
The results of a fatigue analysis strongly depend on the values

in the database. Hence changing the database location may be
the reason for unexpected changes in results! The is described
in detail in
When saving a Geometry Work Sheet (FALANCS folder), for
each used parameter the information on its origin database is
saved. These database specifications are not contained in folders created with older versions of LMS FALANCS. When
loading such an old folder, the parameters are searched in all
available databases and the first hit is used. If the search for a
parameter was not successful, the first editable database specified in the initialization file falancs.ini is used. A corresponding warning appears.
F-132
Operations on Data Sets

In this paragraph the basic operations
z load data sets
z create new data sets
z update data sets
z delete data sets
z view and print data sets
z plot stress-life curves and material data
on database elements are described in detail.
Common Operations
F-133
Loading Data Sets

If all the data you need for your analysis already is organized
in databases, you just have to load the data items and you can
start your analysis. This is done in the database selection windows.
Fig. 38:
Database selection window
The databases and their entries you can select from are listed
in the upper box of the database selection windows. The lower
box lists all the selected entries.
Remark: When loading method parameters only one set may be selected for
a LMS FALANCS job.
How to load data sets

You load data sets from one or more databases successively by
1. opening the database selection window for the desired data
type (e.g., window "Selection of Stress-life Data Sheets" for
Stress-life curves) if not yet done
2. selecting a database in the option menu Database.
All elements of the selected database are listed in the upper
list box. You may diminish the number of listed data sets by
F-134
entering a search text in the field below the option menu

Database (in the figure above it is named SN Curve) and
pressing [Return]. Only data sets matching the search text
are listed now.
3. selecting one or more entries in the upper list box
down
Remark: To select one entry just left-click on it. To select consecutive

entries either select the first one, press the [Shift] button and select the
last one or hold the mouse button down while passing the pointer over
the set. To select several entries, hold down the [Ctrl] button, while selecting the additional entries.
up
4. adding the selected entries to the lower list by selecting the

arrow Down or double clicking the entries
The entries are entered to the list of selected data sets and
the name of the currently selected database is entered on
the right.
5. selecting unwanted entries in the lower list box and removing them with the up button
6. repeating the steps 2. to 5. for all databases from where
data sets are to be selected.
7. pressing OK
The database selection window is closed.
Remark: If you start the database selection from within the window "Geometry Cell", the marked entry in the Geometry Work Sheet will be replaced by
the data set selected in the database selection window. Hence you can
specify only one data set in the database selection window in this case.
Common Operations
F-135
Selecting Method Parameters

Method parameters are selected in the stress-life and strain
life approach. They define some basic parameters and the output of the finite element based analysis. The method parameters are part of the job definition. Hence there is exactly one
method parameter set for each job run in LMS FALANCS.
A method parameter set is loaded via the database selection
window "Selection of Method Parameter Sets". It appears after
selecting
z the menu item Stress-life ApproachMethod Parameters...
respectively
z the menu item Strain-life ApproachMethod Parameters... .
The menu item is ticked off if a method parameter set was
loaded:
Fig. 39:
The menu item Method Parameters... after loading a parameter set
Once a parameter set is loaded it is used in both approaches

stress-life and strain-life. For using an other parameter set reopen the window "Selection of Method Parameter Sets" and
load the set.
See the paragraph Loading database elements for further information on loading elements.
F-136
Selecting Load History Channels

Only single load history channels are used as input in a fatigue
analysis.
Remark: One can only use either load history channels or a test schedule
sequence in an analysis. If you already have selected both you have to deselect either the channels or the test schedules before starting an analysis.
Load channels are chosen from formerly selected load history

files. This is done in the channel selection window "Load history Selection" which appears after selecting
z the menu item Stress-life ApproachLoad Histories...
respectively
z the menu item Strain-life ApproachLoad Histories....
Fig. 40:
The menu item Load Histories... in the Stress-life Approach
These menu items are sensitive if any load history files were
previously specified (the corresponding menu item FileOpen
Load History Files... is ticked off).
How to load load history channels from a formerly loaded
file
You load several channels by
1. opening the corresponding channel selection window "Load
History Selection"
Common Operations
F-137
Fig. 41: The window "Load History Selection"
Down
Up
2. selecting one or more channel entries in the Upper list box

3. adding the selected entries to the Lower list box by selecting Down or double clicking the entries
Selecting Up removes selected entries from the Lower list
box.
4. pressing OK.
The channels in the Lower list box are loaded and the
menu item Load Histories... is ticked off.
Fig. 42: The menu item is ticked off.
F-138
Selecting FEM Load Cases or Mode Shapes

The FEM load cases contain either a static load response or
mode shape information from a modal transient analysis. In
the case of a static load response, each load case corresponds to
a load history channel of the applied load. In the case of a modal transient analysis, each mode shape corresponds to a modal contribution factor history. This information can be stored
in one or more files.
The load cases (or mode shapes) to use can be selected for use
in the analysis in the same way as load history channels can be
selected. This is described below.
The order in which the FEM load case files are selected can decrease the amount of editing that will need to be done in the
Geometry Worksheet. When the Geometry Worksheet is initialized, the worksheet will automatically associate the order of
the load history channels with the order of the FEM load cases
that have been selected. By selecting load history channels and
FEM load cases in the same order, worksheet editing effort is
reduced.
For a modal transient analysis, the mode shapes from 1 to the
highest corresponding contribution factor history should be
selected.
Load cases are selected in the selection window "Selection of
load cases". It appears after selecting the menu item Stresslife ApproachFEM: Load Cases... or Strain-life ApproachFEM: Load Cases....
Fig. 43:
The menu item FEM: Load Cases... in the Stress-life Approach
Common Operations
F-139
These menu items are sensitive if any FE Result files were

previously specified (the corresponding menu item FileOpen
FE Result Files... is ticked off).
How to load load cases
You load several channels by
1. opening the corresponding selection window "Selection of
load cases"
Fig. 44: The window "Selection of load cases".
The entries of the latest loaded FE Result file are selected

when opening the window.
Down
2. selecting one or more entries in the Upper list box

3. adding the selected entries to the Lower list box by
pressing Down or double clicking the entries
F-140
Fig. 45: The selected load cases
Up

box.
4. adding the currently loaded test schedules or load channels
by pressing get load histories or get test sched.
Fig. 46: The load history channels are added
Common Operations
F-141
5. changing the order of the selected load case entries by

moving them up and down with the arrow buttons on the
right if necessary
6. pressing OK.
The elements in the Lower list box are used in the next
FEM analysis and the menu item FEM: Load Cases... is
ticked off.
Fig. 47: The menu item is ticked off.
F-142
Selecting a Test Schedule Sequence

Test schedule segments are loaded from a formerly selected
Test Schedule Definition file. The order in which you choose
the segments is important: It defines the order in which the
segments are run through in the durability simulation. You
can choose segments from one Test Schedule Definition file
only!
Remark: One can only use either load history channels or a test schedule
sequence in an analysis. If you already have selected both you have to deselect either the channels or the test schedules before starting an analysis.
The selection window appears after selecting the menu item

Stress-life ApproachTest Schedule Segments... or
Strain-life ApproachTest Schedule Segments.... These
menu items are only available after a Test Schedule Definition
file (TSD) has been loaded via the File menu.
How to load test schedule segments
You load several segments by
1. opening the corresponding channel selection window "Test
Schedule Segments"
Fig. 48: The window "Test Schedule Segments"
Common Operations
Down
Up
F-143
2. selecting one or more segment entries in the Upper list

box
box.
4. pressing OK.
The segments in the Lower list box are loaded and the
menu item Test Schedule Segments... is ticked off.
Fig. 49: The menu item Test Schedule Segments... is ticked off.
Remark: Note that you do not select the channels corresponding to the load
cases in this window. All the channels in the test schedule file are used. Use
the button Info and/or the button get test sched. in the window "Load case
selection" to properly match the channels to load cases!
F-144
Selecting FEM Sets

FEM sets are useful in organizing elements into groups according to material properties and solution parameters. For
example, one group of elements may be near a weld, and have
different material properties than the base metal. Distinguishing these elements by groups allows you to easily set up
and conduct fatigue analyses for each case.
Once an FE Set file is opened, different element sets defined in
the file can be selected. Refer to Part 6 Reference - Interfaces
to Finite Element Tools for information on how to create element sets for your particular finite element code.
Element sets may be loaded once a FE set file has been opened
(the corresponding menu item FileOpen FE Set Files... is
ticked off).
The according selection window "Selection of element sets" appears after selecting the menu item Stress-life Approach
FEM: Sets... or Strain-life ApproachFEM: Sets....
How to load FEM element sets
You load several element sets by
1. opening the corresponding channel selection window "Selection of element sets"
Fig. 50: The window "Selection of element sets"
Common Operations
Down
Up
F-145
2. selecting one or more element set entries in the Upper list

box
box.
4. pressing OK.
The element set in the Lower list box are loaded and the
menu item FEM: Sets... is ticked off.
Fig. 51: The menu item FEM: Sets... is ticked off
F-146
Creating new Data Sets

Creating a new database entry of a specific data type means
1. setting up a new data sheet
2. specifying parameters in the data sheet and
3. adding it to a database.
Remark: This action is allowed only on editable databases!
If you need a new data set of a specific data type for your
analysis choose the menu item ActionDefine in the according database selection window. The corresponding data
sheet appears where you define the parameters of the new data
set.
You may use the parameters of an existing element as template or use default parameters defined.
You may specify your own default parameters by creating a
new database element with these parameters and using it as
template for further definitions.
For information on the individual parameters refer to the
chapter Data Sheets for a detailed description of the different
data sheets.
How to define new data sets
You define a new data set by
Stress-life curves) in the menu Stress-life Approach or
Strain-life Approach if not yet done
2. using
an existing data set as template
1. select a database where the template is stored in (option menu Database)
All data set of the selected database are listed in the
Upper list box.
2. select the template in the Upper list box, add it to
the Lower list box and mark it therein
Common Operations
F-147
default parameters as template

1. select any database in the option menu Database
2. remove all entries from the Lower list box (no entry
marked)
3. selecting the menu item ActionDefine
The data sheet of the data set type is opened. Depending on
the used approach it is titled "Stress-life Approach - Define
...." or "Strain-life Approach - Define ...".
Fig. 52: Defining a new data set
Depending on step 2. the window fields are filled with

the parameter values of the existing element
default parameters.
One can use this feature e.g. for parameter studies.
All fields of the window are editable for naming the new
data set, selecting a database and setting the parameters.
Remark: If the name starts e.g. with a project code, the entries are easy
to group and easy to find by using the option menu Database in the database selection windows.
Additionally you may start a printout of the data sheet by

pressing Print.
F-148
4. pressing
OK
The new data set is added to the specified database. If a
data set with the same name already exists in the database, you are asked for permission to overwrite this element.
The data sheet is closed.
Apply
The new data set is added to the specified database. If a
data set with the same name already exists in the database, you are asked for permission to overwrite this element.
The data sheet is kept open. You may edit the name field
and other parameters to create another data set .
One can use this feature for defining successively several
data sets.
5. pressing OK for closing the database selection window.
Common Operations
F-149
Updating existing data sets

Updating a data set means opening its data sheet and changing its parameters. The name of the data set and the database
it is contained in are not editable. The original parameter values are overwritten and are no longer available.
To change an existing data set select it in the Upper list box
of the according database selection window and choose the
menu item ActionUpdate. You edit the data set's parameters in the appearing data sheet.
For information on the individual parameters refer to the

chapter Data Sheets for a detailed description of the different
data sheets.
How to update a data set
You update the parameters of a data set by
2. selecting the database where the data set is contained in
(option menu Database)
All data sets of the selected database are listed in the Upper list box.
3. marking the data set in the Upper list box
4. selecting the menu item ActionUpdate
The data sheet of the data set is opened. Depending on the
used approach it is titled "Stress-life Approach - Update ...."
or "Strain-life Approach - Update ...".
F-150
Fig. 53: Updating the data sheet of the SN-curve "Sample Steel" in the
database Default
The name and the database are not to be changed. The according fields are set insensitive. All other parameters may
be changed.
Additionally you may start a printout of the data sheet by
pressing Print.
5. editing the available parameters
6. pressing
OK
The changes are saved and the data sheet is closed. The
opened database selection window gets the focus.
Apply
The changes are saved and the data sheet is kept open.
You may modify another parameter set.
Pressing Cancel will close the data sheet without changing
the parameters.
7. repeating the steps 2. to 6. for updating several data sets if
desired
8. pressing OK or Cancel for closing the database selection
window
Common Operations
F-151
Deleting existing data sets

To get rid of existing database entries select them in the Upper list box of the database selection window and choose the
menu item ActionErase. You can select a set of data sets as
well. A confirmation box gets popped up to ask if you really
want to delete these data sets.
The deleted data sets are deleted from the file system, too.
Hence there is no chance to recover deleted data sets . So be
sure that you wont need them in the future.
How to delete elements from a data set

You delete data sets by
Stress-life curves) if not yet done
2. selecting the database from where the data sets are to be
removed in the option menu Database
3. marking one or more data sets in the Upper list box
4. selecting the menu item ActionErase
A confirmation box appears asking for the permission to
delete the selected data sets .
5. repeating the steps 2. to 4. for deleting another data set
6. pressing OK.
The database selection window is closed.
F-152
Viewing and Printing a Data Sheet

Viewing a data sheet means opening the data sheet for displaying its parameters. You may print the data sheet but not
change it.
How to view a data sheet
You open a data sheet for viewing the parameters of a data set
by
2. selecting the database where the data set is contained in
(option menu Database)
All data sets of the selected database are listed in the Upper list box.
3. marking the data set in the Upper list box
4. adding the selected entry to the Lower list box
The button Data Sheet is set sensitive as soon as the first
entry is entered into the lower list box.
5. marking the data set entry in the Lower list box
6. pressing Data Sheet
The data sheet of the data set is opened. Depending on the
used approach it is titled "Stress-life Approach - View ...." or
"Strain-life Approach - View ...".
Common Operations
F-153
Fig. 54: Viewing the data sheet of the SN-curve "Sample Steel" in the
database Default
The parameter entries are not to be changed. All fields are

insensitive. You can not change the settings.
For the individual entries refer to the chapter Data Sheets
for a detailed description of the different data sheets.
7. pressing Print will open the window "Print" for setting the
print parameters and starting the printout of the data
sheet.
8. pressing OK.
The database selection window is closed. The opened database selection window gets the focus.
Displaying Stress-Life Curves and Material Data

To display a stress-life curve or a material data select the corresponding entry in the Lower list box of the database selection window and press Graphics. The according graphical display appears and you can print the graphic and view the corresponding data sheet.
Remark: All printouts of graphics in LMS FALANCS should be done in landscape format because the layout of the printouts is done in this format.
F-154
Viewing Load Channels

LMS FALANCS accepts time series and rainflow matrices as
load channels. These channels are collected in load history
files.
You may view load channels when selecting them in the
channel selection window "Load History Selection".
The window appears after selecting the menu item Stress-life
ApproachLoad Histories resp. Strain-life Approach
Load Histories. It lists the channels of all currently loaded
load history files.
Fig. 55:
Start viewing load channels
LMS FALANCS uses two tools for displaying load channels:

LMS TecWare TimeEdit and LMS TecWare RainView. You
start the display by marking the load channels in the Selected
Load Histories and pressing Graphics.
Common Operations
F-155
Time series are displayed using LMS TecWare TimeEdit or its

restricted version LMS TecWare TimeView.
z In LMS TecWare TimeEdit you may edit the selected time
series and perform the LMS TecWare methods on them.
z In the view only version LMS TecWare TimeView no editingis possible.
The section [LoadHistoryView] of the configuration file
falancs.ini defines which version is used.
Fig. 56:
Viewing three time series
Rainflow matrices are plotted in the window "RAINFLOW

Matrices" by the tool LMS TecWare RainView. Only one matrix
at a time can be displayed. For viewing several matrices select
and display one rainflow matrix after the other.
F-156
Fig. 57:
Viewing a rainflow matrix
Displaying time series and rainflow matrices in the same display is not possible. But you may open LMS TecWare
TimeEdit/TimeView and the window "RAINFLOW Matrix"
concurrently.
Remark: For further information on the used LMS TecWare tools see the
paragraph LMS TecWare TimeEdit and the part Visualization of Rainflow
Matrices in the manual LMS TecWare - Volume II. You may view these
chapters in the online-help or in the pdf-version. The online-help is opened by
selecting the menu item HelpOverview in the LMS FALANCS main window "LMS FALANCS" and choosing the corresponding entry. The pdfversion is located in the subdirectory manual of your LMS TecWare installation directory and is named tecware_volume_2_en.pdf.
Common Operations
F-157
Fatigue Analysis with the windows

"Geometry Work Sheet" and "Geometry
Cell"
For any type of fatigue analysis, the windows "Geometry Work
Sheet" and "Geometry Cell" are used together to define the
channel combinations and history offset and factor.
General concepts
LMS FALANCS supports several methods for the Non FEMand the FEM-case:
Non FEM
FEM
fatigue analysis
fatigue analysis
(static or modal superposition)
LTS Tensor Analysis
Local Time Series (LTS)
History Reduction.
Transient Analysis
The Geometry Work Sheet defines the analysis that is to be

performed. The material properties, the solution parameters,
the loading channels ( resp. test schedules) and the FEM-load
cases and element sets get combined.
After the necessary input data has been collected in the database selections, the load history resp. test schedule selection
and the FEM-load case selection, the user can pop up the Geometry Work Sheet that corresponds to the chosen analysis.
There are Worksheets for the stress-life approach and the
strain-life approach of each analysis.
The GUI initializes the Geometry Work Sheet with the best
guess as to what the user intends to do. The following paragraphs describe the different initialization types.
F-158
Initialization for the Non FEM - fatigue analyses and

transient analysis
For each possible combination from selected S-N curve (or material in the strain-life approach), load history, and solution
parameter, one task is generated that applies the load history
to a combination of S-N-curves (or materials in the strain-life
approach) and solution parameters.
Fig. 58:
The GWS of a Non FEM - fatigue analysis
Initialization for the Non FEM - LTS tensor analyses
The selected load histories are grouped in triples x , y , .

For each triple a task is generated combining it with the selected S-N curve (or material in the strain-life approach) and
solution parameter.
Fig. 59:
The GWS of a Non FEM - tensor analysis
Common Operations
F-159
Initialization for FEM - fatigue analyses

Each load case is combined with a load history. For the combinations, the ordering in the load history selection and the FEM
load case selection is crucial. Be sure that you combine the load
cases with the matching load histories. For one FEM analysis
several element sets represented by the selected S-N curves (or
materials in the strain-life approach) and solution parameters
can be defined.
Fig. 60:
The GWS of a FEM - fatigue analysis
Initialization for FEM - local time series

Each load case is combined with a load history. For the combinations, the ordering in the load history selection and the FEM
load case selection is crucial. Be sure that you combine the load
cases with the matching load histories. For each node of the
elements, the output is a couple of time series. Therefore, you
should choose a small element set, to perform the analysis.
Fig. 61:
The GWS of FEM - local time series
F-160
The Geometry Work Sheet

The window "Geometry Work Sheet" lists the task number or
name for Non-FEM and element set for FEM calculations, material, parameter set, channel, channel offset and factor in table form for the current fatigue analysis.
Various editing icons appear at the top of the window, below
the menu bar. The menu Navigate or the horizontal and vertical scroll bars at the right and bottom of the screen may be
used to see the contents of the table. The window can also be
resized to show more of the table at one time. Items in the
worksheet can be selected by highlighting them with the mouse
button, or by using the Select menu. In the "Geometry Work
Sheet", items such as the offset and factor can be modified on a
cell (or group) basis, by selecting the cell and modifying items
in the window "Geometry Cell".
The keyboard accelerators and the arrow keys can be used instead of the mouse or icons to edit the cells.
See the paragraph Window "Geometry Work Sheet" for a detailed description of the menu items.
The Geometry Work Sheet table

The Geometry Work Sheet is organized as a table connecting
material and solution parameters to load histories and load
cases. Each line represents one task, defining one fatigue
analysis leading to one result. The Geometry Work Sheet defines the whole job that is processed as one piece and may contain as many tasks as necessary.
Initially, tasks are named by unique numbers, but it is a good
idea to change these names as they are used to identify the results. Task names may be any valid directory name. The Geometry Cell window has to be used for making modifications.
In the non FEM approach the task names build up the first
column in the Geometry Work Sheet. In case of FEM approach
the first column refers to the element sets. In the second column, the S-N curve and the material name for the individual
tasks are displayed. The third column contains the solution parameter. The entries of these columns can be changed using
Common Operations
F-161
the window "Geometry Cell" as described in the paragraph Use

the Window "Geometry Cell" for Changing Entries.
The first row represents besides the description of the first
three columns the loading histories. Starting in the 4th column, the load histories are listed. Three lines are displayed for
each load history. The first gives the file name, the second the
channel name ,and the third gives the channel calibration,
where O:xxx defines the offset and F:xxx gives a multiplication
factor.
The c values connect the tasks to the load histories. In the Non
e~
e~
FEM case you can give c as the fraction of and L . When an
e~
FEM analysis is done for each node, is read from the result
e~
file and only L for the matching load case needs to be given.
Hence in the FEM case the individual load case is printed in
the cell.
e~
Remark: c is inversely proportional to L .
The clipboard
To improve user interaction there are various possibilities to
select, change, copy, cut and paste parts in the Geometry Work
Sheet table. The default mode is to select one entry in the Geometry Work Sheet after the other and change it individually.
But there are various situations where several entries should
be changed in the same way. By using the multi selection facilities of the Geometry Work Sheet this task can be fulfilled
easily. The various possibilities of selection can be chosen from
the menu Select or by using the corresponding icon in the
toolbar. The selection modes are:
z
z
z
z
z
Single cell selection

Row selection
Column selection
Diagonal selection
Rectangular region selection
F-162
z Individual multiple cell selection: Select a set of individual

cells by choosing them in arbitrary order. The selection process in this mode switches between select and deselect.
z Cancel current selection
Printing the Geometry Work Sheet

The button Print lets you print the Geometry Work Sheet. The
window "Print" appears where you select a printer device and
start printing.
The printout gives detailed information on the Job, on the load
histories (including calibration), the material (resp. SN curves),
method and solution parameters used (including all parameter
values), the element sets and the load influence factors of the
individual tasks.
The graphical printouts in the results indicate to each plotted
curve the job and task name leading to the printed result.
Hence the combination of Geometry Work Sheet printouts and
result graphic printouts give all necessary information for
documenting an analysis.
Example print:
In the following the printout of a Geometry Work Sheet for
a local time series analysis is listed. The input data are:
three load history channels
the stress-life curve Sample Steel from the database Default
the solution parameter Default from the database
Default
the element set HS_01_Elem_3016.
Common Operations
F-163
************************************************
Stress-life Approach FEM local time series Geometry Work Sheet
************************************************
Job Name: default-lts
User: faluser
Date: 18. March 2002
Time: 14:54:21
Load Histories Information
==========================
____________________________________________________
ID
: C_001
File
: C:\falancs\LoadHistories\rpf2.asc
Channel
: K_1
Calibration
: O: 0
F: 1
load
time series
____________________________________________________
ID
: C_002
File
: C:\falancs\LoadHistoriesrpf2.asc
Channel
: K_2
Calibration
: O: 0
F: 1
load
time series
____________________________________________________
ID
: C_003
File
: C:\falancs\LoadHistories\rpf2.asc
Channel
: K_3
Calibration
: O: 0
F: 1
load
time series
____________________________________________________
Stress-life Curve: Sample Steel
==================
Database
: Default
Comment
Tensile Strength
Compressive Strength
Physical Unit
R-ratio
:
:
:
:
450
1250
MPa
-1
SN Curve Type
S1
SE
k1
k2
N0
N1
NE
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
SN Curve
80
80
5
5
177.58
1E+6
1E+6
F-164
Dang Van Type
: Dang Van
alpha
Shear (tau)
: -1.5
: 80
Solution parameter: Default

===================
Database
: Default
Comment
Mean Stress Correction
Damage Accumulation
: NS / None
: Miner's Rule (elementary)
Spot welds
Diameter of spot welds to be analyzed
: 5
Shift of nugget SN-curve against sheet
: 0.7
Calculate damage in the spot weld nugget too : Yes
General
Surface Correction
: 1
Size Correction
: 1
Limit Damage Sum
: 1
FEM/LTS: Local Stress State : pseudo stress: crit.
plane, open. mode (I)
Different Channel Lengths: Truncate
Design Point
Unknown Variable
Probability of Failure
Life
Load Level
Tolerance
:
:
:
:
:
Computed Points
Axis
Type
Tolerance
: Load Level
: Automatic
: 0.1
General
------Data set name
Database name
Compute TSDs exact
(include residual influence
between events
Fatigue Sensitive Editing
Life
50 %
1000 Blocks
1
0.05
: Default
: Poptext
: 100
: No
: No
Common Operations
NP FEM
-----Number of critical planes
Maximum number of projection
directions
Tolerance angle
Maximum norm quotient
Elimination safety factor
Use absolute elimination
threshold
Absolute elimination threshold
Use strain-life also for
elimination runs
FEM Results
----------Result 1
Use logarithmic scale for
Result 1
Result 2
F-165
: 18
:
:
:
:
250
10
100000
100
: No
: 0.001
: Yes
: Miner sum
: Yes
: Design Life Factor
(N_Design/N)
Result 3
: Load Design Factor
(Sig/SigDesign)
Result 4
: RF Norm
Value to indicate infinite life : -30
Factor on 'Limit Damage Sum'
to indicate static failure
: 100
RP-Filter
--------Filter width for filter runs
: 0.7
: 0.3
Hot Spots
--------Calculate hot spots
Minimum damage (log)
Threshold (log)
Maximum number
Minimum size
Determination of size effects
LTS
--Generate stress time series
Generate strain time series
Projection angle
:
:
:
:
:
:
No
-30
1.2
20
1
none
:
:
:
:
Yes
No
No
0
Generate time series for

forces and moments (spot weld) : No
default-lts
F-166
Element/Node Set: HS_01_Elem_3016

-----------------------------------------------Material : Sample Steel
Solution Parameters : Default
-----------------------------------------------ID: C_001
K_1
Result File: C:\falancs\FEResultFiles\knuckle.op2
Load Case: KNUCKLE / LONGITUDINAL / SUBCASE 1
Le: 1.00000
ID: C_002
K_2
Load Case: KNUCKLE / LATERAL / SUBCASE 2
Le: 1.00000
ID: C_003
K_3
Load Case: KNUCKLE / VERTICAL / SUBCASE 3
Le: 1.00000
Common Operations
F-167
Some useful techniques for the work with the

Geometry Work Sheet
This section is intended to give some hints on what to do to
quickly edit the Geometry Work Sheet.
Let initialization do the work

Careful selection of database entries load histories and load
cases should lead to a good basis for your analysis. Keep in
mind that the load histories and FEM load cases are matched
in the order of their selection.
Use Geometry Work Sheets again

Save the Geometry Work Sheet that represents often used
crack initiation sites and materials. After loading them again,
just change load histories using the Geometry Cell window.
Use Edit direction

For just entering Task names, set Edit direction to vertical to
enter the names without navigation in the Geometry Work
Sheet.
Use Block operations

The select block option can be used for copying the c values for
given crack initiation sites, but also for deleting several rows or
columns. To delete multiple columns, first select the channel
cell of the first column and then c value in the last row of the
last column to be deleted. Choosing the cut operation then deletes all the columns in between. To delete multiple rows, the
operation is a little trickier since one cant select several task
cells. Hence the first cell to be selected has to be the material
(S-N curve) cell of the first row to be deleted. The final cell is
the c-value cell in the last column of the last row to be deleted.
F-168
Use diagonal operations

Since the diagonal represents the c-values for single channel
operations, selecting the diagonal can help to simultaneously
change all the c-values.
Use row selection for overall calibration

You can select the first row to simultaneously calibrate all
channels. Select row selection and select one of the channel
fields. This feature is especially helpful if you want to perform
a strain-life approach analysis based on measured strains. By
selection the first row and the calibration window, you can set
the load history type for all channels to elastic-plastic strain in
one step.
Use multi selection operations

Multi selection may be useful to edit several entries of one type
at the same time. For example one can calibrate multiple load
histories at the same time if you selected a set of load histories
before bringing up the calibration window and applying the
changes in calibration. Especially if you change the load history type in the strain life approach, you should select all the
loading histories before changing this item since load histories
having different load history types can not be used in the same
task.
Use the Window "Geometry Cell" for Changing

Entries
When selecting entries in the table field of the window "Geometry Work Sheet" the corresponding fields in the window
"Geometry Cell" are filled accordingly. The number of filled
fields depends on the selection.
Common Operations
Fig. 62:
F-169
The window "Geometry Cell" in the FEM approach
You may change the entries of available fields and press Apply
to accept the changes for the selected entries in the window
"Geometry Work Sheet".
F-170
Monitoring Analysis Progress with

Computation Status
The window "Computation Status" keeps the user informed on
how far the analysis is from being finished. Especially for long
analysis runs like a large nonproportional FEM analysis, this
can help to estimate the necessary time to complete the analysis. You can also stop analysis runs if you discover errors in the
input. The status box also discovers if started analysis runs
were stopped from the operating system level.
Overview
Fig. 63:
The window "Computation status"
The window "Computation Status" is divided into a left and a

right list box. The string in the left list box Process is composed of the type of analysis and the job name, e.g. Job "tensor
205" : stress-life approach, if the job tensor 205 is run in the
stress-life approach. In the right list box State the actual state
of this particular job is listed. The possible states for the different approaches are listed in the appropriate section below.
If the window is filled with too many jobs, apply the button
Clean up to remove all finished jobs from the list. By pressing
OK the window disappears. You can always redisplay the window by selecting the menu item ToolsComputation Status.
To stop a running process, select it in the list boxes and press
Stop. After some time the process will stop and the state
Stopped will be written in the right list box.
Common Operations
F-171
Because different jobs are started as individual processes, one

can have several jobs running at a time.
You get information on all jobs listed in the window "Computation status" by pressing Info:
Fig. 64:
Information on jobs
An Information window appears displaying for each job

the job name
the approach it was started in
starting time of the job
all error messages and warnings that occurred during
the job
ending state.
You may save this information by pressing Save as ... and

specifying a save file (*.log) in the appearing file selection
window.
F-172
Job State
Jobs that have been finished can have the following states:
finished
The job finished correctly without errors.
Stopped
The job was aborted.
Stopped without message
The job was canceled or killed from outside (e.g., from operating system level).
finished with error
An error occurred during the calculation. Please check your
input data.
non FEM jobs

For these jobs each task in the Geometry Work Sheet is run
consecutively. While running, the task and its state are given
in the right list box. Task states are:
Initializing
Reading, calibrating, and superposing the loading histories
participating in this task. For long load histories especially
in ASCII-format, this may take some time.
Design Point
The fatigue analysis for the design point is done.
Computation Point n/m
The fatigue analysis for the n-th out of m computation
points is running.
Common Operations
F-173
Proportional FEM-analysis
For proportional FEM-analysis two steps are necessary: First
two tasks in a non FEM analysis have to be done. Here the
same states as in the section above are displayed. The damage
for each node is calculated in the second step where also the
results are written. The states are
Reading load case n
The n-th load case is read from the result file.
x% finished
The damage calculation finished x% of the complete analysis.
Writing results
The result file is written.
Non-proportional FEM-analysis
The non proportional FEM-analysis is subdivided in several
steps:
FEM/NP controller
This job controls the whole process. Hence it is running during
the complete analysis. States are
in progress
The controller is running.
finished
The complete job has finished.
FEM/NP surface detection

Since the damage process starts from the surface of a specimen, only the surface has to be analyzed. The surface elements
are detected in this step. States are
F-174
Parsing input
% finished
The surface detection process has finished x% of all possible
directions.
finished (time)
The surface detection has finished at the given time.
FEM/NP rainflow projection

This part detects the critical directions for the RP filtering process. If there is no RP filtering because the original load history
is already short, or there are only a few elements in the analysis, this step is omitted. See the description of the corresponding entries in the configuration file falancs.ini in Part 5
Reference General Settings. Possible states are:
Parsing input
The folder with the problem specification is read.
Reading load case n
The n-th load case is read from the result file.
Selecting elements from task <task>
The elements to the element set <task> are selected from
the results.
% finished
The rainflow projection process has finished x% of all possible directions.
Writing results
The result folder is written.
finished (time)
The rainflow projection has finished at the given time.
Common Operations
F-175
FEM/NP rainflow filtering #n

The n-th rainflow filter run. The number of runs is specified in
the configuration file method parameters. States are
Initializing
Filtering load histories
The n-th filter run is running.
finished (l = <length>, d=<relative residual damage>% ,
f=<filter width><time>)
The length of the load histories after this filter run is
<length>. For the direction in which the largest reduction in
damage occurred, the damage is still <relative residual
damage>% of the original damage the filter width was <filter width> and the filter run ended at <time>.
FEM/NP Damage calculation n/m

Depending on the problem size and the maximum number of
elements per task (see the corresponding section in the description of the configuration file falancs.ini), the problem is subdivided in m tasks. For the n-th out of these m, the damage is
calculated. These tasks can be calculated in parallel even on
different machines. The states are
Reading load case n
The n-th load case is read from the result file
Run i/j x% finished
Here j corresponds to the number of filter runs. The damage
calculation of the analysis corresponding to the i-th block of
nodes is finished up to x%. The splitting into several blocks
is done automatically due to the memory limits.
finished (time)
The damage calculation n/m has finished at the given time.
F-176
FEM/NP Write FEM damage

Collects the results from the different tasks and writes them to
the result file. The writing is started by the controller when all
the damage calculations are finished. The states are:
Parsing input
The folder with the problem specification is read.
Selecting elements from task <task>
The elements to the element set <task> are selected from
the damage results.
Writing results
The result file is written.
finished (time)
The writing has finished at the given time.
History reduction
Shortens the time series according to the damage of the individual parts. States are:
in progress
History reduction is running.
finished
History reduction has finished.
External Tools
The tools accessible from the menu Tools are started independently from the LMS FALANCS main process. There is no
job control available for these tools. The computation status
box only indicates that the job was started. There is no control
whether the tools finish correctly. In the process list box the
name of the tool is listed.
started independently
The external tool has been started.
Common Operations
F-177
Printing Datasheets or Graphs

Datasheets and graphs can be printed by selecting the button
Print in the appropriate window.
When this is done, the window "Print" will appear where you
select the print device and set some print options. Depending
on your computer's operating system the design of the window
differs.
Window "Print" in Microsoft Windows

In the window "Print" you specify the parameters of a printout:
z
z
z
z
name of the printer

specific properties of the chosen printer
number of copies to be printed
name of a file used as a buffer for the printout, if you want
to print it later.
The window appears after selecting the button Print in a window.
Fig. 65:
The window "Print" in Microsoft Windows
The window contains the sections Printer, Page range and

Copies.
F-178
Section: Printer
Here you define the output device and its properties.
Name
Name of the printer used as output device. The arrow button opens a list of all defined printers from where you may
select another printer.
Properties
The window "Printer properties" appears where you specify
the properties of the selected printer. The layout of this
window and the available parameters depend on the selected printer.
Remark: All printouts of graphics in LMS FALANCS should be done in
landscape format because the layout of the printouts is done in this format.
Status
The current status of the printer is displayed.
Type
The short description of the printer as defined in your computer system.
Where
The location of the printer as defined in your computer system.
Comment
The comment for the printer as defined in your computer
system.
Monochrome
If this check box is activated the printout will be monochrome.
Remark: This check box is not always visible.
Common Operations
F-179
Background
If this checkbox is activated the background of graphics will
be printed too.
This function is relevant for plotters which naturally have
problems with filled areas.
Remark: This check box is not always visible.
Print to file
Activate this check box to store the printout as a file. You
may print it later.
Section: Page range

The settings in this section are not to be changed. The printout
will contain the complete graphic and information.
Section: Copies
Here you cause the printing of several copies.
Number of copies
Enter the number of copies to be printed.
Collate
If this check box is activated the copies will be sorted.
Buttons
OK
If the check box Print to file is not active: The printout is
sent to the selected printer.
If the check box Print to file is active: A file selection
window appears where you define a file. The printout is
stored in this file. You may print it later. The file selection window works as described in the paragraph Single
file selection windows in LMS FALANCS of this manual.
Cancel
The window is closed. Nothing will be printed.
F-180
Window "Print" in UNIX

This window is displayed when a Print button has been selected in Unix operation system. The desired printer, the paper
orientation and number of copies can be specified. An option to
save the print out as file can also be chosen.
Fig. 66:
Window "Print"
The window contains the following elements:
Search
Printer
The currently selected printer is displayed in the Printer
display field.
Other printers may be chosen in the window "List of Printers" by clicking on the Search button on the right:
Fig. 67: Window "List of Printers"
Common Operations
F-181
The window shows the currently selected printer and a list

of all available printers as specified in the LMS TecWare
initialization file tecware.ini.
Selecting a printer in the list and pressing As Default
Printer specifies the marked printer as new default
printer and updates the field Default Printer accordingly.
Marking a printer in the list and pressing OK accepts
the selected printer as current printer and closes the
window. The marked printer is entered to the field
Printer in the window "Print".
Pressing OK without marking a printer in the list accepts the default printer and closes the window. The default printer is entered to the field Printer in the window "Print".
Pressing Cancel closes the window without changing the
entry of the field Printer in the window "Print".
Note that to print a datasheet, the ASCII printer option
must be chosen. (The ASCII data will be converted to the
appropriate printer language after this point.)
Graphics files are interpreted immediately into the printer
language, so any supported graphics printer can be selected.
Orientation
Landscape or Portrait page orientation can be selected
with this radio button. A pictogram of the orientation is displayed next to the radio button choices.
Remark: All printouts of graphics in LMS FALANCS should be done in
landscape format because the layout of the printouts is done in this format.
Copies
The number of copies of the specified page can be changed
in the Copies input field. Any positive integer in the range
[1, 999] can be entered.
F-182
Save Print File

Selecting this check box brings up another print window,
where the name of the print file can be specified by typing
in a print file name or by calling up a file selection window.
This file selection window works as described in the paragraph Single file selection windows in LMS FALANCS of
this manual. Selecting the OK or Cancel buttons will accept or reject and close each respective window.
Print
Selecting this button will print the graphic to the specified
printer or file.
Cancel
Selecting this button will cancel the operation and close the
window.
Management of Non-FEM Results
F-183

LMS FALANCS offers a comfortable management of Non-FEM
results both in the stress-life approach and in the strain-life
approach.
You may load and save Non-FEM result folders, remove them
from the result management, export the list of displayed results into the csv- or ASCII format, display graphically up to
four task results and get information on them and perform the
History Reduction for some task results.
The result management is done from the window "result selection" or from the window "history reduction". The window titles
are expanded by the used approach (e.g. "Strain-life Approach - history reduction"). The design of these windows is identical,
but the variety of listed results differs:
z The window "result selection" lists all results from analyses
performed during the current session in either the stresslife or the strain-lifer approach and loaded results of former
sessions.
It is opened by selecting the menu item Stress-life ApproachNon FEM: Results... or Strain-life Approach
Non FEM: Results... in the LMS FALANCS main window
"LMS FALANCS".
z The window "history reduction" lists only a subset of the results available in the window "result selection": results
based on method parameters for that the parameter Fatigue Sensitive Editing is set.
It is opened by selecting the menu item Stress-life ApproachNon FEM: History reduction... or Strain-life
ApproachNon FEM: History reduction... in the LMS
FALANCS main window "LMS FALANCS".
F-184
Fig. 68:
Management of Non-FEM results
If a Non-FEM analysis is finished successfully and a result

management window is already opened the created result is
added automatically to the result list (remember: it will be
added to the list in the window "history reduction" only if the
FSE parameter is set for the used method parameter set).
Fig. 69:
list of results
F-185
For each result its name and creation date are entered. Below
this entry the tasks of the result are listed. For each task the
task number (or name if defined) and the number of blocks are
entered. The short cuts *MIN* and *MAX* denote the tasks
with the minimum respectively maximum number of blocks.
Multiple marking is possible (e.g. infinite number of blocks in
several tasks will cause several *MAX* marks).
Down
Up
The tasks contained in the lower list box are supposed for
viewing them (up to four tasks simultaneously) or performing
the history reduction on it (single task only). You add a task to
the lower list box by double clicking it in the result list or selecting it and pressing the Down icon. Double clicking an entry
in the lower list box or selecting it and pressing the Up icon
will remove it from the list.
The following paragraphs describe in detail how to
z load formerly saved Non-FEM result folders
(paragraph Loading Non-FEM Results)
z save complete Non-FEM result folders
(paragraph Saving Non-FEM Results)
z remove complete Non-FEM result folders from the result
management
(paragraph Removing Non-FEM Results from the Result
Management)
z export the displayed list in the csv- or ASCII-format
(paragraph Exporting the List of Non-FEM Results)
Information on viewing Non-FEM results and performing the
History Reduction are given in the chapters
z Viewing Non-FEM Results:
how to view up to four Non-FEM result tasks simultaneously from the window "result selection"
and
z History Reduction:
how to perform history reduction on single tasks from the
window "history reduction
F-186
Loading Non-FEM Results

Loading results means loading a result folder containing all
task results of an Non-FEM analysis. Loading a single task result is not possible from the result management.
Remark: If you want to load a single task result of an Non-FEM analysis you
have to redo this analysis with the desired task only. I.e., reopen the Geometry Work Sheet of the analysis, cut off all tasks except for the desired task,
and perform the analysis. The result will be listed in the window "result selection". If the window is already opened, the result is automatically added to the
list.
How to load Non-FEM results

You load a result by
1. pressing Load
The directory selection window "Load results" appear.
2. selecting the directory that contains the result in the field
Search in
3. selecting the result folder in the list field
4. pressing Open
The result is added to the result list in the result management window.
F-187
Saving Non-FEM Results

Saving results means saving the results of all tasks of a performed analysis in a result folder.
Saving single task results of a result folder is not possible from
the result management.
Remark: If you want to save a single task result of an analysis you have to
redo this analysis with the desired task only. I.e., reopen the Geometry Work
Sheet of the analysis, cut off all tasks except for the desired task, perform the
analysis and save the result.
How to save Non-FEM results

You save a result folder by
1. pressing Save
The file selection window "Save results" appear.
2. selecting the save directory in the field Search in
3. entering a name in the field Folder or selecting an existing
result folder in the list field
4. pressing OK
The result folder is saved in the specified directory with the
given name. If a folder with this name already exists in the
save directory a question window appears where you may
confirm overwriting it.
F-188
Removing Non-FEM Results from the Result

Management
Removing results from the result management means deleting
the corresponding entries in the displayed list. The result folders are not physically deleted. You may load them again at any
time.
How to remove Non-FEM results from the result management
You remove a result from the result management by
1. selecting the result entry in the list
2. pressing Remove
F-189
Exporting the List of Non-FEM Results

Exporting the list of results means creating a list of all tasks
and saving it in a csv-file or ASCII-file. The new list contains
for each task the following information:
z name of the result folder the task is contained in
z name of the task
z calculated life time measured in blocks
The export is started by selecting one of the buttons Export(csv)... or Export(ASCII)... in the result management
windows. A file selection window "Export(csv)..." resp. "Export(ASCII)..." appears where you specify the name of the export file and select the directory it is to be stored in.
Fig. 70:
The window "Export(csv)..."
The field File type is preset with the entry CSV(*.csv) resp.
ASCII(*.txt) according to the chosen export format.
When pressing OK the created file is saved in the specified directory.
F-190
Example: Export the list of Non-FEM results

A list of results is exported into a csv-file and an ASCII-file.
The created files are opened with Microsoft Excel respectively
a text editor.
The original list:
Fig. 71:
The list of results in a result management window
The csv-file opened with Microsoft Excel:
Fig. 72:
The list of results exported into a csv-file (Excel)
The ASCII-file opened with a text editor:

BEGIN
CHANNELNAME
COLUMNTYPE
COLUMNWIDTH
= ['JobName','TaskName','Life']
= ['CH','CH','R4']
= [32,32,19]
COLUMNOFFSET = [0,1,1]
END
nonFEM-test-5-notset
nonFEM-test-1
nonFEM-test-1
nonFEM-test-1
nonFEM-test-1
nonFEM-test-2
nonFEM-test-2
nonFEM-test-2
1
12
13
1
2
3
4
1
5
6
0
0
0
0
0
787752
1E+30
0
0
0
F-191
F-192
Management of FEM Results
F-193

After starting a FEM-based analysis the window "Computation
status" is opened.
Fig. 73:
The window "Computation status" for a FEM-based analysis
It shows information on the status of the single analysis steps.

The button Info opens the window "Info" where more detailed
information on the analysis steps (filter runs, surface detection, rainflow projection, RP filtering, damage calculation, ...),
the location and value of the element or node with the maximum damage and the written files is listed.
F-194
Fig. 74:
The window "Info" for a FEM-based analysis
If ANSYS result files are used, the analysis result overwrites

the selected result file (in the example above
plate_quasistatic_ansys.rst) with a dummy load case of
the used FEM tool. Otherwise a new result file is created
If the hot spot detection was activated two additional files are
written: an ASCII file (*.txt) and an element set file (*.tsi). The
names of these files are combined by the name of the written
result file, the suffix "_HS" and the corresponding file extensions (e.g. plate_quasistatic_ansys_HS.txt and
plate_quasistatic_ansys_HS.tsi).
The location (path) of the result files can be changed by using
the features of the configuration file falancs.ini. See the paragraph Parameter Section for LMS FALANCS Methods Re-
F-195
sult Specification in Part 5 Reference General Settings for

You may save the displayed list for job documentation by
pressing Save as... and defining the path and name of a Logfile (*.log) in the appearing file selection window.
See the paragraph Viewing FEM Results for detailed information on the available result displays.
F-196
Viewing Results
F-197
Viewing Results
You can display graphically the results of an analysis and get
some information on it.
The viewing of Non-FEM results and FEM results is handled
in different ways. See the following paragraphs
z Viewing Non-FEM Results and
z Viewing FEM Results
for the corresponding descriptions.
F-198
Viewing Non-FEM Results

In LMS FALANCS you may display graphically up to four
Non-FEM results simultaneously and get several additional information.
After leaving LMS FALANCS, open displays will stay open until they are closed explicitly by clicking OK on these windows.
You start viewing the result tasks from the result management
window "result selection" by adding up to four task entries to
the lower list box and pressing OK or Apply.
Fig. 75:
Selecting two Non-FEM result tasks for viewing
Viewing Results
F-199
The window "Results" appears. It displays three curves for

each selected task drawn in different line colors and markers
corresponding to the legend on the left of the task list.
Fig. 76:
Displaying a Non-FEM result task
The plot is a graph, with cycles on the horizontal axis. In the

Stress-life Approach you may scale the vertical axes logarithmic or linear, in the Strain-life Approach only logarithmic
scaling is possible. The plot contains the constant amplitude
life curve of the material plotted (only if the Stress-life Approach was selected), the results of the calculation using the
design points and life curve points and a cumulative load amplitude histogram.
F-200
You get additional plots and information by selecting the items

of the menu Action:
information on the design points
list of life points
diagram of weighted results
results in blocks
Rainflow matrix
damage matrix
diagram of the load-notch strain relation (in the strain-life
approach only)
z diagram of the P constant amplitude life curve (in the
strain-life approach only)
Some of these displays are performed only on the currently selected task (set by the radio buttons to the left of the task list).
The others refer to all displayed tasks. See the descriptions of
the single displays below for detailed information.
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
The menu Action is contained in all displays for skipping from

one display type to another.
In the UNIX - version of LMS FALANCS there are lens buttons near the bottom of the screen that can be used to zoom-in
or undo a zoom-in of the graph. Numerical values for any location on the plot can be determined by clicking the left mouse
button at the desired location. The coordinate values appear in
the display fields near the bottom of the window, labeled Cycles: and Amplitude:. Clicking and holding the middle mouse
button on a particular point and moving the cursor to a new
point (while keeping the middle mouse button depressed)
changes the Cycles: and Amplitude: to Difference: and Factor:. These give the difference and factor (ratio) from the number of cycles at the first point to the number of cycles at the
second point.
You may print the displayed plot. Pressing the button Print
will open the window "Print" for selecting the print device and
setting the print parameters. All printouts of graphics in LMS
FALANCS should be done in landscape format because the
layout of the printouts is done in this format.
Viewing Results
F-201
Constant Amplitude Life Curve

The constant amplitude life curve is the SN-curve defined in
the Stress-life Curves sub-menu of the Stress-life Approach. It
has units of cycles on the horizontal axis and the input unit on
the vertical axis. For the stress-life approach, the input unit
may or may not be units of stress, depending on how the constant amplitude life curve was defined. It is plotted to serve as
a reference line. It is only plotted if the Stress-life Approach
was chosen.
For each task in the display a constant amplitude life curve is
drawn. Identical curves are displayed overlayed with alternating line colors.
Fig. 77:
overlayed material property curves
F-202
Cumulative Load Amplitude Histogram

The cumulative load amplitude histogram is a histogram of
load amplitudes, that is, one-half the range of a cycle. It is plotted for one repeat of the load history.
The histogram has units of cycles on the horizontal axis and
load on the vertical axis. Units of load are obtained by applying
the offset and factor to the load history. The value of the c factor, which is specified in the "Geometry Cell" window, does not
affect the scaling of the vertical axis.
For each task in the display a cumulative load amplitude histogram is drawn.
Fig. 78:
cumulative load amplitude histograms
Viewing Results
F-203
Variable Amplitude Life Curve

The variable amplitude life curve is composed of the parameters Design Point and other Computed Points as specified
in the Solution Parameter set. It has units of cycles on the
horizontal axis and units of load on the vertical axis. These cycles are the accumulated number of cycles in all repeats of the
load sequence at that load amplitude level. The load amplitude
in this case refers to the maximum load amplitude in the load
sequence, that is, one-half the maximum cycle range in the
load sequence. Units of load are obtained by applying the offset
and factor to the load history. The value of the c factor, which
is specified in the "Geometry Cell" window, does not affect the
scaling of the vertical axis. It is, however, applied when performing the fatigue calculation.
Basically, the factor can be thought of as converting a time history with any units (directly proportional to elastic stress) into
a nominal stress history. The c factor can then be thought of as
a stress concentration factor. The units of the nominal stress
history are plotted on the vertical axis for the cumulative load
histogram and for the Life Curve.
For each task in the display a variable amplitude life curve is
drawn.
Fig. 79:
variable amplitude life curves
F-204
Design Point
The window "Design Point" lists the job, task, material data
set, load level, cycles, blocks and failure mode for each task.
The window appears after selecting the menu item Action
Design Point in one of the display windows "Results",
"Weighted Results" and "Results in blocks".
Fig. 80:
Design points of Non-FEM result tasks
The failure mode is

z static: the tensile or compressive strengths had been exceeded
z cyclic: a fatigue failure was calculated
z no entry: no failure was calculated
Pressing List of life points opens the window "Life points"
and selecting Help displays the online -help to the window.
The window is closed by pressing OK.
Viewing Results
F-205
List of Life Points

The window "Life points" appears after
z selecting the menu item ActionList of life points in one
of the display windows "Results", "Weighted Results" and
"Results in blocks"
or
z pressing the button List of life points in the window
"Design point".
Fig. 81:
List of life points
Depending on the chosen approach different information sets

are displayed in the upper area.
In the Stress-life Approach the information is:
the S-N curve used in the analysis
the name of the job the task was computed in
the name of the task
the used range of stress at crack initiation site
the used mean stress correction
F-206
the used damage accumulation rule

In the Strain-life Approach the information is:
the material data used in the analysis
the name of the job the task was computed in
the name of the task
the used range of stress at crack initiation site
the load-notch strain relation and the corresponding
limit load ratio (or the file name, if the load-notch strain
relation is File)
the damage parameter.
In the middle of the window, for each life point, the load amplitude, cycles, blocks and failure mode are listed. If the number
of blocks is listed as infinite, the component was calculated to
not fail. The last line displayed contains the data for the design
point.
If more than one task is selected for viewing, you use the buttons Previous and Next for switching to an other task.
Pressing Help displays the online -help to the window.
Viewing Results
F-207
Weighted Results
The window "Weighted Point" appears after selecting the menu
item ActionWeighted Results in one of the display windows "Results" and "Results in blocks".
Fig. 82:
Displaying weighted results of Non-FEM result tasks
The display is similar to the graphic in the window "Results",

except that the mean stress corrected amplitudes or damage
parameter are plotted on the vertical axis for the stress-life or
strain-approach, respectively. The variable amplitude, mean
stress corrected S-N curve or damage parameter life curve is
also plotted for the stress-life and strain-life approach, respectively
The buttons, fields and the menu Action have the same
meaning as on the "Results" window.
F-208
Blocks
The window "Results in blocks" appears after selecting the
menu item ActionDesign Point in one of the display windows "Results" and "Weighted Results".
Only the variable amplitude life curve is plotted, where the
horizontal axis refers to blocks (number of repeats of the loading sequence) instead of cycles.
Fig. 83:
Displaying the block version of Non-FEM result tasks
For each task in the display a curve is drawn.

The buttons, fields and the menu Action have the same
meaning as on the "Results" window.
Viewing Results
F-209
Rainflow-Matrix
The rainflow matrices, which you get as a part of the NONFEM results describe the local stresses:
z In the strain approach, they are counted starting at the
physical level 0 in order to track the correct orientation of
the hysteresis cycles (standing or hanging ones). This is
necessary here because it influences the calculation of the
corresponding strains. As a consequence, the residue of
these rainflow matrices always starts with the bin belonging the physical value 0. This is independent of the first
point of the input time histories. For test schedules, the
same is done for first segment only. The other segments
need not be started with 0.
z For the stress approach, the counting always starts at the
first point defined by the input time histories. This is not
necessarily the 0-stress level
The window "RAINFLOW-Matrix" appears after selecting the
menu item ActionRainflow-Matrix in one of the display
windows "Results", "Weighted Results" and "Results in blocks".
Fig. 84:
Displaying a Non-FEM result task as Rainflow-matrix
F-210
If the original load sequence was a time history, The graphic

represents the rainflow matrix of the time history. If the original load sequence was a rainflow matrix, the input rainflow
matrix is displayed.
If the legend is loaded, different colored points represent different numbers of counts, as given by the legend on the upper
right portion of the window.
The residue of the rainflow matrix count is displayed in a box
on the lower right portion of the window. The residual of the
rainflow matrix or simply residue is composed of load excursions that could not be matched to form complete closed loops.
You may
z change the layout of the display using the items in the
menu Options
z perform the LMS TecWare 1D cycle counting methods
Range Pair, Level Crossing acc. to DIN, Symmetric Level
Crossing and Peak Count III and display the results graphically by selecting the corresponding items in the menu Analyze
z zoom into the graphic using the lens buttons and move the
zoom box using the arrow buttons
z print the matrix via the menu item FilePrint
and
z close the window by selecting the menu item FileExit.
Remark: The part Visualization of Rainflow Matrices in the Volume II of
the LMS TecWare documentation describes the window "RAINFLOW-Matrix"
in detail. You may view this chapter in the online-help or in the pdf-version.
The online-help is opened by selecting the menu item HelpOverview in
the LMS FALANCS main window "LMS FALANCS" and choosing the corresponding entry. The pdf-version is located in the subdirectory manual of your
LMS TecWare installation directory and is named
tecware_volume_2_en.pdf.
Viewing Results
F-211
Damage matrix
A damage matrix is displayed for the selected task.
Fig. 85:
Displaying the damage matrix of a Non-FEM result task
Each location in the matrix contains the relative damage of the

cycles of this location. The sum of all entries is normalized to 1.
If the damage for an element is less than 10E-4 then no damage is displayed.
The lens buttons, arrow keys and the menus File and Options
work in the same manner as in the "Rainflow Matrix" window.
There is no menu Analyze for damage matrices. If you are interested in analyzing the damage matrix you have to use the
LMS TecWare tool RainEdit.
The window "Damage Matrix" appears after selecting the
menu item ActionDamagematrix in one of the display
windows "Results", "Weighted Results" and "Results in blocks".
F-212
Load-notch Strain Relation

This plot is only available when using the Strain-life Approach.
It appears after selecting the menu item ActionLoad-notch
strain Relation... in one of the display windows "Results",
"Weighted Results" and "Results in blocks".
~
For each task a plot of the stress on the vertical axis and
strain in percent on the horizontal axis is drawn.
e
Fig. 86:
Displaying the load-notch strain relations of Non-FEM result

tasks
The legend gives for each curve the corresponding material parameter name, the load notch approximation and the limit load
ratio. If a load notch curve is given by a file the name of the file
is displayed in the legend.
The buttons and fields in this window have the same meaning
as on the "Results" window.
The load-notch strain relation is calculated frrom the RambergOsgood relation and the load notch approximation approach.
Viewing Results
F-213
P Constant Amplitude Life Curve

This plot is only available when using the Strain-life Approach.
It appears after selecting the menu item ActionDamage
parameter life curve in one of the display windows "Results",
"Weighted Results" and "Results in blocks"..
Fig. 87:
Displaying the P constant amplitude life curves of Non-FEM

result tasks
This is a log-log plot of the damage parameter specified in the

Strain life parameter set versus cycles for the material specified in the analysis, generated for constant amplitude loading.
Note that it is that parameter value that is plotted on the vertical axis and not the load level.
The legend gives for each curve the corresponding material parameter name and the damage parameter name.
F-214
Viewing FEM Results

This chapter intends to explain the different result displays for
a FEM analysis.
In the panel FEM Results of the method parameters you
specify four results that are written as
z Result 1
z Result 2
z Result 3
and
z Result 4
to a dummy load case of the used FEM tool. For information on
your special tool see the corresponding chapter in Part 6
Reference - Interfaces to Finite Element Tools of this manual.
You can visualize these results by selecting the correct stress
component in your FE postprocessor.
Remark: Not all of the plots are available for all types of elements.
The following result displays are available:

z damage plot
z relative damage plot
z stress and safety plots
z hot spots
and
z some others.
See the corresponding paragraphs in the following.
Viewing Results
F-215
Damage plots
Several damage plots are available:
Computed Damage
If you choose to display the computed damage (selected by
Result 1 = Miner sum) the displayed value is by default
the logarithm to the base 10 of the Miner sum.
, If the limit damage sum in the used solution parameter
set is set to 1.0, the Miner sum corresponds to
1.0/ number of repetitions to failure.
, If you choose another limit damage sum the Miner sum
corresponds to
limit damage sum / number of repetitions to
failure.
Remark: Since failure is assumed if the Miner Sum exceeds limit damage
sum this value is independent of limit damage sum (except residual effects).
Number of Repetitions
If you are interested in the number of repetitions itself select
Result 1 = Number of blocks.
1/Number of Repetitions
You can also select Result 1 = 1/number of blocks".
Use logarithmic scale
The entry Use logarithmic scale in the panel FEM Results of the method parameters defines whether the damage results (specified in Result 1) are displayed in logarithmic or linear scale:
If checked, the logarithm of the Miner Sum is displayed
such that contour plots with equidistant contour lines can
be used. This means a value in the plot of e.g. 3 means
that the Miner sum is 0.001 and for a limit damage sum of
1.0 the part holds for 1000 repetitions at this node.
F-216
Indicator of endurance limit

For nodes with stresses below the endurance limit, it is necessary to write a finite value to the result file. The value can
be specified by the entry Value to indicate endurance
limit in the panel FEM Results of the method parameters. The default value is set to 30.
Remark: This value is always interpreted for the default setting Miner
Sum and logarithmic scale. If you choose linear scale and Number of
30
blocks then a value of 30 will lead to the result 10
for nodes below
the endurance limit.
Indicator of static failure

For nodes which are loaded with tensile stress above the
tensile strength or a compressive stress above the compressive strength the number of blocks is set to
NumberOfBlocks = LimitDamageSum * factor
with the corresponding Factor on 'Limit Damage Sum'
to indicate static failure defined in the panel FEM Results of the method parameters. This factor is given in linear scale.
Viewing Results
F-217
Relative damage plots

Several relative damage plots are available:
Design Life Factor
If you set Result 2 = NDesign versus N the design life
factor is displayed. That is the ratio of the number of prescribed repetitions given in the Design Point section of the
solution parameters and the number of repetitions to failure.
The entry Use logarithmic scale in the panel FEM Results of the method parameters determines for NDesign
versus N whether the value is written in logarithmic or linear scale.
Load Design Factor
The setting of Result 3 = Load Design Factor
(Sig/SigDesign) displays the ratio of the corresponding
constant amplitude stress values (load design factor).
F-218
Stress and Safety Plots

Several stress and safety plots are available:
Maximum Stress Amplitude
If you set Result 3 = Max. absolute stress the maximum
absolute stress encountered during the loading is displayed.
It contains actual stresses.
For non-proportional strain calculations the actual
stresses are the pseudo elastic stresses transformed due
to the load notch stress/strain relation.
For stress calculations (proportional and nonproportional) the actual stresses are equal to the pseudo
elastic stresses.
For proportional strain calculations the maximum absolute stress is not calculated and can not be displayed.
Maximum Stress Amplitude
If you set Result 3 = Max. stress amplitude the maximum stress amplitude encountered during the loading is
displayed. It contains actual stresses.
For non-proportional strain calculations the actual
stresses are the pseudo elastic stresses transformed due
to the load notch stress/strain relation.
For stress calculations (proportional and nonproportional) the actual stresses are equal to the pseudo
elastic stresses.
For proportional strain calculations the maximum stress
amplitude is not calculated and can not be displayed.
Safety Factor
If you set Result 3 = Safety factor the factor, which can be
applied to the loads in order to reach the endurance limit
resp. the static limit is displayed.
The safety factor is calculated for proportional and nonproportional stress calculations and non-proportional strain
calculations (except the Jiang approch).
For proportional strain calculations and Jiang calculations
the safety factor is not calculated and can not be displayed.
Viewing Results
F-219
Hot Spots
If you are interested in the detected hot spots set Result 4 =
Hot spot number. The number of the hot spot to which an
element belongs to is displayed. If the element does not belong
to a hotspot the value is 0.
Remark: The hot spot calculation is performed only if the check box Calculate hot spots is activated in the panel Hot Spots of the method parameters.
Other Plots
Several displays are available:
Elimination Run Number
For a non-proportional FEM analysis with several filter
runs you can display the number of filter run, when the
nodes are eliminated. You can use these results to adjust
the Filter Width entries in the property sheet RP Filter of
the method parameters.
To get this display you have to set Result 2 = Elimination
run number in the panel FEM Results of the method parameters.
Rainflow Projector Norm
The setting Result 4 = RF Norm (Rainflow projector norm)
may be used to visualize the representative elements. Only
for those non zero results are achieved.
Task Number
The setting Result 4 = Task number displays for each
task of the result file its number.
F-220
LMS FALANCS Methods
F-221
LMS FALANCS Methods

Beside the Non-FEM and FEM Fatigue Analyses LMS FALANCS supports the methods
z Local Time Series (LTS)
z LTS Tensor Analysis
z Transient Analysis
and
z History Reduction.
F-222
Local Time Series (LTS)

The local results of the FEM analysis and the external loads
(only time series) can be written to new local time series using
the menu item FEM: Local time series (LTS) in the stress or
strain life approach.
The following lists describes the possible output:
z Stress-life Approach
principles min, max and angle
stress time series in x-,y- and xy- direction
z Strain-life Approach
principles min, max and angle
stress time series in x-, y- and xy- direction
strain time series in x-, y-, xy- and z- direction (pseudo
strains)
real stress time series in x-, y-, xy- direction (if Jiang is
selected)
strain time series in specified angle
z Dang Van
pressure and shear
z Spot welds
forces and moments
radial stresses.
It is important to check the number of elements, which is subject to the computation. For each stress location (node) of the
elements, the output is a couple of time series. Therefore, you
should choose a small element set, to perform the analysis.
The following restriction is given:
z The method does not accept rainflow matrices or TSDs as
input, only time series.
The resulting tensor files can be re-loaded in LMS FALANCS
using the LTS Tensor Analysis in the stress or strain life approach (see explanation below).
LMS FALANCS Methods
F-223
The writing of principle stresses can be configured in the falancs.ini file by setting the parameter LTS_Principles in
the section [Method Parameters].
Which of the possible output channels are written depends on
the corresponding settings in the method parameters.
F-224
LTS Tensor Analysis

In the LTS Tensor Analysis a triple of time series is merged to
a 2D-tensor analysis task. The input to this method usually is
the output of the method FEM: Local time series (LTS).
The first channel specifies the x-direction, the next one the ydirection and the last one the xy- direction. You can specify
more than three channels, resulting in more than one task.
Channel number 4 will represent the x-direction of the second
task etc. Of course, the number of channels has to be a multiple of 3.
The tensors will be used to calculate a certain number of critical planes (see the table NP-FEM in the window "Method Parameters"). A Non-FEM Fatigue Analysis will be performed on
the projected time series of all critical planes.
The following restrictions are given:
z Multiple of 3 time series as loads, no rainflow matrices, no
TSDs
z Exactly 3 time series in each row of the Geometry Work
Sheet with factor c 0 are required (this is the default initialization).
LMS FALANCS Methods
F-225
Transient Analysis
A transient damage analysis may be performed on FE data
from ANSYS, NASTRAN, ABAQUS and CATIA.
You simply have to select the FE-file and the load cases. No
explicit extraction of the stress histories from the FE-file is required. You just have to select the menu item Stress-life ApproachFEM: transient analysis respectively Strain-life
ApproachFEM: transient analysis. You then just proceed
as in case of an ordinary quasi-static FEM computation.
Remark: The computation is performed on shell elements only.
F-226
History Reduction
The purpose of the history reduction is to interactively edit the
load sequence by eliminating cycles that do not contribute
much to the total damage of the history. This function is available only in Non-FEM calculations and only if the Fatigue
Sensitive Editing option was chosen in the data sheet of the
used method parameter.
The history reduction is available both in the Stress-life Approach and in the Strain-life Approach. It is performed on single result tasks and is started from the window "history reduction".
A history reduction is done in five steps:
1. Selection of the result task.
2. Definition of the reduction measure.
3. Definition of the minimum resulting segment length.
This number of samples will be the minimum segment
length of the load sequence that will be left between edited
portions of the load sequence. This value could be adjusted
if, for example, maintaining a certain power spectral density
of the time history was needed.
4. Selection of the result directory.
5. Start of the method.
If the method was successfully performed, a new result folder
is created in the specified directory. It contains the reduced
time history, i.e. the result of the history reduction. The new
folder and its task are named as the original task and the
folder it is contained in.
How to perform a history reduction
You perform a history reduction by
1. selecting the item Non-FEM: History reduction in the
menu Stress-life Approach or Strain-life-Approach
2. loading a result file into the result list as described in the
paragraph Loading Non-FEM Results
LMS FALANCS Methods
F-227
3. selecting a single task in the result list and adding it to the

lower list box
Fig. 88: Pressing Down adds the selected task to the lower list box
4. pressing OK
The window "Damage selection" appears. The window "history reduction" is closed. Press Apply instead of OK to keep
it open.
Fig. 89: The window "Damage selection"
F-228
5. moving the slider on the right to define the damage reduction
Fig. 90: Defining the damage reduction
The entries in the two fields below the graph are changing
accordingly.
6. entering the desired resulting segment length in the corresponding field
7. entering the path and name of the save directory for the reduction result in the field result directory
Fig. 91: Defining the result directory
LMS FALANCS Methods
F-229
After pressing the Search button on the right the directory

selection window "Result directory selection" appears where
you can search for a directory.
8. pressing OK
The history reduction is started and its process is added to
the list of processes in the window "Computation status".
F-230
Data Sheets
F-231
Data Sheets
Data sheets in LMS FALANCS contain the parameters of a database element like material data, solution parameters,
method parameters and stress-life curves (SN-curves and Bastenaire curves, each with Dang Van data).
The data sheets are opened from the database selection windows and are used to
z view the parameters of a database element
z update an existing database element
and
z create a new database element.
Additionally you may print the data sheet.
Remark: See the paragraph Operations on Database Elements for further
information on these actions.
Depending on the database element type and the intended

purpose the data sheets are named as:
z "Define Stress-life Data Sheet", "Update Stress-life Data
Sheet", "View Stress-life Data Sheet"
z "Define Solution Parameter Set", "Update Solution Parameter Set", "View Solution Parameter Set"
z "Define Material Data Sheet", "Update Material Data
Sheet", "View Material Data Sheet"
and
z "Define Method parameter", "Update Method parameter",
"View Method parameter"
You may open one data sheet per database element type concurrently but not several data sheets of the same type. I.e., you
can view the parameters of a solution parameter set and define
a new stress-life curve but it is not possible to view the parameters of two material data sets at the same time.
F-232
A data sheet is closed if you press Ok or Cancel in the data

sheet itself or close the database selection window from where
the sheet was opened.
See the following chapters
z The Data Sheet for Stress-Life Curves and Dang Van Data
z The Data Sheet for Solution Parameters
z The Data Sheet for Material Data
and
z The Data Sheet for Method Parameters
for a detailed description of the different data sheets and the
single parameters.
The Data Sheet for Stress-Life Curves and Dang Van Data
F-233
The Data Sheet for Stress-Life

Curves and Dang Van Data
The according data set contains a curve, defining the relation
of stress amplitude and life (constant amplitude life curve) and
additionally, data needed to perform a safety factor analysis
according to Dang Van. See the part Appendix: Data Representations of Stress-Life Curves and Dang Van Data for detailed information on the relations between the different data
representations.
z Stress-life Curves
There are two types of curves which may be chosen
the ordinary SN curve type (Whler curves) (SN curve)
or
the Bastenaire curve type (Bastenaire).
The type of curve used in a specific data set is stored with
the set and displayed in the data sheet. Although the data
set contains parameters for both types of curves, only one of
them is activated.
z Dang Van Data
The Dang Van method needs a bounding curve in the p- plane spanned by the pressure p and the shear . Again
there are two types of Dang Van data:
the simple definition using only one point in the plane
and the slope of the curve (Dang Van) and
a more sophisticated definition for which an arbitrary
number of points in the plane may be defined (Dang
Van multiple points).
One of these data sets can be used in either an ordinary stress
life approach (including weldings) or in a safety factor approach (Dang Van). Depending on the type of curve and the
Dang Van type, only the corresponding data is used in the
computation.
F-234
Both types of curves (SN and Bastenaire) can be combined with

both types of Dang Van data. Thus the following 4 types of
data sets exist:
Curve data
Dang Van data
SN curve
SN curve
Bastenaire
Bastenaire
Simple
Multiple points
Simple
Multiple points
For Bastenaire and SN curves only the parameter values corresponding to the amplitude definition are stored and used in
the computation. The definition using maximum stresses is
supported only for the users convenience. The parameter values defined here are automatically converted to amplitude values taking the R-ratio into account. In case of SN curves the
slope format is used internally as well as in the database.
Since LMS FALANCS 2.11 an arbitrary number of databases
is allowed for each kind of data set. This feature should be used
to define a database for SN-curve data sets and another database for Dang Van data sets. The data sets from the
z SN-curve database
are used in the stress life approach only . The computation
program checks the type of stress-life curve (SN curve or
Bastenaire) and uses the corresponding data. The user can
always check, which part of the data set is valid by inspecting the curve type.
The Dang Van data are ignored.
z Dang Van database
are used in the safety factor approach only. The computation program checks the type of Dang Van data (simple or
multiple points) and uses the corresponding data. The user
can always check, which part of the data is valid by inspecting the Dang Van type.
The tensile strength, the compressive strength and the Rratio, which are common to the stress-life curves and the
Bastenaire curves, are not used.
F-235
Remark: The definition of the type of analysis to be performed (either ordinary stress life approach or safety factor approach) is not defined within the
data set described here, but in the entry FEM/LTS: Local Stress State of the
solution parameter set where the option Pseudo stress: Dang Van has to
be chosen to activate the safety factor approach.
The Data Sheet

The data sheet for Stress-life curves and Dang Van data is
saved with the Geometric Work Sheet. It appears in three versions depending on the intended purpose (define element, update element or view element). The data sheet is available in
the Stress-life approach only. The layout is always the same
but the edit status of the fields differs.
The window versions are:
z "Stress-life Approach - Define Stress-life Data Sheet"
The window is called via the menu item ActionDefine in
the database selection window "Selection of Stress-life Data
Sheets". All fields are editable for naming a new database
element, selecting the database it will be stored in and setting its parameters.
See the paragraph Creating new Database Entries for detailed information on defining new database elements.
z "Stress-life Approach - Update Stress-life Data Sheet"
The window is called via the menu item ActionUpdate
in the database selection window "Selection of Stress-life
Data Sheets". The element name and the database can not
be edited. All other parameters may be changed. The new
settings will be saved when pressing OK or Apply. The
original values are no longer available, after saving.
See the paragraph Updating existing database entries for
detailed information on updating database elements.
z "Stress-life Approach - View Stress-life Data Sheet"
The window is called via the button Data Sheet in the database selection window "Selection of Stress-life Data
Sheets". All fields are insensitive.
F-236
See the paragraph Viewing and Printing a Database Entry

for detailed information on viewing database elements.
Window "Define Stress-life Data Sheet"

This paragraph describes the data sheet for defining Stress-life
curves and Dang Van data.
Fig. 92:
The window "Define Stress-life Data Sheet"
The window contains the areas Element, General Data for

SN-curves and Curve Definition, the option menu View
Mode and some buttons. The layout of the area Curve Definition depends on the chosen combination of stress-life curve
type and Dang Van data type and from the setting in the option menu View Mode.
F-237
Element
The area Element contains general information on the data
set like its name and the types of the SN-curve and the Dang
Van data.
Stress-life Curve
To define a constant amplitude Stress-life (S-N) Curve,
the name of the data set must be entered into this field.
When viewing or updating a data set this field is not editable. The name must not be changed.
Database
When defining a new SN-curve data set or a Dang Van data
set you specify the database it is to be stored in in this option menu. Available entries are all databases defined for
SN-curves and Dang Van data. If you use an existing data
set as template the field is preset with the database this
data set is contained in. The database Default is chosen if
you use the LMS FALANCS default values as template.
When viewing or updating a data set this field is not editable. The database must not be changed.
Remark: For updating and defining a data set the selected database
must be editable! Otherwise, the buttons OK and Apply are insensitive.
Comment
This text is saved as comment to the material data. It is editable when updating or defining a material data.
The comment may contain up to 80 characters.
SN Curve Type
Specifies the type of stress-life curve. Available entries are
SN Curve and Bastenaire.
Dang Van Type
Specifies the type of Dang Van data. Available entries are
Dang Van
If the View Mode Dang Van is chosen, the area Curve
Definition contains
F-238
the edit fields Shear (tau) and alpha.

and
Dang Van multiple points
If the View Mode Dang Van multiple points is chosen, the area Curve Definition contains
the edit fields for Pressure and Shear (tau)
a List of Multiple Points in the pressure-shear
plane
and
the buttons for adding, modifying, deleting and sorting the list.
When changing the Dang Van Type the corresponding
data is converted automatically. If the type is changed
from Dang Van to Dang Van multiple points
then 2 points representing the same boundary curve are
calculated from the simple Dang Van definition.
from Dang Van multiple points to the simple definition Dang Van
only the two first points can be used to recalculate the
simple Dang Van parameters. If more than 2 points exist
a corresponding warning pops up.
If the Dang Van Type is changed while the View Mode
status is on one of the SN curve or Bastenaire curve options,
then the View Mode is automatically changed to show the
Dang Van data.
F-239
General Data for SN-Curves

In this area you specify the general parameters of a stress-life
curve according to the setting in the option menu SN Curve
Type.
Fig. 93:
The area General Data for SN-Curves in the window "Define Stress-life Data Sheet"
Tensile Strength
The material tensile strength is entered into this input
field. The values can range from (0, 10E+10]. If this value is
exceeded by the maximum value in the time history, a static
failure mode is reported. The display units of the Tensile
Strength are specified in the Physical Unit field.
The material compressive strength is entered into this field.
The values can range from (0, 10E+10]. If this value is exceeded by the minimum value in the time history, a static
failure mode is reported. The display units of the Compressive Strength are specified in the Physical Unit field.
Physical Unit
The option menu by the Physical Unit field allows the user
to select various units for the tensile and compressive
strength. It is this unit that is plotted on the vertical axis of
the S-N, or Load-Cycles, plot. The choices of units are MPa,
Pa, N and Nm.
F-240
Remark: The unit is used only for displaying the data! No internal conversion is performed based on the unit.
R-ratio
The R-ratio at which the stress-life material properties
were determined is entered into the R-ratio input field. The
R-ratio is the value of minimum load / maximum load for
the constant amplitude material properties test. A fully reversed (R = -1) S-N curve can be calculated if the R-ratio
for the defined material properties is known, in conjunction
with the Mean Stress Correction parameter given in the
Solution Parameters. The option menu next to the input
field lists some common values, including minus infinity.
The value for the R-ratio can be in the range [minus infinity, 1) and R>1.
View Mode
The available entries in the option menu View Mode depend on the chosen combination of stress-life curve type and
Dang Van data type.
SN Curve Type Dang Van Type View Mode
SN Curve
Bastenaire
Dang Van
Slope (for SN curve)

Point (for SN curve)
Basquin (Amplitude)
(for SN curve)
Basquin (Max. stress)
(for SN curve)
Dang Van (for Dang
Van data)
Dang Van
Bastenaire (ampl.)
(for Bastenaire curve)
Bastenaire (max.
stress) (for Bastenaire
curve)
Dang Van (for Dang
Van data)
F-241
SN Curve Type Dang Van Type View Mode
SN Curve
Bastenaire
Dang Van
multiple points
Slope (for SN curve)

Point (for SN curve)
Basquin (Amplitude)
(for SN curve)
(for SN curve)
Dang Van multiple
points
Dang Van
multiple points
Bastenaire (ampl.)
(for Bastenaire curve)
Bastenaire (max.
stress) (for Bastenaire
curve)
Dang Van multiple
points
The default view mode for SN curves is Slope and for Bastenaire curves it is Bastenaire (ampl.).
If the SN Curve Type is changed while the View Mode is
Dang Van or Dang Van multiple points, then the View
Mode is automatically changed because it is assumed, that
the user now wants to get the data corresponding to the new
curve type he has chosen
If Slope is chosen , key points and slopes on the log-log S-N
curve are used to define the SN-curve. If Point is chosen,
only key points are used to define the SN-curve. If the mode
is changed from Slope to Point (or vice-versa) after the
properties have been defined, the other set of parameters is
calculated.
F-242
Curve Definition
The definition of an ordinary SN curve can be done using one
of the 4 View Mode options for SN curves. It is up to the user
to choose the one he is most familiar with. Internally the data
is always converted to and represented and stored in the slope
format.
The definition of a Bastenaire curve can be done using one of
the 2 View Mode options for Bastenaire curves. It is up to the
user to choose the one he is most familiar with. The data is internally always converted to and represented and stored in the
amplitude format.
Remark: The different representations and their relations can be found in the
Appendix: Data Representations of Stress-Life Curves and Dang Van
Data.
The number of elements in the area Curve Definition depends on the settings in the option menus SN Curve Type,
Dang Van Type and View Mode.
The combination SN Curve Type SN curve + View Mode
Slope
ignores the Dang Van Type setting and fills the area with
the elements
S1
The load used, if necessary, to define a second point on a
two-sloped S-N curve. If the S-N curve can be adequately
described by one slope, then enter a value for S1 equal to
F-243
SE. The unit of S1 is set in the field Physical Unit and

the valid range is from [SE, Tensile Strength].
SE
The load value used to define the endurance limit of the
material in the constant amplitude material properties
test. The unit of SE is set by the field Physical Unit
and the valid range is from (0, Tensile Strength].
k1
In slope mode, k1 is the absolute value of the slope of the
line on the log-log S-N curve between the points (N0,
Tensile Strength) and (N1, S1) (or the point (NE, SE))
if only one slope is used to describe the S-N curve. This
means that for values (S,N) in this region it holds:
N1 S
=
N S1
k1
The slope must be in the range [0.5, 100].

k2
In slope mode, k2 is the absolute value of the slope of the
line on the log-log S-N curve between the points (N1, S1)
and (NE, SE). The slope must be greater than or equal to
k1. If only one slope is needed to describe the S-N curve,
enter the same values for S1 and SE and the value in the
k2 field will be ignored.
NE S
=
N
SE
k2
NE
The cycles value used to define the endurance limit of
the material in the constant amplitude material properties test. The units of NE are cycles and the valid range
is [1, 1e15].
F-244

Point
the elements
S1
The load used, if necessary, to define a second point on a
two-sloped S-N curve. If the S-N curve can be adequately
described by one slope, then enter a value for S1 equal to
SE. The unit of S1 is set in the field Physical Unit and
the valid range is from [SE, Tensile Strength].
SE
The load value used to define the endurance limit of the
material in the constant amplitude material properties
test. The unit of SE is set by the field Physical Unit
and the valid range is from (0, Tensile Strength].
N0
The value N0 defines the number of cycles at the first
corner point (N0, Tensile Strength).
N1
The cycles used, if necessary, to define a second point on
a two-sloped S-N curve. If the S-N curve can be adequately described by one slope (S1 = SE) the value in the
N1 field will be ignored. The units of N1 are cycles and
the valid range is [N0, NE].
NE
The cycles value used to define the endurance limit of
the material in the constant amplitude material proper-
F-245
ties test. The units of NE are cycles and the valid range
is [1, 1e15].
Basquin (Amplitude)
the elements A1 (ampl), B1 (ampl), A2 (ampl),B2 (ampl)
and SE (ampl).
These fields correspond to the parameters A1 , B1 , A 2 , B2

and S E used in the chapter Data Representation of SN
curves (Woehler type) of the Appendix: Data Representations of Stress-Life Curves and Dang Van Data.
the elements A1 (max), B1 (max), A2 (max),B2 (max)
and SE (max).
F-246
These fields correspond to the parameters A1 , B1 , A 2 , B 2

and S E used in the chapter Data Representation of SN
curves (Woehler type) of the Appendix: Data Representations of Stress-Life Curves and Dang Van Data.
The combination SN Curve Type Bastenaire + View
Mode Bastenaire (ampl.)
the elements A (ampl), B (ampl), C (ampl) and SE
(ampl).
These fields correspond to the parameters A , B , C and

S E used in the chapter Data Representation of Stress-Life
Bastenaire Curves of the Appendix: Data Representations
of Stress-Life Curves and Dang Van Data.
The combination SN Curve Type Bastenaire + View
Mode Bastenaire (max. stress)
the elements A (max), B (max), C (max) and SE (max).
F-247
These fields correspond to the parameters A, B, C and S E

used in the chapter Data Representation of Stress-Life
Bastenaire Curves of the Appendix: Data Representations
of Stress-Life Curves and Dang Van Data.
The combination Dang Van Type Dang Van Data + View
Mode Dang Van
ignores the SN Curve Type setting and fills the area with
the elements Shear (tau) and alpha.
These fields correspond to the parameters 0 and used in

the chapter Data Representation of Dang Van Data of the
Appendix: Data Representations of Stress-Life Curves and
Dang Van Data.
The combination Dang Van Type Dang Van Data multiple points + View Mode Dang Van multiple points
ignores the SN Curve Type setting and fills the area with
the elements
F-248
Add
Adds the point defined in the edit fields Pressure and
Shear (tau) to the List of Multiple Points.
Modify
Modifies the selected point in the List of Multiple
Points according to the edit fields Pressure and Shear
(tau).
Delete
Deletes the selected point from the List of Multiple
Points.
Sort
Sorts the entries by ascending angles in the p- -plane.
List of Multiple Points
All defined points are listed. The entries have the form
<pressure> ; <shear>
where <pressure> and <shear> are the pressure and
shear values of a point.
Selecting a point entry in the list enters the corresponding values into the fields Pressure and Shear (tau).
Use the buttons Add, Modify, Delete and Sort and the
fields Pressure and Shear (tau) for editing the List of
Multiple Points.
Pressure / Shear (tau)
The values in these edit fields define a point in the p- plane. They correspond to the parameters p i and i used
in the chapter Data Representation of Dang Van Data of
the Appendix: Data Representations of Stress-Life
Curves and Dang Van Data.
F-249
Buttons
The data sheet contains the following buttons:
OK
When defining new stress-life data a new element is added
to the selected database. Its name and parameters are defined by the settings in the window. The data sheet is
closed.
When updating existing stress-life data the new settings are
stored and the data sheet is closed. The old parameter values are lost.
When viewing stress-life data the data sheet is closed.
Apply
As OK but without closing the data sheet.
Cancel
The data sheet is closed without creating a new database
element.
Print
The window "Print" appears from where you start the printout of the data sheet.
Help
The online help system is started displaying the according
chapter.
F-250
The Data Sheet for Solution Parameters
F-251
The Data Sheet for Solution

Parameters
The data sheet for solution parameters is saved with the Geometric Work Sheet. It appears in three versions depending on
the intended purpose (define element, update element or view
element). The layout is always the same but the edit status of
the fields differs.
The window versions exist in both the Stress-life Approach and
the Strain-life Approach:
z "Define Solution Parameter Set"
the database selection window "Selection of Solution Parameter Sets". All fields are editable for naming a new database element, selecting the database it will be stored in
and setting its parameters.
z "Update Solution Parameter Set"
in the database selection window "Selection of Solution Parameter Sets". The element name and the database can not
z "View Solution Parameter Set"
The window is called via the button Data Sheet in the database selection window "Selection of Solution Parameter
Sets". All fields are insensitive.
F-252
Window "Define Solution Parameter Set"

This paragraph describes the data sheet for defining solution
parameter sets.
Remark: Once the parameter set is defined and the OK button has been selected, any further changes to the solution parameters must be done using
the Update option. If you use the Apply button several times for saving interim states you have to confirm overwriting the last save in an appearing
warning.
The window title contains the selected approach. The window

layout depends on the selected approaches.
Fig. 94:
The window "Define Solution Parameter Set" in the Stress-life

Approach
The window contains the areas Element, Strain-life Approach (resp. Stress-life Approach and Spot welds), General, Design Point, Computed Points and FEM/LTS: Local Stress State and some buttons.
F-253
Element
In the area Element general database settings are defined.
Fig. 95:
The area Element in the window "Define Solution Parameter

Set"
Solution parameter
When defining a new solution parameter set you enter its
name at this field. If you use an existing solution parameter
set as template the field is preset with the name of this set.
The field is left blank if you use the LMS FALANCS default
values as template.
When viewing or updating a solution parameter set this
field is not editable. The name must not be changed.
Database
When defining a new solution parameter set you specify the
database it is to be stored in in this option menu. Available
entries are all databases defined for solution parameter
sets. If you use an existing solution parameter set as template the field is preset with the database this set is contained in. The database Default is chosen if you use the
LMS FALANCS default values as template.
When viewing or updating a solution parameter set this
field is not editable. The database must not be changed.
Remark: For updating and defining solution parameter sets the selected
database must be editable! Otherwise, the buttons OK and Apply are insensitive.
Comment
This text is saved as comment to the solution parameter set.
It is editable when updating or defining a solution parameter set.
F-254
The Load-notch Strain Curve calculation method, or the
File to use, can be specified in this area. The Limit-Load Ratio can be entered into the input field.
This area is visible only in the Strain-life Approach. In the
Stress-life Approach it is replaced by the areas Stress-life
Approach and Spot welds.
The area fields are editable when updating or defining a solution parameter set.
Fig. 96:
The area Strain-life Approach in the window "Define Solution Parameter Set"
Load-notch Strain Curve

Various choices are allowed for the relationship between the
applied load and the notch (local) strain. The methods are
described in the LMS FALANCS Theory Manual and are:
Neuber: Neubers rule
Seeger/Beste: Seeger-Beste formula
ESED: equivalent strain energy density
File: you specify a file that contains the load-notch
strain data in pairs of e~ and strain. The file name is entered at the input field File.
F-255
The information could come from, for example, strain

gage test measurements, finite element analysis, or an
approximate formula other than those listed above.
The default selection is Neuber.
Search
File
If the option File is selected in the option menu Loadnotch Strain Curve, you enter the name of the input file
at this field.
The Search button opens a file selection window where you
can browse for a Load-notch Strain Curve file.
Remark: If a Load notch strain curve is used for FEM based analysis, this
load notch strain relation has to give the relation between equivalent
stress and equivalent strain.
Limit load ratio

The limit load ratio (Kp) for plastic correction can be entered
here. The limit load ratio has to be greater than 1. The default value is 2.5.
Damage Parameter
Various choices are allowed for damage parameter. The
damage parameters are described in the LMS FALANCS
Theory Manual and are:
P_SWT original and P_SWT linear
for Smith-Watson-Topper equations with mean stress
correction
P_SWT Torsion and P_SWT Torsion lin.
these parameters for torsion do nott distinguish between
positive and negative mean stress
Remark: If torsion parameters are used, be sure that also the max
shear approach is used for FEM-analysis and that the parameter Material parameters were measured in ... tests in the material parameter set is set correctly.
P_Bergmann
F-256
LMS FALANCS User Manual - Reference - Graphical User Interface
the Bergmann parameter may be used for weighting the

mean stress influence of the P_SWT
P_J
for the Vormwald parameter
Morrow
for the basic strain-life parameter
No mean stress influence
a calculation without mean stress influence is conducted
The default selection is P_SWT original.
Mean Stress Influence Factor
The mean stress influence factor for the P Bergmann damage parameter may be entered here.
The default value is 1.
Remark: This field is only available if the P Bergmann damage parameter is chosen.
Start linearization at
For log-log linear regression (PSWT-Linear, PJ, synthetic
stress-life curve), the start point may be defined here.
The default value is 1000. Prior to LMS FALANCS 2.6 this
value was hardcoded to a value of 100.
End linearization at
For log-log linear regression (PSWT-Linear, PJ, synthetic
stress-life curve), the end point may be defined here.
The default value is 2E+5. Prior to LMS FALANCS 2.9 this
value was set to the endurance limit
Residual Stress
If a non zero value is given here, an analysis using the
"Thin surface layer" approach with the given residual stress
value is performed.
Remark: This parameter is ignored if RFM matrices are used as input.
F-257
Mean stress correction and damage accumulation methods are
defined in the area Stress-life Approach.
This area is visible only in the Stress-life Approach. In the
Strain-life Approach it is replaced by the area Strain-life Approach.
Fig. 97:
The area Stress-life Approach in the window "Define Solution Parameter Set"
Mean Stress Correction

This option menu allows the user to select mean stress correction methods. Available methods and the necessary input
fields are:
Name
Necessary input
fields
NS/None
NS/Goodman
None
M
(def. M=0.3)
M, M1, M3
(def. M=0.3, M1=0.3,
M3=0.1)
NS/3 Segments
F-258
Name
Necessary input
fields
M, M1, M3, Limit R

(def. M=0.3, M1=0.3,
M3=0.1, Limit
R=0.5)
None
SW/NS/EC3 high RS
None
SW/NS/EC3 low RS
M
SW/NS/FKM Recomm.
(def. M=0.3)
None
SW/NS/IIW high RS (cat. III)
SW/NS/ IIW medium RS (cat. II) None
None
SW/NS/IIW low RS (cat. I)
M
Torsion: 1 Segment
(def. M=0.3)
M, M3
Torsion: 2 Segments
(def. M=0.3, M3=0.1)
M, M3, Limit R
Torsion: 3 Segment
(def. M=0.3, M3=0.1,
Limit R=0.5)
NS/4 Segments
The default selection is NS/None.

A discussion of these parameters is given in the LMS FALANCS Theory Manual
M
This input field may take values in the range(0, 1).
M1, M3
Mean stress parameters with the restrictions:
M1 must be in the range (0, 1] and
M3 must be in the range (0, 1].
The default values are 0.
Compute Button
If NS/3 Segments or Torsion: 2 Segments is selected, the
values of M1, M3 may be computed from the value of M. If
F-259
the button is pressed the value M1(only if NS/3 Segments

is selected) is set to the value of M and the value of M3 is
set to one third of the value of M.
Limit R
In the 4-segments mean stress correction procedure, this
value is used to limit the correction with slope M3 for
0<R<1 to the range 0<R<Limit R. Beyond this value (for
Limit R < R < 1) no more mean stress correction is done. If
this is not used, one might have cycles with very small amplitude but high mean stress, which have an equivalent
amplitude above the endurance limit.
The default value depends on the selected Mean Stress
Correction. See the table above.
Damage Accumulation
This option button allows the user to define the damage accumulation method to use for the fatigue analysis. The options Miners Rule (original), Miners Rule (elementary) and Haibach/Miner (2k - 1) modify the S-N curve
past the endurance limit. The option Liu/Zenner modifies
the S-N curve before and after the endurance limit.
The default selection is Miners Rule (elementary).
A discussion of these parameters is given in the LMS FALANCS Theory Manual.
F-260
Spot welds
This area is visible only in the Stress-life Approach. In the
Strain-life Approach it is replaced by the area Strain-life Approach.
Fig. 98:
The area Spot welds in the window "Define Solution Parameter Set"
If pseudo stress: spotweld is chosen as Local Stress

State the following parameters influence the calculation of
the fatigue life of the spot welds. Note, that spot welds can
not be computed with transient input!
Diameter of spot welds to be analyzed
For fatigue analysis of spot welds the model of Rupp (LBF)
is used. The diameter of the spot weld is an important parameter of this model. This parameter gives the diameter in
the same unit as the width of the shells.
Calculate damage in the spot weld nugget too
If not checked the damage evaluation is only performed in
the sheet at the weld toe and not inside the nugget leading
to less computational effort. This may be done since the
crack initiation in most cases does not start in the nugget. If
checked a damage calculation in the nugget is performed,
too.
As default the option is checked.
Shift of nugget SN- curve against sheet
If the nugget is calculated a shifting factor for the SN-Curve
used to calculate the nugget may be applied. Often the SNCurves for the nugget show a lower endurance limit than
F-261
the SN-Curve for the sheet. A factor lower than 1.0 may be
applied in these cases, i.e.
S E ,nugget
S E ,sheet
The default value is 0.7.
F-262
General
General solution parameters are defined in this area.
Fig. 99:
The area General in the window "Define Solution Parameter

Set"
Surface Correction
A surface correction parameter may be input into this field.
This parameter accounts for changes in the surface roughness between the actual component and the specimens from
which the basic constant amplitude life curve were determined. It is defined as the endurance limit of the rough
specimen over the endurance limit of a polished specimen.
The surface correction parameter can take values in the
range (0, 2].
Size Correction
A size correction parameter may be input into this field.
This parameter accounts for size difference, if needed, between the actual component and the specimens from which
the basic life curve(in the Strain-life Approach) resp. S-N
curve (in the Stress-life Approach) were determined. It is
defined as the endurance limit of the component over the
endurance limit of the lab specimen. The size correction parameter can take values in the range (0, 3].
F-263

Limit Damage Sum
The input field Limit Damage Sum is used to specify a
damage value limit other than unity. Any value greater
than zero may be used.
This is also called relative Miners Rule and is discussed in
the LMS FALANCS Theory Manual.
Different Channel Lengths
This option menu allows the user to determine the method
to use when multiple channels have been selected for a fatigue analysis and the channels have different lengths. The
available entries are:
Truncate
The longer channels are truncated to the length of the
shortest channel.
Fill
This option will fill the shorter channels with zeroes, until it matches the length of the longest history.
Repeat
This option will repeat each history until it matches the
length of the longest history.
The default selection is Truncate.
F-264
Design Point
In the area Design Point you specify a particular design
point. It is used to calculate a life curve for the particular load
sequences and parameters specified
Fig. 100:
The area Design Point in the window "Define Solution Parameter Set"
Unknown Variable
The unknown variable of the Design Point in the fatigue
analysis can be specified by the option menu Unknown
Variable. The choices are Life or Load Level. One of
these two will be known and the corresponding value of the
other will be calculated.
The default selection is Life.
Probability of Failure
The probability of failure is at 50 percent unless a prior statistical analysis has been done on the material dataset using TecWare LifeStat.
Life
The life of the design point can be specified in the input field
in terms of Cycles or Blocks of the load history.
F-265
Load Level
The multiplier of the load level given in units of the load after the offset and factor have been applied (in other words,
the calibrated load ) is to be entered into this input field.
For example, if 2 is entered into this input field, the design
point load level will be set at twice the maximum amplitude
in the calibrated load sequence. The calibration of the load
sequence with the offset and factor is discussed in the section Geometry Work Sheet.
In the Results display, the computed variable amplitude
life curve and life points will be presented with respect to
multiples of the Load Level.
For analyses with several superimposed channels, the
pseudo stress is calculated to determine the fatigue damage.
However, in the results display, the load amplitude that is
referred to is the amplitude of the first channel in the list
that contributes to the damage.
Tolerance
If Load Level is chosen as Unknown Variable, a given
life is back calculated. This entry specifies the tolerance for
this calculation.
F-266
Computed Points
In the area Computed Points you specify the location of additional points on the life curve to be computed, with respect to
the location of the input design point.
For example, if the design point is at location 1.0, then a load
level point of 0.5 is at half the load level of the design point.
Fig. 101:
The area Computed Points in the window "Define Solution

Parameter Set"
Axis
This option menu is for user specified calculation of additional points on the life curve.
The available options are:
Load Level
computed points are in terms of multiples of the design
point along the vertical axis
Life
computed points are in terms of multiples of the design
points life
The default selection is Load Level.
F-267
Type
The user can input a number of defined points, have a given
number of design points, or have design points automatically generated.
The option button menu at this location will give these options. Once this option has been selected, several numbers
will appear in the list box to the right and correspond to the
factor applied to the design point variable specified with the
Axis option menu button.
For example, if Axis is set to Load Level and the Type is
set to 5 Points, the first number in the list box will be 1.5,
meaning a point on the variable amplitude S-N curve will be
generated at 1.5 times the design load. Other numbers in
the list have a similar meaning. The points can be edited
using the Delete, Add and Modify buttons and the input
field below the list box. If Automatic is chosen, LMS FALANCS tries to distribute the computed points between the
endurance limit and static failure.
The default selection is Automatic.
Remark: If you use a solution parameter for proportional FEM Analysis,
Type is automatically set to Automatic for this analysis.
Tolerance
If Life is chosen as Axis, a given life is back calculated.
This entry specifies the tolerance for this calculation.
F-268
FEM/LTS: Local Stress State

The field is available when updating or defining a solution parameter set.
Fig. 102:
The area FEM/LTS: Local Stress State in the window "Define Solution Parameter Set"
The available options depend on the selected approach.

In the Stress-life Approach
The option menu FEM/LTS: Local Stress State allows the
user to select the type of critical plane stress parameter to
use, or equivalent stress parameter to use during the FEM
analysis or the LTS-Tensor analysis.
For analyzing spot welds choose the option pseudo stress:
spot welds and to activate the safety factor approach
choose the option Pseudo stress: Dang Van.
The default selection is pseudo stress: crit. Plane, open

mode (I).
pseudo stress: crit. Plane, open mode (I)
In this method, the components of the local stress/strain
tensor are resolved to directions perpendicular to candi-
F-269
date critical planes upon which the fatigue damage is

computed.
Pseudo stress: crit. Plane, max shear (II+III)
In this method, the components of the local stress tensor
are resolved to directions parallel to candidate critical
planes upon which the fatigue damage is computed.
Pseudo stress: signed von Mises
For the signed von Mises local stress state option, the
von Mises equivalent stress is computed and given the
sign of the principal stress with the largest magnitude.
Pseudo stress: maximum principle
The maximum principal stress is used as the equivalent
uniaxial stress in the damage model.
Pseudo stress: intermediate principle
For these options, the respective principal stress component is used in the fatigue analysis. Either the maximum
or the intermediate principal stress component is used.
Pseudo stress: spotweld
The model of Rupp is used to calculate the fatigue of spot
welds. See the section about the spot weld parameters
above.
Pseudo stress: Dang Van
Enables the safety factor approach according to Dang
Van.
sigma x
The x-component of the local stress tensor is used as the
equivalent uniaxial stress in the damage model.
Sigma y
The y-component of the local stress tensor is used as the
Sigma xy
The xy-component of the local stress tensor is used as the
F-270
In the Strain-life ApproachThe option menu FEM/LTS:

Local Stress State allows the user to select the type of
critical plane stress parameter to use, or equivalent stress
parameter to use during the fatigue analysis. This parameter is only used during FEM analysis or the LTS-Tensor
analysis.
The pseudo stress parameters operate on the projected directions of the pseudo stress tensor. An uniaxial strain-life
approach is performed in each of these directions.
For the strain parameters the pseudo stress tensor is first
transformed to a local stress tensor via Jiang's model and
the projections are done afterwards.
The default selection is pseudo stress: crit. Plane, open.

Mode (I).
strain: crit. Plane, open mode (I)
The Jiang model is used to calculate the local stress tensors and the components of the local stress tensors are
resolved to directions perpendicular to candidate critical
planes upon which the fatigue damage is computed.
Strain: crit. Plane, max shear (II +III)
The Jiang model is used to calculate the local stress tensors and the components of the local stress tensors are
resolved to directions parallel to candidate critical planes
upon which the fatigue damage is computed. Both inplane and out-of-plane shear are considered.
F-271
Strain: signed von Mises

For the strain signed von Mises local stress state option, the von Mises equivalent stress is computed and
given the sign of the principal stress with the largest
magnitude.
Strain: maximum principle
The Jiang model is used to calculate the local stress tensors and the maximum principal stress is used as the
Strain: intermediate principle
The Jiang model is used to calculate the local stress tensors and the respective principal stress component is
used in the fatigue analysis. Either the maximum or the
intermediate principal stress component is used.
Pseudo stress: crit. Plane, open mode (I)
are resolved to directions perpendicular to candidate
critical planes upon which the fatigue damage is computed.
Pseudo stress: crit. Plane, max shear (II+III)
are resolved to directions parallel to candidate critical
planes upon which the fatigue damage is computed. Both
in-plane and out-of-plane shear are considered.
Pseudo stress: signed von Mises
For the signed von Mises local stress state option, the
von Mises equivalent stress is computed and given the
sign of the principal stress with the largest magnitude.
Sigma x
The x-component of the local stress tensor is used as the
Sigma y
The y-component of the local stress tensor is used as the
Sigma xy
F-272
The xy-component of the local stress tensor is used as the

Remark: If the max shear approach is used, be sure to use a torsion
damage parameter as well and that the type of the material parameter set
is set correctly (tension / torsion).
Buttons
OK
When defining a new solution parameter set a new element
is added to the selected database. Its name and parameters
are defined by the settings in the window. The data sheet is
closed.
When updating an existing solution parameter set the new
settings are stored in the set and the data sheet is closed.
The old parameter values are lost.
When viewing a solution parameter set the data sheet is
closed.
Apply
Cancel
The data sheet is closed without creating a new database
element.
Print
The window "Print" appears from where you start the printout of the data sheet.
Help
The online help system is started displaying the according
chapter.
The Data Sheet for Material Data
F-273

The data sheet for strain-life material data is saved with the
Geometric Work Sheet. It appears in three versions depending
on the intended purpose (define element, update element or
view element). The window is available only in the Strain-life
Approach. The layout is always the same but the edit status of
the fields differs.
z "Strain-life Approach - Define Material Data Sheet"
the database selection window "Selection of Material Data
Sheets" or by pressing OK in the window "Estimation Based
on Uniform Material Law". All fields are editable for naming a new database element, selecting the database it will
be stored in and setting its parameters.
z "Strain-life Approach - Update Material Data Sheet"
in the database selection window "Selection of Material
Data Sheets". The element name and the database can not
original values are no longer available.
z "Strain-life Approach - View Material Data Sheet"
The window is called via the button Data Sheet in the database selection window "Selection of Material Data
Sheets". All fields are insensitive.
F-274
The Window "Define Material Data Sheet"

This paragraph describes the data sheet for defining strain-life
material data.
Remark: Once the parameter set is defined and the OK button has been selected, any further changes to the solution parameters must be done using
the Update option. If you use the Apply button several times for saving interim states you have to confirm overwriting in an appearing warning.
Fig. 103:
The window "Define Material Data Sheet"
The window contains the areas Element, Manson-CoffinMorrow Relation, Static Failure Data, Endurance Limit,
Ramberg-Osgood Relation, Measurement and Multiaxial
material model (Jiang) and some buttons.
F-275
Element
In the area Element general database settings are defined.
Fig. 104:
The area Element in the window "Define Material Data

Sheet"
Material
When defining new material data you enter its name at this
field. If you use an existing material data as template the
field is preset with the name of this set. The field is left
blank if you use the LMS FALANCS default values as template.
When viewing or updating a material data this field is not
editable. The name must not be changed.
Database
When defining a new material data you specify the database
it is to be stored in in this option menu. Available entries
are all databases defined for material data. If you use an
existing material data as template the field is preset with
the database this data is contained in. The database Default is chosen if you use the LMS FALANCS default values as template.
When viewing or updating a material data this field is not
editable. The database must not be changed.
Remark: For updating and defining material data the selected database
must be editable! Otherwise, the buttons OK and Apply are insensitive.
Comment
This text is saved as comment to the material data. It is editable when updating or defining a material data.
F-276
Manson-Coffin-Morrow Relation
Material properties relating to strain-life failure are defined in
this area.
Fig. 105:
The area Manson-Coffin-Morrow Relation in the window

"Define Material Data Sheet"
Formula
The strain-life damage equation is displayed:
f
(2 N )b + f (2 N )c
E
Fatigue Strength Coefficient

The coefficient must be entered in MPa. Allowed values are
in the range (0,4000].
Fatigue Ductility Coefficient
Allowed values are in the range (0,10].
Fatigue Strength Exponent
Allowed values are in the range (-1,0].
The default value is -0.087.
Fatigue Ductility Exponent
Allowed values are in the range (-4,0].
The default value is -0.58.
F-277
Static Failure Data

Static Tensile Strength and Compressive Strength data in
terms of engineering stresses are entered in this portion of the
window. If unknown, they can be estimated from the Cyclic
Failure Data.
Fig. 106:
The area Static Failure Data in the window "Define Material Data Sheet"
The units for these quantities are MPa and the entered values
must be positive. If these values are exceeded by the maximum
or minimum value in the time history, a static failure mode is
reported.
The default value for Tensile Strength is 600 MPa (Stress)
resp. 3.849% (Strain) and the default value for Compressive
Strength is 1800 MPa.
There are no default values for the strains. By the default setting of the radio buttons, the strains are calculated from the
stresses using the Ramberg-Osgood-relation. If the radio button for strain is activated, then the strains can be defined by
the user and the stresses are re-calculated again from the
Ramberg-Osgood-relation.
F-278
Endurance Limit
The parameters of the endurance limit are defined in this area.
Fig. 107:
The area Endurance Limit in the window "Define Material

Data Sheet"
The activated radio button before a field describes which value

is defined by the user. The two remaining ones are calculated
using the Ramberg-Osgood and the Manson-Coffin-Morrow
relations.
Number of Cycles
Allowed values are in the range [1, 1e12].
The default value is 5.0677E+5.
Stress Amplitude
Allowed values are in the range (0,1000]). The values are
given in MPa.
Strain Amplitude
Allowed values are in the range (0,10]). The values are
given in percent at the endurance limit.
F-279
Ramberg-Osgood Relation
The cyclic stress-strain properties are listed in this area.
Fig. 108:
The area Ramberg-Osgood Relation in the window "Define

Material Data Sheet"
Formula
The Ramberg-Osgood relation is displayed:

= +
E K
Youngs Modulus
The modulus of elasticity is entered in MPa. Allowed values
are in the range [100,1e7].
The default value is 2E+5.
Cyclic Hardening Coefficient
Allowed values are in the range [100, Young's Modulus].
The values are given in MPa.
Cyclic Hardening Exponent
Allowed values are in the range (0.03, 0.5).
F-280
Measurement
This area contains information on the measured data.
Fig. 109:
The area Measurement in the window "Define Material Data

Sheet"
R-ratio
The R-ratio of the constant amplitude strain controlled test
from which the material properties have been determined is
entered in this input field.
The ratio is defined as the minimum stress amplitude over
the maximum stress amplitude and can take values in the
range ( minus infinity, 1] and > 1.
The option menu on the right offers common values of the
ratio.
The default value is -1.
Material parameters were measured in
The test type is chosen in the option menu. Available entries are Torsion and Tension.
The default selection is Tension.
Remark: If you have performed torsion tests to determine your parameters, you have to set the letter parameter to Torsion so that your parameters are correctly interpreted. In this case, you must enter the torsional data in the appropriate fields, e.g. G in the E field, etc.
If axial tests have been performed and the data is to be used in a torsion
analysis, be sure to enter the correct value for the Poisson's ratio in
area Multiaxial material model (Jiang).
F-281
Multiaxial material model (Jiang)

Here the parameters for the Jiang model and the elastic-plastic
model are defined.
Fig. 110:
The area Multiaxial material model (Jiang) in the window "Define Material Data Sheet"
Please refer to the LMS FALANCS Theory Manual for details

Poisson's ratio
Ratchetting parameter Chi
Number of backstresses
F-282
Buttons
OK
When defining new strain-life material data a new element
closed.
When updating existing strain-life material data the new
settings are stored in the database element and the data
sheet is closed. The old parameter values are lost.
When viewing strain-life material data the data sheet is
closed.
Apply
Cancel
Selecting this button will close the data sheet without defining or saving any information.
Print
Selecting the Print button will call the "Print" window to
allow the user to print the strain-life material data.
Help
Selecting this button will display this help information.
The Data Sheet for Method Parameters
F-283
The Data Sheet for Method

Parameters
The method parameters define some basic parameters and the
output of the finite element based analysis.
The method parameter set is saved with the Geometric Work
Sheet.
The data sheet for method parameters appears in three versions depending on the intended purpose (define element, update element or view element). The layout is always the same
but the edit status of the fields differs.
The window versions are in both the Stress-life Approach and
the Strain-life Approach:
z "Define Method Parameter"
the database selection window "Selection of Method Parameter Sets". All fields are editable for naming a new database element, selecting the database it will be stored in
and setting its parameters.
z "Update Method Parameter"
in the database selection window "Selection of Method Parameter Sets". The element name and the database can not
z "View Method Parameter"
F-284
The window is called via the button Data Sheet in the database selection window "Selection of Method Parameter
Sets". All fields are insensitive.
F-285
Window "Define Method parameter"

The method parameter sheet consists of the panels General,
NP FEM, FEM Results, RP-Filter, Hot Spots and LTS. In
the case you want to perform a non FEM analysis you only
have to take care about the first panel.
For a detailed description of the different parameters please refer to the matching sections of the LMS FALANCS Theory
Manual.
General
In the panel General method parameters are defined that are
used in both FEM analyses and Non-FEM analyses.
Fig. 111:
The panel General in the window "Define Method parameters"
Data set name

When defining a new material parameter set you enter its
name at this field. If you use an existing material parameter set as template the field is preset with the name of this
set. The field is left blank if you use the LMS FALANCS default values as template.
F-286
When viewing or updating a material parameter set this

field is not editable. The name must not be changed.
Database name
When defining a new material parameter set you specify the
database it is to be stored in in this option menu. Available
entries are all databases defined for material parameter
sets. If you use an existing material parameter set as template the field is preset with the database this set is contained in. The database Default is chosen if you use the
LMS FALANCS default values as template.
When viewing or updating a material parameter set this
field is not editable. The database must not be changed.
Remark: For updating and defining material parameter set the selected
database must be editable! Otherwise, the buttons OK and Apply are insensitive.

Sets the number of rainflow bins used for rainflow counting
in the non-FEM analysis.
Compute TSDs exact (include residual influence between events)
For test schedule definition based analysis runs there are
two different possibilities to calculate:
After each event of the test schedule there remains a residue of unclosed loops that may also influence the simulation
of the next event. The user has to decide whether he wants
to have this effect of the residue included. If yes the option
must be checked. If the influence of the residue shall be ignored, the option has to be unchecked.
As default the option is not checked.
Remark: In the non-FEM stress approach, the residue is always taken
into account.
F-287
Fatigue Sensitive Editing

If the option is checked for a Non-FEM analysis the history
reduction may be performed on its results. See the chapter
History Reduction for further information.
F-288
NP FEM
Fig. 112:
The panel NP FEM in the window "Define Method parameters"
Number of critical planes

Defines the number of critical planes used in the non proportional FEM critical plane approaches. The higher the
number of critical planes the more accurate the analysis
will get but also the computational effort increases linearly
with the number of critical planes.
Maximal number of projection directions
Specifies the number of projection directions for the rainflow projector during a nonproportional analysis.
Tolerance angle
Specifies the tolerance angle (in degrees) used for identifying similar directions in the rainflow projector.
F-289

A direction in the rainflow projector is discarded if <max.
norm> / <act. Norm> > NormQuotient. A high value for
this parameter means that many directions will be examined, while a low value will result in fewer directions being
examined.
Elimination safety factor
Gives a numerical criterion for node elimination. Eliminated
nodes have to satisfy the condition:
<nodal damage>
* <damage correction factor>
* Elimination safety factor
< <Elimination threshold>
This means that the larger this factor is chosen the less
elements are eliminated.
Use absolute elimination threshold
If this option is checked the entered Absolute elimination
threshold is used as <Elimination threshold> in the
node elimination runs.
If the option is not checked the value of the <Elimination
threshold> is automatically chosen from the elimination
run.
Absolute elimination threshold
For each node elimination run the following criterion is used
for nodes to be eliminated:
<nodal damage>
* <damage correction factor>
* Elimination safety factor
< <Elimination threshold>
Here the <damage correction factor> is calculated
during the RP-filtering process and the EliminationSafetyFactor is given in this panel.
F-290
If Use absolute elimination threshold is not checked,

the <Elimination threshold> is automatically chosen
from the elimination run.
If Use absolute elimination threshold is checked, the
value of Absolute elimination threshold is used as
<Elimination threshold>.
Use strain-life also for elimination runs
Used for the strain-life approach for nonproportional FE
analyses.
If checked then the strain-life approach will be used to calculate damage for filtered load histories, and if not checked
the stress-life approach is used instead.
The use of the strain-life also for the filter runs takes some
more time, but it is more accurate.
F-291
FEM Results
The LMS FALANCS result files contain four computed values
for each task. The settings in the panel FEM Results specifies
the four results that are written into the result file and defines
the values that are used to indicate infinite life and static failures.
How to find the 4 results in a LMS FALANCS result file depends on the FE-file format which is used. The FE-file formats
are described in Part 6 Reference - Interfaces to Finite Element Tools.
Fig. 113:
The panel FEM Results in the window "Define Method parameters"
Result 1
This entry changes the displayed value if you choose to display damage(max), damage(top) or damage(bottom). The
value of Use logarithmic scale for Result 1 also influences the display.
The following options are available:
Miner sum
The Miner sum is displayed.
F-292
If the limit damage sum is set to 1.0, the Miner sum corresponds to 1.0 / (number of sustainable repetitions).
If you choose another limit damage sum, it corresponds
to (limit damage sum) / (number of sustainable repetitions) to failure.
Be aware that since failure is assumed if the Miner Sum
exceeds limit damage sum the number of sustainable
repetitions depends (almost) linearly on the limit damage sum, and hence in the case of Miner Sum the display
is (almost) independent of the limit damage sum.
1/number of blocks
The value 1.0 / (number of sustainable repetitions) is
displayed.
Number of blocks
The number of sustainable repetitions is displayed.
The default option is Miner sum.
In former releases the option menu was named Write
damage as.
Use logarithmic scale for Result 1
If checked, the logarithm of the damage is displayed such
that contour plots with equidistant contour lines can be
used to display.
If not checked the damage values are written to the result
file as they are.
Result 2
One of the following options may be selected. The according
result is written into the result file.
Design life Factor (N_Design/N)
The ratio of the design life value (N_Design) and the
computed life (N) is written. N_Design can be defined in
the solution parameter set (variable Life in section Design Point).
Elimination run number
F-293
This parameter is useful for displaying at which filter

width level nodes have been eliminated from fatigue
analysis for a finite element mesh. For spot weld analysis runs the position where the crack starts (2 for nugget,
1 for sheet) is written to the position Result 2 in the result file.
The default option is Design life Factor (N_Design/N).
Result 3
result is written into the result file.
Load Design Factor (Sig/SigDesign)
From the computed life a corresponding stress value Sig
can be re-calculated using the SN curve. This stress represents the amplitude for a constant amplitude loading,
which leads to the same damage. The load design factor
is the ratio of this value and the design stress (SigDesign), which is calculated from the design life
(N_Design) again using the SN curve. In case of strain
life approach, the SN curve is synthetically calculated.
Max. absolute stress
This is the maximum absolute stress encountered during
the loading. In the stress life approach the pseudo stress
is used, in the strain life approach the real stress is used.
The value is calculated from the uni-axial equivalent
stresses (von Mises, critical planes, etc.).
Max. stress amplitude
This is the maximum stress amplitude encountered
during the loading. In the stress life approach the pseudo
stress is used, in the strain life approach the real stress
is used. The value is calculated from the uni-axial
equivalent stresses (von Mises, critical planes, etc.).
Safety factor
The safety factor is always defined as the factor, which
can be applied to the loads in order to reach the endurance limit resp. the static limit. Thus a factor of 2 means,
that the load does not cause any damage as long as it is
scaled with a factor < 2. Damage starts when the factor
F-294
is > 2. The safety factor is not calculated when the Jiang

model is used.
The default option is Load Design Factor
(Sig/SigDesign).
Result 4
result is written into the result file. Additionally the specific
values for indicating infinite life and static failure are to be
defined.
RF Norm
To get the pseudo stress at a certain location and for a
certain uni-axial stress state (for example crit. Plane), a
linear combination of the load histories has to be calculated. The coefficients of this combination depend on the
stresses in the load cases. These coefficients are scaled
with the maximum amplitude of the corresponding load
history and interpreted as a vector. The length of this
vector is a measure for the importance of the corresponding location. The higher this value is, the more
damage is to be expected. For all locations, which are
used in the RP-Filter process, this length called RFNorm is written. For all other locations it is set to 0.
Thus by displaying the RF-Norm it can be checked which
locations have been used in the RP-Filter process.
Task number
For each task its number is written into the result file.
Hot spot number
The number of the hot spot to which an element belongs
to is written into the result file. If the element does not
belong to a hotspot the value is 0.
As default RF Norm is entered.
Value to indicate infinite life
For FEM methods, specifies the logarithmic value to be
written into the result file if the damage is below the endurance limit.
F-295
Factor on 'Limit Damage Sum' to indicate static failure

For FEM methods, specifies the factor which is multiplied
with 'Limit Damage Sum' before writing into the result file
if a static failure occurred.
F-296
RP Filter
Fig. 114:
The panel RP Filter in the window "Define Method parameters"
Filterwidth for filter runs

The values given for the filter widths should get ordered
automatically such that
Filterwidth_1 > Filterwidth_2 > ... > Filterwidth_n.
The values of the filter width are related to the SN-curve of
the material as follows:
the interval between the number of cycles corresponding
to static failure load and the endurance limit is equally
divided in the log-log scale. The N-value for the endurance limit corresponds to 0 and the N-value for the static
failure load corresponds to 1. In this scale each value of
the filter width is interpreted as an N-value and the corresponding stress amplitude is calculated.
Any hysteresis loops smaller than the computed stress
amplitude is filtered (discarded) from the analysis.
For example, a filter width of 0 will discard all hysteresis
loops smaller than the endurance limit, and a filter width of
1 will discard all loops smaller than the static failure load.
F-297
Add
The value in the text box is added to the list box.
Change
Exchanges the selected entry in the list box with the value
in the text box.
Remove
Removes a selected entry from the list box.
F-298
Hot Spots
In the panel Hot Spots you define whether hot spots are calculated during an analysis and specify the parameters for the
calculation.
Fig. 115:
The panel Hot Spots in the window "Define Method parameters"
Calculate hot spots

The hot spot calculation is only performed if this option is
checked.
Minimum damage (log
Elements below this damage value are not taken into account.
Threshold (log
The damage D (in logarithmic scale) of the hot spot is given
by the damage of its center element. The neighboring elements are added to the hot spot, as long as their damage
values are greater than d - threshold. This parameter has
influence on the size of a hot spot. The larger the threshold,
the larger the hot spot might be.
F-299

Maximum number
This is the maximum number of hot spots which are determined. The hot spots are sorted in such a way, that the
damage of the center element is descending.
Minimum size
This parameter is used to control the size of the hot spots,
which are to be detected. If the value of the parameter is 1,
then just the element with maximum damage is part of the
hot spot. If the value is 2, then all elements, which are direct neighbors of the center element are also part of the hot
spots. If the value is 3, then not only the direct neighbors of
the center element are taken, but also the neighbors of the
neighbors. This scheme is extended also to higher values of
the parameter. If one of these elements do not reach the
damage threshold, then the entire hot spot is discarded.
The default value is 1, which means that it is sufficient,
that only the center element itself fulfills the threshold condition. If there is a very small hot spot, where the damage
decreases rapidly in the neighborhood, then it may happen,
that elements which are geometrically very close to the hot
spot center have a damage value below the threshold. If in
such a case the minimum size is too large, then the hot spot
might not be detected at all. That's the reason for choosing
the default value 1.
F-300
LTS
In the panel LTS you define the parameters for the Local Time
Series (LTS) calculation and specify which kind of time series
are generated.
Fig. 116:
The panel LTS in the window "Define Method parameters"
Generate stress time series

If checked, in both the Stress-life Approach and the Strainlife Approach stress-time series are generated when performing Local Time Series (LTS) based on the method parameter set. The generated time series are:
time series for x- y- and xy-pseudo stresses:
elem_<n>_stress.erg and the header file
elem_<n>_stress.hrg
where <n> is the element number in the element set
time series of max. principle stresses:
elem_<n>_principles.erg and the header file
elem_<n>_principles.hrg
time series containing radial stresses (for hot spots only).
F-301

If checked, in the Strain-life Approach strain-time series are
generated when performing Local Time Series (LTS) based
on the method parameter set. The generated time series
are:
strain time series calculated from pseudo stresses (x-, y-,
z- and xy-stresses) using Hook's law:
elem_<n>_strain.erg and the header file
elem_<n>_strain.hrg
Projection angle
If checked, in the Strain-life Approach, the entered angle
will be used for generating strain time series in the specified direction. The generated time series are:
strain time series in the direction specified by the projection angle:
elem_<n>_angle_<d>.erg and the header file
elem_<n>_angle_<d>.hrg
where <n> is the element number in the element set and
<d> is the direction.
As default the option is not checked. The default angle is 0.
Generate time series for forces and moments (spot weld)
If checked time series for forces and moments are generated
in the Stress-life Approach when performing Local Time Series (LTS) based on the method parameter set. In the used
solution parameter set the FEM/LTS: Local Stress State
has to be pseudo stress: spotweld. The generated time series are:
time series for forces and moments:
elem_<n>_forces_and_moments.erg and the header
file
elem_<n>_forces_and_moments.hrg
F-302
where <n> is the element number in the element set.

Each of these time series contains six channels per element node:
N_<node>_Fx
force
N_<node>_Fy
"
N_<node>_Fz
"
N_<node>_Mx
moment
N_<node>_My
"
N_<node>_Mz
"
where <node> is the node number.
F-303
Buttons
The following buttons are available on each panel:
OK
When defining a new method parameter set a new element
closed.
When updating an existing method parameter set the new
settings are stored in the database element and the data
sheet is closed. The old parameter values are lost.
When viewing a method parameter set the data sheet is
closed.
Cancel
Selecting this button will close the data sheet without defining or saving any information.
Print
Selecting the Print button will call the "Print" window to
allow the user to print the strain-life material data.
Help
F-304
Error and Information Messages
F-305

The individual methods pop up error and information messages
during execution.
Information messages just give hints as to why some results
may turn out as non-expected, while error messages indicate
why an analysis run could not come up with results.
As long as a job is listed in the window "Computation status"
all messages that occurred during its execution are available.
You may list them in the window "Info" and save the list as logfile for job documentation.
We included parts of the information and error messages that
the individual methods pop up during execution. We only explain the major messages and try to give hints how to solve the
individual problem.
F-306
LMS FALANCS Main Program and Graphical

User Interface
This paragraph explains messages concerning the file selection
and the database handling.
File Selection
The channels of the selected file cannot be read. Possible reason: wrong format
File: <File name>
The number of channels of the selected file cannot be
read.
Possible reason: defect in file or wrong format
File: <File name>
You probably did not choose the right format entry for the
given file. Please check the option button File type.
The selected file <file name> cannot be read.
Internal data access function returned error <error
number>
The file seems to be corrupted. Please check the file.
Databases
Error while initializing the database
The entry in the falancs.ini pointing to the database directory is not valid. Check your falancs.ini configuration
file.
Error while opening the database
The database inventory file could not be opened. Check your
falancs.ini configuration file.
Can't open <database entry file>
The selected entry points to <database entry file> which can
not be opened. Some other user could be editing it.
F-307
Can't write to <database entry file>

You do not have write permission on the <database entry
file>. Either this is due to the permissions you have set or
another user has locked the file.
Database editing
The field <field> has an invalid value
The field <field> needs a valueless than <value>
The field <field> needs a value less or equal <value>
The field <field> needs a value greater than <value>
The field <field> needs a value greater or equal to
<value>
The field <field> needs a value not equal to <value>
The field <field> needs a value within <value1> <= x <=
<value2>
You entered an invalid number. Please check with the corresponding section of this manual what the physical meaning this field represents and in what range entries have to
be specified.
The field <field> is empty. Please input a correct value
You left the field empty, but an input is necessary. Please
check with the corresponding section of this manual as to
what the physical meaning this field represents and in what
range entries have to be specified.
The input implies in the field <field> a value greater |
greater or equal | less |less or equal |equal to value.
Value is automatically adapted.
Some inputs also alter other fields. If this leads to invalid
entries in those fields, they are automatically changed to
correct values.
F-308
Load History Selection and Viewing

You can't select time series and rainflow matrices at the
same time
You can only select one matrix to view
You can view only either time histories or rainflow matrices
at one time, since different applications are launched to display the loading histories. Only one matrix can be displayed
at one time. Please view those items one after the other.
There is a wrong entry (<entry>) in your configuration
file 'falancs.ini' In the section '[LoadHistoryView]' the
allowed values for the entry 'TimeSeries=' are 'TimeEdit
or 'TimeView'. Shall I use TimeView at this moment for
viewing?
Answer yes to this confirmation box and correct your falancs.ini.
F-309
Geometry Work Sheet and Cell

This paragraph explains messages concerning the working
with the Geometry Work Sheet and Cell.
Selections, Cut and Paste

Wrong selection!
A selected block needs to contain at least one geometry
cell.
Please repeat the selection accordingly.
Proceed as instructed.
Selected item can't be deleted! There has to be one row
and one column in the tablefield at least at any time.
You can not cut the whole Geometry Work Sheet !
The paste buffer content doesn't fit into the currently
selected cells!
Wrong location for block insertion The rectangular section of the Geometry Work Sheet contained in the paste
buffer does not fit here probably to table header columns or rows contained in it. Please select a new location.
Wrong location for row insertion The row contained in
the paste buffer cannot be inserted here
To insert the row from the paste buffer please select a
row or a single cell.
Wrong location for column insertion! The column contained in the paste buffer cannot be inserted here.
To insert the column from the paste buffer, please select
a column or a single cell.
Please reselect such that the content fits into the selected
parts. The problem may be that header information (row
head: material, solution parameter sets, column head: load
history information) is only included in either the paste
buffer or the selected area.
F-310
The length of the rows|columns in the paste buffer is

shorter than the current length of the rows in the work
sheet. The rows|columns will be filled up with zeros.
The length of the rows|columns in the paste buffer is
longer than the current length of the rows|columns in
the work sheet. The rows will be truncated.
Gives information as to how different lengths in paste
buffer and selection are handled.
Cell entry values

Task Name Already Used! The name for the "Task/Site"
cell already exists. A new name is automatically generated.
Invalid Job/Task name! Please define a new Job
name/Task name. Use alphanumeric characters only !
Task names must be unique, since they are used to identify
the results. Task and Job names are used to create result
directories. Hence they must be valid directory names.
Invalid Sigma|L_e - Value! Only numeric values within
the float-range are allowed for Sigma|L_e.
c value out of float range ! Please specify new Sigma, Le
values.."
L_e must not be zero. Please define another value.
Please define new values within the range. Keep in mind
that c is defined as e over eL. Hence eL must be different
from zero.
Input Error !
Rainflow matrices and channels of elastic-plastic strains
cannot be combined with other channels. Please correct
your input!
Change the concentration factors accordingly.
F-311
Starting a job
Before starting a job, the Geometry Work Sheet is checked for
consistency. If any inconsistency occurs, the job can not be
started until the Geometry Work Sheet is corrected. Please
follow the instructions in the error messages:
Rainflow channels or channels containing elasticplastic strains are combined with other channels in row
number <row number> (Task/Site = '<task>') and <number of rows other row(s). This is not allowed. Please correct these rows.
No concentration factors unequal to zero found in row
<row number>(Task/Site = '<task>') and <number> other
row(s).
Please correct these rows.
There are missing material- and/or solution parameter
entries in row <row number> (Set = '<Element set>') and
<number> other row(s) of the tablefield. Please enter
the missing entries.
There are <number of duplicates> duplicate row(s)
<number of duplicates> duplicate column(s) in the tablefield. The first duplicate row is <number of row>
(Task/Site = '<task>'), the first duplicate column is
<number of column. Please remove them before proceeding!"
F-312
Some combinations in the Geometry Work Sheet are not possible to analyze using LMS FALANCS. The following messages
indicate them.
Error in GWS (task <task>, column c_<column>)
The damage parameter PJ can't be used to analyze rainflow matrices!
The damage parameter PJ can't be used for a FEM/NP
analysis!
Load and elastic-plastic strain can't be combined in one
task.
Error in GWS (task <task>)
Spot welds can not be computed with transient input.
The license for computing spot welds is not available.
Elastic-plastic strain can only be used in non-FEM.
Delete the tablefield - entries.
Delete the tablefield - entries after finishing calculations?
The existing workfolder contains entries. Create a new
folder?
Before the Geometry Work Sheet is deleted, you must confirm the request to delete the current Geometry Work Sheet
by either pressing the Cancel button or the OK button
(here the Geometry Work Sheet is deleted after performing
the analysis. It is kept open if you start the analysis by
pressing the Apply button.) or loading a Geometry Work
Sheet by the file options the user must confirm the deletion.
The job <job name> is still running.
You tried to start a job with the same name as a running
job. Since this could lead to unpredictable results, this is
F-313
forbidden. Either cancel the running job or enter a new job

name in the Job initialization window.
FEM specific
The number of selected load histories (<number of load
histories>) doesn't match the number of selected load
cases (<number of load cases>). Please correct one of
these selections.
Each load history is matched with one load case during initialization of the Geometry Work Sheet. Hence you have to
select the same number for each of them. Note that you
should select them in a matching order to reduce the necessary editing in the Geometry Work Sheet.
The number of selected materials must not be greater
than the number of selected element sets. Please correct
one of these selections.
The number of selected solution parameters must not be
greater than the number of selected element sets. Please
correct one of these selections.
For each element set there has to be one material and one
solution parameter set. Ensure that you select them correspondingly.
Computation Status window

Really stop Job <Job name>
Before canceling a job, the action must be confirmed.
Job <Job name> cant be stopped
Job could not be stopped (unknown reason)
Job <Job name> run on another machine and cant be
stopped
Jobs can only be stopped if they run on the same machine as
the LMS FALANCS main program.
F-314
Non FEM methods

This paragraph explains messages which may occur when performing Non-FEM calculations.
Either approach
The arguments for task <task> are incorrect!
Either the material, S-N-Curve or solution parameter set
include wrong entries or your Geometry Work Sheet is corrupted. Please check all your input and try again.
An error occurred during the calculation of the local
loading of task <task>
Your load histories may be corrupted. Please check them.
Other possible reasons may be that you may not write to the
location where the RF-Matrix is written to, or the disk is
full.
An error occurred during the calculation of the design
point of task <task name>
An error occurred during the calculation of the damage
channel of task <task name>
An error occurred during the iteration to calculate of
the design point of task <task name>
An error occurred during the calculation of task <task>
These messages most probably indicate some problem with
memory or the file handling. Please check your permissions
on the directory results are written to and whether enough
disk space is provided there. Try to solve memory problems
by restarting LMS FALANCS. If the problems persist
please contact your LMS FALANCS support person.
F-315
The prescribed life for the calculation of the design

point|computation point of task is too short|long.
Loadlevel set to the maximal|minimal loadlevel below
static failure|above endurance limit!
The prescribed lifetime can not be achieved with the given
parameters. If the lifetime is too short, this indicates that at
a corresponding load level a static failure will occur. The
load level is set to the maximum value at which no static
failure occurs. If on the other hand the matching load level
would lie below the endurance limit, it is set to the minimum value at which cyclic failure happens.
The prescribed life for the calculation of computation
point i of task <task name> is either infinite of zero.
Computation point ignored!
This happens if the design points unknown variable is life
and the failure mode is either static or none. If the life axis
is chosen for the computation points and the points are not
chosen to be computed automatically this error occurs. The
computation points are discarded in this case.
The loading for task<task name> is empty or constant
In this case no hysteresis loop can be identified and the task
is aborted. Note that there will be no results available for
that task. Please check your loading histories and concentration factors c.
Stress-life approach
An error occurred during the calculation of the S-Ncurve of task <task name>
Please check your S-N-curve entries.
The combination of SN-Curve and mean stress influence
used in task <task name> may lead to unpredictable results. Please check your parameters!
The combination of SN-Curve and mean stress influence
used in this task may lead to assigning a non zero damage
contribution to a hysteresis loop with zero amplitude but a
mean stress near the tensile strength of the material. You
F-316
should check your parameters and handle the results with

special care.
Strain life approach

The value of PWLLinearizationStart is not valid. It was
adapted automatically! Please check the values in the
file falancs.ini!
If for the linearized damage parameter life curve, the
starting point of the regression is not far enough below or
even greater than the endpoint, it is adapted to a value such
that at least a linearized damage parameter life curve can
be calculated. However this may lead to a damage parameter curve different from the one you intended to use. Check
the parameter life curve in the result windows before analyzing the results and check your configuration file entries.
History reduction
This computation has no damage
You selected a task that created no damage. Hence no history reduction can be based on this task. Check your input
parameters.
The result directory must be specified
The result directory can't be created
The result directory does not exist create it?
You have to specify a valid directory name as a result directory. If the directory does not exist it may be automatically
created.
F-317
FEM based analysis

This paragraph explains messages which may occur when performing FEM-based calculations.
Accessing result files

cannot open <result file><load case>
cannot read <result file><load case>
cannot write to <result file><load case>
Check the result file and permissions to read and write it.
NastranMAXR in section [FEM-Driver] in falancs.ini
must be >= <value>
Check the corresponding section in Part 6 Reference - Interfaces to Finite Element Tools for more detail.
No data block <data block name> found
Wrong file contents in <result file>
Data necessary for the fatigue analysis are missing. Please
check the corresponding section in Part 6 Reference - Interfaces to Finite Element Tools.
Error in element ordering. Please set in falancs.ini,
section [FEM-Driver] SortElements=1 and restart the
calculation.
The elements in the different load cases have incompatible
ordering. Set the mentioned parameter and LMS FALANCS
fixes the problem.
F-318
Proportional FEM analysis

Not enough life points in task <task name>
The list of life points contains no more than <number>
elements
Please check your input data and try to increase the parameter NoOfAutomaticPoints in the section [Method Parameters] in the configuration file falancs.ini.
If the load leads to large mean stresses (either tensile or
compressive) by small amplitudes, it may happen that there
is no load amplitude that leads to cyclic failure and no life
points can be calculated. In this case there are only elements below endurance limit or above static failure.
Non-proportional FEM analysis

Results of filter run # <run number> discarded because
of too small difference in length (<new length>: <orig
length>)
If the differences in the length are too small it makes no
sense to perform that filter run. You should check the Filter
width entries in the falancs.ini configuration file. Please
also see the chapter about how logging information can help
you in this situation in Part 5 Reference General Settings
of this manual.
<Process name> could not be started.
Your LMS FALANCS installation should be checked if this
problem is reproducible
The damage calculation requires too much memory
(<required size> MB). Allowed are only <available size>
MB.
Check the corresponding entries in the configuration file
falancs.ini. (Parameters depending on the problem size)
in Part 5 Reference General Settings of this manual.
F-319
Correction factor of the RP-filtering is 0.0 Please check

the input parameters.
Please check the input parameters and the configuration
file falancs.ini.
The element <element number> is in multiple FE Set
Files
Elements may only be in one element set. Please check the
element set files.
The correction factor for the node elimination is 0. It is
set to<factor> for the damage calculation.
There are two possible reasons for this Warning. Either the
original load leads to no damage for the whole part. In this
case the message can be ignored. The problematic case is if
the load is calibrated such that static failure occurs. In this
case the user should check the input data and use the output just an information where the static failure happens.
Licensing problems
This paragraph explains messages concerning licensing problems.
License "<License>" not available
License "<License>" can't be loaded
License "<License>" has expired
License file could not be loaded
License key for "<License>" is wrong
Check the section about licensing in Part 1 of this manual
and check with your LMS contact if your license has expired.
F-320
Process communication problems

Please check with your system operator if any of these problems occur. They usually result from corrupt entries in the
brokerdb.ini file which should be set up during installation.
Can't find service <service> (error = <error>)
Creating the communication link failed
Spawning server process failed
Cannot spawn to that platform
Invalid hostname / hostname not found
Executable not found
Service not available
Accepting the communication connection failed
ReferenceBatch Mode Interface
F-321
Part 4
ReferenceBatch Mode
Interface
Batch processing using LMS FALANCS allows the user to set
up fatigue analyses that can be executed anytime without further user input. This may be particularly useful if there are
large analysis jobs to be run at off-peak times, such as at night.
The user may define a set of jobs at a time and then put them
into the batch queue for later processing.
Another important application is to run the analysis integrated
in larger process queue like shape optimization or for parameter studies.
F-322
LMS FALANCS User Manual - ReferenceBatch Mode Interface
Starting a Batch Process
F-323

There are two possibilities to use the batch processing of LMS
FALANCS.
Start from the command line

To process in batch mode, the user must first set up a file that
contains all the information about the analysis, such as files to
use, material properties, and solution parameters. The command file is a GWS folder file, either in ASCII file format that
ends with the extension .fal by default or a binary GWS folder
(default extension .fol). It essentially contains the information stored in the Geometry Work Sheet.
To execute LMS FALANCS in batch mode, the command is entered:
tecware falbatch <batch-file-name>
<batch-file-name>
[<program>]
is the name of the LMS FALANCS batch command file.

Batch command files usually have the extension .fal.
[<program>]
is an optional program (or shell script) that is executed after
the analysis has been completed.
The user may find it useful to use a notification script that announces the completion of the LMS FALANCS analysis. If no
script or program is executed when the analysis is completed,
then falbatch ends silently without notification that it has finished.
The <program> is invoked with the following arguments:
<program> <return-code> <task-directory> <log-file>
where
F-324
<return code>
Is 1 = success, 0 = failure
<task-directory> Is the directory where the temporary data

of the tasks are stored
<log-file>
is the file that will contain the messages

normally sent to the computation status
box, information boxes, warning boxes and
error boxes.
Start from the Geometry Work Sheet

This is the most convenient way to use the batch process. Proceed, like in the interactive LMS FALANCS usage, just check
the Start in batch mode option in the Job initialization window.
Fig. 117:
Window "Job Setup Window"
The command starting the batch processing is set in the section [Batch Processing] of the configuration file
falancs.ini by the entry
GWSBatchProgram = <command>
Here GWS folder file name may be masked by

%1
Hence the default entry:

GWSBatchProgram = falbatch del %1
starts the batch processing immediately after the job is started

by applying the OK button or the Apply button in the Geometry Work Sheet. In the default case no notification script is
started. The del option deletes the input GWS folder after
completion.
F-325
This entry should be replaced by a command that queues the

job in your batch environment. Refer to the latter section for
the specification of starting the batch jobs from the command
line. Please contact your system administration to supply you
with the necessary information how to set this entry.
F-326
Generating Batch Command Files
F-327
Generating Batch Command Files

This chapter gives information about generating batch command files.
Using the Geometry Work Sheet File menu

Batch command files may directly be generated from Geometry
Work Sheets by using the FileSave as option in the File
menu of the Geometry Work Sheet. Choose the format GWSFolder (ASCII full) or GWS-Folder (ASCII ref) and select a
file name for the Batch Command File.
Converting Geometry Worksheets to a Batch

Command File
A batch command file in ASCII format (*.fal) can be made by
z converting the contents of the Geometry Work Sheet folder.
The GWS folder is saved using the menu item FileSave
as... of the Geometry Work Sheet. It is stored in the batch
command file format directly by selecting the format GWSFolder (ASCII full) or GWS-Folder (ASCII ref).
Or
z using a command is available to do the conversion automatically.
It is invoked by:
tecware falgws2i <folder to convert> <output command file>
where
<folder to convert> is the file name of the binary Geometry

Work Sheet folder to convert
F-328
and
<output command file> is the name of the batch command
file to generate.
The option is useful for initially setting up the Geometry Work
Sheet interactively, and then later editing this folder and executing LMS FALANCS in batch mode.
Write a new or edit an old Batch command

File
You can use your favorite ASCII file editor to generate a new
or edit an existing batch command file. In the next chapter the
structure of the batch command files is described.
Ensure that all relevant information is provided if you write
your own batch command file. Be careful that all database entries exist in your currently used database and check the
spelling of the entry names and file names.
A batch command file can be checked if you load it from the
File Menu of interactive LMS FALANCS, and use the check
option in the Geometry Work Sheet (menu item Check
Files).
The Batch Command File
F-329

There exist two versions of the batch command file:
ASCII full
This version includes all parameter values from chosen parameter data sets.
ASCII ref.
In this version only references to parameter set values in
the database are stored.
Both versions have their special applications.
The file is structured in sections in the form
[heading]
followed by keywords and their values:

keyword = <value>
where [heading] is the name of the section and <value> may be

a numerical value or a text string.
If there are only certain choices available, then the choices are
indicated with a vertical line (|).
Path Specification
If file names must be given in the command file, then the path
specification follows the UNIX notation. For example,
$TEST_ROOT/Input/AS/woehler4.dat
$TEST_ROOT/Input/IF/$SYSTYP/demo.erg
F-330
Job Section [Job]

The section [Job] describes the general settings of the job
given in the Job Initialization window if LMS FALANCS is run
interactively.
NAME
Syntax:
Name=job name
Function:
Specifies the type size used by the dialog manager.

Argument
job name
Type
string
Meaning
valid file name
COMMENT
Syntax:
Comment=comment
Function:
Specifies the text saved as comment to the job.

Argument
comment
Type
string
Meaning
any text
APPROACH
Syntax:
Approach=STRESS | STRAIN
Function:
Specifies the used approach.
PROGRAM
Syntax:
Program=DAM | FSE | FEM_NP | FEM_P
Function:
Specifies the analysis type.

Argument
DAM
FSE
FEM_NP
FEM_P
Type
Meaning
non-FEM damage analysis
fatigue sensitive editing
non-proportional FEM
proportional FEM
F-331
LINES
Syntax:
Lines=value
Function:
Specifies the number of rows in the Geometry

Work Sheet (i.e. the number of tasks).
Argument Type
Meaning
value
integer
number of tasks
Remark: In the following we assume to have m tasks.
COLUMNS
Syntax:
Columns=value
Function:
Specifies the number of columns in the Geometry

Work Sheet (i.e. the number of load histories or
FEM load cases, for FEM analysis - to process).
Argument Type
Meaning
value
integer
number of columns
Remark: In the following we assume to have n columns.
F-332
Task Section [Tasks]

Under the [Tasks] heading are the names of the tasks to process. There must be as many defined tasks as there are given
for the number of rows in the Job section.
I
Syntax:
i=task name
Function:
Specifies the name of a task in the Geometry

Work Sheet (i.e. the number of tasks).
Argument
i
Type
integer
Meaning
number of a task in the GWS
i=1,...Lines
task name string
name of the i-th task
Remark: There must be as many defined tasks as the specified number
of rows ( parameter Lines in section [Job]).
Example for Section [Task]

[Tasks]
1 = <Name of task 1>
2 = <Name of task 2>
.
.
.
m = <Name of task m>
F-333
Method Parameter Section [MethodParam]

In this section the method parameter set is described. There is
always exactly one method parameter set for each file.
See the chapter The Data Sheet for Method Parameters for a
detailed description of the single parameters.
Reference only version

The name of the parameter set and the name of the section in
the section in the falancs.ini are given in the section
[MethodParam]
NAME
Syntax
Name=material parameter
Function:
Specifies the name of the parameter set.

Argument
material
parameter
Type
string
Meaning
material parameter set
DBSECTION
Syntax
DBSection=section
Function:
Specifies the section in the falancs.ini defining

the database the material parameter Name is
stored in.
Argument
section
Type
string
Meaning
section name in falancs.ini
F-334
Full version
The full parameter set is given in the section [Method Param]
NAME
Syntax
Name=material parameter
Function:
Specifies the name of the parameter set.

Argument
material
parameter
Type
string
Meaning
material parameter set
DBSECTION
Syntax
DBSection=section
Function:

the database the material parameter Name is
stored in.
Argument
section
Type
string
Meaning
NOOFCRITPLANES
Syntax
NoOfCritPlanes=number
Function:
Specifies the number of critical planes used in the

non proportional FEM critical plane approaches.
Argument
number
Default: 18
Type
integer
Meaning
number of critical planes
NOOFRFMCLASSES
Syntax
NoOfRFMClasses=number
Function:
Specifies the number of rainflow bins used for

rainflow counting in the non-FEM analysis.
Argument
number
Type
integer
Meaning
number of classes
F-335
TSDEXACT
Syntax
TSDExact=0 | 1
Function:
Specifies the handling of the residue in test

schedule definition based analyses.
Argument
1
Type
Meaning
after each event of the test schedule
there remains a residue of unclosed
loops that may also influence the
simulation of the next event
the influence of the residue is ignored
0
Default: 0
Remark: In the non-FEM stress approach, the residue is always taken
into account.
FSE
Syntax
FSE=0 | 1
Function:
The parameter Fatigue Sensitive Editing specifies

whether the history reduction can be performed
on the results of a Non-FEM analysis or not.
Argument
0
Type
1
Default: 0
Meaning
no history reduction may be performed
the history reduction may be performed
FILTERWIDTH--C
Syntax
FilterWidth--c=number
Function:
Specifies the number of defined filter widthes.

Argument
number
Type
integer
Meaning
number of defined filter widthes
F-336
FILTERWIDTH--I
Syntax
FilterWidth--i=width
Function:
Specifies the filter widths for filter runs.

Argument
width
Type
real
Meaning
i-th filter width
i=1...FilterWidth--c
Remark: Filterwidth--1 > Filterwidth--2 > .. > Filterwidth--c.
See the description of the parameter Filterwidth for filter runs in the
panel RPFilter of the data sheet for method parameters for further information.
NOOFPROJECTIONS
Syntax
NoOfProjections=number
Function:
Specifies the number of projection directions for

the rainflow projector during a nonproportional
analysis.
Argument
number
Default: 250
Type
integer
Meaning
number of projection directions
TOLANGLE
Syntax
TolAngle=angle
Function:
Specifies the tolerance angle (in degrees) used for

identifying similar directions in the rainflow projector.
Argument
angle
Default: 10
Type
real
Meaning
tolerance angle
F-337
NORMQUOTIENT
Syntax
NormQuotient=quotient
Function:
Specifies the maximum norm quotient.
Argument Type
Meaning
quotient
integer
norm quotient
Default: 100000
Remark: See the description of the parameter Maximum norm quotient in the panel NP FEM of the data sheet for method parameters for
ELIMSAFETYFACTOR
Syntax
ElimSafetyFactor=factor
Function:
Specifies a numerical criterion for node elimination.

Argument
factor
Type
integer
Meaning
numerical criterion
Default: 100
Remark: See the description of the parameter Elimination safety factor in the panel NP FEM of the data sheet for method parameters for
USEABSELIMLIMIT
Syntax
UseAbsElimLimit=0 | 1
Function:
Specifies wheter the value of AbsElimLimit is

used in the node elimination runs.
Argument
0
1
Default: 0
Type
Meaning
the value of the <Elimination
threshold> is automatically chosen
from the elimination run
AbsElimLimit is used as <Elimination threshold>
F-338
ABSELIMLIMIT
Syntax
AbsElimLimit=factor
Function:
Specifies the absolut elimination limit. Used in

elimination runs if UseAbsElimLimit is activated.
Argument Type
Meaning
factor
real
numerical criterion
Default: 0.001
Remark: See the description of the parameter Absolute elimination
threshold in the panel NP FEM of the data sheet for method parameters for further information.
STRAINLIFEFORALL
Syntax
StrainLifeForAll=0 | 1
Function:
Specifies wheter the strain-life approach will be

used to calculate damage for filtered load histories.
Default: 1
Argument
0
1
Type
Meaning
stress-life approach is used
strain-life approach is used
SHOWNODEELIM
Syntax
ShowNodeElim=0 | 1
Function:
Specifies the value written to Result 2.

Argument
0
1
Meaning
the ratio of the design life value (N_Design)
and the computed life (N) is used
the elimination run number is used
Default: 0
Remark: See the description of the parameter Result 2 in the panel
FEM Results of the data sheet for method parameters for further information.
F-339
FEMWRITEDAMAGE
Syntax
FEMWriteDamage=WriteDamageMinerSum |
WriteDamageRecLifeTime | WriteDamageLifeTime
Function:
Specifies which of the computed values is saved as

Result 1 in the LMS FALANCS result file.
Argument
WriteDamageMinerSum
WriteDamageRecLifeTime
WriteDamageLifeTime
Meaning
The Miner Sum is used
The value 1.0 / (number of sustainable repetitions) is used
The number of sustainable repetitions is used
Default: WriteDamageMinerSum
FEMWRITEDAMLOG
Syntax
FEMWriteDamLog=0 | 1
Function:
Specifies the display of the results written to Result 1.

Argument
0
1
Default: 1
Type
Meaning
the damage values are written to the
result file as they are
the logarithm of the damage is displayed such that contour plots with
equidistant contour lines can be used
to display
F-340
LOGD_INFINITELIFE
Syntax
LogD_InfiniteLife=value
Function:
Specifies the logarithmic value to be written into

the result file if the damage is below the endurance limit (infinite life).
Argument
value
Default: -30
Type
real
Meaning
indicator value for infinite life
STATICFAILFACTOR
Syntax
StaticFailFactor=factor
Function:
Specifies the factor which is multiplied with

'Limit Damage Sum' before writing into the result
file if a static failure occurred.
Argument
factor
Default: -100
Type
integer
Meaning
factor
FEMWRITESIGMA
Syntax
FEMWriteSigma=ShowSigmaOverSigmaDesign |
ShowSigmaMax | ShowSigmaMaxAmplitude |
ShowSigmaSafetyFactor
Function:
Argument
Meaning
ShowSigmaOverSigmaDesign the load design factor is written
ShowSigmaMax
the maximum absolute stress
encountered during the loading is written
ShowSigmaMaxAmplitude
the maximum stress amplitude encountered during the
loading is written
ShowSigmaSafetyFactor
The safety factor is written
Default: ShowSigmaOverSigmaDesign
F-341
FEMWRITEDAM5
Syntax
FEMWriteDam5=WriteDamRPNorm | WriteDamTaskNr| WriteDamHotSpots
Function:

Argument
WriteDamRPNorm
WriteDamTaskNr
WriteDamHotSpots
Meaning
the RF Norm is written
for each task its number is written is
written
the number of the hot spot to which an
element belongs to is written
Default: WriteDamRPNorm
CALCHOTSPOTS
Syntax
CalcHotspots =0 | 1
Function:
Specifies whether the hot spot calculation is performed.
Default: 0
Argument
0
1
Meaning
the hot spot calculation is not performed
the hot spot calculation is performed
HSMINDAMAGE
Syntax
HSMinDamage=value
Function:
Elements below the given damage value are not

taken into account (hot spot calculation).
Argument
value
Default: --30
Type
integer
Meaning
limit damage value
F-342
HSTHRESHOLD
Syntax
HSThreshold=value
Function:
Specifies the damage D (in logarithmic scale) of

the hot spot (hot spot calculation).
Argument
value
Type
real
Meaning
damage D
Default: --1.2
Remark: See the description of the parameter Threshold (log) in the
panel Hot Spots of the data sheet for method parameters for further information.
HSMAXCOUNT
Syntax
HSMaxCount=number
Function:
Specifies the maximum number of hot spots which

are determined(hot spot calculation).
Argument
number
Type
integer
Meaning
maximum number of hot spots
Default: -20
Remark: The hot spots are sorted in such a way, that the damage of the
center element is descending.
HSMINNEIGHBORS
Syntax
HSMinNeighbors=number
Function:
Controls the size of the hot spots, which are to be

detected (hot spot calculation).
Argument
number
Type
integer
Meaning
defines the number of considered
neighbors
Default: -1
Remark: See the description of the parameter Minimum size in the
panel Hot Spots of the data sheet for method parameters for further information.
F-343
GENSTRESS
Syntax
GenStress=0 | 1
Function:
Specifies whether stress-time series are generated

when performing Local Time Series (LTS.
Argument
0
1
Meaning
no stress-time series are generated
stress-time series are generated
Default: 1
Remark: See the description of the parameter Generate strain time
series in the panel LTS of the data sheet for method parameters for further information.
GENSTRAIN
Syntax
GenStrain=0 | 1
Function:
Specifies whether strain-time series are generated

when performing Local Time Series (LTS).
Argument
0
1
Meaning
no strain-time series are generated
strain-time series are generated
Default: 0
PROJECTIONANGLE
Syntax
ProjectionAngle=0 | 1
Function:
Specifies whether a defined angle will be used for

generating strain time series in the specified direction.
Argument
0
1
Default: 0
Meaning
no -strain time series in the specified direction
are generated
strain time series in the specified direction are
generated
F-344
PROJECTIONANGLEVALUE
Syntax
ProjectionAngleValue=angle
Function:
Specifies an angle that will be used for generating

strain time series if ProjectionAngle is activated.
Argument
angle
Default: 0
Type
integer
Meaning
Angle in degrees
GENFORCEANDMOMENT
Syntax
GenForceAndMoment=0 | 1
Function:
Specifies whether time series for forces and moments are generated in the Stress-life Approach
when performing Local Time Series (LTS.
Argument
0
1
Meaning
no -time series for forces and moments are
generated
time series for forces and moments are generated
Default: 0
Example for Section [MethodParam] (full version)

[MethodParam]
Name = "Default"
DBSection = "MethodParam_Default"
NoOfCritPlanes = 18
NoOfRFMClasses = 100
TSDExact = 0
FSE = 0
FilterWidth--c = 2
FilterWidth--1 = 0.7
NoOfProjections = 250
TolAngle = 10
NormQuotient = 100000
ElimSafetyFactor = 100
UseAbsElimLimit = 0
AbsElimLimit = 0.001
StrainLifeForAll = 1
FEMWriteDamage = WriteDamageMinerSum
FEMWriteDamLog = 1
ShowNodeElim = 0
LogD_InfiniteLife = -30
StaticFailFactor = 100
FEMWriteSigma = ShowSigmaOverSigmaDesign
FEMWriteDam5 = WriteDamRPNorm
CalcHotspots = 0
HSMinDamage = -30
HSThreshold = 1.2
HSMaxCount = 20
HSMinNeighbors = 1
GenStress = 1
GenStrain = 0
GenForceAndMoment = 0
ProjectionAngle = 0
ProjectionAngleValue = 0
F-345
F-346
SN-Curve section [SNCurve]

The section [SNCurve] is only available for stress-life analysis.
See the chapter The Data Sheet for Stress-Life Curves and
Dang Van Data for a detailed description of the single parameters in the full version.

In the section [SNCurve], the name of each material that corresponds to each task and the corresponding database section
in the falancs.ini must be listed. It is important to note that
these names reference the SN-curve files in the SN-curve database, and it is possible that these properties could be modified
before the batch job executes.
I
Syntax:
i=curve name
Function:
Specifies the name of a SN-curve.

Argument
i
Type
Meaning
integer number of SN-curve
i=1, ..., Lines
curve name
string name of the i-th SN-curve
Remark: There must be as many defined CURVES as the specified number of rows ( parameter Lines in section [Job]).
F-347
DB_I
Syntax:
DB_i=section
Function:
Specifies a section in the falancs.ini wherein

the database is defined that contains the i-th SNcurve.
Argument
i
Type
integer
Meaning
number of SN-curve
i=1,...number of SN-curves
section
string
corresponding section in the falancs.ini
Remark: There must be as many section entries as SN-curves.
Example for Section [SNCurve] (reference only)

[SN-Curve]
1 = <Name of SN-Curve 1>
DB_1 = <name of section in falancs.ini of SN-Curve 1>
2 = <Name of SN-Curve 2>
DB_2 = <name of section in falancs.ini of SN-Curve 2>
...
m = <Name of SN-Curve m>
DB_m = <name of section in falancs.ini of SN-Curve m>
Full version
For each task an individual section
[SNCurve_1]
...
[SNCurve_2]
...
...
[SNCurve_m]
...
where m is the number of the task is given. Each section defines the values for a complete SN-curve.
F-348
NAME
Syntax
Name=name
Function:
Specifies the name of the SN-curve.

Argument
name
Type
string
Meaning
curve name
DBSECTION
Syntax
DBSection=section
Function:

the database the SN-curve Name is stored in.
Argument
section
Type
string
Meaning
COMMENT
Syntax
Comment=text
Function:
Specifies the text saved as comment to the SNcurve.

Argument
text
Type
string
Meaning
comment
UNIT
Syntax
Unit=MPa | Pa | N | Nm
Function:
Specifies the unit for the tensile and compressive

strength.
Default: "MPa"
Remark: The unit is used only for displaying the data! No internal conversion is performed based on the unit.
F-349
SMAX
Syntax
Smax=value
Function:
Specifies the material tensile strength.
Argument Type
Meaning
value
real
(0, 10E+10]
Remark: If this value is exceeded by the maximum value in the time history, a static failure mode is reported.
SMIN
Syntax
Smin=value
Function:
Specifies the material compressive strength.
Argument Type
Meaning
value
string
(0, 10E+10]
Remark: If this value is exceeded by the maximum value in the time history, a static failure mode is reported.
S1
Syntax
S1=value
Function:
Specifies the stress at the intersection point of the

regions with slope k1 and k2.
Argument
value
Default:
Remark: If .
Type
real
Meaning
stress value
F-350
SE
Syntax
Se=value
Function:
Specifies the stress amplitude at the endurancelimit .

Argument
value
Type
real
Meaning
Load value
TE
Syntax
Te=value
Function:
Specifies the Tau value for Dang Van limit curve

Argument
value
Type
integer
Meaning
tau
ALPHA
Syntax
alpha=value
Function:
Specifies the value of alpha for Dang Van limit

curve.
Argument
value
Default:
Remark: If .
Type
real
Meaning
alpha
K1
Syntax
k1=value
Function:
Specifies the slope of a Whler curve for S > S1.

Argument
value
Default:
Remark: If .
Type
real
Meaning
k1
F-351
K2
Syntax
k2=value
Function:
Specifies the slope of a Whler curve for S < S1.

Argument
value
Type
integer
Meaning
k2
NE
Syntax
Ne=value
Function:
Specifies the number of cycles at the endurance

limit.
Argument
value
Type
real
Meaning
number of cycles
SMHAT
Syntax
SmHat=value
Function:
Specifies the R-ratio: R =

Argument
value
Type
real
SmHat 1
.
SmHat + 1
Meaning
parameter for R-ratio
Remark: SmHat corresponds to the parameter

Representation of SN curves (Woehler type).
Sm
in the chapter Data
SNCURVETYPE
Syntax
SNCurveType=SNCTypeSNCurve | SNCTypeBastenaire
Function:
Specifies type of stress-life curve.

Argument
SNCTypeSNCurve
SNCTypeBastenaire
Meaning
SN-curve in Whler form
SN-curve in Bastenaire form
F-352
DANGVANTYPE
Syntax
DangVanType=DVTypeDangVan |
DVTypeDangVanMultiPoints
Function:
Specifies type of Dang Van data.

Argument
DVTypeDangVan
Meaning
Simple Dang Van data
Multiple points definition
DANGVANPOINTSP--C
Syntax
DangVanPointsP--c=value
Function:
Specifies the number of Dang Van points (pressure component).
Argument Type
Meaning
value
integer
number of Dang Van points
Remark: For DangVanType=DVTypeDangVan one point is needed. For
DangVanType=DVTypeDangVanMultiPoints several points are to be
defined. DangVanPointsP--c = DangVanPointsT--c.
DANGVANPOINTSP--I
Syntax
DangVanPointsP--i=value
Function:
Specifies the pressure of the i-th Dang Van point.

Argument
i
Type
integer
value
real
Meaning
Number of the Dang Van point,
i=1, ..., DangVanPointsP--c
pressure
F-353
DANGVANPOINTST--C
Syntax
DangVanPointsT--c=value
Function:
Specifies the number of Dang Van points (tau

component)..
Argument Type
Meaning
value
integer
number of Dang Van points
Remark: For DangVanType=DVTypeDangVan one point is needed. For
DangVanType=DVTypeDangVanMultiPoints several points are to be
defined. DangVanPointsT--c = DangVanPointsP--c.
DANGVANPOINTST--I
Syntax
DangVanPointsT--i=value
Function:
Specifies the tau value of the i-th Dang Van point.

Argument
i
Type
integer
value
real
Meaning
number of the Dang Van point,
i=1, ..., DangVanPointsT--c
tau
BASTENAIREA
Syntax
BastenaireB=value
Function:
Specifies the parameter A in the Bastenaire equation for maximum stresses.
Argument Type
Meaning
value
real
parameter A
Remark: The Bastenaire equation for maximum stresses (amplitude no S S C
A
E
.
exp
tation) has the form N =
B
S SE
F-354
BASTENAIREB
Syntax
BastenaireB=value
Function:
Specifies the parameter B in the Bastenaire equation for maximum stresses.

Argument
value
Type
real
Meaning
parameter B
Default:
Remark: See BastenaireA for the Bastenaire equation.
BASTENAIREC
Syntax
BastenaireC=value
Function:
Specifies the parameter C in the Bastenaire equation for maximum stresses.

Argument
value
Type
real
Meaning
parameter C
Default:
Remark: See BastenaireA for the Bastenaire equation.
Example for Section [SNCurve] (full version)

[SNCurve_1]
Creator = zingsheim
Modifier =zingsheim
Created = 02-11-1999 10:32:03
Modified =06-03-2002 15:13:16
[Data]
Name = "R1MS (R=0)"
Comment = "Lit.: FKM Schweissverbindung II; 180; 1994"
DBSection = ""
Unit = "MPa"
Smax = 20000
Smin = 40000
S1 = 129.68
Se = 129.68
Te = 129.68
alpha = -1.5
k1 = 3
k2 = 3
Ne = 5e+006
SmHat = 1
SNCurveType = SNCTypeSNCurve
DangVanType = DVTypeDangVan
DangVanPointsP--c = 2
DangVanPointsP--1 = 0
DangVanPointsP--2 = 86.4519
DangVanPointsT--c = 2
DangVanPointsT--1 = 129.678
DangVanPointsT--2 = 0
BastenaireA = 6e+007
BastenaireB = 1300
BastenaireC = 2.5
F-355
F-356
Material Section [Material]

The material section [Material] is only available for strainlife analysis.
See the chapter The Data Sheet for Material Data for a detailed
description of the single parameters in the full version.

In the [Material] section, the name of each material that
corresponds to each task and the corresponding section in the
falancs.ini must be listed. It is important to note that these
names reference the material files in the material database,
and it is possible that these properties could be modified before
the batch job executes.
I
Syntax:
i=name
Function:
Specifies the name of a material parameter set.

Argument
i
Type
Meaning
integer number of material parameter set
i=1, ..., Lines
name
string name of the i-th material parameter
set
Remark: There must be as many defined materials as the specified
number of rows ( parameter Lines in section [Job]).
DB_I
Syntax:
DB_i=section
Function:

the database is defined that contains the i-th material parameter set.
Argument
i
section
Type
integer
string
Meaning
number of material parameter
F-357
Remark: There must be as many section entries as material parameter

sets.
Example for Section [Material] (reference only)

[Material]
1 = <Name of material 1>
DB_1 = <name of section in falancs.ini of material 1>
2 = <Name of
DB_2 = <name
.
.
.
m = <Name of
DB_m = <name
material 2>
of section in falancs.ini of material 1>
material m>
of section in falancs.ini of material 1>
Full version
[Material_1]
[Material_2]
.
.
.
[Material_m]
where m is the number of the task is given. Each section defines the values for a complete material data set.
NAME
Syntax
Name=name
Function:
Specifies the name of the material.

Argument
name
Type
string
Meaning
material name
F-358
DBSECTION
Syntax
DBSection=section
Function:

the database the material Name is stored in.
Argument
section
Type
string
Meaning
COMMENT
Syntax
Comment=text
Function:
Specifies the text saved as comment to the material.

Argument
text
Type
string
Meaning
comment
NE
Syntax
Ne=value
Function:
Specifies the number of cycles.
Argument
value
Default: 5.0677E+5
Type
real
Meaning
number of cycles, [1, 1e12]
SIGE
Syntax
SigE=value
Function:
Specifies the stress amplitude in MPa.

Argument
value
Type
integer
Meaning
Stress amplitude, (0,1000]
F-359
EPSE
Syntax
EpsE=value
Function:
Specifies the strain amplitude in percent at the

endurance limit.
Argument
value
Type
integer
Meaning
Stress amplitude, (0,10]
SMHAT
Syntax
SmHat=value
Function:
Specifies the R-ratio: R =

Argument
value
Type
integer
SmHat 1
.
SmHat + 1
Meaning
parameter for R-ratio
Remark: SmHat corresponds to the parameter

Representation of SN curves (Woehler type).
Sm
in the chapter Data
TENSTRENGTH
Syntax
TenStrength=value
Function:
Specifies the tensile strength if LimitDefinition=LimitTypeStress.
Argument Type
Meaning
value
real
tensile strength, >0
Default: 600 MPa (stress)
Remark: If this value is exceeded by the maximum or minimum value in
the time history, a static failure mode is reported.
Remark: See the description of the parameter Tensile Strength in the
area Static Failure Data of the data sheet for material parameters for
F-360
COMPRSTRENGTH
Syntax
ComprStrength=value
Function:
Specifies the compressive strength if LimitDefinition=LimitTypeStress.
Argument Type
Meaning
value
real
compressive strength, >0
Default: 1800 MPa (stress)
Remark: If this value is exceeded by the maximum or minimum value in
the time history, a static failure mode is reported.
Remark: See the description of the parameter Compressive Strength
in the area Static Failure Data of the data sheet for material parameters for further information.
MATSTRAINTYPE
Syntax
MatStrainType=MatDataTypeTension | MatDataTypeTorsion
Function:
Specifies the test type.
Argument
Meaning
MatDataTypeTension tension tests were performed
MatDataTypeTorsion torsion test were performed
Default: MatDataTypeTension
Remark: If you have performed torsion tests to determine your parameters, you have to set the letter parameter to Torsion so that your parameters are correctly interpreted. In this case, you must enter the torsional data in the appropriate fields, e.g. G in the E field, etc. If axial
tests have been performed and the data is to be used in a torsion analysis,
be sure to enter the correct value for the Poisson's ratio in area Multiaxial material model (Jiang).
F-361
SIG_FSTRICH
Syntax
sig_fStrich=value
Function:
Specifies the fatigue strength coefficient used in

the Manson-Coffin-Morrow relation.
Argument
value
Type
real
Meaning
fatigue strength coefficient in MPa
(0,4000]
Default: 900
Remark: See the description of the parameter Fatigue Strength Coefficient in the area Manson-Coffin-Morrow Relation of the data sheet
for material parameters for further information.
EPSE
Syntax
EpsE=value
Function:
Specifies the fatigue ductility coefficient used in

Argument
value
Type
real
Meaning
fatigue ductility coefficient
(0,10]
Default: 0.59
Remark: See the description of the parameter Fatigue Ductility Coefficient in the area-Manson-Coffin-Morrow Relation of the data sheet
B
Syntax
b=value
Function:
Specifies the fatigue strength exponent used in

Argument
value
Type
real
Meaning
fatigue strength exponent
(-1,0]
Default: -0.087
Remark: See the description of the parameter Fatigue Strength Exponent in the area-Manson-Coffin-Morrow Relation of the data sheet
F-362
C
Syntax
c=value
Function:
Specifies the fatigue ductility exponent used in

Argument
value
Type
real
Meaning
fatigue ductility exponent
(-4,0]
Default: -0.58
Remark: See the description of the parameter Fatigue Ductility Exponent in the area Manson-Coffin-Morrow Relation of the data sheet
EMOD
Syntax
Emod=value
Function:
Specifies the modulus of elasticity in MPa

(Young's modulus) used in the Ramberg-Osgood
relation.
Argument
Value
Type
real
Meaning
Young's modulus
[100,1e7]
Default: 2E+5
Remark: See the description of the parameter Young's Modulus in the
area Ramberg-Osgood Relation of the data sheet for material parameters for further information.
VERFKOEFF
Syntax
VerfKoeff=value
Function:
Specifies the cyclic hardening coefficient used in

the Ramberg-Osgood relation.
Argument
value
Type
real
Meaning
cyclic hardening coefficient
[100, Emod]
Default: 990
Remark: See the description of the parameter Cyclic Hardening Coefficient in the area Ramberg-Osgood Relation of the data sheet for
material parameters for further information.
F-363
NSTRICH
Syntax
nStrich=value
Function:
Specifies the cyclic hardening exponent used in

the Ramberg-Osgood relation.
Argument
value
Type
real
Meaning
cyclic hardening exponent
(0.03, 0.5)
Default: 0.15
Remark: See the description of the parameter Cyclic Hardening Exponent in the area Ramberg-Osgood Relation of the data sheet for
material parameters for further information.
POISSON
Syntax
Poisson=value
Function:
Specifies the poisson's ratio used in Jiang's model.

Argument
value
Default: 0.29
Type
real
Meaning
poisson's ratio
CHI
Syntax
Chi=value
Function:
Specifies the ratchetting parameter Chi used in

Jiang's model.
Argument
value
Default: 5
Type
integer
Meaning
ratchetting parameter
BACKSTRESS
Syntax
BackStress=value
Function:
Specifies the number of backstresses used in

Jiang's model.
Argument
value
Default: 5
Type
integer
Meaning
number of backstresses
F-364
LIMITDEFINITION
Syntax
LimitDefinition=LimitTypeStress | LimitTypeStrain | LimitTypeEstimate
Function:
Specifies how the parameter TenStrength and

ComprStrength are given.
Argument
LimitTypeStress
Meaning
data are given in terms of engineering
stresses (parameters TenStrength and
ComprStrength),
the strains are calculated from the
stresses using the Ramberg-Osgoodrelation
the parameters TensileStrainLimit
and CompressiveStrainLimit are ignored
LimitTypeStrain
data are defined in percent (parameters
TensileStrainLimit and CompressiveStrainLimit),
the stresses are re-calculated using the
Ramberg-Osgood-relation
the parameters TenStrength and
ComprStrength are ignored
LimitTypeEstimate data are estimated from the cyclic failure data
Default: LimitTypeStress
ENDURANCEDEFINITION
Syntax
EnduranceDefinition=EnduranceTypeCycles |
EnduranceTypeStress | EnduranceTypeStrain
Function:
Specifies which value to specify the endurance

limit is given by the user. The two remaining ones
are calculated using the Ramberg-Osgood and the
Manson-Coffin-Morrow relations.
Argument
Meaning
EnduranceTypeCycles the number of cycles (parameter Ne)
is defined by the user
EnduranceTypeStress the stress amplitude (parameter
SigE) is defined by the user
EnduranceTypeStrain the strain amplitude (parameter
EpsE) is defined by the user
Default: EnduranceTypeCycles
F-365
TENSILESTRAINLIMIT
Syntax
TensileStrainLimit=value
Function:
Specifies the tensile strength as strain in percent

if LimitDefinition=LimitTypeStrain.
Argument
value
Type
real
Meaning
tensile strength
COMPRESSIVESTRAINLIMIT
Syntax
BackStress=value
Function:
Specifies the compressive strength as strain in

percent if
LimitDefinition=LimitTypeStrain
Argument
value
Type
real
Meaning
compressive strength
Example for Section [Material] (full version)

[Material_1]
Name = "Al_Mg_4.5_Mn"
Comment = ""
DBSection = "Material_Default"
Emod = 71500
Ne = 1e+006
SigE = 178.94
EpsE = 0.002522
SmHat = 0
TenStrength = 472.308
ComprStrength = 1416.93
MatStrainType = MatDataTypeTension
sig_fStrich = 654
eps_fStrich = 0.45
b = -0.089
c = -0.755
VerfKoeff = 693
nStrich = 0.125
Poisson = 0.29
Chi = 5
BackStress = 5
LimitDefinition = LimitTypeStress
EnduranceDefinition = EnduranceTypeCycles
F-366
Solution Parameter Section [SolParam]

The [SolParam] section is available in both the Stress-life
Approach and the Strain-life Approach.

In the [SolParam] section, the name of each solution parameter set that corresponds to each task and the corresponding section in falancs.ini must be listed. It is important to
note that these names reference the solution parameter set
files in the solution parameter database, and it is possible that
these solution parameters could be modified before the batch
job executes.
I
Syntax:
i=name
Function:
Specifies the name of a solution parameter set.

Argument
i
Type
Meaning
integer number of solution parameter set
i=1, ..., Lines
name
string name of the i-th solution parameter
set
Remark: There must be as many defined solution parameter sets as the
specified number of rows ( parameter Lines in section [Job]).
DB_I
Syntax:
DB_i=section
Function:

the database is defined that contains the i-th solution parameter set.
Argument Type
Meaning
i
integer number of solution parameter set
section
string
Remark: There must be as many section entries as solution parameter
sets.
F-367
Example for Section [SolParam] (reference only)

[SolParam]
1 = <Name of solution parameter 1>
DB_1 = <name of section in falancs.ini
of solution parameter 1>
2 = <Name of solution parameter 2>
DB_2 = <name of section in falancs.ini
of solution parameter 2>
.
.
.
m = <Name of solution parameter m>
DB_m = <name of section in falancs.ini
of solution parameter m>
Full version
[SolParam_1]
[SolParam_2]
.
.
.
[SolPara_m]
where m is the number of the task is given. Each section defines the values for a complete solution parameter data set.
The solution parameter data sets for stress-life and strain-life
are different. See the following for two examples of stress-life
and strain-life parameter sets and the description of the used
parameters.
Example for Section [SolParam] in Stress-life

Approach (full version)
[SolParam_1]
Name = "Critical plane, open mode (I), Goodman correction"
Comment = ""
DBSection = "SolpStress_Default"
Approach = Approach_Stress
MeanStressCorr = Goodman
M1 = 0
M2 = 0.3
M3 = 0
R_lim = 1
F-368
DamageAccum = MinerElem
SpotwDiameter = 5
SpotwSNShift = 0.7
SpotwCalcNugget = 1
SurfCorr = 1
SizeCorr = 1
LimitDamSum = 1
LocStressState = PstressCritPlaneMode1
DiffChanLength = Truncate
UnknownVar = Life
ProbOfFail = 50
Life = 1000
LifeDim = Blocks
LoadLevel = 1
DespTol = 0.05
Axis = AxisLoadLevel
AxisType = Automatic
ComppTol = 0.1
CompPoints--c = 0
Example for Section [SolParam] in Strain-life

Approach (full version)
[SolParam_1]
Name = "Pseudo stress, critical plane, max shear
(II+III), P_SWT"
Comment = ""
DBSection = "SolpStrain_Default"
Approach = Approach_Strain
SurfCorr = 1
SizeCorr = 1
LimitDamSum = 1
LocStressState = PstressCritPlaneMaxTau
UnknownVar = Life
ProbOfFail = 50
Life = 1000
LifeDim = Blocks
LoadLevel = 1
DespTol = 0.05
ComppTol = 0.1
CompPoints--c = 0
LNStrainRel = Neuber
StrainFile = ""
LimLoadRatio = 2.5
DamageParam = DamPSWTTau
ResidualStress = 0
ResidStressUnit = "MPa"
k_Bergmann = 0
PwlLinStart = 1000
PwlLinEnd = 200000
F-369
NAME
Syntax
Name=name
Function:
Specifies the name of the solution parameter set.
Argument Type
Meaning
name
string
solution parameter set name
Remark: used in Stress-life and Strain-life Approach.
DBSECTION
Syntax
DBSection=section
Function:

the database the solution parameter set Name is
stored in.
Argument Type
Meaning
section
string
COMMENT
Syntax
Comment=text
Function:
Specifies the text saved as comment to the solution parameter set.
Argument Type
Meaning
text
string
comment
APPROACH
Syntax
Approach=Approach_Stress | Approach_Strain
Function:
Specifies in which approach the solution parameter set may be used.
Argument
Meaning
Approach_Stress solution parameter for Stress-life Approach
Approach_Strain solution parameter for Stress-life Approach
F-370
SURFCORR
Syntax
SurfCorr=value
Function:
Specifies the surface correction parameter.

Argument
value
Type
integer
Meaning
surface correction parameter,
(0, 2]
Default: 1
Remark: used in Stress-life and Strain-life Approach. See the description
of the parameter Surface Correction in the area General of the data
sheet for solution parameters for further information.
SIZECORR
Syntax
SizeCorr=value
Function:
Specifies the size correction parameter .

Argument
value
Type
integer
Meaning
size correction parameter,
(0, 3]
Default: 1
of the parameter Size Correction in the area General of the data sheet
for solution parameters for further information.
LIMITDAMSUM
Syntax
LimitDamSum=value
Function:
Specifies a damage value limit other than unity

(relative Miners Rule). Any value greater than
zero may be used.
Argument
value
Type
integer
Meaning
damage value limit
Default: 1
of the parameter Limit Damage Sum in the area General of the data
sheet for solution parameters for further information.
F-371
DIFFCHANLENGTH
Syntax
DiffChanLength=Truncate | Fill | Repeat
Function:
Specifies the method to use when multiple channels have been selected for a fatigue analysis and
the channels have different lengths.
Argument
Truncate
Fill
Repeat
Meaning
the longer channels are truncated to the length of
the shortest channel
the shorter channels are filled with zeroes, until
it matches the length of the longest history
each history will be repeated until it matches the
length of the longest history
Default: Truncate
F-372
MEANSTRESSCORR
Syntax
MeanStressCorr=Goodman | StressCorrNone |
ThreeSegments | FourSegments | EC3Hes | EC3
| FKM | IIWHEs | IIWdW | IIWkEs | Tor1Seg
| Tor2Seg | Tor3Seg
Function:
Specifies the mean stress correction method.

Argument
Goodman
StressCorrNone
ThreeSegments
FourSegments
EC3Hes
EC3
FKM
IIWHEs
IIWdW
IIWkEs
Tor1Seg
Tor2Seg
Tor3Seg
Meaning, necessary parameters (defaults)

NS/Goodman
M1
no correction
NS/3 Segments
M1, M2, M3
NS/4 Segments
M1, M2, M3, Limit R
SW/NS/EC3 high RS
no parameters needed
SW/NS/EC3 low RS
SW/NS/FKM Recomm.
M1
SW/NS/IIW high RS (cat. III)
SW/NS/ IIW medium RS (cat. II)
SW/NS/IIW low RS (cat. I)
Torsion: 1 Segment
M1
Torsion: 2 Segments
M1, M3
Torsion: 3 Segments
M1, M3, Limit R
Default: StressCorrNone
Remark: used in Stress-life Approach only. See the description of the parameter Mean Stress Correction in the area Stress-life Approach of
the data sheet for solution parameters for further information.
F-373
M1
Syntax
M1=value
Function:
Specifies a parameter for the mean stress corrrection methods Goodman, ThreeSegments, FourSegments, FKM, Tor1Seg, Tor2Seg and
Tor3Seg (see parameter MeanStressCorr).
Argument
value
Type
real
Meaning
mean stress corrrection parameter,
(0, 1)
Default: 0.3
Remark: used in Stress-life Approach only.
M2
Syntax
M2=value
Function:
Specifies a parameter for the mean stress corrrection methods ThreeSegments and FourSegments (see parameter MeanStressCorr).
Argument
value
Type
real
Meaning
mean stress corrrection parameter
Default: 0.3
M3
Syntax
M3=value
Function:
Specifies a parameter for the mean stress corrrection methods ThreeSegments, FourSegments,
Tor2Seg and Tor3Seg (see parameter MeanStressCorr).
Argument
value
Type
real
Meaning
Default: 0.1
F-374
R_LIM
Syntax
R_lim=value
Function:
Specifies a parameter for the mean stress corrrection methods FourSegments and Tor3Seg (see
parameter MeanStressCorr).
Argument
value
Type
real
Meaning
Default: 0.15
Remark: used in Stress-life Approach only. See the description of the parameter Limit R in the area Stress-life Approach of the data sheet for
solution parameters for further information.
DAMAGEACCUM
Syntax
DamageAccum=MinerElem | MinerOrig | HaibMiner | LiuMiner
Function:
Specifies the damage accumulation method to use

for the fatigue analysis.
Argument
Meaning
MinerElem
elementary Miners Rule
MinerOrig
original Miners Rule
HaibMiner
Haibach correction (2k - 1)
LiuMiner
Liu/Zenner
Default: MinerElem
Remark: used in Stress-life Approach only. See the description of the parameter Damage Accumulation in the area Stress-life Approach of
the data sheet for solution parameters for further information.
F-375
SPOTWDIAMETER
Syntax
SpotwDiameter=value
Function:
Specifies the diameter of the spot weld in the

model of Rupp (LBF).
Argument
value
Type
integer
Meaning
diameter in the same unit as the
width of the shells
Default: 5
Remark: used in Stress-life Approach only. See the description of the parameter Diameter of spot welds to be analyzed in the area Spot
welds of the data sheet for solution parameters for further information.
SPOTWSNSHIFT
Syntax
SpotwSNShift=value
Function:
Specifies the shifting factor for the SN-Curve used

to calculate the nugget if SpotwCalcNugget=1.
Argument
value
Type
real
Meaning
shifting factor
Default: 0.7
Remark: used in Stress-life Approach only. See the description of the parameter Shift of nugget SN- curve against sheet in the area Spot
welds of the data sheet for solution parameters for further information.
F-376
SPOTWCALCNUGGET
Syntax
SpotwCalcNugget=0 | 1
Function:
Enables / disables the damage calculation in the

spot weld nugget.
Argument
0
Meaning
the damage evaluation is only performed
in the sheet at the weld toe and not inside
the nugget leading to less computational
effort
a damage calculation in the nugget is performed, too.
Default: 1
Remark: used in Stress-life Approach only. See the description of the parameter Calculate damage in the spot weld nugget too in the area
Spot welds of the data sheet for solution parameters for further information.
LOCSTRESSSTATE
Syntax
LocStressState=PstressCritPlaneMode1 |
PstressCritPlaneMaxTau | PstressSignedVonMises | LocStressSigma1 | LocStressSigma2 |
LocStressSigmaX | LocStressSigmaY | LocStressSigmaXY | PstressSpotWeld | DangVan |
CritplaneMode1 | CritPlaneMaxtau | SignedVonMises
Function:
Specifies the type of critical plane stress parameter to use, or equivalent stress parameter to use
during the FEM analysis or the LTS-Tensor
analysis.
Argument
Corresponding parameter in
solution parameter data sheet
Parameters used in both approaches:
PstressCritPlaneMode1
pseudo stress: crit. Plane, open
mode (I)
PstressCritPlaneMaxTau pseudo stress: crit. Plane, max
shear (II+III)
PstressSignedVonMises
pseudo stress: signed von Mises
LocStressSigma1
pseudo stress: maximum principle;
strain: maximum principle
LocStressSigma2
pseudo stress: intermediate prin-
F-377
ciple,
strain: intermediate principle
LocStressSigmaX
sigma x
LocStressSigmaY
sigma x
LocStressSigmaXY
sigma xy
Parameters used in stress-life approach only:
PstressSpotWeld
pseudo stress: spotweld
DangVan
pseudo stress: Dang Van
Parameters used in strain-life approach only:
CritplaneMode1
strain: crit. Plane, open mode (I)
CritPlaneMaxtau
strain: crit. Plane, max shear (II
+III)
SignedVonMises
strain: signed von Mises
Default: PstressCritPlaneMode1
Remark: See the description of the parameters in the area FEM/LTS:
Local Stress State of the data sheet for solution parameters for further
information.
UNKNOWNVAR
Syntax
UnknownVar=Life| LoadLevel
Function:
Specifies the unknown variable of the Design

Point in the fatigue analysis .
Argument
Life
LoadLevel
Meaning
the value of LoadLevel is defined by the
user and the value of Life is calculated
the value of Life is defined by the user
and the value of LoadLevel is calculated
Default: Life
PROBOFFAIL
Syntax
ProbOfFail=value
Function:
Specifies the probability of failure.

Argument
value
Type
integer
Meaning
probability of failure
Default: 50
F-378
LIFE
Syntax
Life=value
Function:
Specifies the life of the design point in terms of

cycles or blocks (LifeDim) of the load history.
Argument Type
Meaning
value
integer
life of the design point
Default: 1000
LIFEDIM
Syntax
LifeDim=Blocks | Cycles
Function:
Specifies the dimension of the parameter Life.

Argument
Blocks
Cycles
Meaning
the life of the design point is given in
terms of blocks
the life of the design point is given in
terms of cycles
Default: Blocks
LOADLEVEL
Syntax
Loadlevel=value
Function:
Specifies the calibrated load.

Argument
value
Type
integer
Meaning
multiplier of the load level given in
units of the load after the offset and
factor have been applied
Default: 1
F-379
DESPTOL
Syntax
DespTol=value
Function:
Specifies the tolerance for the calculation of the

life of the design point.
Argument
value
Type
real
Meaning
tolerance
Default: 0.05
AXIS
Syntax
Axis=AxisLoadLevel | AxisLifeDuration
Function:
Specifies the type of computed points.

Argument
AxisLoadLevel
Meaning
computed points are in terms of multiples
of the design point along the vertical axis
AxisLifeDuration computed points are in terms of multiples
of the design points life
Default: AxisLoadLevel
F-380
AXISTYPE
Syntax
AxisType=Automatic| OnePoint | FivePoints |

ElevenPoints | Manual
Function:
Specifies the number of computed points (in addition to the design point).
Argument
Automatic
OnePoint
FivePoints
ElevenPoints
Manual
Meaning
10+n points are generated: 10 default
points and n points defined by the parameters CompPoints--c=n and CompPoint-1......CompPoint--n
1 point is generated defined by the parameters CompPoints--c=1 and CompPoint--1
5 points are generated defined by the parameters CompPoints--c=5 and CompPoint--1......CompPoint--5
11 points are generated defined by the parameters CompPoints--c=11 and CompPoint--1......CompPoint--11
n points are generated defined by the parameters CompPoints--c=n and CompPoint--1......CompPoint--n
Default: Automatic
COMPPTOL
Syntax
ComppTol=value
Function:
Specifies the tolerance for the calculation of the

life if Axis=AxisLifeDuration.
Argument
value
Type
real
Meaning
tolerance
Default: 0.1
F-381
COMPPOINTS--C
Syntax
CompPoints--c=number
Function:
Specifies the number of manual defined computed

points.
Argument
number
Type
integer
Meaning
number of manual defined computed
points (see parameter AxisType)
Default: 0
COMPPOINTS--I
Syntax
CompPoints--i=value
Function:
Specifies the value of a manual defined computed

point (AxisType=Manual).
Argument
i
Type
Meaning
number of computed point,
i=1, ..., CompPoints--c
value
real
value of i-th computed point
LNSTRAINREL
Syntax
LNStrainRel=Neuber| SeegerBeste | ESED |

File
Function:
Specifies the relationship between the applied

load and the notch (local) strain.
Argument
Neuber
SeegerBeste
ESED
File
Meaning
Neuber's rule
Seeger-Beste formula
equivalent strain energy density
you specify a file that contains the loadnotch strain data in pairs of e~ and strain
(StrainFile)
Default: Neuber
Remark: used in Strain-life Approach only. See the description of the parameter Load-notch Strain Curve in the area Strain-life Approach
of the data sheet for solution parameters for further information.
F-382
STRAINFILE
Syntax
StrainFile=path
Function:
Specifies a file that contains the load-notch strain

data in pairs of e~ and strain if LNStrainRel=File.
Argument
path
Type
string
Meaning
path and name of the input file
Default: 0.15
LIMLOADRATIO
Syntax
LimLoadRatio=value
Function:
Specifies the limit load ratio (Kp) for plastic correction.

Argument
value
Type
real
Meaning
limit load ratio, >1
Default: 2.5
DAMAGEPARAM
Syntax
DamageParam=DamPSWTOrig |
DamPSWTLinear | DamPSWTauLinear |
DamPJ | DamPBergmann | DamManCof
Function:
Specifies the damage parameter in the Strain-life

Approach.
Argument
Meaning
DamPSWTOrig
Smith-Watson-Topper:original
DamPSWTLinear
Smith-Watson-Topper:linear
DamPSWTau
Smith-Watson-Topper Torsion
DamPSWTauLinear Smith-Watson-Topper Torsion linear
DamPJ
Vormwald parameter
DamPBergmann
Bergmann parameter
DamManCof
the basic strain-life parameter
Default: DamPSWTTau
Remark: used in Strain-life Approach only. See the description of the parameter Damage Parameter in the area Strain-life Approach of the
data sheet for solution parameters for further information.
F-383
RESIDUALSTRESS
Syntax
ResidualStress=value
Function:
Specifies the residual stress value for the "Thin

surface layer" approach.
Argument
value
Type
real
Meaning
residual stress value , >0
Default: 0.0
Remark: used in Strain-life Approach only.
RESIDSTRESSUNIT
Syntax
ResidStressUnit="MPa"
Function:
Specifies the unit the parameter ResidualStress is given in.
Argument
Meaning
"MPa"
unit
Default: MPa
K_BERGMANN
Syntax
k_Bergmann=value
Function:
Specifies the mean stress influence factor for

damage parameter 'Bergmann' only.
Argument
value
Type
integer
Meaning
mean stress influence factor
Default: 0
F-384
PWLLINSTART
Syntax
PwlLinStart=value
Function:
Specifies the start point for log-log linear regression (PSWT-Linear, PJ, synthetic stress-life
curve).
Argument Type
Meaning
value
integer
start point
Default: 1000
PWLLINEND
Syntax
PwlLinEnd=value
Function:
Specifies the end point for log-log linear regression (PSWT-Linear, PJ, synthetic stress-life
curve).
Argument Type
Meaning
value
integer
end point
Default: 2E+5
F-385
Element Sets Section [ElementSets]

The name of the elements sets (if any) that are needed for the
fatigue analysis are specified in this section. A default filename
can be specified, or multiple element set files with an index for
each file can be specified. The default filename is assumed for
those rows j where no explicit filename F_j is specified. A default filename can be used if all or most element sets reside in
one file.
F_DEFAULT
Syntax
F_Default=path
Function:
Specifies the default file .

Argument
path
Type
string
Meaning
path and name of the default file
F_I
Syntax
F_i=name
Function:
Specifies the file the i-th element set is contained

in.
Argument
i
Type
integer
name
string
Meaning
Element set number,
i=1, ..., Lines
file name and path
S_I
Syntax
S_i=value
Function:
Specifies the index of the i-th element set in the

file F_i.
Argument
i
Type
integer
value
integer
Meaning
Element set number,
i=1, ..., Lines
Index in F_i
F-386
Example for section [ElementSets]

[ElementSets]
F_Default = <Defaultname of file>
F_1 =
S_1 =
F_2 =
S_2 =
...
F_m =
S_m =
<Name of element set file 1>

<Index of element set 1>
<Name of element set file 2>
<Index of element set 2>
<Name of element set file m>
<Index of element set m>
The index entries give the specific position of the element sets
in the files.
F-387
Channel Definition Section [Channels]

The channels are defined in this section. For each channel, the
name of the data file (i.e. time series), type of data format, default name of the channel, and type of history are defined by
the variables F, S, C, and T, respectively. Either default values
can be given, or these values can be specified for each history
and must match the number specified in the Job section for the
number of columns in the Geometry Work Sheet. The default
values apply only to those entries where no specific value is
given.
F_DEFAULT
Syntax
F_Default=path
Function:
Specifies the file the default channel is contained

in.
Argument
path
Type
string
Meaning
F_I
Syntax
F_i=name
Function:
Specifies the file the i-th channel is contained in.

Argument
i
Type
integer
name
string
Meaning
Channel number,
i=1, ..., Columns
file name and path
F-388
S_DEFAULT
Syntax
S_Default=AS | IF | RP | IS | TD
Function:
Specifies a two letter code for the type of data

format that the default file is in (default data system).
Argument Meaning
AS
ASCII
IF
FUNKTION (Schenck)
RP
RPC-III (MTS)
IS
STRUKTUR (rainflow matrices)
TD
TDF (LMS HP)
Remark: See the chapter Supported Data Formats in the Appendix: File
Formats for the available data formats.
S_I
Syntax
S_i=AS | IF | RP | IS | TD
Function:
Specifies the data system of the i-th channel.

Argument
i
Type
integer
AS
IF
RP
IS
TD
Meaning
Channel number,
i=1, ..., Columns
ASCII
FUNKTION (Schenck)
RPC-III (MTS)
STRUKTUR (rainflow matrices)
TDF (LMS HP)
C_DEFAULT
Syntax
C_Default=name
Function:
Specifies the default channel name.

Argument
name
Type
string
Meaning
name of the default channel
F-389
C_I
Syntax
C_i=name
Function:
Specifies the name of the i-th channel.

Argument
i
Type
integer
name
string
Meaning
Channel number,
i=1, ..., Columns
name of the i-th channel
T_DEFAULT
Syntax
T_Default=LOAD | ELPLAST
Function:
Specifies the history type of the default channel.
Argument Meaning
LOAD
proportional to load
ELPLAST elastic plastic strain)
Remark: The type of load history should always be given as default
value, since different types can not be combined in one task.
T_I
Syntax
T_i=LOAD | ELPLAST
Function:
Specifies the history type of the i-th channel.

Argument
i
Type
integer
Meaning
Channel number,
i=1, ..., Columns
LOAD
proportional to load
ELPLAST
elastic plastic strain)
Remark: The type of load history should always be given as default
value, since different types can not be combined in one task.
Remark: For test schedule definitions, the data system is "TSD", the file
name is the name of the TSD-file and the channel is the one defined in the
TSD-file.
F-390
Example for section [Channel]

[Channel]
F_Default = <Defaultname of data file>
C_Default = <Defaultname of data system>
S_Default = <Defaultname of channel>
T_Default = <Default type of channel>
F_1
C_1
S_1
T_1
=
=
=
=
<Name of
<Name of
<Name of
<History
file containing channel 1>

channel 1>
data system for channel 1>
type of channel 1>
F_2 =
C_2 =
S_2 =
T_2 =
...
F_n =
C_n =
S_n =
T_n =
<Name of
<Name of
<Name of
<History
file containing channel 2>

channel 2>
data system for channel 2>
type of channel 2>
<Name of
<Name of
<Name of
<History
file containing channel n>

channel n>
data system for channel n>
type of channel n>
F-391
Test Schedule Definition Section [TSD]

If you choose to use a test schedule instead of simple load
channels a section [TSD] is needed.
FILENAME
Syntax
Filename=name
Function:
Specifies the test schedule definition file.

Argument
name
Type
string
Meaning
file name and path
S-I
Syntax
S_i=name
Function:
Specifies the name of the i-th segment.
Argument Type
Meaning
i
integer
Number of segment
name
string
file name and path
Remark: The S_i entries define the sequence of segments for the defined
job. In the moment only one TSD per job may be defined
Example for section [TSD]

[TSD]
FileName = "$TEST_ROOT/TestSchedules/ca_loading.tsd"
S_1 = "R=1"
S_2 = "R=oo"
S_3 = "R=0"
F-392
Calibration Section [Calibration]

The calibration setting for the load histories are specified in
this section. The default values are 0 for offset and 1 for factor.
Each channel having a different offset or factor must be specified in this section.
O-I
Syntax
O_i=value
Function:
Specifies the offset of the i-th channel.

Argument
i
value
Type
integer
integer
Meaning
number of channel
offset
F-I
Syntax
F_i=value
Function:
Specifies the factor of the i-th channel.

Argument
i
value
Type
integer
integer
Meaning
number of channel
factor
Example for section [Calibration]

[Calibration]
O_1 = <Offset
F_1 = <Factor
O_2 = <Offset
F_2 = <Factor
...
O_n = <Offset
F_n = <Factor
of
of
of
of
channel
channel
channel
channel
1>
1>
2>
2>
of channel n>
of channel n>
F-393
Load Case section [LoadCases]

In this section, the load cases are defined for FEM analyses.
Either a default load case file name is specified, or the name of
each load case and result file can be specified. There should be
one load and result file specified for each channel. The default
filename is assumed for those rows j where no explicit filename
F_j is specified. A default filename can be used if all or most
load cases reside in one file.
Remark: For a LMS FALANCS batch job only the indices are interpreted and
not the load case names!
F_DEFAULT
Syntax
F_Default=path
Function:
Specifies the default load case file.

Argument
path
Type
string
Meaning
L_I
Syntax
L_i=name
Function:
Specifies the load case for the i-th channel.

Argument
i
Type
integer
name
string
Meaning
Channel number,
i=1, ..., Columns
load case
F_I
Syntax
F_i=name
Function:
Specifies the result file for the i-th channel.

Argument
i
Type
integer
name
string
Meaning
Channel number,
i=1, ..., Columns
file name and path
F-394
S_I
Syntax
S_i=name
Function:
Specifies the index of the load case for the i-th

channel.
Argument
i
Type
integer
Meaning
Channel number,
i=1, ..., Columns
name
integer
index
Remark: The index entries give the specific position of the load cases in
the files.
If the batch command file is created by an interactive LMS

FALANCS run the section [LoadCases] includes additional
information. If you are creating/modifying batch command files
(fal-files) make sure that these settings are correct! Otherwise
you may get unpredictable results.
COUNT
Syntax
Count=value
Function:
Specifies the number of cases.
Argument Type
Meaning
value
integer
number of cases
Remark: The entry Count is not interpreted in the solver. It may be
omitted.
ELEMC
Syntax
ElemC=value
Function:
Specifies the number of elements.
Argument Type
Meaning
value
integer
number of elements
Remark: The entry ElemC may be omitted. If it is missing, the solver has
to parse the FE-files in order to re-compute this number. If it is defined, it
is used for allocation purposes and must be correct
F-395
NODEC
Syntax
NodeC=value
Function:
Specifies the number of nodes.
Argument Type
Meaning
value
integer
number of nodes
Remark: The entry NodeC is not interpreted in the solver. It may be
omitted.
DRIVER
Syntax
driver=text
Function:
Specifies the driver.
Argument Type
Meaning
text
string
driver
Remark: The entry Driver is mandatory and must be defined correctly.
Example for section [Loadcases]

[LoadCases]
F_Default = <Defaultname of file>
L_1 =
F_1 =
S_1 =
L_2 =
F_2 =
S_2 =
...
L_n =
F_n =
S_n =
<Name of load case 1>

<Name of result file 1>
<Index of load case 1>
<Name of load case 2>
<Name of result file 2>
<Index of load case 2>
<Name of load case n>
<Name of result file n>
<Index of load case n>
Count = <No of Cases>

ElemC = <No of Elements>
NodeC = <No of Nodes>
Driver = <Driver>
F-396
SigmaE section [SigmaE]

In this section, the sigma_e factor for each row and column in
the Geometry Cell are specified. Only non-zero entries need to
be given.
I,J
Syntax
i,j=value
Function:
Specifies the sigma_e factor for the i-th row and

j-th column.
Argument
i
Type
integer
integer
value
real
Meaning
row number,
i=1, ..., Lines
column number,
j=1, ..., Columns
sigma_e factor
Example for section [SigmaE]

[SigmaE]
1,1 = <Sigma_e
1,2 = <Sigma_e
...
i,j = <Sigma_e
...
m,n = <Sigma_e
of cell (row 1, column 1)>

of cell (1,2)>
of cell (row i, column j)>
of cell (m,n)>
F-397
Le section [Le]
In this section, the Le factor for each row and column in the
Geometry Cell are specified. Only entries different from 1 need
to be given.
I,J
Syntax
i,j=value
Function:
Specifies the Le factor for the i-th row and j-th

column.
Argument
i
Type
integer
integer
value
real
Meaning
row number,
i=1, ..., Lines
column number,
j=1, ..., Columns
Le factor
Example for section [Le]

[Le]
1,1 =
1,2 =
...
i,j =
...
m,n =
<L_e of cell (row 1, column 1)>

<L_e of cell (1,2)>
<L_e of cell (row i, column j)>
<L_e of cell (m,n)>
F-398
Differences between Interactive and Batch Processing
F-399
Differences between Interactive and

Batch Processing
Even though batch processing gives the user more freedom
about when and where the jobs are run, there are some points
to pay special attention to when using batch processing.
The database handling for the references

only version.
As described in the section about the batch command file, only
references to database entries are given in this command file.
Hence if the database is changed after the batch command file
was created but before the batch job started, the output is unpredictable. If the database entry is deleted the job will return
with failure, but if the entry is just changed the user will not
be notified and may go on working with wrong results. Keep in
mind that also the configuration files are evaluated at runtime. So changes in the database definition section in the
falancs.ini configuration file may result in the same problem described above.
Additionally in a multihosting environment the path to the databases must be the same in the whole system, whereas in the
interactive mode the database entries are sent to the evaluating hosts.
F-400
The database handling for the full version.

Here the values of the parameter sets are stored in the file and
no more interaction with the databases is necessary.
LMS FALANCS relies on valid values for the parameters.
Hence if the user changes some entries by hand he is fully responsible that the complete dataset remains valid. There is no
more validation check for read ASCII folders in batch.
Validation for data sets is checked when written to the database.
Lack of job control

The notification script defined at batch startup provides the
only control you can get about the job execution. This script
may inform about general success or failure and notifies the
user when the job finishes. In the interactive mode the computation status window informs of the state of the calculation and
also provides the possibility to stop jobs.
License needed for parallel batch jobs

Batch jobs start a new LMS FALANCS process, hence if you
start a batch job while interactive LMS FALANCS is running
you will need additional licenses. For this reason, multiple
batch jobs should be scheduled to run consecutively.
Reference General Settings
F-401
Part 5
Reference General Settings

Analysis results are not only influenced by parameters specified in the graphical user interface (GUI), but also by parameters defined in the falancs.ini file. Whereas certain parameters set in the GUI change often, such as solution parameters for fatigue analysis, other parameters change infrequently
and are set in the falancs.ini file.
There are various groups of these parameters, varying from
parameters that set the colors of graphical displays, to parameters that affect the amount of physical memory available for an
analysis.
These parameters are described in this part of the manual.
F-402
LMS FALANCS User Manual - Reference General Settings
System Level and User Specific Settings
F-403
System Level and User Specific

Settings
The settings in the configuration files can be done at different
levels. Higher levels (closer to the user) always overwrite settings at a lower level. The lowest level is the default values
that are hard coded in LMS FALANCS itself. The highest level
is given to the user specific configuration files that reside in the
subdirectory tecware in the users home directory.
Structure of a TecWare installation

The installation is done in some directory. The environment
variable $TECWAREHOME points to this directory that has in
general the following structure:
./tecware
./bin/
./data/
./pdb/
./custom/
./falancs/
TecWare start script

directory with license & ini-files
directory with LMS FALANCS
default databases
customer specific ini-files
LMS FALANCS specific files
bin
data
contrib
... ( and other directories for further components )
F-404
The different locations for configuration

files
The default values
The default values are set in the program and reflect our
experiences with the different settings. Stay with the default values for the Method Parameters unless you have
gained some experience with different settings.
The system configuration files
The system configuration files are located in the data subdirectory of the TecWare installation directory. Note that
this file is overwritten by each new installation.
The custom configuration files
In the custom directory of the LMS FALANCS (TecWare)
installation, you can put configuration files. Here the system administrator should configure the available printers.
Also, system wide default directories can be entered here.
The user specific settings
The user can have his own settings if he puts configuration
files into a directory named tecware in his home directory.
Only changes to the default values need to be reflected in
this directory. If method parameters are changed for a given
analysis, it is a good practice to save the configuration file
(at least the file falancs.ini) with this analysis. In this
case one is able to repeat an analysis or perform a similar
analysis with different loadings later.
System Level and User Specific Settings
F-405
The Syntax of the Configuration Files

A configuration file is a simple text file which may be edited
with a program editor or a text processing program.
It contains individual sections marked by a heading written in
brackets "[...]". The heading must start in the first column. A
section name may contain up to 40 characters.
A section consists of assignments; here you assign a value to
certain parameters.
Comment lines are marked by a semicolon ";" in the first column.
If described assignments are not present default values are
taken.
F-406
The most important settings

This section should just serve as an overview. For details see
the corresponding chapters.
Most important entries in tecware.ini

Definition of language
english or german
Definition of standard directories with direct access
from file selection menu
Debug Level
Log Level
may be changed to create log files with detailed messages
for LMS FALANCS support to locate problems
Most important entries in falancs.ini

Location of database
directories with own databases (like $TECWAREHOME/pdb)
may be defined
Location of results
The location where results and intermediate data shall be
stored.
Settings Specific to LMS FALANCS: falancs.ini
F-407
Settings Specific to LMS FALANCS:

falancs.ini
The options available in the initialization file falancs.ini
are described in this section. By modifying this file, options
such as the location of database files, default screen colors, and
some basic solution parameters can be set by the user. The file
format is text, and can be edited by any screen editor. The file
is subdivided in sections starting with
[section name]
In each section several parameters can be set in the form

Keyword = value
Comment lines in the file are those lines that start with a
semi-colon (;).
Remark: You may change most of the options using Configuration
Method Parameters
Remark: Since Version 2.9 of LMS FALANCS many parameters that had to
be changed in the configuration file falancs.ini now are part of the parameter data sets. Those entries are marked in italics in the sequel.
F-408
Overview
In this chapter the entries of the configuration file are grouped
by their main purpose. The subsections of this chapter describe
the following sections of the configuration file:
Parameters directly influencing the fatigue analysis
[Method Parameters]
[FEM Postprocessing]
[Non Proportional FEM]
[Controller_HostTable]
[Jiang]
[FEM-Driver]
[SpotWeld]
Parameters for input and output operation

[DB:SNCurve]
[DB:Material]
[DB:SolpStress]
[DB:SolpStrain]
[DB:MethodParam]
[FalMain_Output_Name]
[DamageCalc_Output_Name]
[HistReduct_Output_Name]
[SurfaceDetect_Output_Name]
[RPFilter_Output_Name]
[RFProjector_Output_Name]
[PostProc_Output_Name]
[LTS_Output_Name]
[Hot_Spot_Output_Name]
[DataFormats]
[Miscellaneous]
Graphic Display Parameters

[WOEHLERATTR]
[ERGEBATTR]
[MATERIALATTR]
[PWOEHLATTR]
[FLIESSATTR]
[ERGMATATTR]
[HPGLPLOT]
[SCHAEDATTR]
Parameters for multi processing controllers

F-409
Parameters that should only be changed by system administrators

[Batch Processing]
Parameters that should only be changed by your LMS

support person
[Messages]
[LoadHistoryView]
F-410
Parameters directly influencing the fatigue

analysis
This section describes the parameters that influence the fatigue analysis directly. If you need to change some of these parameters, change them in your personal copy of falancs.ini. It is a good advice to save your personal copy after
a calculation and link it to this calculation, such that you can
do related analysis runs with the same setup.
Here the following sections of the configuration file are described:
[Method Parameters]
[Non Proportional FEM]
[Jiang]
Non FEM and Proportional FEM Parameters

The section [Method Parameters] of the initialization file
contains parameters for the non FEM and proportional FEM
methods in LMS FALANCS.
[Method Parameters]
BufferSize = <integer>
Specifies the number of values of each load history in memory at one time. This value will influence the size of the
scratch files, which are usually given in multiples of the
buffer size.
RandomSeed = <integer>
Used in strain-life concept calculations on rainflow matrices
for Monte Carlo simulations. Choosing the same random
seed during an initialization will ensure that the same result will be reached on successive runs of the same problem.
RFMSampleSize = <integer>
Specifies the number of Monte Carlo simulations to be run;
this value is typically small (around 10).
F-411
StrainGageAngles = list of <integer>

Specifies the default angles in degrees the strain gage uses
when measuring the strain. The commonly used values are
0, 45 and 90.
LTS_Principles = abs_principles |
classic_principles
Specifies the writing principles for the results of FEM Local
Time Series (tensor files).
abs_principles:
|sig_1| > |sig_2| > |sig_3|
max-channel = sig_1
min-channel = sig_2
sig_3 will not be written to local time series file
classic_principles:
sig_1 > sig_2 and |sig_1| > |sig_3| and |sig_2| >
|sig_3|
max-channel = sig_1
min-channel = sig_2
sig_3 will not be written to local time series file
The default values of these parameters are listed below.
[Method parameters]
BufferSize
RandomSeed
RFMSampleSize
StrainGageAngles
LTS_Principles
=
=
=
=
=
10000
12345
10
10, 45, 90
abs_principles
Parameters influencing the post processing

The parameters in the section [FEM Postprocessing]
change the type of results written to the FEM result files.
These results may be viewed using the your FEM post processor.
F-412
FEMWriteDamageToASCII
If set to 1 the damage values are not only written to the result file but additionally a ASCII file is written. The file is
written into the same directory as the FEM-result file and
its name is the same as the result file just the extension is
changed to .txt.
The ASCII list is structured into 8 columns: The first two
are integer values giving the element and the node number.
The contents of the following six columns are listed in the
table below:
3rd column
Result 1
4th column
Result 2
5th column
Result 3
6th column
Result 1 at top layer(shells only)
7th column
Result 2 at bottom layer (shells only)
8th column
Result 4
The column names cate the output, which has been specified in the list of method parameters. The following names
have been chosen:
Result 1
"Damage", "#Blocks" or "1/#Blocks"
Result 2
"NDesign/N" or "ElimRunNumber"
Result 3
Sig/SigDesign", "Max.abs.str.",
"Max.str.ampl." or "SafetyFactor"
Result 4
"RPNorm", "TaskNumber" or "HotSpots"
These ASCII lists may be used for user specified statistics,

case studies and optimization without having to start an FE
Post-processor.
FEMOverwriteResults = <integer>
FEM-result files are not overwritten if the flag is not set.
The file name is modified with a suffix to make it unique.
F-413
Converter = <string>
Specifies the program, to converts LMS FALANCS results
into other formats:
dam2udm for converting LMS FALANCS results with

NASTRAN OP2 input for I-DEAS
fdm2udm for converting LMS FALANCS results with
ABAQUS input for I-DEAS
dam2res for converting LMS FALANCS results with
NASTRAN OP2 input for Hypermesh
dam2bof for converting LMS FALANCS results with
NASTRAN OP2 input for MEDINA
Remark: You can configure only one of these tools. If you need more
than one, you should use the command line:
tecware <converter> input-file [output-file] [+log
[logfile]].
ConverterNas = dam2<string>
Specifies the damage file converter dependent on the FE-file
format used. In order to do this, the short name of the format is appended. If you want to specify a conversion to IDEAS files only if Nastran op2-input is used, you can define
ConverterNAS=dam2udm.
This setting ensures, that no conversion is applied if for example I-DEAS unv-files are used as input to LMS FALANCS. Depending on the currently used format, the postprocessor first looks for the corresponding specific converter.
If none is defined it also checks the entry Converter and
uses this one if it is defined. Thus the old settings using
only the keyword Converter can still be used. This procedure is of specific advantage if more than one FE-format is
often used.
The default values of these parameters are listed below.
[FEM postprocessing]
FEMOverwriteResults
Converter
ConverterNas
0
0
""
""
F-414
Non-proportional FEM Parameters

In the section [Non proportional FEM] the parameters influencing only the non-proportional fatigue analysis runs are
described.
Parameters influencing the RP-filtering process

These parameters may be used to change the behavior of the
node elimination process. The default values are chosen for
problems where no static failure appears or the loading for the
whole structure lies below endurance limit.
UseAbsoluteElimLimit = <boolean>
AbsoluteElimLimit
= <real>
StrainLifeForAllRuns = <integer>
Remark: These parameters are included in the method parameter dataset since version 2.9 and explained in the corresponding section of the
data sheet for method parameters.
Parameters depending on the problem size

These parameters depend on your current problem and the
power and memory of your system. Check with your operator
before changing these settings.
MaxMemoryUsage = <integer>
Specifies the amount of random access memory (RAM)
available for FAL/NP damage calculation in kBytes. If you
have to handle many long loading histories, increasing this
number leads to better buffering and may increase the
speed of the analysis. Also, if you increase the next parameter (MaxElementsInTask) you may need to increase MemMemoryUsage. Be aware that it is crucial that enough
physical memory is actually available to really get an increase in speed.
F-415
MaxElementsInTask = <integer>
Specifies the maximum number of elements in one damage
calculation task. The larger this number is the fewer individual damage analysis runs have to be performed. Note
that more elements in a task implies that more memory is
needed.
MinElementsForFilterRuns = <integer>
If the number of elements in an analysis is at or below this
value, then RP filtering is not used during an analysis.
MinSignalLengthForFilter = <integer>
Specifies the minimum signal length to use the RP-filter.
Default values
The default values for these parameters are shown below.
[Non proportional FEM]
UseAbsoluteElimLimit
AbsoluteElimLimit
EliminationSafetyFactor
= 0
= 0.001
= 1.5
MaxMemoryUsage
MaxElementsInTask
MinElementsForFilterRuns
MinSignalLengthForFilter
StrainLifeForAllRuns
=
=
=
=
=
100000
1000
50
1000
1
Parameters controlling the non-proportional FEM

calculation process
LMS FALANCS is capable of parallel execution of the nonproportional FEM analysis An analysis is subdivided in several
tasks. The size and number of these tasks can be influenced by
the parameters in the section above. For parallel execution, the
controller has to know the number of parallel calculations that
should be started on each host.
In the section [Controller_HostTable] the keywords are
the host names and the values are the number of processes to
run on this host in parallel.
F-416
Example 1: Run FEM/NP on your own single processor workstation (default)

localhost = 1
Example 2: Run FEM/NP on your powerful multiprocessor machine
localhost = 8
Default setting:
localhost = 1
Finite Element Interface Parameters

The section [FEM-Driver includes some parameters that are
specific to work with some of the FEM interfaces.
NastranMAXR = 40000
Using NASTRAN BUFFSIZE = NWORD to specify a different
record-size NWORD that is larger than 2049, the standardfile-buffer of LMS FALANCS may be too small. This problem is solved by setting NastranMAXR =2*NWORD The factor 2 is essential, since NASTRAN internally assumes 64Bit words.
Remark: it may be possible that the buffer problem does not occur when
loading the file (File menu) but when starting the fatigue calculation.
NastranCopyBlocks = <block1>,<block2>,...
LMS FALANCS writes a binary OP2-file *.dam (also if the
input is a formatted OP2-file) which has essentially the
same structure as the stress-input-file. As default, PATRAN-Output (PARAM POST -1) is assumed, i.e. the blocks
GEOM1(S),GEOM2(S) are copied from the input file and the
modified block OES1(X) (which now contains the damage
data) is written. In the case of a different OP2-format like
the one used for IDEAS (PARAM POST -2) or MEDINA the
F-417
data blocks which should be copied can be explicitly defined

by NastranCopyBlocks.
The list must be given in the same order as the blocks are
found in the stress-input-file. As an example, the following
setting for IDEAS (PARAM POST -2) will produce a *.damfile containing the same geometry-blocks as the input file:
NastranCopyBlocks =
GPL,GPDT,EPT,MPT,GEOM2,GEOM3,GEOM4.
I-DEASGeoFileExtension = <file-extension>
The stress and geometry data may reside in different files.
In the FE-Resultfile selection user has to specify the file
containing the stress data. The geometry file is searched in
the same directory, but the extension is replaced by the
value of I-DEASGeoFileExtension (default .ugd)
CDHHexaOrientation = <integer>
If spot welds are modeled with the CDH-approach, the
RBEs which connect the spot weld to the shells have to be
split in two groups, one group connecting to the first group
of shells, the other one to the second group of shells. Usually
this is done by finding the corresponding groups of shells
using the neighborhood condition. Sometimes this does not
suffice, such that also certain numbering criterions can be
used.
Allowed values are:
0
240
204
153
Ignore the spot weld

Node numbering:
First group = element
Second group = element
Node numbering:
Node numbering:
nodes 1,2,3,4
nodes 5,6,7,8
nodes 1,2,6,5
nodes 4,3,7,8
nodes 1,5,8,4
nodes 2,6,7,3
F-418
Parameters for spot weld calculation

The section [Spotweld]includes parameters used in the spot
weld calculation.
KdivSqrtS = Possible Values > 0
This entry is only intended for the experienced user who is
totally aware of the underlying method. In this method the
radial stresses at the weld toe are calculated and a constant
is applied. One may change this constant by changing this
parameter. The value will be multiplied by the square root
of the sheet thickness before it is applied.
Remark: The default value of the parameter "KdivSqrtS" relies on the unit
[mm] for shell thickness and diameter. If you want to use a different unit
[myunit] where
f =
myunit
mm
please multiply "KdivSqrtS" by
The default value of this parameter is:

KdivSqrtS = 0.6
F-419
Database configuration
In the sections [DB:<type>], the location of the databases for
SN-curves, material properties, method parameters and solution parameters are specified, and can be modified by the user.
For each of these databases, the database format and the name
of the directory are to be specified. A display name can be defined. See the paragraph Syntax of Database Definition for a
detailed description.
;;---------------------------------------------------; Database for SN curve parameters
;----------------------------------------------------[DB:SNCurve]
Default = SNCDefault
Default.Display = Default SN Curves
Examples = SNCExamples
Examples.Display = Example SN Curves
WeldConnections=SNCWeld
;----- specification for database driver ----[pdb:SNCDefault]
Format = "CFG"
Path = "%TECWAREHOME%\pdb\default\snc"
Editable = true
[pdb:SNCExamples]
Format = "CFG"
Path = "%TECWAREHOME%\pdb\examples\snc"
Editable = false
[pdb:SNCWeld]
Format = "CFG"
Path
= "%TECWAREHOME%\pdb\welding\snc"
Editable = false
;----------------------------------------------------; Database for material parameters
;----------------------------------------------------[DB:Material]
Default = Material_Default
Examples = Material_Examples
;----- specification for database driver ----[pdb:Material_Default]
Format = "CFG"
Path = "%TECWAREHOME%\pdb\default\mat"
Editable = true
[pdb:Material_Examples]
Format = "CFG"
F-420
Path = "%TECWAREHOME%\pdb\examples\mat"
Editable = false
;----------------------------------------------------; Database for solution parameter stress-life approach
;----------------------------------------------------[DB:SolpStress]
Default = SolpStress_Default
Examples = SolpStress_Examples
WeldConnections=SolpStress_Weld
;----- specification for database driver ----[pdb:SolpStress_Default]
Format = "CFG"
Path = "%TECWAREHOME%\pdb\default\sp_stress"
Editable = true
[pdb:SolpStress_Examples]
Format = "CFG"
Path = "%TECWAREHOME%\pdb\examples\sp_stress"
Editable = false
[pdb:SolpStress_Weld]
Format = "CFG"
Path = "%TECWAREHOME%\pdb\welding\sp_stress"
Editable = false
;----------------------------------------------------; Database for solution parameter strain-life approach
;----------------------------------------------------[DB:SolpStrain]
Default = SolpStrain_Default
Examples = SolpStrain_Examples
;----- specification for database driver ----[pdb:SolpStrain_Default]
Format = "CFG"
Path = "%TECWAREHOME%\pdb\default\sp_strain"
Editable = true
[pdb:SolpStrain_Examples]
Format = "CFG"
Path = "%TECWAREHOME%\pdb\examples\sp_strain"
Editable = false
;----------------------------------------------------; Database for method parameters
;----------------------------------------------------[DB:MethodParam]
Default = MethodParam_Default
Examples = MethodParam_Examples
WeldConnections=MethodParam_Weld
;----- specification for database driver ----[pdb:MethodParam_Default]
Format = "CFG"
Path = "%TECWAREHOME%\pdb\default\mparam"
Editable = true
[pdb:MethodParam_Examples]
Format = "CFG"
Path = "%TECWAREHOME%\pdb\examples\mparam"
Editable = false
[pdb:MethodParam_Weld]
Format = "CFG"
Path = "%TECWAREHOME%\pdb\welding\mparam"
Editable = false
F-421
F-422
Parameter Section for LMS FALANCS

Methods result specification
In sections [<method>_Output_Name], of the initialization
file, the output file names can be specified for the output of the
various methods in LMS FALANCS.
The methods of LMS FALANCS are:
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
FalMain: LMS FALANCS main program

DamageCalc: Damage calculation
HistReduct: History reduction
SurfaceDetect: Surface Detection (determines which elements are on an external surface
RPFilter: Rainflow Projection Filtering
RFProjector: Rainflow projector
PostProc: FEM postprocessor
LTS: Local Time Series
Hot_Spot: Hot spot detection
For each of the methods, the path name, file name and extension, and the object name can be defined by variable entries
(<variable>) or by logical name(<logical>). The default object
name is the channel name used in the analysis.
PathName
FileName
FileExt
ObjectName
=
=
=
=
%T
%j
%t
%k
%d
%e
%p
temporary directory
job name
task name
default channel name
default file name
default extension
original path of FE file
<variable> or <logical>
The variables are combinations of these elements:
%nT
%nO
%nD
%nR
F-423
(for FEM calculations only)

index of task in GWS (row)
index of object in GWS (column)
index of object in file
index of run in computation.
The path notation for the task directory depends on the operating system, described below:
UNIX
%T/%j/%t
Examples
This procedure is most easily understood by some examples,
where we assume the following settings
HOME = /users/falancs_user Environment-Variable or Logical
EXAMPLES = /usr/examp
Environment-Variable or Logical
[Data Directories]
see description of tecware.ini
DATA_TEST = /usr/tests
Temporary Directory: /tmp/fv0A0001
This name gets created from the setting TEMP_DIR in

tecware.ini and a unique name created by each LMS FALANCS run.
The analysis is assumed to be done on the following files and
channels:
File
Channel
$EXAMPLES/time/demo.ez4
K_1
K_2
K_3
Ch1
Ch2
RAD1
RAD2
-
$EXAMPLES/time/test.erg
$EXAMPLES/demo/demo_if.e1
$EXAMPLES/demo/demo.op2
F-424
Example 1: RPFilter: Change the names of the files

and the channels.
This example lets the RP-filtering program put all the output
into the file /tmp/fv0A0001/rpf.erg, where the channels
are named chan_1, chan_2 to chan_7.
[RPFilter_Output_Name]
PathName
FileName
FileExt
ObjectName
=
=
=
=
%T
rpf
erg
chan_%nO
Output files and channels:

/tmp/fv0A0001/rpf.erg
. . .
chan_1
chan_2
...
chan_7
Example 2: postProcessor: Change the pathname

Here the original file and channel names are used but all the
resulting files are put to the directory /usr/examp/fe_results.
[PostProc_Output_Name]
PathName
= %p/../fe_results
FileName
= %d
FileExt
= %e
ObjectName = %k
FE-output files:
/usr/examp/fe_results/demo.dam
/usr/examp/fe_results/demo.txt
/usr/examp/fe_results/demo.fal
/usr/examp/fe_results/test.log
Example 3: Where to put the GWS-folders

Here we change the place where the GWS-folders (gwsout.fol,
resspec.fol, resultf.fol) are written to before the analysis starts.
We assume that in this LMS FALANCS run the Jobs Job1,
Job2 and Job3 are executed.
[FalMain_Output_Name]
PathName
= [DATA_TEST]/%j
F-425
Output files:
/usr/tests/Job1/gwsout.fol
Example 4: Output of the non-FEM damage

calculation
In this example two tasks (Task1, Task2) in Job1 are performed. Instead of storing the results in
/usr/tmp/fv0A0001/Job1/Task1
/usr/tmp/fv0A0001/Job1/Task2
the directories
/users/falancs_user/Job1_Task1
/users/falancs_user/Job1_Task2
are used. The filenames get the prefix PN_.

[DamageCalc_Output_Name]
PathName
= $HOME/%j_%t
FileName
= PN_%d
FileExt
= %e
Some of the output files:

/users/falancs_user/Job1_Task1/PN_dammat.dat
/users/falancs_user/Job1_Task1/PN_schmat.dat
/users/falancs_user/Job1_Task1/PN_lcurve.asc
/users/falancs_user/Job1_Task2/PN_dammat.dat
/users/falancs_user/Job1_Task2/PN_schmat.dat
/users/falancs_user/Job1_Task2/PN_lcurve.asc
The following table is a list of files created by the various

methods of LMS FALANCS including the file format and a
short description of each.
In addition to this list, the FE result files (dam-files, log-files,
txt-files, LTS-files, hot spot-files) are also created. The names
of these files depend however on the input files.
Name
gwsout.fol
Format
INI-Section
Description
TMDFolder
FalMain
Folder containing the GWS-information
F-426
Name
resultf.fol
resspec.fol
dammat.erm
rfmat.erm
damcoll.asc
pncurve.asc
Lnotch.asc
pcoll.asc
rcoll.asc
rcollw.asc
lifecrv.asc
fseforw.buf
fsebackw.buf
fsesect.buf
damchan.erg
sfdetgws.fol
sfdetset.tsi
rfproj0.fol
rfproj1.fol
Format
INI-Section
Description
TMDFolder
FalMain
Folder containing the result specification
TMDFolder
FalMain
Folder containing the results to view
TS-Struktur
DamageCalc
Damage matrix
TS-Struktur
DamageCalc
Rainflow matrix
TS-ASCII
DamageCalc
Damage histogram for History reduction
TS-ASCII
DamageCalc
P-life curve
TS-ASCII
DamageCalc
Load-notch curve
TS-ASCII
DamageCalc
P-histogram for weighted results
TS-ASCII
DamageCalc
Load amplitude histogram
TS-ASCII
DamageCalc
Weighted load amplitude histogram
TS-ASCII
DamageCalc
life curve
Internal binary
DamageCalc
Used for history reduction
Internal binary
DamageCalc
Internal binary
HistReduct
TS-Funktion
FalMain
Damage channels
TMDFolder
Controller
Folder containing the elements sets from
the surface detection module
Element Set File SurfaceDetect
Element sets from the surface detection
TMDFolder
Controller
Folder containing the directions for the
RP-filter runs
TMDFolder
Controller
F-427
Name
Format
INI-Section
Description
Internal folder
rfprange.fol TMDFolder
Controller
Folder containing information about the
range and the length of the applied loads
rpdirec.
Internal binary
Controller
rpfosp%nr.fol TMDFolder
Controller
Folder containing the output-specification
for the RP-filter runs
rpf%nr.erg
TS-Funktion
RPFilter
Filtered time series
npdamage.buf Internal binary
DamageCalc
Default values
The default values for these entries are shown below.
;----------------------------------------------------; Parameters for LMS FALANCS main program
;----------------------------------------------------[FalMain_Output_Name]
PathName
= %T/%j
FileName
= %d
FileExt
= %e
ObjectName
= %k
;----------------------------------------------------; Parameters for damage calculation
;----------------------------------------------------[DamageCalc_Output_Name]
PathName
= %T/%j/%t
FileName
= %d
FileExt
= %e
ObjectName
= %k
;----------------------------------------------------; Parameters for history reduction
;----------------------------------------------------[HistReduct_Output_Name]
PathName
= %T/%j
FileName
= %d
FileExt
= %e
ObjectName
= %k
;----------------------------------------------------; Parameters for controller
;----------------------------------------------------[Controller_Output_Name]
PathName
= %T/%j
FileName
= %d
F-428
FileExt
= %e
ObjectName
= %k
;----------------------------------------------------; Parameters for surface detection
;----------------------------------------------------[SurfaceDetect_Output_Name]
PathName
= %T/%j
FileName
= %d
FileExt
= %e
ObjectName
= %k
;----------------------------------------------------; Parameters for rainflow projector
;----------------------------------------------------[RFProjector_Output_Name]
PathName
= %T/%j
FileName
= %d
FileExt
= %e
ObjectName
= %k
;----------------------------------------------------; Parameters for RP filtering
;----------------------------------------------------[RPFilter_Output_Name]
PathName
= %T/%j
FileName
= %d
FileExt
= %e
ObjectName
= %k
;----------------------------------------------------; Parameters for FEM postprocessor
;----------------------------------------------------[PostProc_Output_Name]
PathName
= %p
FileName
= %d
FileExt
= %e
ObjectName
= %k
;----------------------------------------------------; Parameters for LTS
;----------------------------------------------------[LTS_Output_Name]
PathName
= %T/%j/%t
FileName
= %d
FileExt
= %e
ObjectName
= %k
;----------------------------------------------------; Parameters for Hotspot output
;----------------------------------------------------[Hot_Spot_Output_Name]
PathName
= %p
FileName
= %d_HS
FileExt
= %e
ObjectName
= %k
F-429
LMS FALANCS Data Formats

In the section [DataFormats]the parameters for the LMS
FALANCS specific file input and output are specified. In the
corresponding section [TS DataFormats] of the configuration
file tecware.ini the data formats for load history files and
rainflow matrices are described.
Here the default formats and default extensions for FEM result
files, FEM element set files and GWS folder files may be
changed.
The format name displayed in the field File type-of the file
selection windows can be changed by entries like
NameXXX = "NewName"
The default search pattern may be altered via
PatternXXX = "NewPattern"
And the default extension for writing operations may be
changed by
DefaultExtensionXXX = "NewExtension"
The pattern XXX may be one out of the following list:
File Selection: FEM result files
ANS
ANSYS
NAS
NASTRAN
IDE
I-DEAS
MEC
Pro/MECHANICA
ABA
ABAQUS
CAT
CAT/FALANCS
MED
MEDINA
Remark: Independently from the entries in the falancs.ini configuration file only licensed FEM interfaces can be used and chosen in the FEM
result file selection.
F-430
File Selection: FEM element sets

TSI
Element sets
File Selection: GWS file
FOL
GWS folder (binary folders)
FAL
GWS folder (batch command files,
ASCII)
File Selection: Modal transient analysis
BDF
Bulk data file (NASTRAN)
PCH
Punch file (NASTRAN)
File Selection: Test Schedule Definition
TSD
Test schedule definition
File Selection: Text file
ASC
ASCII
The default formats can be prescribed by
DefaultFEMRead
= "XXX"
Where XXX has to be chosen from the FEM result file pattern
list.
Remark: The result files are written in the same format as they are read.
Hence there is no entry DefaultFEMWrite available.
The GWS file format can be given by

DefaultGWSRead
DefaultGWSWrite
= "XXX"
= "XXX"
Where XXX is one of the GWS file patterns.

The default values are:
[DataFormats]
DefaultFEMRead
DefaultGWSRead
DefaultGWSWrite
NameFOL
NameFAL
NameFAF
NameFAR
NameANS
NameNAS
NameIDE
= "ANS"
= "FOL"
= "FOL"
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
"GWS-Folder
"GWS-Folder
"GWS-Folder
"GWS-Folder
"ANSYS"
"NASTRAN"
"I-DEAS"
(Binary)"
(ASCII)"
(ASCII full)"
(ASCII ref.)"
NameMEC
NameABA
NameCAT
NameHYM
NameTSI
NameBDF
NamePCH
NameTSD
NameASC
NameINP
NameLOG
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
"Pro/MECHANICA"
"ABAQUS"
"CATIA"
"Hypermesh"
"ELEMENT SETS"
"BULK DATA (NASTRAN)"
"PUNCH FILE (NASTRAN)"
"Test Schedule Definition"
"Text file"
"Abaqus Input"
"Logfile"
PatternFOL
PatternFAL
PatternFAF
PatternFAR
PatternANS
PatternNAS
PatternIDE
PatternMEC
PatternABA
PatternCAT
PatternHYM
PatternTSI
PatternBDF
PatternPCH
PatternTSD
PatternASC
PatternINP
PatternLOG
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
"*.fol"
"*.fal"
"*.fal"
"*.fal"
"*.rst"
"*.op2"
"*.u*"
"*.neu"
"*.fil"
"*.tmp"
"*.res"
"*.tsi"
"*.bdf"
"*.pch"
"*.tsd"
"*"
"*.inp"
"*.log"
DefaultExtensionFOL
DefaultExtensionFAL
DefaultExtensionFAF
DefaultExtensionFAR
DefaultExtensionANS
DefaultExtensionNAS
DefaultExtensionIDE
DefaultExtensionMEC
DefaultExtensionABA
DefaultExtensionCAT
DefaultExtensionHYM
DefaultExtensionTSI
DefaultExtensionBDF
DefaultExtensionPCH
DefaultExtensionTSD
DefaultExtensionASC
DefaultExtensionINP
DefaultExtensionLOG
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
"fol"
"fal"
"fal"
"fal"
""
"dam"
"udm"
"s00"
"fdm"
"dmp"
"res"
"tsi"
"bdf"
"pch"
"tsd"
"dat
"inp
"log
F-431
F-432
Graphic Display Parameters

In these sections, parameters are described that can be used to
modify the graphical display of results. Each method that can
display results or material parameters has its own section in
the initialization file, and contains similar keywords.
The various sections are:
z [WOEHLERATTR]
Stress-life approach graphics parameters for S-N curves.
z [ERGEBATTR]
Stress-life approach graphics parameters for results.
z [MATERIALATTR]
Strain-life approach graphics parameters for material
graphics.
z [PWOEHLATTR]
Strain-life approach graphics parameters for parameter-life
curves.
z [FLIESSATTR]
Parameters for load-notch graphics.
z [ERGMATATTR]
Strain-life approach graphics parameters for results.
Keywords for Graphic Display Parameters

The following is a list of keywords that may need translation.
keyword
translation
Colour
color
Turquoise
turquoise
Woehlerlinie
S-N curve or Parameter life curve
Achse
axis
Kurvenbereich
plot diagram background
Hintergrund
plot legend and border background
keyword
translation
Textfarbe
text color
Text-Legende
text legend
Linie
line
Lebensdauerpunkt
design point marker size
Spannenkollektiv
load amplitude histogram
Lebenlinie
life curve
Fliesskurve
load notch curve
Gitter
grid
berschrift
heading
F-433
Language
Language = <language>
<language> can take the values "english" or "deutsch".

If you choose "english" most of the keywords can be given in
English.
Line colors
lci = <string>
The color of line number i is specified by a string composed

of three sections:
attribute to change
name of curve
color code.
For example, the parameter
lc1 = "linecolour
Woehlerlinie_1
dark_green"
sets the line color of S-N curve 1 to dark_green.

Available colors are:
black
white
red
green
blue
yellow
violet
dark_grey
light_grey
dark_red
dark_green
dark_blue
dark_yellow
dark_violet
F-434
turquoise
dark_turqouise.
Available lines that can be modified are:

Woehlerlinie_i
i-th S-N curve or Parameter-life
curve for stress-life or strain-life
approach
X-Achse
X-axis
Y-Achse
Y-axis
Linie
Load amplitude histogram curve

and life curve in stress-life approach
separate_Linie
Specifies line color when only a

single line is drawn
separate_Woehlerl
Specifies S-N curve color when only

a single S-N curve is drawn
Material_i
i-th material curve in strain-life

approach
Fliesskurve_i
i-th load notch curve
Spannenkollektiv_i
i-th load amplitude histogram

curve
separates_Spannenk
Specifies load amplitude histogram

curve color when only a single load
amplitude histogram curve is
drawn
Lebenlinie_i
i-th life curve
separate_Lebenlinie
specifies life curve color when only

one life curve is drawn
Line width
lwi= <string>
The line width of line number i is specified by a string composed of three sections:
attribute to change
name of curve
line width in point.
F-435

Lw4 = "linewidth
Woehlerlinie_4
3.0"
sets the line width of S-N curve 4 to 3.

The default line width for all lines in LMS FALANCS is set
to 2.0.
The available line specifications for changing the line width
are the same as for changing the line colors:
Line type
lti= <string>
The line type of line number i is specified by a string composed of three sections:
attribute to change
name of curve
line type.
lt1 = "linetype
Woehlerlinie_1
sets the line type of S-N curve 1 to solid.

Available line types are:
solid
Dashed
solid"
Dotted
Dashdotted
The available line specifications for changing the line type

are the same as for changing the line colors:
Area Fill
fi= <string>
The color of an area fill of a plot can be specified by a string

composed of three sections:
area fill keyword
name of the area to fill
fill color.
fi = "fillareacolour
Kurvenbereich
white"
sets the area fill color for the plot diagram background
(Kurvenbereich) to white. In addition to the plot diagram
background, the plot border and legend background color
can be changed by specifying Hintergrund instead of Kurvenbereich.
F-436
Text attributes
ti
= <string>
The color of text can be specified by a string composed of

three sections:
text color
name of the text
name of the text color.
For example,
t1 = "textfarbe
Text-Legende
sets the text color of the legend to black.
black"
Marker Size
s1 = <text>
The marker size of points plotted on curves can be specified

by a string composed of three sections:
marker size keyword
name of the marker point
size of the marker.
For example,
s1
= "markersize
Lebensdauerpunkt
1.5"
means that a design life point of size 1.5 will be placed on

the life curve.
The available marker size parameter are:
Lebensdauerpunkt (design life point)
Lebenlinie_1
(calculation point, only available for

strain-life results).
Default settings for Graphic Display Parameters

The defaults for each section are presented below.
[WOEHLERATTR]
;
language = "english"
;
lc0 = "linecolour
lc1 = "linecolour
lc2 = "linecolour
lc3 = "linecolour
lc4 = "linecolour
lc5 = "linecolour
Gitter
Woehlerlinie_1
Woehlerlinie_2
Woehlerlinie_3
Woehlerlinie_4
X-Achse
light_grey"
red"
dark_green"
blue"
dark_violet"
black"
lc6 = "linecolour
;
lt0 = "linetype
lt1 = "linetype
lt2 = "linetype
lt3 = "linetype
lt4 = "linetype
;
lw1 = "linewidth
lw2 = "linewidth
lw3 = "linewidth
lw4 = "linewidth
;
f1 = "fillareacolour
;
t1 = "textcolour
t2 = "textcolour
;
[ERGEBATTR]
;
;
lc0 = "linecolour
lc1 = "linecolour
lc2 = "linecolour
lc3 = "linecolour
lc4 = "linecolour
lc5 = "linecolour
lc6 = "linecolour
lc7 = "linecolour
lc8 = "linecolour
lc9 = "linecolour
lc10 = "linecolour
lc11 = "linecolour
lc12 = "linecolour
;
lt0 = "linetype
lt1 = "linetype
lt2 = "linetype
lt3 = "linetype
lt4 = "linetype
lt5 = "linetype
lt6 = "linetype
lt7 = "linetype
lt8 = "linetype
lt9 = "linetype
lt10 = "linetype
;
lw1 = "linewidth
lw2 = "linewidth
lw3 = "linewidth
lw4 = "linewidth
lw5 = "linewidth
F-437
Y-Achse
black"
Gitter
Woehlerlinie_1
Woehlerlinie_2
Woehlerlinie_3
Woehlerlinie_4
solid"
solid"
dashed"
dotted"
solid"
Woehlerlinie_1
Woehlerlinie_2
Woehlerlinie_3
Woehlerlinie_4
2"
2"
2"
2"
Kurvenbereich
Hintergrund
white"
white"
Text-Legende
Ueberschrift
black"
black"
Gitter
Woehlerlinie_1
Woehlerlinie_2
Woehlerlinie_3
Woehlerlinie_4
separate_Woehlerl
Linie_1
Linie_2
Linie_3
Linie_4
separate_Linie
X-Achse
Y-Achse
light_grey"
red"
dark_green"
blue"
dark_violet"
black"
red"
dark_green"
blue"
dark_violet"
red"
black"
black
Gitter
Woehlerlinie_1
Woehlerlinie_2
Woehlerlinie_3
Woehlerlinie_4
separate_Woehlerl
Linie_1
Linie_2
Linie_3
Linie_4
separate_Linie
solid"
solid"
dashed"
dotted"
dashed"
dotted"
solid"
dashed"
dotted"
solid"
solid"
Woehlerlinie_1
Woehlerlinie_2
Woehlerlinie_3
Woehlerlinie_4
separate_Woehlerl
2"
2"
2"
2"
2"
F-438
lw6 = "linewidth
lw7 = "linewidth
lw8 = "linewidth
lw9 = "linewidth
lw10 = "linewidth
;
s1 = "markersize
;
;
t1 = "textcolour
t2 = "textcolour
;
[MATERIALATTR]
;
;
lc0 = "linecolour
lc1 = "linecolour
lc2 = "linecolour
lc3 = "linecolour
lc4 = "linecolour
lc5 = "linecolour
lc6 = "linecolour
;
lt0 = "linetype
lt1 = "linetype
lt2 = "linetype
lt3 = "linetype
lt4 = "linetype
;
lw1 = "linewidth
lw2 = "linewidth
lw3 = "linewidth
lw4 = "linewidth
;
;
t1 = "textcolour
t2 = "textcolour
;
[ERGMATATTR]
;
;
lc0 = "linecolour
lc1 = "linecolour
lc2 = "linecolour
lc3 = "linecolour
lc4 = "linecolour
lc5 = "linecolour
lc6 = "linecolour
Linie_1
Linie_2
Linie_3
Linie_4
separate_Linie
2"
2"
2"
2"
2"
Lebensdauerpunkt
1.2"
Kurvenbereich
Hintergrund
white"
white"
Text-Legende
Ueberschrift
black"
black"
Gitter
Material_1
Material_2
Material_3
Material_4
X-Achse
Y-Achse
light_grey"
red"
dark_green"
blue"
dark_violet"
black"
black"
Gitter
Material_1
Material_2
Material_3
Material_4
solid"
solid"
dashed"
dotted"
solid"
Material_1
Material_2
Material_3
Material_4
2"
2"
2"
2"
Kurvenbereich
Hintergrund
white"
white"
Text-Legende
Ueberschrift
black"
black"
Gitter
Spannenkollektiv_1
Spannenkollektiv_2
Spannenkollektiv_3
Spannenkollektiv_4
separates_Spannenk
Lebenlinie_1
light_grey"
red"
dark_green"
blue"
dark_violet"
black"
red"
lc7 = "linecolour
lc8 = "linecolour
lc9 = "linecolour
lc10 = "linecolour
lc11 = "linecolour
lc12 = "linecolour
lc13 = "linecolour
lc14 = "linecolour
lc15 = "linecolour
lc16 = "linecolour
lc17 = "linecolour
;
lt0 = "linetype
lt1 = "linetype
lt2 = "linetype
lt3 = "linetype
lt4 = "linetype
lt5 = "linetype
lt6 = "linetype
lt7 = "linetype
lt8 = "linetype
lt9 = "linetype
lt10 = "linetype
lt11 = "linetype
lt12 = "linetype
lt13 = "linetype
lt14 = "linetype
lt15 = "linetype
;
lw1 = "linewidth
lw2 = "linewidth
lw3 = "linewidth
lw4 = "linewidth
lw5 = "linewidth
lw6 = "linewidth
lw7 = "linewidth
lw8 = "linewidth
lw9 = "linewidth
lw10 = "linewidth
lw11 = "linewidth
lw12 = "linewidth
lw13 = "linewidth
lw14 = "linewidth
lw15 = "linewidth
;
s1 = "markersize
s2 = "markersize
s3 = "markersize
s4 = "markersize
s5 = "markersize
;
;
F-439
Lebenlinie_2
Lebenlinie_3
Lebenlinie_4
separate_Lebenlinie
Woehlerlinie_1
Woehlerlinie_2
Woehlerlinie_3
Woehlerlinie_4
separate_Woehlerl
X-Achse
Y-Achse
dark_green"
blue"
dark_violet"
black"
red"
dark_green"
blue"
dark_violet"
red"
black"
black"
Gitter
Spannenkollektiv_1
Spannenkollektiv_2
Spannenkollektiv_3
Spannenkollektiv_4
separates_Spannenk
Lebenlinie_1
Lebenlinie_2
Lebenlinie_3
Lebenlinie_4
separate_Lebenlinie
Woehlerlinie_1
Woehlerlinie_2
Woehlerlinie_3
Woehlerlinie_4
separate_Woehlerl
solid"
solid"
dashed"
dotted"
solid"
solid"
solid"
dashed"
dotted"
solid"
solid"
solid"
dashed"
dotted"
solid"
solid"
Spannenkollektiv_1
Spannenkollektiv_2
Spannenkollektiv_3
Spannenkollektiv_4
separates_Spannenk
Lebenlinie_1
Lebenlinie_2
Lebenlinie_3
Lebenlinie_4
separate_Lebenlinie
Woehlerlinie_1
Woehlerlinie_2
Woehlerlinie_3
Woehlerlinie_4
separate_Woehlerl
2"
2"
2"
2"
2"
2"
2"
2"
2"
2"
1"
1"
1"
1"
1"
Lebensdauerpunkt
Lebenlinie_1
Lebenlinie_2
Lebenlinie_3
Lebenlinie_4
2.0"
1.2"
1.2"
1.2"
1.2"
Kurvenbereich
Hintergrund
white"
white"
F-440
t1 = "textcolour
t2 = "textcolour
;
[PWOEHLATTR]
;
;
lc0 = "linecolour
lc1 = "linecolour
lc2 = "linecolour
lc3 = "linecolour
lc4 = "linecolour
lc5 = "linecolour
lc6 = "linecolour
;
lt0 = "linetype
lt1 = "linetype
lt2 = "linetype
lt3 = "linetype
lt4 = "linetype
;
lw1 = "linewidth
lw2 = "linewidth
lw3 = "linewidth
lw4 = "linewidth
;
;
t1 = "textcolour
t2 = "textcolour
;
[FLIESSATTR]
;
;
lc0 = "linecolour
lc1 = "linecolour
lc2 = "linecolour
lc3 = "linecolour
lc4 = "linecolour
lc5 = "linecolour
lc6 = "linecolour
;
lt0 = "linetype
lt1 = "linetype
lt2 = "linetype
lt3 = "linetype
lt4 = "linetype
;
lw1 = "linewidth
lw2 = "linewidth
lw3 = "linewidth
lw4 = "linewidth
Text-Legende
Ueberschrift
black"
black"
Gitter
Woehlerlinie_1
Woehlerlinie_2
Woehlerlinie_3
Woehlerlinie_4
X-Achse
Y-Achse
light_grey"
red"
dark_green"
blue"
dark_violet"
black"
black"
Gitter
Woehlerlinie_1
Woehlerlinie_2
Woehlerlinie_3
Woehlerlinie_4
solid"
solid"
ddashed"
dotted"
solid"
Woehlerlinie_1
Woehlerlinie_2 2"
Woehlerlinie_3
Woehlerlinie_4
2"
Kurvenbereich
Hintergrund
white"
white"
Text-Legende
Ueberschrift
black"
black"
Gitter
Fliesskurve_1
Fliesskurve_2
Fliesskurve_3
Fliesskurve_4
X-Achse
Y-Achse
light_grey"
red"
dark_green"
blue"
dark_violet"
black"
black""
Gitter
Fliesskurve_1
Fliesskurve_2
Fliesskurve_3
Fliesskurve_4
solid"
solid"
dashed"
dotted"
solid"
Fliesskurve_1
Fliesskurve_2
Fliesskurve_3
Fliesskurve_4
2"
2"
2"
2"
2"
2"
;
f1
f2
;
t1
t2
;
= "fillareacolour Kurvenbereich
= "fillareacolour Hintergrund
white"
white"
= "textcolour
= "textcolour
black"
black"
Text-Legende
Ueberschrift
F-441
HPGL Plotter Pen Renumbering

The plotter pen assignments for an HPGL plotter can be reassigned. Only pens that are changed from the default values
need to be re-assigned.
The pens are defined in the section [HPGLPLOT]of the initialization file.
; HPGL-Plot-Pen-Renumbering
;
[HPGLPLOT]
;
;
----------------------------------------;
Plotpencil-File
HPGL-Paintjet
;
----------------------------------------;
; Only the changes to the default values need
; specified.
;
;
;
Plotter Pen
;
;black
= "plotpencil black
;white
= "plotpencil white
;red
= "plotpencil red
;green
= "plotpencil green
blue
= "plotpencil blue
yellow
= "plotpencil yellow
;violet
= "plotpencil violet
turqouise
= "plotpencil turqouise
;dark_grey
= "plotpencil dark_grey
;light_grey
= "plotpencil light_grey
;dark_red
= "plotpencil dark_red
;dark_green
= "plotpencil dark_green
dark_blue
= "plotpencil dark_blue
dark_yellow
= "plotpencil dark_yellow
;dark_violet
= "plotpencil dark_violet
dark_turqouise = "plotpencil dark_turqouise
to be
1"
2"
3"
4"
8"
5"
7"
6"
9"
10"
11"
12"
16"
13"
15"
14"
F-442
Graphics Defaults for Fatigue Sensitive Editing

Plots
Changes to fatigue sensitive editing plot graphics can be defined in the section [SCHAEDATTR].
The default values for the entries are listed below.
; FATIGUE-SENSITIVE-EDITING
;
[SCHAEDATTR]
;
; History reduction plot attributes.
;
;
lc1 = "linecolour
Schaed-Verteilung
lc2 = "linecolour
X-Achse
lc3 = "linecolour
Y-Achse
;
lt1 = "linetype
Schaed-Verteilung
;
lw1 = "linewidth
Schaed-Verteilung
;
f1 = "fillareacolour Kurvenbereich
f2 = "fillareacolour Hintergrund
;
red"
black"
black""
solid"
1"
white"
white"
F-443
Parameters for multi processing controllers

The section [Controller_HostTable]includes a specific parameter for multi processing controllers:
<host>
<number>
where <host> is the name of a host and <number> defines

the number of parallel executable damage calculations.
You may set this parameter for several hosts.
Example:
localhost = 1
MultiProcHost = 2
F-444
Parameters that should only be changed by

system administrators
Section
[Batch Processing]
You can queue batch jobs directly after defining the jobs in the
Geometry Work Sheet. In this section the command that
queues the job is given:
The LMS FALANCS batch mode needs a batch command file

that defines the job. Before starting the command the actual
batch command file name replaces "%1".
Before using the batch processing from within LMS FALANCS,
this entry should be replaced by a command that queues the
job in your batch queuing system.
Refer to the chapter Starting a Batch process for how to start
a LMS FALANCS batch job.
The default value
GWSBatchProgram = falbatch del %1
just starts the batch job immediately without notification. And

deletes the input GWS folder.
F-445
Parameters that should only be changed by

your LMS support person
Message File
The section [Messages] defines the name of the file that contains messages written by LMS FALANCS. It includes information such as window names and error messages that appear
on the screen. The name of the message file should not be
modified by the user.
[Messages]
File01 = falmsgs.msg
Viewer for Input Data

The program to be used to view time series and rainflow matrices can be specified in the section [LoadHistoryView]..
[LoadHistoryView]
TimeSeries
= TimeView | TimeEdit
TimeSeries may take the values TimeView or TimeEdit.

RF-Matrices
RainView
RF-Matrices can take the value RainView.
F-446
General TecWare Settings
F-447
General TecWare Settings

You use the file tecware.ini for controlling some basic features of all TecWare components. The chapter The File
tecware.ini in the manual LMS TecWare -Volume I contains a
detailed description of the initialization file.
In the following table specific settings for LMS FALANCS are
listed.
Section Parameter
[Runtime]
TempDir
LMS FALANCS
In this directory the results of nonFEM analysis runs are stored if there
are no other settings in the result
specification parts of the file falancs.ini. See the paragraph
Settings Specific to FALANCS: falancs.ini for details.
[PrintConfiguration]
Orientation All printouts of graphics in LMS
FALANCS should be done in landscape orientation because the layout
of the printouts is done in this format.
[Debugging]
DebugLevel
DebugLevel = A,-D,+200-499
denotes all messages excluding debugging hints but including all messages of LMS FALANCS fatigue
methods
250-299 FALANCS main program
300-349 FALANCS fatigue methods
350-399 FALANCS FEM-interfaces
400-449 FALANCS <unused>
450-499 FALANCS API (FCI)
F-448
Shell Scripts
F-449
Shell Scripts
This chapter describes the shell scripts which are available
when working with LMS FALANCS.
The tecware shell script

The tecware family of programs as LMS FALANCS relies on a
complex setting of environment variables (or Symbols in VMS)
to run correctly. These settings are done for the user by a script
named tecware. The usual installation produces a shorthand
for this script such that it can be started just by
tecware <application name> <param1> <param_n>
If you run the script without parameters a list of valid application codes is printed to the screen. Note that usually not all of
these tools are installed since they have to be purchased and
licensed on their own.
The most important applications here are
falancs
The interactive version of LMS FALANCS easily is started
by
tecware falancs +log <log-file>
if you want to log the logging information in the file <logfile>(recommended), or by

tecware falancs
if you dont need any logging information.

falbatch
The batch version can be started from the command line by
tecware falbatch <batch-file> <notification script>
See Part 5 Reference General Settings of this manual for

a closer description of the batch mode.
F-450
falgws2i
Generate batch-files by converting binary Geometry Work
Sheet folders by starting the tecware script:
tecware falgws2i <folder> <batch-file>
See section Start from the Geometry Work Sheet for more
information.
terminal
You can open an xterm where all the tecware related settings are already done. Hence one can start applications directly. This is only for the experienced user.
tecware terminal
Shell Scripts
F-451
Logging LMS FALANCS operations

By starting LMS FALANCS with the tecware script a log-file
can be specified:
tecware falancs +log <log-file>
The default value for <log-file> is nolog that means all logging
information is lost (i.e. is sent to /dev/null on UNIX systems).
Logging Debug information

The log-file can give valuable information for your support staff
if any problems occur. Please check in case of problems with
your LMS FALANCS support which options to set in the [Debugging] section of the tecware.ini configuration file.
Logging additional method information

This section gives information how the logging file can help you
to improve the settings for non-proportional FEM/NP.
The default settings for method parameters in the
falancs.ini configuration file are chosen to reflect an analysis where the analyzed structure and the applied loads lead to
cyclic failure at the most damaged nodes. However if the
analysis leads to static failure somewhere or the whole structure is left undamaged, the default settings may fail. In these
cases you can get additional information by setting the
LogLevel = <integer-range>
parameter in the
[Debugging]
section of the configuration file tecware.ini

To get all logging information available by the FAL/NP methods set
LogLevel = 0,300-318
The following table gives the individual information given at

each LogLevel:
Level
Method
Information
F-452
Level
Method
Information
311
Cntr
312
Cntr
317
Cntr
317
RFProj
318
RFProj
313
Dam
303
Dam
317
317
Dam
Dam
318
Dam
307
Dam
317
Dam
If the resulting damage after a RP-Filter

run with given filter width is 0, the filter is
made smaller automatically.
At this LogLevel information the old and
new filter width is written to the log file.
Also if the operation fails this is written to
the log file.
Length of load histories after filter runs.
This information is also provided in the
computation status box.
The MinSignalLengthForFilter parameter
value that is set in the configuration file
falancs.ini and the actual load history
length are written to the log file.
A table with all selected directions is
printed to the log file. This table gives information about the corresponding element
and node and the length of the direction
vector.
A table with all selected directions is
printed to the file rfproj.txt in the result directory. This table gives information
about the corresponding element and node
and the length of the direction vector.
A table about memory usage is written to
the log file.
The start of a damage calculation is
logged.
The number of tasks is logged.
The number of stresses in each task is
written to the log file.
The calculated correction factor for elimination is logged.
The start of the final damage run is
logged.
If the task is too large to fit into the memory it is split. This and the size after splitting is logged.
Shell Scripts
F-453
Level
Method
Information
316
313
Dam
Dam
313
Dam
311
Dam
The time used for each task is logged.

The damage up to which nodes are eliminated after each run is written to the log
file.
The time used for node elimination and the
number of stresses that are left over are
written to the log file.
If the maximum damage in the task was 0
this is written to the log-file.
F-454
FEM related shell scripts

The scripts mentioned in this section are explained in detail in
the FEM-interface reference part of this manual. Be sure to
execute the programs in a shell created by the command
tecware terminal.
elem2tsi
converts ASCII element sets (e.g. produced by the PRELEM
command in ANSYS) to element set files that can be used
by LMS FALANCS. The ASCII element files have to include
one element number per line. After the element number a
comment can be input if separated by at least one space.
See the chapter The ASCII Data Format For Element Sets
for a description of the ASCII format of element sets.
ts2inp
converts load histories readable by LMS FALANCS to .inp
files needed as input for ABAQUS.
fil2tsub
converts the contribution factors from a ABAQUSresult file
(*.fil)to time series in the Universal Binary format.
ans2tsub
converts ANSYS modal contribution factors time histories to
Universal Binary files.
dam2bof
converts LMS FALANCS result files (*.dam)to MEDINA
Format (available only on UNIX).
pch2tsi
converts a resulting punch file (*.pch) written by a NASTRAN modal transient analysis to a LMS FALANCS readable "load history file" containing the modal participation
factors. The channels will get named MODE1, MODE2, up
to the maximal calculated mode MODEn.
Shell Scripts
F-455
ts2bdf
converts load histories readable by LMS FALANCS to .bdf
files needed as input for NASTRAN modal transient analysis.
unv2tsi
reads groups from I-DEAS universal files and converts them
to element set files that can be used by LMS FALANCS.
pch2tsif
converts the punch files produced by NASTRAN modal
transient analysis to the FUNKTION format accessible for
LMS FALANCS analysis.
Remark: These scripts are also accessible via the menu Tools of LMS FALANCS.
F-456
ReferenceInterfaces to Finite Element Tools
F-457
Part 6
ReferenceInterfaces to Finite
Element Tools
In this part, the available interfaces to finite element results
are described.
F-458
LMS FALANCS User Manual - ReferenceInterfaces to Finite Element Tools
Overview on Supported Interfaces
F-459
Overview on Supported Interfaces

Currently, interfaces to
z NASTRAN
z ANSYS
z I-DEAS
z Pro/MECHANICA
and
z ABAQUS
are supported.
For CATIA an integrated solution CAT/FALANCS is available.
A basic LMS FALANCS FEM license comes with one of these
interfaces.
F-460
NASTRAN
F-461
NASTRAN
In the following paragraphs information on the interface to
NASTRAN is given.
Supported Versions, Analysis Types and

Elements
The release notes contain a list of all versions, analysis types
and elements supported from LMS FALANCS when working
with NASTRAN.
The list is available by the entries marked in the following figure:
Fig. 118:Links to the description of supported elements
F-462
Limitations and solutions

The order of the output data must be SORT1
Using
NASTRAN BUFFSIZE=NWORD
to specify a different record-size NWORD that is larger than

2049, the standard-file-buffer of LMS FALANCS may be too
small. This problem is solved by adding the lines
[FEM-Driver]
NastranMAXR=2*NWORD
to the falancs.ini file. The factor 2 is essential, since NASTRAN internally assumes 64-Bit words.
Remark: it may be possible that the buffer problem does not occur when
loading the file (File menu) but when starting the fatigue calculation
(Stress/Strain-life Approach menus).
Sample-Load deck
ASSIGN OUTPUT2 = 'file.op2', UNIT = 12
.
.
SOL 101
.
.
CEND
.
.
STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES)=...
/* center stresses for shells */
or
STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=... /* element-nodal
stresses for shells */
.
.
BEGIN BULK
PARAM
POST
-1
/* Patran */
PARAM
PATVER 3.
or
PARAM
POST
-2
/* I-DEAS */
NASTRAN
F-463
Output written by LMS FALANCS

LMS FALANCS writes a binary OP2-file *.dam (also if the input is a formatted OP2-file) which has essentially the same
structure as the stress-input-file. As default, PATRAN-Output
PARAM POST -1
is assumed, i.e. the blocks GEOM1(S),GEOM2(S) are copied

from the input file and the modified block OES1(X) (which now
contains the damage data) is written. In the case of a different
OP2-format such as the one used for I-DEAS
PARAM POST -2
or MEDINA, the data blocks which should be copied can be explicitly defined in falancs.ini by
[FEM-Driver]
NastranCopyBlocks=block1,block2,...
The default is
NastranCopyBlocks = "CSTM,GPL,GPDT,GEOM1,GEOM2"
Additional blocks can be given via the NastranCopyBlock.

LMS FALANCS writes 4 results, which are simply named Result 1, Result 2, Result 3 and Result 4. To each of these
items, the user can assign one of the following results:
z Result 1: Miner sum, 1/number of blocks or number of
blocks
z Result 2: N_Design/N or elimination run number
z Result 3: Sigma/Sigma_design, max. absolute stress, max.
stress amplitude or safety factor
z Result 4: RF-Norm, task number or hot spot number
This is done in the sheet "FEM results" of the window "Method
parameters". In order to interpret the results during post processing, it is necessary to define a table, which gives the relation
between the result items 1, 2, 3 and 4 and their physical storage in the FE-file. This table is depending on the format and
reads as follows:
F-464
Solids:
SX
SY
SZ
SXY
SYZ
SXZ
von Mises
Result 1
Result 3
0 (not used)
Result 2
0 (not used)
Result 4
equals SX
Shells Layer Z1
SX
SY
SXY
von Mises
Result 1 of Z1
Result 1 of Z1 or Result 1 of Z2
(the one with the higher damage)
Result 2
equals SY
Shells Layer Z2
SX
SY
SXY
von Mises
Result 1 of Z2
Result 4
Result 3
equals SY of Z1
Remark: The maximum damage is also written to the elements VON-MISES

entry in the OES1* blocks (which simplifies postprocessing with MEDINA).
By default PATRAN does not display the VON MISES entry but recalculates
it from the stress tensor, so that displaying the entry in PATRAN does not
work.
For unsupported elements, no damage-output is generated.

The load-case title is replaced by "FALANCS", the subtitle is
replaced by the string optionally entered as "Comment:" in the
LMS FALANCS Job Setup Window.
NASTRAN
F-465
Procedures for post-processing

Since damage data replaces the stress data of the elements,
they are usually subject to coordinate transformations during
the post-processing.
In order to get the correct values of each quantity, these transformations have to be suppressed. As an example, the following
procedure will show the maximum damage of a shell structure
using PATRAN 75:
In the results menu, choose the create fringe option. To visualize the maximum damage select the SY component on layer
Z1 in the Select Results submenu (See the following figure).
Fig. 119:
The PATRAN 75 Stress Result Menu
F-466
In order to suppress coordinate transformations we choose the

option None for Coordinate Transformations in the Plot
Options submenu (see the following figure).
Fig. 120:
The PATRAN 75 Plot Option submenu
In addition Averaging Definition:Domain is set to None,

such that the maximum damage displayed in PATRAN is not
averaged across elements and coincides with the value displayed in the LMS FALANCS message box.
NASTRAN
F-467
Using the PATRAN Tool Menu

The first three items of the tools menu may be used to generate
LMS FALANCS element set files, the item Show results
shows the damage plots that were written to .op2 files by LMS
FALANCS. LMS FALANCS may be started from within this
menu.
Fig. 121:
PATRAN Tool Menu
Elements sets by groups
PATRAN:by groups
Fig. 122:
PATRAN Tool Menu: Groups Wizard
F-468
All groups defined in the PATRAN database are shown in

the list box. You may choose the groups written to the element set file. If the option Write bin file is enabled the
element set file is automatically converted into a LMS
FALANCS readable element set file.
Elements sets by property
Fig. 123:
PATRAN Tool Menu: Properties Wizard
All properties defined in the PATRAN database are shown

in the list box. You may choose the properties for which the
elements showing this property are written to the element
set file. If the option Write bin file is enabled the element
set file is automatically converted into a LMS FALANCS
readable element set file.
NASTRAN
F-469
Elements sets by materials
Fig. 124:
PATRAN Tool Menu: Materials Wizard
Materials defined in the PATRAN database are shown in

the list box. Only those materials that are connected to a
property are shown. You may choose the properties for
which the elements showing this property are written to the
element set file. If the option Write bin file is enabled the
element set file is automatically converted into a LMS
FALANCS readable element set file.
Show results
You may choose a load case and a sub case for which the
damage distribution is shown. If you use this tool the damage for Solids and Shells may de displayed correctly in one
plot.
Start FALANCS
Starts LMS FALANCS from within PATRAN. Ensure that
the tool is setup correctly such that this option works properly.
F-470
About
Shows some information about the tool.
Quit
Deletes the LMS Durability tool-menu from the PATRAN
main menu.
NASTRAN
F-471
Modal Transient Analysis

For a modal transient analysis LMS FALANCS needs as input
the modal stresses and the modal contribution factor time series.
For a structure modeled with finite elements, the modal
stresses can be calculated with NASTRANs modal stress
analysis (SOL 103).
For the modal transient analysis (SOL 112 as restart of SOL
103), you need a bulk data file as input for NASTRAN. The option "Time seriesNASTRAN bulk data" in the menu Tools
of LMS FALANCS can be used to convert time series readable
by LMS FALANCS to NASTRAN bulk entries. For each cannel, a TABLED1 entry is generated. In addition a TSTEP card
with time step equal to one tenth of the sampling frequency
and set identification number SID=9999 is written as a comment.
The modal transient analysis is conducted using NASTRAN,
and the result is a set of contribution factor histories that correspond to each mode shape. These results are stored in a
NASTRAN punch file that must be converted into a format
readable by LMS FALANCS. Again there is a tool accessible
via the menu Tools of LMS FALANCS available for this,
which is called: "NASTRAN punch file time series"
The resulting file can be treated just as a time series file for
FEM analysis in LMS FALANCS. The contribution factor histories corresponding to each mode are labeled mode 1, mode 2,
etc.
The user can superpose the modes, and define what analysis
method to use for the fatigue analysis.
F-472
Spot Weld Analysis

For a fatigue analysis at spot welds, these welds have to be
modeled as CBAR's or CBEAM's that are connected to shells at
each end directly via common nodes or via RBE2, RBE3 or
MPCs.. The shells may be CQUAD4, CQUADR, CQUAD8,
CTRIA3, CTRIAR or CTRIA6.
For the analysis we need the GEOM2 block in the OP2 file for
element definition, OES1 for the width of the shell and OEF1
for the forces at the bars.
You can use RBE2 elements to connect the bars to the shells as
well. In this case the block GEOM4 is required in the OP2 file.
Additionally spot welds according to the CDH model can be
processed. For this model the op2 file has to contain the
OQMG1 block, which is written, if MPCFORCES are requested. Spot welds consisting of CBAR and CBEAMS still
want to read the element forces from the OEF1 block
If spot welds are modelled with the CDH-approach, the RBEs
which connect the spot weld to the shells have to split in two
groups, one group connecting to the first group of shells, the
other one to the second group of shells. Usually this is done by
finding the corresponding groups of shells using the neighborhood condition. Sometimes this does not suffice, such that also
certain numbering criterions can be used. In falancs.ini the criterion for searching the spot welds can be defined in the following way:
[FEM-Driver]
CDHHexaOrientation = 0 | 240 | 204 | 153
with
0
240
204
153
ignore the spot weld

node numbering:
first group = element nodes 1,2,3,4
second group = element nodes 5,6,7,8
node numbering:
node numbering:
NASTRAN
F-473
After you conducted a static stress analysis in NASTRAN a

spot weld fatigue analysis can be done by LMS FALANCS. If
you want to analyze not only the spot welds you have to define
different element sets, into one of which you have to put the
CBAR elements that model the spot welds.
Ensure that you choose the right SN-Curve, a solution parameter where local stress state is set to pseudo stress: spot weld
and that the parameter "Diameter of the spot weld" in the
solution parameter is set to the correct diameter size. Keep in
mind that the diameter is measured in the same unit as the
shell width.
Remark: The value default value of the parameter "KDivSqrtS" relies on the
unit [mm] for shell thickness and diameter. If you want to use a different unit
[myunit] where
f =
myunit
mm
please multiply "KDivSqrtS" by
The damage results for the spot welds are not only written to
the CBAR / CBEAM / CHEXA elements but also to the connected shell elements such that a better visualization is
achieved.
F-474
ANSYS
F-475
ANSYS
ANSYS is given.

Elements
with ANSYS.
F-476

blocks
between the result items 1, 2, 3 and 4 and their physical storage in the FE-file. Data is stored in the ANSYS file according
to the following list. There is no difference between element
types
SX
SY
SZ
SXY
SYZ
SXZ
Result 1 at top or bottom

Result 2
Result 3
Result 1 at this layer
Result 1 at the opposite layer
Result 4
Remark: Fatigue analysis results are written into the first load case of the
selected FE load file. Any results currently in this portion of the file will be
over-written, so users should use a dummy load case as the first load case.
ANSYS
F-477
Spot Weld Analysis

modeled as BEAM4 being connected to shells (SHELL43,
SHELL63, SHELL93, SHELL143 or SHELL181) at each end.
If you want to analyze not only the spot welds you have to define different element sets, into one of which you have to put
the BEAM4 elements that model the spot welds.
shell width.
Remark: The value default value of the parameter "KDivSqrtS" relies on the
[myunit] where
f =
myunit
mm
please multiply "KDivSqrtS" by
the beam elements but also to the connected shell elements
such that a better visualization is achieved.
F-478
Procedures for post processing

If you are licensed for the ANSYS post-processing tools, a special toolbar will appear when ANSYS is started. On this toolbar are various items for displaying and loading LMS FALANCS results. Each button is described below.
Fig. 126
ANSYS Toolbar
FALANCS
This button will start LMS FALANCS.
Remark: LMS FALANCS is started from the same directory that ANSYS was
started from. Hence if your FEM result files reside in that directory, you have
immediate access to them by the file selection windows.
LMS FALANCS specific Buttons

CM2TSI
Generates LMS FALANCS element set files from ANSYS
components. The user will be asked for the filename (without extension) of the element set file. All components are
written as separate element sets into this file.
LOAD_FAT
This button will load in the fatigue damage results.
NDS_TO_N
This button will display Result 2, which might be the ratio
of the design life (set in the solution parameters) to the actual life.
ANSYS
F-479
S_TO_SDS
This button will display Result 3, which might be the ration
of the stress to the design stress (corresponding to the design life set in the solution parameters).
DAM_MAX
This button will display Result 1, which might be the
maximum damage of the top and bottom of shell elements.
DAM_TOP
This button will display Result 1 at top, which might be the
damage on the top of the shell elements.
DAM_BOT
This button will display Result 1 at bottom, which might be
the damage on the bottom of the shell elements.
Buttons of the Initial ANSYS Toolbar

SAVE_DB
This button will save the database.
RESUM_DB
This button will resume from a save database.
QUIT
This button will quit ANSYS.
F-480
Generating element sets

There are two different procedures for generating element set
types to use in LMS FALANCS. The first adds user defined
functionality to ANSYS such that the element set files can be
written just by selecting elements in ANSYS and calling a
macro, the second is using simple ASCII files.
Using the ANSYS Toolbar

1. Ensure that you have installed the ANSYS Toolbar.
2. Load model, select elements, create components (Entity:
Elements)
3. Use the button CM2TSI. You are asked for a file name
file_name (default: fal_set) and all components are written to the file
file_name.tsi
Each component defines a element set in LMS FALANCS.
Using ASCII files

1. Generate one or multiple ASCII files in which all elements
are listed each in one row. You can use the ESEL and
ELIST command for this purpose. Check with the ANSYS
User Manuals.
2. Use the menu item ToolsASCII fileelement sets of
LMS FALANCS to select the ASCII element sets and the
name of the resulting element set file readable by LMS
FALANCS.
I-DEAS
F-481
I-DEAS
In the following paragraphs information on the interface to IDEAS is given.

Elements
with I-DEAS.
F-482
Limitations
In the stress result block the data must have the format:
Model Type
Analysis Type
Data Characteristic
Specific Data Type
Data Type
=
=
=
=
=
1
1
4
2
2
(Structural)
(Static)
(Symmetric global Tensor)
(Stress)
(Single precision floating point)
Number of values per position = 6
And 'data at nodes on element' must be set.
I-DEAS
F-483

A result file having the extension .udm is written that contains
the damage results generated by a LMS FALANCS analysis.
As title lines the following lines are written to data set 57:
"FALANCS"
"None"
Actual Date
"None"
Job-Comment or Job-Directory.
blocks
between the result items 1, 2, 3 and 4 and their physical storage in the FE-file. Result data are written as unknown symmetric Tensor, where we have
SX
SY
SZ
SXY
SYZ
SXZ
Result 1 at Z1 or Z2 (the one with the higher damage)

Result 3
Result 4
Result 2
Result 1 at Z2
Result 1 at Z1
F-484
Spot Weld Analysis

modeled as LINEAR BEAM (21) being connected to shells at
each end.
Ensure that element forces are written in the universal file set
57 or 2414. The shell thickness is read from set 788 or 789.
If you want to analyze not only the spot welds you have to define different element sets, into one of which you have to put
the BEAM elements that model the spot welds. You can use
RIGIT (122) elements to connect the beams to the shells as
well.
shell width.
Remark: The value default value of the parameter "KdivSqrtS" relies on the
[myunit] where
f =
myunit
mm
the beam elements but also to the connected shell elements
such that a better visualization is achieved.
I-DEAS
F-485

Using unv2tsi
1. Define groups within I-DEAS.
2. Ensure that the group definitions are written to the universal file (*.unv)
3. Use the option "I-DEAS static groups element sets" in the
menu Tools of LMS FALANCS to select the ASCII element
sets and the name of the resulting element set file readable
by LMS FALANCS.
The written element set file contains all groups that are found
in the universal file.
Using ASCII files

are listed each in one row. Check with the manual of your
post processor how to produce such files.
2. Use the option ""ASCII fileelement sets" " in the menu
Tools of LMS FALANCS to select the ASCII element sets
and the name of the resulting element set file readable by
LMS FALANCS.
F-486
Pro/MECHANICA
F-487
Pro/MECHANICA
Pro/MECHANICA is given.

Elements
with Pro/MECHANICA.
F-488
Limitations
Damage is calculated at h-nodes.
Surface detection acts on p-elements.
Since distinct Pro/MECHANICA runs may operate on different
h-nodes you have to specify the same h-mesh for different load
cases if you want to combine the results in a single LMS FALANCS fatigue analysis.

The damage is written into the analysis directory of the first
selected load case into a 'Version 7' stress ASCII file with the
extension s00. The values are written into the location of global
stress for solids, 2-D surface elements and top surface for shells
and line 2-D elements. All other values are set to zero. To visualize the results the file must be renamed to a file name of a
stress result file generated during a stress analysis.
blocks
between the result items 1, 2, 3 and 4 and their physical storage in the FE-file. You find at
Pro/MECHANICA
F-489
SX
Result 1 at top or bottom

SY
Result 2
SZ
Result 1 at top
SXY
Result 3
SYZ
Result 1 at bottom
SXZ
Result 4
Beam elements are ignored.
Remark: If the parameter Elimination run number is selected as Result 2
in the method parameters, then instead of the value
N design
N
being written
into the file, the filter run number when the node was eliminated is written into
the file for display on the finite element mesh.
This parameter is useful for displaying at which filter width level nodes have
been eliminated from fatigue analysis for a finite element mesh (If not
checked, then
mesh.)
N design
N
is written into the file for display on a finite element

Using ASCII files
Use the menu item ToolsASCII file->FALANCS Element
sets of LMS FALANCS to select the ASCII element sets and
the name of the resulting element set file readable by LMS
FALANCS.
F-490
ABAQUS
F-491
ABAQUS
In the following paragraphs information on the interface to ABAQUS is given.

Elements
with ABAQUS.
F-492
Sample input file

A part like
*EL FILE POSITION=NODES
S
is necessary to write the stresses to the .fil file. LMS FALANCS needs these stresses to perform a durability analysis.
The position may be one of NODES, CENTROIDAL or INTEGRATION POINTS:
If spot welds shall be analyzed you need something like the
following:
*EL FILE , POSITION=NODES, ELSET=WELDNGET
SF
S
*EL FILE , POSITION=NODES, ELSET=WELDROOT
S
STH
In the element set WELDNGET put the beams that model the
spot welds. Here the forces (SF) and the stresses(S) need to be
written.
For the shells that are connected to the spot welds (assumed to
be put in the elements set WELDROOT) the shell thickness
(STH) is needed.
ABAQUS
F-493

LMS FALANCS writes a fil-file *. (default extension .fdm)
which has essentially the same structure as the stress-inputfile.
blocks
between the result items 1, 2, 3 and 4 and their physical storage in the FE-file. This table is depending on the format and
reads as follows:
Solids:
SX
SY
SZ
SXY
SYZ
SXZ
Result 1 at top or bottom (the one with the

higher damage)
Result 3
0 (not used)
Result 2
0 (not used)
Result 4
Shells Layer 1
SX
SY
SXY
Result 1
Result 1 at L1 or L2 (the one with the
higher damage)
Result 2
F-494
Remark: If I-DEAS is used to visualize the results, the results of layer 1 are
written to the top layer.
Shells Layer 2
SX
SY
SXY
Result 1
Result 4
Result 3
Remark: If I-DEAS is used to visualize the results, the results of layer 2 are
written to the bottom layer.
For unsupported elements, no damage-output is generated.

The load-case title is replaced by "LMS FALANCS", the subtitle is replaced by the string optionally entered as "Comment:"
in the LMS FALANCS Job Setup Window.
ABAQUS
F-495
Spot Weld Analysis

modeled as B31 bars that are connected to shells at each end.
The shells may be STRI3, S3, S3R, S4, S4R or S8R.
After you conducted a static stress analysis in ABAQUS a spot
weld fatigue analysis can be done by LMS FALANCS. If you
want to analyze not only the spot welds you have to define different element sets, into one of which you have to put the B31
elements that model the spot welds.
shell width.
Remark: The value default value of the parameter "KdivSqrtS" relies on the
[myunit] where
f =
myunit
mm
the B31 elements but also to the connected shell elements such
that a better visualization is achieved.
F-496

Using fil2tsi
1. Define element sets (ELSET) within ABAQUS.
2. Use the menu item ToolsABAQUS fil files->FALANCS
Element sets of LMS FALANCS to select the ASCII element sets and the name of the resulting element set file
readable by LMS FALANCS.
The written element set file contains all element sets that are
found in the .fil file.
Using ASCII element files

1. Generate one or multiple ASCII-file in which all elements
Remark: Use the menu item ToolsASCII file->FALANCS Element sets of
LMS FALANCS to select the ASCII element sets and the name of the resulting element set file readable by LMS FALANCS.
CAT/FALANCS
F-497
CAT/FALANCS
CATIA is given.

Elements
with CATIA.
F-498
The CAT/FALANCS philosophy

CAT/FALANCS may be used in two modes:
z
Interactive fatigue analysis
This is the default mode: A FALANCS process is started from

within CAT/FALANCS and a process communication between
the two processes is initiated. Stress results, damage results
and element sets get transferred without bothering about files.
z
Manual interfacing using intermediate files
The stress results are written into special files that may be
read by a separate FALANCS run later on. This FALANCS
process may as well be run on a different computer or even a
different platform. The results produced in this fatigue analysis may then be read into CATIA again and visualized using
ANVISU.
CAT/FALANCS
F-499
The CAT/FALANCS command window
Fig. 131:
The CAT/FALANCS command window
The window contains the areas load cases and general selections and the button Start FALANCS.
Load cases
Write Stresses
Transfers all available stress results from CATIA to LMS
FALANCS. If LMS FALANCS is running it gets informed
and it is set to a state as if the files would have been loaded
manually. The results are written into an intermediate file.
The name of the file may be chosen individually in the adjacent text field. If FALANCS is started after the intermediate file has been written this file is preloaded in LMS FALANCS.
Read Damage
After a fatigue analysis has been conducted the results may
be displayed within CATIA. By pressing this button the results are read into the CATIA database and the "Max Damage" plot is displayed.
F-500
General Selections
Write as set
General selection generated by the ANMANAGE-tool are
written into an element set file and preloaded in LMS FALANCS. The element sets have the same names as the general selections.
Read from set
General selections are created from FALANCS element set
files.
Create by property
General selections are created by different element properties. Keep in mind that the general selections are transferred to FALANCS after pressing the Write as set button.
Create by material
General selections are created by different element materials. Keep in mind that the general selections are transferred
to FALANCS after pressing the Write as set button.
Button
Start FALANCS
Starts a FALANCS process on the same computer and establishes a process communication with this process. This is
necessary if you want to use CAT/FALANCS interactively
to perform a fatigue analysis.
CAT/FALANCS
F-501
Viewing Results
blocks
This is done in the panel FEM results of the data sheet
"Method parameters". In order to interpret the results during
post processing, it is necessary to define a table, which gives
the relation between the result items 1, 2, 3 and 4 and their
physical storage in the FE-file:
DAMMAX = Result 1 at top or bottom (the one with the higher
damage)
RELLIF = Result 2
RELSIG = Result 3
DAMTOP = Result 1 at top
DAMBOT = Result 1 at bottom
RFNORM = Result 4
By applying the button Read Damage all damage results are
read into the CATIA database and may be displayed. The damage plot is displayed automatically.
F-502
To see the other results, you have to change to the ANVISU

tool. Here you may chose six different predefined images:
Fig. 132:
The images available in CAT/FALANCS
The images correspond to the names in the LMS FALANCS

User Manual by
CAT/FALANCS IMAGE : MAXIMUM DAMAGE
Result 1 (maximum)
CAT/FALANCS IMAGE : DAMAGE ON BOTTOM
LAYER
Result 1 at bottom layer
CAT/FALANCS IMAGE : DAMAGE ON TOP LAYER
Result 1 at top layer
CAT/FALANCS IMAGE : DESIGN LIFETIME / CALCULATED LIFE TIME
Result 2
CAT/FALANCS IMAGE : LOAD FACTOR AGAINST
STRESS AT DESIGN POINT
Result 3
CAT/FALANCS IMAGE : NORM OF LOAD INFLUENCE
VECTOR
Result 4
CAT/FALANCS
F-503
Generating Element Sets

1. Generate CATIA general selections using the CATIA ANMANAGE tool or the command buttons create by property or create by material in the CAT/FALANCS tool.
2. Generate the element sets by pressing the write as sets
button.
F-504
Databases
F-505
Part 7
Databases
This part contains detailed information on the database handling in LMS FALANCS.
F-506
LMS FALANCS User Manual - Databases
Shared or Private Databases
F-507
Shared or Private Databases

It is possible to have shared or private stress-live curve, material, solution and method parameter databases. If a user
wishes to have private databases, then the appropriate databases directory location should be specified in the users personal copy of the falancs.ini file, placed in the users home
directory in a subdirectory called tecware.
Users are cautioned that shared databases can be edited by
anyone having access to them. So to ensure that changes to
solution parameters or material properties are not made unexpectedly, users are encouraged to maintain their own private
database.
A personal database location can be specified in the users
falancs.ini file. The INI file is described in detail in Part 5
Reference General Settings of this manual. The entries for
changing the database location are briefly reviewed in the
chapter Syntax of Database Definition.
The location of the default databases for SN-curves, material
properties, method parameters and solution parameters are
specified in the global falancs.ini, and can be modified by
the user. For each of these databases, the name of the directory
and the contents file can be specified.
Remark: The results of a fatigue analysis strongly depend on the values in
the database. Hence changing the database location may be the reason for
unexpected changes in results!
F-508
The Database Configuration Tool
F-509

The Database Configuration Tool (DCT) is a comfortable tool
for creating and modifying user defined databases.
The DCT may be started from LMS FALANCS or as stand
alone program.
This chapter contains the paragraphs
z Starting the DCT from LMS FALANCS
z Starting the DCT as stand alone program
z The window "Database Configuration Tool
and
z Syntax of Database Definition
F-510
Starting the DCT from LMS FALANCS

In LMS FALANCS the Database Configuration Tool is started
from the menu ConfigurationDatabases....
The window "Database Configuration Tool" appears. In this
window all databases defined in the initialization files falancs.ini are listed.
Even though the general and custom databases are listed the
user cannot change them. These databases are marked by a
cross "+".
After closing the DCT the changes of the editable databases
and definitions of new databases are written to the users personal configuration file falancs.ini.
If you want to define new empty databases, you can do so and
write the specification into the falancs.ini file using the
DCT. But when you try to open a database selection window,
the following messages occur:
Fig. 133:
Database directory does not exist
That is because the new settings are saved in the falancs.ini, but the directory is not yet created. When prompting the question with
z Yes the directory will be generated and the new database is
available in the database selection window
z No nothing is created and the new database is not available
in the database selection window. When opening next time
the database selection window in the current LMS FALANCS session, the two messages will not appear.
This occurs as often as you open the first time in a LMS FALANCS session a database selection windows for that a new database is defined.
F-511
Starting the DCT as stand alone program

The Database Configuration Tool is started as stand alone program directly from the command line by typing
faldct <parameter>
where <parameter> specifies the file the changes are saved in.
The read/write permission for the file has to be given for the
user. Otherwise an error message appears and the DCT is not
started.
parameter
used file
-local
-custom
the personal falancs.ini

the falancs.ini in the custom directory of
the tecware installation directory
the global falancs.ini in the data directory of the tecware installation directory
The specified file is used. If it does not exist
yet, the file is created.
-global
<path and file>
If no <parameter> is entered a corresponding error message

appears:
Fig. 134:
Error message when starting the DCT stand alone without parameter
If the command was sent correctly and the required read/write

permission is given, the window "Database Configuration Tool"
appears. In this window all databases defined in the initialization files falancs.ini are listed. The databases marked by a
cross "+" are not to be changed.
F-512
The user may edit all editable databases and define new databases. After closing the DCT the changes are saved in the file
specified by the starting parameter.
F-513
The window "Database Configuration Tool"

The window "Database Configuration Tool" appears after
starting the DCT as described above.
Fig. 135:
The window "Database Configuration Tool"

Selection Area
In the upper window area you select the type of the database you want to add, edit or delete.
All already existing databases of the selected type are listed
in the List box.
Available selections are:
Stress-life Approach SN Curve
All databases for stress-life material data are entered in
the List box. The data sets in these databases are used
in the Stress-life Approach only.
The data sets in these databases contain two conceptually different types of data, namely the SN or Bastenaire
curves for the ordinary stress life approach and the Dang
Van data for the safety factor approach. You should define a database for data sets used in the stress life ap-
F-514
proach and another database for data sets used in the

safety factor approach.
Stress-life Approach Solution parameter
All databases are entered in the List box, that contain
solution parameter sets used in the Stress-life Approach.
Strain-life Approach material data
All databases for strain-life material data are entered in
the List box. The data sets in these databases are used
in the Strain-life Approach only.
Strain life Approach Solution parameter
All databases are entered in the List box, that contain
solution parameter sets used in the Stress-life Approach.
General Method parameter
All defined databases for method parameter data sets
are entered in the List box.
The method parameter data sets are independent of the
used approach. Hence the data sets of the listed databases may be used in both the Stress-life Approach and
the Strain-life Approach.
General All
All existing databases of all types are listed.
You may create new databases of all types at once by
1. entering a name at Name (e.g. TEST) and
2. specifying the general path of the save directory in
Path (e.g. C:\tecware\pdb\TEST).
The subdirectories for the different database types are
defined automatically (e.g. C:\tecware\pdb\TEST\mat
for material data sets).
List box
All entries of the selected database type which are already
defined in the initialization files falancs.ini are listed. A
"+" marks databases which are not editable.
When marking an entry general information on the database is entered in the fields on the right.
F-515
Name
The edit text displays the name of an already existing and
in the List box selected database.
The user may
edit the text for changing the name of the database when
pressing Modify
enter a text to define a new database when pressing
New Entry.
See the paragraph Syntax of Database Definition for further information on the corresponding entry in the falancs.ini.
Path
The edit text displays the path to the content file
pdb_dir.pdc of an already existing and in the List box
selected database.
The user may
edit the text to change the path of the database when
pressing Modify
enter a new text to define the path for a new database
when pressing New Entry.
If General All is selected the entered path is used as general path for the save directory. The subdirectories of the
different database types are generated automatically.
Editable?
The radio buttons indicate whether a database is editable or
not.
The user may
change the setting for an already existing and in the List
box selected database when pressing Modify
set the edit flag for a new database when pressing New
Entry.
F-516
New Entry
A new database is created corresponding to the type definition in the Selection Area and the settings in the fields
Name, Path and Editable?.
If the entered path leads to an empty or not yet existing directory, the DCT asks , if a new one should be created.
If the radio button All is selected, the specified name and
path are used for defining a directory where the subdirectories for the different databases are created automatically.
Modify
The parameters of the currently selected database entry are
changed corresponding to the settings in the fields Name,
Path and Editable?.
Remark: Database entries marked by "+" can not be changed!
Delete
The currently selected database is deleted.
Remark: Database entries marked by "+" can not be deleted!
Clear
The fields Name, Path and Editable? are cleared.
OK
If the DCT was started
from LMS FALANCS the changes of the user defined databases are written into the users personal configuration
file.
as stand-alone program the changes are saved in the file
specified by the starting parameter.
Cancel
The DCT is closed without saving the changes.
Help
The online help to the DCT appears.
F-517
F-518
Syntax of Database Definition

The initialization file contains a section [DB:<type>] for each
of the five database types:
Type
stress-life curves
material data
solution parameter
solution parameter
method parameter
Section [DB:<type>]
[DB:SNCurve]
[DB:Material]
[DB:SolpStrain]
[DB:SolpStress]
[DB:MethodParam]
Approach
Stress only
Strain only
Strain only
Stress only
Stress and
Strain
Where stress-life curves means as well ordinary SN curves

(Whler curves) as Bastenaire curves and Dang Van data.
Database Sections
A database section [DB:<type>] may contain several database
definitions. If the section remains empty, no database of the
corresponding type is defined. A database section has the
structure:
<name>=xxxx
<name>.Display=<display-name>
where
<name> is the internal name of a database.
xxxx refers to the parameter definition section [PDB:xxxx] of
the database <name>.
<display-name> is the text used in the option menus for database selection and for listing databases in the DCT.
If the entry <name>.Display=<display-name> is missing,
the internal name <name> is used for listings.
When configuring a database with the DCT the parameter
<name> and xxxx are defined automatically. As <displayname> the name specified in the field Name of the DCT is
used.
F-519
Parameter Definition Section

The parameter definition section [PDB:xxxx] of a database contains the specifications for the database driver. It has the
structure:
[PDB:xxxx]
Format = <format>
Path = <path>
Editable = <edit-flag>
where
<format> is the storage format of the database.
In the current release "CFG" is the only available value.
<path> specifies the directory where the content file
pdb_dir.pdc and all elements of the database are stored.
The name must be given in the correct syntax for the specific operating system, and must be enclosed in quotes.
There should be enough free disk space available on this
disk to store the database.
<edit-flag> defines whether the database is editable or not.
Available values are: true, false, True, False, 0 and 1. The
default value is "true".
When configuring a database with the DCT the parameters
<path> and <edit-flag> are defined by the values set in the
fields Path and Editable?.
F-520
Default Database Definition

The values of the databases delivered with LMS FALANCS are
shown below.
Section
[DB:SNCurve]
[DB:Material]
[DB:SolpStrain]
[DB:SolpStress]
[DB:MethodParam]
Databases
Default, Examples,
WeldConnections
Default, Examples
Default, Examples
Default, Examples,
WeldConnections
Default, Examples,
WeldConnections
The environment variable $TECWAREHOME is set in the

script that executes LMS FALANCS and is not usually modified by the user. It refers to the LMS TecWare installation directory.
;;---------------------------------------------------; Database for SN curve parameters
;----------------------------------------------------[DB:SNCurve]
Default = SNCDefault
Default.Display = Default SN Curves
Examples = SNCExamples
Examples.Display = Example SN Curves
WeldConnections=SNCWeld
;----- specification for database driver ----[pdb:SNCDefault]
Format = "CFG"
Path = "%TECWAREHOME%\pdb\default\snc"
Editable = true
[pdb:SNCExamples]
Format = "CFG"
Path = "%TECWAREHOME%\pdb\examples\snc"
Editable = false
[pdb:SNCWeld]
Format = "CFG"
Path = "%TECWAREHOME%\pdb\welding\snc"
Editable = false
;----------------------------------------------------; Database for material parameters
;-----------------------------------------------------
F-521
[DB:Material]
Default = Material_Default
Examples = Material_Examples
;----- specification for database driver ----[pdb:Material_Default]
Format = "CFG"
Path = "%TECWAREHOME%\pdb\default\mat"
Editable = true
[pdb:Material_Examples]
Format = "CFG"
Path = "%TECWAREHOME%\pdb\examples\mat"
Editable = false
;----------------------------------------------------; Database for solution parameter stress-life approach
;----------------------------------------------------[DB:SolpStress]
Default = SolpStress_Default
Examples = SolpStress_Examples
WeldConnections=SolpStress_Weld
;----- specification for database driver ----[pdb:SolpStress_Default]
Format = "CFG"
Path = "%TECWAREHOME%\pdb\default\sp_stress"
Editable = true
[pdb:SolpStress_Examples]
Format = "CFG"
Path = "%TECWAREHOME%\pdb\examples\sp_stress"
Editable = false
[pdb:SolpStress_Weld]
Format = "CFG"
Path = "%TECWAREHOME%\pdb\welding\sp_stress"
Editable = false
;----------------------------------------------------; Database for solution parameter strain-life approach
;----------------------------------------------------[DB:SolpStrain]
Default = SolpStrain_Default
Examples = SolpStrain_Examples
;----- specification for database driver ----[pdb:SolpStrain_Default]
Format = "CFG"
Path = "%TECWAREHOME%\pdb\default\sp_strain"
Editable = true
F-522
[pdb:SolpStrain_Examples]
Format = "CFG"
Path = "%TECWAREHOME%\pdb\examples\sp_strain"
Editable = false
;----------------------------------------------------; Database for method parameters
;----------------------------------------------------[DB:MethodParam]
Default = MethodParam_Default
Examples = MethodParam_Examples
WeldConnections=MethodParam_Weld
;----- specification for database driver ----[pdb:MethodParam_Default]
Format = "CFG"
Path = "%TECWAREHOME%\pdb\default\mparam"
Editable = true
[pdb:MethodParam_Examples]
Format = "CFG"
Path = "%TECWAREHOME%\pdb\examples\mparam"
Editable = false
[pdb:MethodParam_Weld]
Format = "CFG"
Path = "%TECWAREHOME%\pdb\welding\mparam"
Editable = false
If shared database access is intended, these databases should

be defined in the falancs.ini file that resides in the custom
subdirectory of $TECWAREHOME. The settings there can always be superseded using a private version of falancs.ini
that resides in a subdirectory named tecware in the users
home directory.
F-523
Example for a database definition

Assume that 3 databases for SN-curves are introduced:
z LMSGlobal
default database delivered by LMS; not editable by a typical
user
z CustomerGlobal
global database from the customer; not editable by a typical
user
z Private
private database from a single user; not visible or editable
by other users
;----------------------------------------------------; Database for SN curve parameters
;----------------------------------------------------[DB:SNCurve]
LMSGlobal = SNCurve-LMSGlobal
LMSGlobal.Display = GlobalSNCurves
CustomerGlobal = SNCurve-CustomerGlobal
CustomerGlobal.Display = CustomerGlobalSNCurves
Private = SNCurve-Private
Private.Display = MyPrivateSNCurves
;----- specification for database driver ----[pdb:SNCurve-LMSGlobal]
Format = "CFG"
Path = "$TECWAREHOME/pdb_lms/snc"
Editable=false
[pdb:SNCurve-CustomerGlobal]
Format = "CFG"
Path = "$TECWAREHOME/pdb_customer/snc"
Editable = false
[pdb:SNCurve-Private]
Format = "CFG"
Path = "$TECWAREHOME/pdb_private/snc"
Editable = true
The entries define three databases for SN Curves. The entry

*.Display (in red) is optional. It can be used to define a name
for displaying in the list boxes, which differs from the keys in
the sections [DB:...](e.g. in the database selection windows
or in the DCT):
F-524
Fig. 136:
Define names of databases used in listings
The configuration of databases for material data, solution parameter or method parameter is similar.
Description of The Database Formats
F-525

The databases in LMS FALANCS consist of ASCII-files for
each data set and another ASCII file containing the table of
contents. The whole database is located in a certain directory
which is named db_directory in the following. The name of
the file with the table of contents is always
pdb_dir.pdc.
This file looks like that:

[Header]
DatabaseName=SNCurve-Convert
Version=3
Creator=tecwhome
Modifier=tecwhome
Created=02-Nov-1999 10:31:35
Modified=02-Nov-1999 10:31:35
Name of the database

This is the current version for
FALANCS 2.11
Name of the data set
Relative path, where the data set
is defined. The first letter of the
name of the data set is used to
create a subdirectory, where the
file is located. The file name itself
is arbitrary.
Creator of the database
Last modifier of the database
Creation date
Last modification date
[next data set]
Section of next data set
[Structural Steel]
FileName=s/381eaf7700.pdd
The databases for SN-curves and material data are separated.

For each of these databases there is a base directory and a file
with the table of contents. Several databases for SN-curves or
material data may exist. All databases to be used in FALANCS
have to be configured in falancs.ini.
F-526
SN-Curves
One file containing a SN-curve (including Bastenaire and Dang
Van) looks like that (the values of the parameters are default
values, which should be taken if the correct value is not
known):
[Header]
Creator = speckert
Modifier = speckert
Created = 06-11-2001 08:32:57
Modified = 06-11-2001 08:32:57
[Data]
Name = "SN_Default"
Comment = "Example SN-curve"
DBSection = ""
Unit = "MPa"
Smax = 500
Smin = 1000
S1 = 250
Se = 250
Te = 250
alpha = -1.5
k1 = 3
k2 = 3
Ne = 2e+006
SmHat = 0
SNCurveType = SNCTypeSNCurve
DangVanType =
DangVanPointsP--c = 2
DangVanPointsP--1 = 0
DangVanPointsP--2 = 166.667
Name of the creator of the data

set
Name of the last modifier
Creation date
Modification date
Arbitrary comment
Name of the database in falancs.ini (is not used and may be
omitted)
Unit of the stresses (in FALANCS it is always assumed that
the unit is MPa)
Tensile Strength
Stress at the intersection point of
the regions with slope k1 and k2
Stress amplitude at endurance
limit
Tau for Dang Van limit curve
Alpha for Dang Van limit curve
slope of SN-curve for S > S1
slope of SN-curve for S < S1
Number of cycles at endurance
limit
Value describing the R-ratio:
R = (SmHat -1)/(SmHat +1) =
mean stress/stress amplitude
Type of curve:
SNCTypeSNCurve or
SNCTypeBastenaire
Type of Dang Van limit curve:
DVTypeDangVan or
Number of points for
curves (equals DangVanPointsT--c)
Values for the pressure
DangVanPointsT--c = 2
BastenaireA = 6e+007
BastenaireB = 1300
BastenaireC = 2.5
F-527
Number of Dang Van tau points

Values for tau
Parameters for Bastenaire curve
in amplitude notation
F-528
Material Data
One file containing a material data set looks like that (the values of the parameters are default values, which should be
taken if the correct value is not known):
[Header]
Creator = speckert
Modifier = speckert
Created = 06-11-2001 08:32:57
Modified = 06-11-2001 08:32:57
[Data]
Name = "Mat_Default"
Comment = "Example SN-curve"
DBSection = ""
Emod = 200000
Ne = 506770
SigE = 272.34
EpsE = 0.001545
SmHat = 0
TenStrength = 600
ComprStrength = 1800
MatStrainType =
MatDataTypeTension
sig_fStrich = 900
eps_fStrich = 0.59
b = -0.087
c = -0.58
VerfKoeff = 990
nStrich = 0.15
Poisson = 0.29
Chi = 5
BackStress = 5
Name of the creator of the data

set
Name of the last modifier
Creation date
Modification date
Arbitrary comment
Name of the database in falancs.ini (is not used and may be
omitted)
Young's modulus
Number of cycles at endurance
limit
Stress at endurance limit
Strain at endurance limit
Value describing the R-ratio:
R = (SmHat -1)/(SmHat +1) =
mean stress/stress amplitude
Tensile Strength
Type of material data: determined from tension or torsion
tests
Fatigue Strength Coefficient
Fatigue Ductility Coefficient
Fatigue Strength Exponent
Fatigue Ductility Exponent
Cyclic Hardening Coefficient
Cyclic Hardening Exponent
Poisson's ratio
Chi for Jiangs model
Number of back stresses in
Jiang's model
LimitDefinition =
LimitTypeStress
F-529
Type of definition of static limit:

This is either of type stress
(LimitTypeStress) or of type
strain (LimitTypeStrain)
meaning that the stress value is
defined by the user and the
strain value is calculated using
the stress-strain-relation or the
strain value is defined by the
user and the stress value is calculated.
EnduranceDefinition =
Type of definition of the endurEnduranceTypeCycles ance limit. This is either of type
EnduranceTypeCycles,
EnduranceTypeStress or
EnduranceTypeStrain
meaning that one of the values is
defined by the user and the others are calculated from that
value using the RambergOsgood and the Manson-CoffinMorrow relations
TensileStrainLimit = 0.03849
Strain value at endurance limit
for tension
CompressiveStrainLimit = 53.825 Strain value at endurance limit
for compression
F-530
Method Parameter
One file containing a method parameter set looks like that (the
values of the parameters are default values, which should be
taken if the correct value is not known):
[Header]
Creator = schaefer
Modifier = schaefer
Created = 18-04-2002 15:58:31
Modified = 18-04-2002 15:58:31
[Data]
Name = "LTS-strain only"
DBSection = ""
NoOfCritPlanes = 18
NoOfRFMClasses = 100
TSDExact = 0
FSE = 1
FilterWidth--c = 2
NoOfProjections = 250
TolAngle = 10
NormQuotient = 100000
ElimSafetyFactor = 100
UseAbsElimLimit = 0
AbsElimLimit = 0.001
name of the creator of the data

set
last modifier
creation date
date of last modification
name of the data set
database section in falancs.ini,
not interpreted, may be omitted
number of critical planes used in
the non proportional FEM critical
plane approaches
number of rainflow bins used for
rainflow counting in the non-FEM
analysis
after each event of the test
schedule there remains a residue
of unclosed loops that may also
influence the simulation of the
next event
Fatigue Sensitive Editing is activated, the history reduction may
be performed on the created results
number of defined filter widthes
filter width
filter width
number of projection directions
for the rainflow projector during a
nonproportional analysis
tolerance angle used for identifying similar directions in the rainflow projector
maximum norm quotient
numerical criterion for node elimination
The usage of AbsElimLimit in
node elimination runs is deactivated
absolut elimination limit for node
F-531
elimination runs
the usage of the Strain-life Approach for damage calculation on
filtered load histories is activated
FEMWriteDamage = WriteDamthe Miner Sum is written as ReageMinerSum
sult 1
FEMWriteDamLog = 1
Result 1 is displayed in logarithmic scale
ShowNodeElim = 0
N_Design/N is written as Result 2
LogD_InfiniteLife = -30
value to indicate infinite life
StaticFailFactor = 100
factor on limit damage sum to indicate static failure
FEMWriteSigma = ShowSigmaOver- the load design factor is written
SigmaDesign
as Result 3
FEMWriteDam5 = WriteDamHotSpots the number of the hot spot to
which an element belongs to is
written as Result 4
CalcHotspots = 1
the hot spot calculation is activated
HSMinDamage = -30
elements below the given damage are not taken into account
during the hot spot calculation
HSThreshold = 1.2
The damage D (in logarithmic
scale) of the hot spot is given by
the damage of its center element.
The neighboring elements are
added to the hot spot, as long as
their damage values are greater
than d - threshold
HSMaxCount = 20
maximum number of hot spots
which are determined
HSMinNeighbors = 1
only direct neighbors are taken
FEMSizeEffect = SizEffNone
GenStress = 0
deactivates the generation of
stress-time series during the LTScalculation
GenStrain = 1
activates the generation of straintime series during the LTScalculation
GenForceAndMoment = 0
deactivates the generation of time
series for forces and moments
during the LTS-calculation
ProjectionAngle = 0
the projection angle is ignored
ProjectionAngleValue = 45
projection angle for generating
strain time series
StrainLifeForAll = 1
F-532
Solution Parameter
The solution parameter sets used in the Stress-life Approach
differ from them used in the Strain -Life Approach.
Solution Parameter (Stress-life Approach)

One file containing a solution parameter set used in the Stresslife Approach looks like that (the values of the parameters are
default values, which should be taken if the correct value is not
known):
[Header]
Creator = mayer
Modifier = mayer
Created = 07-05-2002 14:18:29
Modified = 07-05-2002 14:18:29

set
name of the last modifier
creation date
modification date
[Data]
Name = "Default"
Comment = "default stress-life" arbitrary comment
DBSection = ""
may be omitted
Approach = Approach_Stress
solution parameter set for the
MeanStressCorr = StressCorrNone no mean stress correction
method is chosen, no correction
will be performed
M1 = 0
parameters for mean stress correction methods
M2 = 0
M3 = 0
R_lim = 1
DamageAccum = MinerElem
activates the damage accumulation according to Miner's Rule
(elementary)
SpotwDiameter = 5
diameter of spot welds to be
analyzed (Rupp model)
SpotwSNShift = 0.7
Shift of nugget SN- curve against
sheet
SpotwCalcNugget = 1
the damage calculation in the
spot weld nugget is activated
SurfCorr = 1
surface correction parameter
SizeCorr = 1
size correction parameter
LimitDamSum = 1
damage value limit
LocStressState =
specifies the critical plane stress
PStressCritPlaneMode1 parameter
UnknownVar = Life
ProbOfFail = 50
Life = 1000
LifeDim = Blocks
LoadLevel = 1
DespTol = 0.05
ComppTol = 0.1
CompPoints--c = 0
F-533
longer channels are truncated to

the length of the shortest channel
the value of LoadLevel is defined by the user and the value of
Life is calculated
the life of the design point, calculated from LoadLevel
dimension of the parameter Life
the load level of the design point
given by the user
tolerance for the calculation of the
computed points are in terms of
multiples of the design point
along the vertical axis
additionally to the design point 10
computed points are generated
life if Axis=AxisLifeDuration
number of manual defined computed points
Solution Parameter (Strain-life Approach)

One file containing a solution parameter set used in the Strainlife Approach looks like that (the values of the parameters are
default values, which should be taken if the correct value is not
known):
[Header]
Creator = gschaef
Modifier = gschaef
Created = 07-05-2002 14:23:05
Modified = 07-05-2002 14:23:05

set
name of the last modifier
creation date
modification date
[Data]
Name = "Default"
Comment = "default strain-life" arbitrary comment
DBSection = ""
may be omitted
Approach = Approach_Strain
solution parameter set for the
SurfCorr = 1
surface correction parameter
SizeCorr = 1
size correction parameter
LimitDamSum = 1
damage value limit
F-534
LocStressState = PStressCritPlaneMode1
UnknownVar = Life
ProbOfFail = 50
Life = 1000
LifeDim = Blocks
LoadLevel = 1
DespTol = 0.05
ComppTol = 0.1
CompPoints--c = 0
LNStrainRel = Neuber
StrainFile = ""
LimLoadRatio = 2.5
DamageParam = DamPSWTOrig
ResidualStress = 0
ResidStressUnit = "MPa"
k_Bergmann = 0
PwlLinStart = 1000
PwlLinEnd = 200000
specifies the critical plane stress

parameter
longer channels are truncated to
the length of the shortest channel
the value of LoadLevel is defined by the user and the value of
Life is calculated
the life of the design point, calculated from LoadLevel
dimension of the parameter Life
the load level of the design point
given by the user
computed points are in terms of
multiples of the design point
along the vertical axis
additionally to the design point 10
computed points are generated
life if Axis=AxisLifeDuration
number of manual defined computed points
the applied load relates to the
notch (local) strain according to
Neuber's rule
no input file for the load-notch
strain data is defined
the limit load ratio (Kp) for plastic
correction
the original Smith-Watson-Topper
parameter is chosen as damage
parameter
the residual stress value for the
"Thin surface layer" approach
the unit of the parameter
ResidualStress
mean stress influence factor for
damage parameter 'Bergmann'
only
start point for log-log linear regression
end point for log-log linear regression
Seam Weld Databases
F-535
Part 8
Seam Weld Databases

This part contains detailed information on the seam weld databases delivered with LMS FALANCS.
F-536
LMS FALANCS User Manual - Seam Weld Databases
Seam Weld Database Types
F-537

The local geometry has strong influence on the local stresses
and the fatigue characteristics around seam welds. For standard weld details the properties may be looked up from the
catalogues of the Eurocode 3 standard or the recommendations
of the International Institute for Welding (IIW). You find the
main details in the corresponding section of this part of the users manual.
For non-standard details use the R1MS model. The local geometry has to be handled by good 3D FEM element meshes.
LMS FALANCS contains specific databases for the work with
weld connections. They are located in the directory
$TECWAREHOME\pdb\welding.
database for
stress-life curves
solution parameters
method parameters
Subdirectory of \welding
\snc
\sp_stress
\mparam
In the database selection windows these databases are available by the entry WeldConnections in the field Database.
F-538
R1MS Materials Properties

The local geometry has strong influence on the local stresses
and the fatigue characteristics around seam welds. But this local geometry depends on the welding process and may scatter
and the geometry details are not known before manufacturing.
Since the fatigue life is governed by the growth of cracks, the
slope of SN curves is around k=3.
The base material has no influence on the fatigue in the case of
mild and medium-strength steels. Since a static failure would
occur in the surrounding material only the endurance limit for
the seam weld has to be determined.
The R1MS model

The R1MS model assumes a constant notch radius (R1) at the
intersection of the weld and the base material and a flat weld
surface. The material properties for the weld are back calculated from tests. These tests give Mean and Scatter of the material properties.
The results from over 250 tests lead to the values
e E = 176 Mpa for R=0

e E = 247 Mpa for R=1
where e E gives the pseudo stress amplitude at 2,000,000 cycles
The seam weld SN-curve database contains four entries
R1MS (R=0)
R1MS (R=-1)
R03MS (R=0)
R03MS (R=-1)
that are based on these two values, where the endurance limit
is set to 5,000,000 cycles.
Since the static failure depends on the base material, the tensile and compressive strength are set to relatively high values.
F-539
If you only evaluate the seam weld you should set the static
failure data to those of the base material.
We recommend to use Haibach/Miner damage accumulation
and the mean stress influences recommended by the IIW. Use
SW/NS/IIW low RS (cat I) if the base material shows negligible residual stresses. Use SW/NS/IIW med RS (cat II) for
geometrically simple thin walled details and use SW/NS/IIW
high RS (cat III) for complex details, structures with high residual stresses or having thick walls. If there is no further information on the structure use SW/NS/IIW high RS (cat III).
Thin and thick plates

The original R1MS approach was intended for heavy machinery and steel construction. The use of the R1MS data is recommended for plate thicknesses between 8mm and 80 mm.
If the plates are between 2mm and 8mm, model the notch radius r = 0.3 mm and use the R03MS material properties. This
was used in LMS consulting projects.
For plate thicknesses below 2mm a verification of the method
is not yet available.
F-540
Eurocode 3
Eurocode 3 gives guidelines for the design of steel structures.
Within these guidelines a catalogue of fatigue analysis recommendations for a variety of seam welds is given. As outlined in
the introduction these may be used for standard details in construction.
Eurocode 3 recommends to use a safety factor Mf for poor accessible components and components where a failure leads to
rapid failure of the whole structure (non fail-safe components).
The recommended values for Mf are:
Fail-safe components
non fail-safe components
Periodic inspection and

maintenance. Accessible
joint detail
1.0
1.25
Periodic inspection and

maintenance. Poor accessibility.
1.15
1.35
You can apply the safety factor LMS FALANCS by dividing the
surface influence factor in the solution parameters by the value
of Mf.
The Eurocode 3 recommends to use the Mean Stress Correction method SW/NS/EC3 low RS for details with low residual
stresses. Use SW/NS/EC3 high RS for all other details.
Remark: It is always safe to use SW/NS/EC3 high RS.
Remark: The categories are no longer part of the seam weld sn-curves, but
of the solution parameter. Thus one has to choose the approach in the solution parameters
As damage accumulation rule, you should use the Haibach/Miner setting.

This Haibach/Miner setting does not account for the cut off at
100,000,000 cycles as recommended in the Eurocode 3, but the
LMS FALANCS intrinsic filtering mechanisms lead to an

equivalent result.
F-541
F-542
Structures and Detail Categories
F-543

In this section we give the detail categories as recommended in
"Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures: Part 1.1 General rules
and rules for buildings (Section 9), European Committee for
Standardization, Brussels, 1992".
The graphics give a sketch of a structure. Below the detail
category recommended for the structure and a short description are listed. An comment m=5 means you should use a SNCurve having the slope 5, i.e. Eurocode 3 SS - Detail Category 80 or 100
F-544
Non-welded details
160: Rolled and extruded products

Plates and flats
Rolled sections
Seamless hollow sections
Sharp edges, surface and rolling flaws to be improved by
grinding
140: Machine gas cut or sheared material with no drag lines.

All visible signs of edges discontinuities removed
125: Machine thermally cut edges with shallow and regular
drag lines
F-545
Welded build up sections
125: Automatic butt welds carried out from both sides. Without stop/start positions.
If a specialist inspection demonstrates that longitudinal
welds are free from significant flaws, category 140 may
be used.
112: Automatic butt welds carried out from both sides. With
stop/start positions
Automatic butt welds made from one side but without
start/stop positions.
100: Manual fillet or butt weld
F-546
100: Manual or automatic butt welds carried out from one

side only, particularly for box girders
100: Repaired automatic or manual fillet or butt welds
80:
Intermittent longitudinal welds: stitch or tack welds not

subsequently covered by a continuous weld. Gap weld
ratio smaller than 2.5
71:
Intermittent longitudinal welds: ends of continuous

welds at cope holes.
Cope hole not to be filled with weld metal
F-547
Transverse butt welds
112: Transverse splices in plates flats and rolled sections.

Flange splices in plate girders before assembly.
Transverse splices in plates or flats tapered in width or
in thickness where the slope in not greater than 1:4
All welds ground flush to plate parallel to direction of
the arrow.
90:
Transverse splices in plates flats and rolled sections.

Flange splices in plate girders before assembly.
Transverse splices in plates or flats tapered in width or
in thickness where the slope in is not greater than 1:4
The height of the weld convexity to be not greater than
10 % of the weld width, with smooth transitions to plate
surface
80:
Transverse splices in plates flats and rolled sections

The height of the weld convexity to be not greater than
20 % of the weld width
F-548
36:
Butt welds made from one side only
71:
With backing strip:

Transverse splice
Transverse butt weld tapered in width or in thickness
were the slope is not greater that 1:4.
The fillet weld attaching the backing strip terminates
more than 10 mm from the edges of the stressed plate.
Transverse butt weld on a permanent backing strip.
The fillet weld attaching the backing strip terminates
closer than 10 m non load carrying welds to the plate
edge
50:
F-549
Welded attachments with non load carrying

welds
Longitudinal fillet welded gusset at length l

80: l 50 mm
71: 50mm < l < 100 mm
50: l > 100 mm
F-550
Gusset plate, welded to the edge of a plate or beam flange

90: r > 150 mm or r/w > 1/3
71: 1/6 < r/w < 1/3
45: r/w < 1/6
Transverse attachments:
Welds terminating more than 10mm from the edge of the plate
Vertical stiffeners welded to a beam or a plate girder
Diaphragms of box girders welded to the flange or web
80: t 12 mm
71: t > 12 mm
80:
The effect of welded shear connectors on base material
F-551
Welded joints with load-carrying welds
Cruciform joints:
71: Full penetration butt weld
36: Partial penetration tee-butt joint or fillet welded joint.
The misalignment e/t has to be smaller than 15%
63:
Overlapped welded joints:

Fillet welded lap joint
Stress in the main plate
Overlapping larger than 10mm.
45:
Overlapped welded joints:

Fillet welded lap joint
Stress to be calculated in the overlapping plate elements.
Overlapping larger than 10mm.
F-552
Cover plates in beams and plate girders:

End zones of single or multiple welded cover plates, with or
without frontal weld
50: t and tC 20 mm
36: t or tC > 20 mm
80:
Welds in shear:
Continuous fillet welds transmitting in shear flow, such
as web to flange welds in plate girders. For continuous
full penetration butt weld in shear use category 100.
M=5
80:
Welds in shear:
Fillet welded lap joint.
M=5
F-553
80:
Welds in shear:
Stud connectors (failure in the weld or heat affected zone
m=5
71:
Trapezoidal Stiffener to deck plate welds:

Full penetration butt weld
The bending stress range shall be calculated on the basis
of the thickness of the stiffener
50:
Trapezoidal Stiffener to deck plate welds:

Fillet or partial penetration butt weld
The bending stress range shall be calculated on the basis
of the throat thickness of the weld or the thickness of the
stiffener if smaller
F-554
Hollow sections
160: Non welded elements
140: Continuous longitudinal welds

Automatic longitudinal seam welds
No stop/start positions and free from defects.
56:
Butt welded end-to-end connection of rectangular hollow

sections.
Details with thickness greater than 8 mm may be classified two categories higher
F-555
71:
Butt welded end-to-end connection of circular hollow

sections.
Details with thickness greater than 8 mm may be classified two categories higher
71:
Circular or rectangular hollow section, fillet welded to

another section.
Section width parallel to stress direction 100mm.
50:
Circular hollow sections, butt welded end-to-end with intermediate plate.

Details with thickness greater than 8 mm may be classified one category higher
F-556
45:
Rectangular hollow sections, butt welded end-to-end

with intermediate plate.
Details with thickness greater than 8 mm may be classified one category higher
40:
Circular hollow sections, fillet welded end-to-end with

intermediate plate.
Wall thickness less than 8mm
36:
Rectangular hollow sections, fillet welded end-to-end

with intermediate plate.
Wall thickness less than 8mm
F-557
F-558
International Institute of Welding
F-559

The recommendations of the International Institute of Welding
provides guidelines for the design and analysis of welded structures. Within these guidelines a catalogue of fatigue analysis
recommendations for a variety of seam welds is given. As outlined in the introduction these may be used for standard details in construction.
The International Institute of Welding does not give general
recommendations on a partial safety factor m , since such a
factor depends largely on circumstances like
fatigue design strategy
consequences of failure
practical experience
You can apply a safety factor in LMS FALANCS by dividing
the surface influence factor in the solution parameters by the
value of m.
Use SW/NS/IIW low RS (cat I) if the base material shows insignificant residual stresses. Use SW/NS/IIW med RS (cat II)
for geometrically simple thin walled details and use
SW/NS/IIW high RS (cat III) for complex details, structures
with high residual stresses or having thick walls. If there is no
further information on the structure use SW/NS/IIW high RS
(cat III).
Remark: It is always safe to use SW/NS/IIW high RS (cat III).
Remark: The categories are no longer part of the seam weld SN-curves, but
of the solution parameter. Thus one has to choose the approach in the solution parameters.
As damage accumulation rule, you should use the Haibach/Miner setting.
F-560
Remark: This Haibach/Miner setting does not account for the cut off at
100,000,000 cycles as recommended in the Eurocode 3, but the LMS FALANCS intrinsic filtering mechanisms lead to an equivalent result.
F-561
Structures and Fatigue Classes

In this section we give the fatigue class numbers (FAT) according to the "Recommendations of IIW: Fatigue Design of
Welded Joints And Components" by A. Hobbacher, 1996.
The graphics give a sketch of a structure. Below the FAT recommended for the structure and a short description are listed.
A comment m=5/7 gives the slope of the corresponding SNCurve.
Unwelded parts of a component
160: Rolled and extruded products

Plates and flats
Rolled sections
Seamless hollow sections
m=5
F-562
140: Machine gas cut or sheared material with no drag lines,

corners removed, no cracks by inspection, no visible imperfections.
M=3
125: Machine thermally cut edges, corners removed, no
cracks by inspection,
m=3
100: Manually thermally cut edges, free from cracks and severe notches.
M=3
80: Manually thermally cut edges, uncontrolled, no notch
deeper than 0.5mm
m=3
Butt welds, transverse loaded
125: Transverse loaded butt weld (X-groove or V-groove)

ground flush to plate, 100% NDT
100: Transverse loaded butt weld made in shop in flat position, toe angle less equal 30o, NDT
80:
Other transverse loaded butt weld NDT
80:
71:
F-563
Transverse butt weld, welded on ceramic backing, root

crack
Transverse butt weld on permanent backing bar
Transverse butt welds welded from one side without backing

bar, full penetration
71:
Root controlled by NDT
45:
No NDT
45:
Transverse partial penetration butt weld analysis

based on stress in weld throat sectional area, weld
overfill not to be taken into account.
This detail is not recommended for fatigue analysis!
F-564
Transverse butt weld ground flush, NDT, with transition in

thickness and width
125: Slope 1:s : 1:5
100: Slope 1:s : 1:3
80:
Slope 1:s : 1:2
Transverse butt weld made in shop, welded in flat position,
weld profile controlled, NDT, with transition in thickness and
width
100: Slope 1:s : 1:5
90:
Slope 1:s : 1:3
80:
Slope 1:s : 1:2
Transverse butt weld, NDT, with transition on thickness and
width
80:
Slope 1:s : 1:5
71:
Slope 1:s : 1:3
63:
Slope 1:s : 1:2
71:
Transverse butt weld, different thickness without transition, centers aligned.
71:
Three plate connection, root crack
F-565
112:
Transverse butt weld flange splice in built-up section

welded prior to the assembly, ground flush, with radius
transition, NDT
80:
Transverse butt weld splice in rolled section or bar besides flats, ground flush, NDT
F-566
Transverse butt weld splice in circular hollow section, welded

from one side, full penetration
71: Root inspected by NDT
45: no NDT
71:
Tubular joint with permanent backing
Transverse butt weld splice in rectangular hollow section,

welded from one side, full penetration
56: Root inspected by NDT
45: no NDT
F-567
125: Transverse butt weld ground flush, weld ends and radius ground, 100% NDT at crossing flanges, radius transition.
100: Transverse butt weld made in shop at flat position, weld
profile controlled, NDT at crossing flanges, radius transition.
80:
71:
Transverse butt weld grund flush, NDT at crossing

flanges with welded triangular transition plates, weld
ends ground. Crack starting at butt weld
Transverse butt weld, NDT at crossing flanges with
welded triangular transition plates, weld ends ground.
Crack starting at butt weld
F-568
30:
Transverse butt weld at crossing flanges.

Crack starting at butt weld
F-569
Longitudinal load-carrying welds
125: Automatic longitudinal seam welds without stop/start

position in hollow sections
90: With stop/start positions
125: Longitudinal butt weld, both sides ground flush parallel

to load direction, 100% NDT
125: Longitudinal butt weld, without stop/start positions,
NDT
90: Longitudinal butt weld, with stop/start positions, NDT
F-570
125: Continuous automatic longitudinal fully penetrated Kbutt weld without stop/start positions (based on stress
range in flange) NDT
100: Continuous automatic longitudinal double sided fillet
weld without stop/start positions (based on stress range
in flange)
90: Continuous manual longitudinal fillet or butt weld
(based on stress range in flange)
Intermittent longitudinal fillet weld (based on normal stress in

flange and shear stress in web at weld ends)
80: / = 0
71: / = 0.0 0.2
63: / = 0.2 0.3
56: / = 0.3 0.4
50: / = 0.4 0.5
45: / = 0.5 0.6
40: / = 0.6 0.7
36:
F-571
/ > 0.7
Longitudinal butt weld, fillet weld or intermittent weld with

cope holes (based on normal stress in flange and shear stress
in web at weld ends), cope not higher than 40% of web.
71:
/=0
63:
/ = 0.0 0.2
56:
/ = 0.2 0.3
50:
/ = 0.3 0.4
45:
/ = 0.4 0.5
40:
/ = 0.5 0.6
36:
/ > 0.6
F-572
80:
71:
63:
45:
Cruciform joint or T-joint, K-butt welds, full penetration,

no lamellar tearing, misalignment
e < 0.15 t
weld toes ground, toe crack
Cruciform joint or T-joint, K-butt welds, full penetration,
no lamellar tearing, misalignment
e < 0.15 t
weld toes ground, toe crack
Cruciform joint or T-joint, fillet welds or partial penetration K-butt welds, no lamellar tearing, misalignment
e < 0.15 t
toe crack
Cruciform joint or T-joint, fillet welds or partial penetration, K-butt welds including toe ground joints, weld toe
crack.
Analysis based on stress in weld throat
45:
F-573
Splice of rolled section with intermediate plate, fillet

welds, weld root crack.
Splice of circular hollow section with intermediate plate, single-sided butt weld, toe crack
56: Wall thickness > 8mm
50: Wall thickness < 8mm
Splice of circular hollow section with intermediate plate, fillet

weld, root crack.
Analysis based on stress in weld throat.
F-574
Splice of rectangular hollow section with intermediate plate,

single-sided butt weld, toe crack
Splice of circular hollow section with intermediate plate, fillet

weld, root crack.
F-575
Non load carrying attachments
Transverse non-load-carrying attachment, not thicker than

main plate
100: K-butt weld, toe ground
100: Two-sided fillets, toe ground
80: Fillet weld(s), as welded
71: Thicker than main plate
Transverse stiffener welded on girder web or flange, not

thicker than main plate. For weld ends on web principal stress
to be used
100: K-butt weld, toe ground
100: Two-sided fillets, toe ground
80: Fillet weld(s), as welded
71: Thicker than main plate
F-576
80:
Non-load carrying stud as welded
71:
Trapezoidal stiffener to deck plate, full penetration butt

weld, calculated on basis of stiffener thickness, out of
plane bending
45:
Trapezoidal stiffener to deck plate, fillet or partial penetration weld, calculated on basis of stiffener thickness
and weld throat, whichever is smaller
F-577
Longitudinal fillet welded gusset at length,

80
L < 50 mm
71
L < 150 mm
63
L < 300 mm
50
l > 300 mm
Gusset near edge: see flat side gusset
90:
Longitudinal fillet welded gusset with radius transition,

end of fillet weld reinforced and ground
c < 2t, max 25 mm
r > 150 mm
F-578
Longitudinal fillet welded gusset with smooth transition

(sniped end or radius) welded on beam flange or plate
c < 2t, max 25 mm
71: R > 0.5 h
63: R < 0.5 h or < 20o
Longitudinal flat side gusset welded on plate edge or beam

flange edge, with smooth transition (sniped end or radius).
C < 2t2, max 25 mm
50: R > 0.5 h
45: R < 0.5 h or < 20o
If t2 < 0.7 t1, FAT rises 12%
F-579
Longitudinal flat side gusset welded on plate or beam flange

edge, gusset length l
50: L < 150 mm
45: L < 300 mm
40: L > 300 mm
Longitudinal flat side gusset welded on edge of plate or beam

flange, radius transition ground.
90: R > 150 mm or r/w > 1/3
71: 1/6 < r/w < 1/3
50: r/w < 1/6
71:
Circular or rectangular hollow section. Section width

parallel to stress direction < 100 mm, else like longitudinal attachment.
F-580
Lap joints
Transverse loaded lap joint with fillet welds

65: Fatigue of parent material
45: Fatigue of weld throat
Stress ratio must be
0<R<1!
Longitudinally loaded lap joint with side fillet welds

50: Fatigue of parent material
50: Fatigue of weld (calculated on maximum weld length of
40 times the throat of the weld
Lap joint gusset, fillet welded, non-load-carrying, with smooth

transition (sniped end with < 20o or radius), welded to loaded
element
c< 2t max 25 mm
63: To flat bar
56: To bulb section
50: To angle section
F-581
Reinforcements
End of long doubling plate on I beam, welded ends (based on

stress range in flange at weld toe)
56: tD 0.8 t
50: 0.8 t < tD 1.5 t
45: tD > 1.5 t
End of long doubling plate on beam, reinforced welded ends

ground (based on stress range in flange at weld toe)
71: tD 0.8 t
63: 0.8 t < tD 1.5 t
56: tD > 1.5 t
50:
End of reinforcement plate on rectangular hollow section

Wall thickness:
T < 25 mm
F-582
80:
71:
Reinforcements welded on with fillet welds, toe ground

Toe as welded
Analysis based on modified nominal stress
Flanges, branches and nozzles
71:
Stiff block flange, full penetration weld
Stiff block flange, partial penetration or fillet weld

63: Toe crack in plate
45: Root crack in weld throat
F-583
71:
Flat flange with almost full penetration butt welds,

modified nominal stress in pipe, toe crack
63:
Flat flange with fillet welds, modified nominal stress in

pipe, toe crack
80:
Tubular branch or pipe penetrating a plate, K-butt

welds.
If diameter is larger than 50 mm, stress concentration of
cutout has to be considered
F-584
71:
Tubular branch or pipe penetrating a plate, fillet welds.

71:
Nozzle welded on plate, root pass removed by drilling.

63:
Nozzle welded on pipe, root pass as welded

F-585
Tubular joints
63:
Circular hollow section butt joint to massive bar, as

welded
Circular hollow section welded to component with single
side butt weld, backing provided. Root crack
50:
Circular hollow section welded to component single sided

butt weld or double fillet welds. Root crack
F-586
Installation
F-587
Part 9
Installation
This part contains general information concerning the installation of LMS FALANCS.
F-588
LMS FALANCS User Manual - Installation
Installation Instructions
F-589
Installation Instructions
To install LMS FALANCS on your system, please follow the
tecware installation instructions shipped with your LMS FALANCS installation to
z
z
z
z
unpack the installation

adapt the configuration files
setup the user environments
setup the license server.
The remainder of this part is specific to LMS FALANCS and

the interaction with FEM tools.
F-590
Operating Systems: Supported Versions
F-591
Operating Systems: Supported

Versions
UNIX Systems
LMS FALANCS runs on the following UNIX operating systems
Architecture
OS
Hewlett Packard 9000 Series

800
HP-UX 11.x
IBM
AIX 4.3
SGI
IRIX 6.5
SUN Sparc
Solaris 7
The following versions are used for internal quality insurance

tests:
Architecture
OS
Hewlett Packard 9000 Series

800
HP-UX 10.20
IBM
AIX 4.3
SGI
IRIX 6.5
SUN Sparc
Solaris 7
Microsoft Windows
LMS FALANCS runs on Microsoft Windows 4.0 with service
pack 3 or higher.
F-592
Installation of CAT/FALANCS
F-593
Installation of CAT/FALANCS
with CAT/FALANCS.
F-594
Installation
In the subdirectory
falancs/contrib
of the LMS FALANCS installation directory a file
USRENV.dcls
is provided. The contents of this file must be included in the
USRENV_FALANCS.dcls file of the CAT/FALANCS user. This
may be done most easily by
1. copy the provided file to a central place, e.g.
/catiafiles/USRENV_FALANCS.dcls
2. Append the line
include ('/catiafiles/USERENV_FALANCS.dcls');
to the USRENV.dcls files of the CAT/FALANCS users.

To run CATIA with the CAT/FALANCS extensions you have
to use the tecware script with the command
tecware catia
where the user must be able to start CATIA by the command
catia
To use the FALANCS module within CATIA you have to include the module FALANCS in your current keypad.
Remark: We suggest to supply an alias like catfalancs for the start of
CAT/FALANCS.
Remark: The module FALANCS is included in the subdirectory falancs/lib of the tecware-installation directory. Keep in mind that the length
of the load path in CATIA for packages is limited.
Remark: Do not unload the package FALANCS using
/unload m FALANCS
Special Features for FEM Postprocessors
F-595
Special Features for FEM

Postprocessors
This chapter describes the installation of the ANSYS post
processing toolbar and the PATRAN tool menu.
ANSYS Post Processing Toolbar

If you are licensed for the ANSYS post-processing tools, a toolbar is supplied with the LMS FALANCS installation.
The
$TECWAREHOME/contrib
subdirectory in the installation root directory contains a subdirectory

$TECWAREHOME/contrib/ansys
that contains the necessary files.
Unix systems
To install the toolbar:
1. Copy the files *.mac to the docu subdirectory of your ANSYS installation.
2. Edit the file falancs:
you have to give the full path to the TecWare installation
directory, e.g. if you installed LMS FALANCS into the directory /cae_soft/lms/tecware write
/cae_soft/lms/tecware/tecware ans2tsi
to the file falancs.
3. Edit the file ans2tsi:
F-596

directory, e.g. if you installed LMS FALANCS into the directory /cae_soft/lms/tecware write
/cae_soft/lms/tecware/tecware ans2tsi
to the file ans2tsi.
4. Copy the files falancs and ans2tsi to the bin subdirectory of your ANSYS installation and ensure that the ANSYS
users have this subdirectory in the PATH environment variable.
5. To load the FALANCS toolbar
in each ANSYS session:
Add the following two commands at the end of your file
Start??.ans:
/input,lms_bar,dat,<path>
/menu,on
The text <path> has to be replaced by the appropriate
path where you can find the file LMS_bar.dat.
Remark: Either expand the file Start??.ans manually in a text
editor or use the menu items FileRead Input from ... and
MenuCtrlsPUpdate Toolbar to load the file LMS_bar.dat and start
the toolbar.
After restarting ANSYS or after selecting the menu item

FileClear & Start new the FALANCS toolbar is
started
OR
only in the running ANSYS session:
the file Start??.ans has not to be changed
After selecting the menu item FileClear & Start new
the FALANCS toolbar is started.
F-597
Microsoft Windows
To install the toolbar:
1. Copy the files *.mac to the docu subdirectory of your ANSYS installation.
2. Edit the file falancs.bat:
directory, e.g. if you installed LMS FALANCS into the directory Y:\cae_software\tecware
set tecwpath=Y:\cae_software\tecware\
to the file falancs.bat.
3. Edit the file ans2tsi.bat:

directory, e.g. if you installed LMS FALANCS into the directory Y:\cae_software\tecware write
Y:\cae_software\tecware ans2tsi
to the file ans2tsi.bat.
4. Copy the files falancs, ans2tsi and ansrm.bat to the
bin subdirectory of your ANSYS installation and ensure
that the ANSYS users have this subdirectory in the PATH
environment variable.
5. To load the FALANCS toolbar
in each ANSYS session:
Add the following two commands at the end of your file
Start??.ans:
/input,lms_bar,dat,<path>
/menu,on
The text <path> has to be replaced by the appropriate
path where you can find the file LMS_bar.dat.
Remark: Either expand the file Start??.ans manually in a text
editor or use the menu items FileRead Input from ... and
MenuCtrlsPUpdate Toolbar to load the file LMS_bar.dat and start
the toolbar.
F-598
After restarting ANSYS or after selecting the menu item

FileClear & Start new the FALANCS toolbar is
started
OR
only in the running ANSYS session:
the file Start??.ans has not to be changed
After selecting the menu item FileClear & Start new
the FALANCS toolbar is started.
Installing the PATRAN Tool Menu

In the contrib/patran subdirectory of your installation you
find a pcl-file called
lmsdt.pcl
Copy this file to the patran75 subdirectory of your patran75 installation. Add the lines
/* LMS Durability Technologies Tool Menu */
!! INPUT lmsdt.pcl NOERROR
lms.init()
to the init.pcl file and the LMS Tool menu will be loaded
automatically each time you start PATRAN.
You may load the lmsdt.pcl file by hand as well. Do not forget to start the menu by the lms.init() command in this
case.
Copy the scripts falancs and pat2tsi to the PATRAN bin directory or to any directory that is included in all users PATH
variable.
Adapt the scripts to your local installation:
Edit the file falancs, you have to give the full path to the
tecware-installation directory, e.g. if you installed LMS FALANCS into the directory
/cae_soft/lms/tecware
write
/cae_soft/lms/tecware/tecware falancs
to the file falancs.
F-599
1. Edit the file pat2tsi, you have to give the full path to the
tecware-installation directory, e.g. if you installed LMS
FALANCS into the directory
/cae_soft/lms/tecware
write
/cae_soft/lms/tecware/tecware pat2tsi $1
to the file pat2tsi.
F-600
Predefined Directories for Temporary Storage and for Input Files
F-601
Predefined Directories for Temporary

Storage and for Input Files
LMS FALANCS uses some special directories as temporary directory and in the file selection. These directories are described
in the following paragraphs.
LMS FALANCS Temporary Directory

Temporary files get stored in a temporary directory that is
specified in the tecware.ini file by the TEMP_DIR setting in
the section [Runtime]. For each LMS FALANCS run a subdirectory is automatically created with a unique name for each
run. This subdirectory is used as temporary directory for LMS
FALANCS.
In this directory the scratch file and intermediate folders are
written to some place below this directory. You can look up the
actual temporary directory by selecting the item Setup in the
Help menu of the LMS FALANCS main window.
At the end of each LMS FALANCS run, the user will be asked
whether to keep the temporary data or to delete it. By choosing
to delete the temporary data this directory and all its subdirectories are deleted.
For each batch mode job an individual temporary directory is
created. The user is responsible for the handling of these directories.
F-602
Predefined Directories for Input Data

It is possible to define favorite directories for the file selection
windows in LMS FALANCS. These directories may be defined
in the tecware.ini configuration file. All entries in the individual files are merged. See the part General TecWare Settings for further information.
Necessary Storage Space
F-603
Necessary Storage Space

LMS FALANCS requires some storage space for the installation, for result saving and during the computation runs.
Storage Space Needed for LMS FALANCS

Software
The disk storage space for a complete LMS FALANCS installation is approximately 310 MB. The installation contains example data and the online documentation.
Temporary Storage Space Needed During

LMS FALANCS Execution
Temporary storage during LMS FALANCS execution depends
on whether or not an FEM or non FEM analysis is run, and on
the length of the time histories used.
For a non-proportional FEM analysis, there are 8 bytes of storage for each node, and for time histories, there are up to 3
times the length of each time history channel times 4 bytes
used for intermediate files.
Other intermediate files on the order of 10 KB are written
during an analysis if they can not be stored in a memory
buffer.
For permanent storage of results, there is approximately 10
KB per task. For finite element analyses the damage results
are written into a load case, so the only extra disk space for one
load case is needed.
F-604
For modal superposition based on a NASTRAN modal transient analysis, files storage space can be large as the punch file
created by NASTRAN is an ASCII file. The size will depend on
the number of modes and length of the time history, and is approximately the number of modes times the length of the load
history times 8 bytes.
Remark: When leaving LMS FALANCS the user will be asked whether all
temporary files and results of non-FEM analysis should be deleted.
Permanent Storage Needed for LMS

FALANCS Results
For permanent storage of results, there is approximately 10
KB per task. For finite element analyses the damage results
are written into a load case, so the only extra disk space for one
load case is needed. For ANSYS the first load case will be
overwritten, such that there is no additional storage space
needed for ANSYS results.
Remark: When leaving LMS FALANCS the user will be asked whether all
temporary files and results of non-FEM analysis should be deleted.
Prepare Batch Processing
F-605

LMS FALANCS analysis runs may be executed directly from
the graphical user interface (GUI) or queued into a batch process line. The LMS FALANCS batch mode may be invoked from
the command line or directly from the graphical user interface.
To make LMS FALANCS batch mode work in your particular
batch environment you have to provide some script files and
change the necessary entries in the configuration file
falancs.ini.
F-606
Queuing outside of LMS FALANCS

The batch mode of LMS FALANCS is invoked by the tecware
script that resides in the installation directory. Assuming that
an alias "tecware" is set to this script the following line starts
LMS FALANCS in batch mode:
tecware falbatch <batch command file> <notification
script>
where
<batch command file>

is a Geometry Worksheet Folder either in binary or in ASCII format
and
<notification script>
is invoked after completion of the batch job with the following list of arguments
<notification script> <return-code> <temp-directory>
<log-file>
where
<return code>
is 1 = success, 0 = failure
<tempdirectory>
is the directory where the temporary data

of the task are stored
<log-file>
is the file that will contain the messages

normally sent to the computation status
box, information boxes, warning boxes and
error boxes.
F-607
Queuing from the graphical user interface

If the option start in batch mode in the Job initialization
window is checked the job will not be started interactively but
the command given as the parameter
in the section [Batch Processing] of the configuration file

falancs.ini is started. The GWS folder needed as <batch
command file> for the falbatch program replaces the pattern
%1 in the parameter definition.
The GWS folder used to invoke is first copied to a separate
temporary directory. Hence it will not be deleted by exiting
LMS FALANCS and choosing delete temporary data. The notification script will be invoked with the name of the directory as
second argument.
A batch command program should queue the batch process and
handle the batch process via a notification script. The program
has to decide what to do with the temporary directory.
The default setting just starts the job immediately and deletes
the temporary GWS folder after execution.
F-608
Frequently Asked Questions
F-609
Part 10
Frequently Asked Questions

In this part we try to answer some of the most common questions on LMS FALANCS.
F-610
LMS FALANCS User Manual - Frequently Asked Questions
What is the polarity (sign) of load channels?
F-611
What is the polarity (sign) of load

channels?
For fatigue calculations, LMS FALANCS will assume that tensile stresses and strains are positive. Because some damage
parameters are positive mean stress sensitive, it is important
that the user observes this convention.
Users should be particularly cautious when working with finite
element analyses. In these cases, the load history is assumed
to be in the direction of the load defined in the static analysis.
If it is not, then the user must define an appropriate load history calibration factor.
F-612
There are different entries in the

Rainflow matrix and the
corresponding Damage matrix. Is
that possible?
The rainflow matrix that is displayed in the results is counted
during the first run through the load history. Here the hysteresis loops counted by the Clormann-Seeger counting, i.e. hysteresis loops starting on the cyclic stress-strain path are added.
The damage matrix accounts for the damage of the hysteresis
loops closed in the second and all following runs through the
load history. Hence in some cases there may be hysteresis loops
in the rainflow matrix where there are no corresponding loops
in the damage matrix and vice versa. The reason for the different counting is that the rainflow counting should be compatible
with the other tecware methods but the damage matrix has to
account for the special background of fatigue analysis.
I increase the eL settings in my FEM analysis but the damage gets smaller.
F-613
I increase the eL settings in my FEM

analysis but the damage gets
smaller.
The numbers eL give the load level at which the FEM analysis
for the corresponding load case was performed. Hence to get a
normalized load, the stress tensors in the corresponding load
case are divided by eL. That means that the observation that
increasing eL diminishes the damage is an intended feature.
F-614
I have made an ANSYS static

analysis then performed a fatigue
calculation and can no longer find
my static stress results. Where are
they?
When LMS FALANCS calculates damage based on the ANSYS
FE analysis, the damage calculation results are written in the
first load case of the analysis file. Any stress results (or previous damage calculation results) in this load case will be overwritten. Therefore, it is important to set up a dummy load case
as the first load case, so that the stress results can still be accessed as load case two or higher.
I get high stresses at the points where the loads are applied. Does this have influence on the
fatigue analysis?
F-615
I get high stresses at the points

where the loads are applied. Does
this have influence on the fatigue
analysis?
If the loads in a FEM analysis are concentrated to a small set
of nodes, the results around these loads are usually unreliable
and too high. If a non proportional fatigue analysis is conducted using LMS FALANCS these regions may mislead the
automatic detection of critical spots and the rainflow filtering
process may fail.
In this case these regions should be excluded from a fatigue
analysis by defining element sets for the analysis that exclude
the elements around point loads.
F-616
LMS FALANCS for Microsoft Windows
F-617
Part 11
LMS FALANCS for Microsoft

Windows
LMS FALANCS is running not only on UNIX systems but also

on Microsoft Windows (Windows NT and Windows 2000).
LMS FALANCS for Microsoft Windows has essentially the
same functionality and user interaction as for the other available platforms. In this chapter we only describe the differences
and restrictions.
F-618
LMS FALANCS User Manual - LMS FALANCS for Microsoft Windows
LMS FALANCS for Microsoft Windows
F-619

Windows
Installation
A standard setup procedure is provided on the installation CD
such that you may install LMS FALANCS via the usual installation routine as e.g. using "Control panel Software Install"
You may define the installation path during the installation
routine.
Starting LMS FALANCS

During the installation a batch file called falancs.bat is created in the installation directory. This batch file has to be used
to start LMS FALANCS such that all environment variables
are set correctly.
You may find it convenient to copy a link to this batch file to
your desktop.
Pathnames for databases

Ensure that the path names you use in the configuration file
falancs.ini are valid Windows path names.
F-620
LMS FALANCS User Manual - LMS FALANCS for Microsoft Windows
Global and local configuration

The global configuration files are found in the same way like in
the UNIX-versions. The local configuration files are found in
C:\tecware
Restrictions
Due to technical reasons in this version of LMS FALANCS for
Windows NT there are no zooming and value picking facilities
in the graphic windows.
File Formats
Appendix:
File Formats
This part describes the file formats supported in LMS FALANCS.
F-621
F-622
LMS FALANCS User Manual - File Formats
Directory names
F-623
Directory names
The LMS TecWare components run on different hardware platforms and operating systems.
LMS FALANCS has been implemented to be independent from
these platforms. Only the specification of file and path names
depends on the operating system.
When working with standard directories, these specific conventions valid for the used operating system can be ignored prevailingly.
This chapter describes the structure of directory names and file
names with respect to different operating systems and computer platforms.
Unix
In principle, a complete path name is subject to the following
structure:
Fig. 138:
FULL FILE SPECIFICATION of a path name under UNIX
z The path name may contain any characters.

z Directories are separated by means of a slash '/'. The number of subdirectories is unlimited.
z In LMS FALANCS the entire path name may contain up to
256 characters.
z File name extensions do not explicitly exist. By specifying
points '.', you may simulate any number of extensions.
z The file name may be composed of up to 14 characters.
(SUN-OS: 255 characters)
F-624
Supported Data Formats
F-625

The TecWare components as LMS FALANCS can read several
kinds of data.
The supported data formats depend on your installation.
ASCII
List of load data formats

Currently, the following data formats can be read:
data format
HDS
IBM-I2
FUNKTION
PK
PK2
PK2 View
RPC-III
STRUKTUR
TDF
UB
short name
AS
HD
MB
IF
PK
P2
PV
RP
IS
TD
UB
In general, the data format FUNKTION is applied for time series

and STRUKTUR is used for matrices, when storing data.
F-626
List of FEM result data formats

The FEM result files that LMS FALANCS is able to read and
write are described in detail in Part 6 Reference - Interfaces to
Finite Element Tools of this manual. Here we give just a table
as overview:
FEM Tool
Data format
Default short name

extension
.rst
ANSYS
Internal binary
ANS
.op2
NASTRAN
OP2
NAS
.unv
I-DEAS
ASCII universal
IDE
.neu
Pro/MECHANICA Internal binary
MEC
.fil
ABAQUS
Internal binary
ABA
.tmp
CAT/FALANCS
Intermediate
CAT
List of FEM set file formats

LMS FALANCS is only able to read its internal format "Element Sets":
Data format
Element Sets
Default extension short name

.tsi
TSI
There exist tools to convert ASCII format files as well as some

FE-files to this internal format. See the section of your FEM
tool in Part 6 ReferenceInterfaces to Finite Element Tools
for detail.
F-627
List of GWS file formats

Geometry Work Sheets can be read and written into an internal binary format (Folder format) or in a ASCII format that is
used for the batch command files.
Data format
Binary
ASCII
Default extension short name

.fol
FOL
.fal
FAL
The binary format is used for internal storage, the batch command file format is described in detail in the chapter The
Batch Command File.
F-628
The Data Format ASCII for Time Series
F-629
The Data Format ASCII for Time

Series
ASCII files may be the easiest and most common way of storing time series.
The chapter The Data Format ASCII in the manual LMS
TecWare - Volume I: LMS TecWare Kernel contains a detailed
description of the ASCII format supported in LMS TecWare
and LMS FALANCS.
The manual LMS TecWare - Volume I: LMS TecWare Kernel is
available
z in the online help system of LMS FALANCS (menu item
HelpOverview) or
z as pdf-file tecware_volume_1_en.pdf in the subdirectory
manual of your LMS TecWare installation directory.
F-630
ASCII File Format of Load-Notch Strain Curves
F-631
ASCII File Format of Load-Notch

Strain Curves
The user may specify the load-notch strain curve to be used
during a Strain-life Approach fatigue analysis. The first column contains the elastic stress, e~ . This elastic stress is always proportional to the external load, even if the material has
yielded. The second column contains the unitless total notch
strain. The first point should be zero stress and zero strain.
Tab characters should not be used in the file. Comments in the
file are marked with #.
The user should make certain that the material properties selected in the Material Data Sheet are consistent with those
used to obtain this load-notch strain curve. For example, if the
curve was obtained using non-linear finite element analysis,
the finite element analysis material properties should be taken
from the same Material Data Sheet to be used in the fatigue
analysis.
The data format of ASCII Load-Notch strain files is the same
as for ASCII load histories as described in detail in the previous section. It is important that the channel names are chosen
exactly as in the example below. Be sure that the entries are
ordered, such that both columns are increasing.
BEGIN
CHANNELNAME = [LOAD,STRAIN]
COLUMNTYPE = [R4,R4]
COLUMNWIDTH = [15,15]
COLUMNOFFSET = [0,1]
LENGTH = [10, 10]
#234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789
END
0.000000e+00 0.000000e+00
9.259259e-01 1.450555e-05
1.851852e+00 2.942633e-05
2.777778e+00 4.466388e-05
5.555555e+00 8.653605e-05
1.018519e+01 1.576316e-04
1.481481e+01 2.275840e-04
1.944444e+01 2.988200e-04
F-632
2.222222e+01
2.407407e+01
3.419045e-04
3.705882e-04
The ASCII Data Format For Element Sets
F-633
The ASCII Data Format For Element

Sets
The LMS FALANCS installation provides the program
elem2tsi
to convert ASCII element files to files that are readable by

LMS FALANCS for element set definition.
The user can create as many ASCII element set files as necessary for the analysis. The program needs the setting of the
tecware-environment. To provide this environment the program should be started from within LMS FALANCS by selecting the menu item ToolsASCII fileFALANCS Element sets of LMS FALANCS. For each input file a set is created with the name of the input file.
The input files are ASCII files providing in each line one element number. After this element number any comment may be
appended which will be ignored by elem2tsi.
Example
29467 # Here starts part xy
342
123543 , 6524 ,674
122452
15
The written element set in this example contains the elements

29467, 342, 123543, 122452 and 15.
F-634
Data Representations of Stress-Life Curves and Dang Van Data
F-635
Appendix:
Data Representations of
Stress-Life Curves and Dang
Van Data
This part contains information on the data representation of
stress-life curves and Dang Van data.
F-636
Data
LMS FALANCS User Manual - Data Representations of Stress-Life Curves and Dang Van
Data Representation of SN curves (Woehler type
F-637
Data Representation of SN curves

(Woehler type
In LMS FALANCS we have the default representation of SN
curves (Whler curve)
N=
N E SE k 2 S1
N=
N E SE k 2
S
S
k1 k 2
for S E < S < S max
k2
for S1 < S < S max
k2
with the quantities:
k1, k 2 , SE , N E , S1 .
The SN curve can be written in the form
log( N) = A1 log(S) + B1 , S < S1

log( N) = A2 log(S) + B2 , S > S1
where
A1 = k 1 , A 2
= k 2 , B1
= B2 + (k 1 k 2 ) log(S1 ), B2
= log N E SE k 2
or
log(S1 ) =
B2 B1
,
A1 A 2
log(SE ) =
B2 log( N E )
.
k2
Here the stress S is an amplitude. The amplitude S and the

maximum stress S are related to each other via
S = S
1 R
2
F-638
Data
where R denotes the R-ratio. If the SN curve is expressed using

the maximum stresses, then we have
log( N) = A1 log(S) + B1,0 < S < S1

log( N) = A 2 log(S) + B2 , S > S1 > 0
with the relations
Ai = A i
1 R
Bi = Bi Ai log
2
1 R
Bi = Bi + Ai log
.
2
These relations are valid for R < 1.
In pure compression (R > 1) we have S < 0 and
log( N) = A1 log S + B1,0 > S > S1

log( N) = A 2 log S + B2 , S < S1 < 0
with the relations
Ai = A i
Bi = Bi Ai log
1 R
2
Bi = Bi + Ai log
1 R
.
2
m instead of R. The
In LMS FALANCS we often work with S
following relations are valid:
1+ R
Sm =
1 R
1 R
1
=
.
2
1 + Sm
Data Representation of Stress-Life Bastenaire Curves
F-639
Data Representation of Stress-Life

Bastenaire Curves
The Bastenaire equation is written in the form
S S C
A
E
exp
N=
.
S SE
B
This is the form for the maximum stresses. For the amplitudes
we have
S S C
A
E
.
exp
N=
B
S SE
The following relations for the parameters are valid:
A = A
B = B
C = C .
1 R
2
1 R
2
F-640
Data
Data Representation of Dang Van Data
F-641
Data Representation of Dang Van

Data
The Dang Van approach works in the p- -plane spanned by the
hydrostatic pressure p and the shear . For each time step of a
loading history the values p(t ) and (t ) are calculated. The
loading path defined by the sequence of these points in the p-plane is then compared to the boundary curve and its distance
is calculated. The simple boundary curve is defined as
= p + 0
where 0 and are the parameters defined in LMS FALANCS. The following figure illustrates the simple Dang Van
approach.
Fig. 139:
The simple Dang Van approach
The multiple points definition uses a curve as shown in the

next figure
F-642
Data
Fig. 140:
The multiple points Dang Van definition
Such a curve is defined by a sequence of points (p i , i ) where

i = 1,..., n . The relation between the two representations for
n = 2 is given by
2 1
p 2 p1
and 0 = 1 p1 .
If the simple Dang Van definition is given the multiple point

form is calculated using the intersection points with the p- and
axis:
p1 = 0, 1 = 0
p2 =
0
, 2 = 0
Windows in LMS FALANCS
F-643
Appendix:
Windows in LMS FALANCS

This part contains the complete description of those windows
which have not been described completely so far.
F-644
LMS FALANCS User Manual - Windows in LMS FALANCS
Window "Computation status"
F-645
Window "Computation status"

The window "Computation status" gives the user information
on the current state of all running or finished jobs. Detailed information on the single jobs is available by opening the window
"Info".
The window "Computation status" appears after
z selecting the menu item ToolsComputation status in
the LMS FALANCS main window "LMS FALANCS" or
z starting a job from the window "Geometry Work Sheet".
Fig. 141:
Window "Computation Status"

Process list box
This list box displays the running and finished processes.
State list box
This list box displays the state of the corresponding process.
Close
Hides the Computation Status window. All the entries remain in the box for further usage. You can manually pop it
up by selecting the menu item ToolsComputation
Status.
F-646
Clean up
Erases all finished or stopped jobs from the display.
Stop
Stops the selected job. Jobs are selected by left-clicking on
the entry in the list boxes. A confirmation window appears,
asking if the job should really be cancelled.
Info
The window "Info" appears displaying detailed information
on each listed job.
Help
The online help system is started displaying the help text to
the window "Computation status".
Window "Constant Amplitude Life-curve(s) / Stress-strain curve(s)"
F-647
Window "Constant Amplitude Lifecurve(s) / Stress-strain curve(s)"

The window appears by clicking the Graphics... button in the
database selection window "Selection of Material Data Sheets".
In this window the strain-life curve of the material is plotted,
along with the uniaxial stress-strain curve for the material. Up
to four curves may be plotted at a time.
Fig. 142:
Window "Constant Amplitude Life-curve(s) / Stress-strain

curve(s)
The window contains the areas Legend, the Graphics and

some Buttons.
F-648
Legend
At the top of the window, the material names and legend are
displayed.
Use the radio buttons to select a material for that the data
sheet is opened when pressing Data Sheet.
Graphic
The area Graphic displays the stress-strain curves on the left
and the strain-life curves on the right.
On UNIX additional zoom icons and fields are inserted below
the plots:
zoom in
undo
zoom
original
state
Left lens icon

By clicking on the icon, the zoom-in feature is enabled. Use
the left mouse button to click on the graph at the upper left
corner of a zoom-box and drag (while keeping the left mouse
button depressed) to the lower right corner of a zoom-box. A
zoomed-in region of the graph is now displayed. Select the
icon again to use the original left and middle mouse button
features.
Middle lens icon
The middle lens icon will undo the zoom-in history.
Right lens icon
The right lens icon will restore the display to its original
(not zoomed) state.
Strain / Stress Cycles / Strain
Numerical values for any location on the plots can be determined by clicking the left mouse button at the desired location. The coordinate values appear in the display fields
near the bottom of the window. Clicking and holding the
middle mouse button on a particular point and moving the
Window "Constant Amplitude Life-curve(s) / Stress-strain curve(s)"
F-649
cursor to a new point (while keeping the middle mouse button depressed) changes the display fields to Difference:
and Factor:. These give the difference and factor (ratio)
from the number of cycles at the first point to the number of
cycles at the second point.
Buttons
The following buttons are visible both on UNIX and on Microsoft Windows.
Close
Selecting this button will close the display window.
Update
Selecting this button will refresh (redraw) the plot in its
original (unzoomed) state on UNIX. On Microsoft Windows,
pressing Update has no effect.
Data Sheet
The window "View Material Data Sheet" appears for viewing the properties of the current selected material (radio
buttons on the top of the window).
Print
Selecting this button will make the "Print" window appear
so that the graph can be printed.
Help
Selecting this button will display the online-help for this
section.
F-650
Window "Creation of synthetic SN curves"
F-651
Window "Creation of synthetic SN

curves"
In LMS FALANCS it is possible to create stress-life material
data sheets using strain-life material parameters. The stresslife curves are generated for all possible combinations of selected strain-life solution parameters set and strain material
data sets.
In the window "Creation of synthetic SN curves" you specify
the database the new SN curves are to be stored in and start
the process.
The window appears after selecting the menu item Strain-life
Approachsynthetic stress life curve.... The menu item is
available only if both material data sets and solution parameter sets are already selected in the according database selection
windows.
Fig. 143:
F-652
Selected materials
The number of strain material data sets that are currently
selected in the database selection window "Selection of Material Data Sheets".
Selected solution parameters
The number of solution parameter sets that are currently
selected in the database selection window "Strain-life approach - Selection of Solution Parameter Sets".
Synthetic SN curves
The number of created SN curves results from the number
of possible combinations of material data sets and solution
parameter sets.
Target database
The option menu defines the database the created SN
curves are stored in.
Available entries are all editable databases.
OK
The window is closed and the creation of the new SN curves
is started.
The generated curves are placed in the stress-life material
database (containing SN Curves) specified by Target database, and given names according to the following:
SYNxxxx::<original material name>, <load-notch strain
curve method>=<limit-load value>
where
xxxx is a four digit number that ensures that a unique
material data set is specified.
<original material name> is the text name of the original
strain-life data set
<load notch strain curve method> describes the input
for the type of load-notch strain approximation. This
is: N for Neuber, SB for Seeger-Beste, ES for ESED
and F for File.
<limit load value> is the limit load value specified in the
strain-life data set or the filename if <load notch
strain curve method> is File.
F-653
Remark: the damage parameter is not used to determine the synthetic curve.
Cancel
The window is closed without creating any SN curve.
F-654
Window "Damage Selection"
F-655

The user may examine and interrogate the graph of a NonFEM result task and start the history reduction for the displayed result.
The window "Damage selection" appears after
1. selecting a result task in the window "history reduction"
and
2. pressing OK or Apply.
Fig. 144:
F-656
Damage per bin appears on the horizontal axis and omission

amplitude (hysteresis level) appears on the vertical axis. A histogram is plotted on the graph.
Slider bar
A slider bar at the right side of the window is initially at the
lowest position, at the bin level zero.
Reduction to
The Reduction to field initially reads 100% of damage and
100% of cycles.
By moving the slider up, the bin level changes and the percent damage and percent cycles change. For example (depending on the load sequence), moving the slider up to bin
10 may cause the damage to reduce to 98% and the number
of cycles retained may read 10%.
Minimum resulting segment length
The minimum resulting segment length can be set to a
specified number of samples. This number of samples will
be the minimum segment length of the load sequence that
will be left between edited portions of the load sequence.
This value could be adjusted if, for example, maintaining a
certain power spectral density of the time history was
needed.
Search
Result directory
The result directory must be specified and is where the fatigue analysis results of the edited load sequence(s) is(are)
placed.
The Search button opens the directory selection window
"Result Directory Selection" where you browse for the directory.
OK
When a result directory has been specified and this button
is selected, the window "Damage Selection" closes and the
fatigue analysis on the edited load sequence is started. The
"Computation status" window is displayed and the resulting
time series are written to the chosen directory.
F-657
Cancel
Selecting Cancel will close the window without selecting
any analysis.
Help
F-658
Window "Estimation Based on Uniform Material Law"
F-659
Window "Estimation Based on

Uniform Material Law"
The window "Estimation Based on Uniform Material Law" is
used to estimate strain life material properties. This option allows the user to use empirically derived relations to estimate
strain life material properties. The Ultimate Tensile
Strength and Youngs Modulus of the material in MPa must
be specified. A radio button to specify either an Unalloyed or
Low-alloy Steel or an Aluminum or Titanium Alloy metal
must be chosen. This method is described in detail in the LMS
FALANCS Theory Manual.
The window appears after selecting the menu item Action
Uniform Material Law... in the database selection window
"Selection of Material Data Sheets".
Fig. 145:
Window "Estimation Based on Uniform Material Law"

Ultimate Tensile Strength
The material's specific ultimate tensile strength in MPa.
Allowed are values in the range [30,2000].
F-660
Young's Modulus
The specific value of Young's modulus in Mpa.
Allowed are values in the range [10000,1000000].
Unalloyed or Low-alloy Steel / Aluminum or Titanium
Alloy
The kind of material is defined by these two radio buttons.
OK
The data sheet "Define Material Data Sheet" for defining
material data appears. The defined parameters are entered
at the fields
Tensile Strength in the area Static Failure Data
and
Youngs modulus in the area Ramberg-Osgood Relation.
The other fields are filled with the parameters calculated
according to the uniform material law. You may change
these settings, enter a name for the material data set and
specify the database where it is to be stored in. Use the buttons OK or Apply for saving the new material data set and
the button Cancel for rejecting the settings..
The window "Estimation Based on Uniform Material Law"
is closed.
Cancel
The window "Estimation Based on Uniform Material Law"
is closed. No further action is started.
Help
OK
The window is closed.
Cancel
When this button is selected, the "Estimation Based on Uniform Material Law" window closes and the user is transferred back to the database selection window "Selection of
Material Data Sheet".
Window "Exit LMS FALANCS"
F-661
Window "Exit LMS FALANCS"

The window "Exit" is used to decide on the disposition of the
temporary data written during the current session and to quit
LMS FALANCS.
The window appears after selecting the menu item FileExit.
Fig. 146:
Window: Exit Confirmation

Radio buttons
Choose whether to keep the temporary data in further sessions or to delete it when leaving LMS FALANCS.
Yes
Leave LMS FALANCS and delete the temporary data if the
corresponding option in the radio buttons is checked.
No
Return to LMS FALANCS ignoring the option checked by
the radio buttons.
F-662
Window "Geometry Cell"
F-663

The "Geometry Cell" window allows the user to edit the highlighted cells from the "Geometry Work Sheet". Its actual appearance depends on the approach chosen for analysis.
See the chapter Fatigue Analysis with the windows "Geometry Work Sheet" and "Geometry Cell" for information on using
the Geometry Work Sheet and the window "Geometry Cell".
The window "Geometry Cell" appears by selecting non FEM:
Fatigue Analysis.
Fig. 147:
Window "Geometry Cell Non FEM"
Fig. 148:
Window "Geometry Cell FEM"
F-664
The window contains the sections Load Component, Other,

Table and Geometry. Note that the edit fields and search
buttons are sensitive only in case of an appropriate cell is selected in the Geometry Work Sheet.
Load Component
In this section of the window, information about the various
load sequence files and channels is displayed and the calibration values can be defined.
File
This display field lists the file from the channel that has
been selected for a fatigue analysis.
Search
Channel
This display field lists the channel name from the file selected for fatigue analysis. Pressing the Search button opens
the load history selection window to change the channel.
Remark: Only one load history can be chosen from the load history selection window when started from here.
Search
Calibration
This display field shows the calibration offset, O and the
calibration factor, F, as well as the type of history. All these
fields can be edited by calling the window "Load History
Calibration" by selecting the Search button near the display box. The window "Load History Calibration" also shows
the original maximum and minimum values in the history.
Other
This section of the "Geometry Cell" window displays the
Task/Site text field cell, the Material property file of the cell
and Solution Parameters set for this cell.
Search
Since the tasks are initially just given a unique number the
user should change this field for each analysis. The Material
property file and Solution Parameters set can be changed by
pressing the Search button to open the corresponding database selection window.
F-665
Remark: Only one database item can be chosen from the database selection window when started from here.
In the FEM case instead of the Task/Site field the element

sets are given. Different parts of the analyzed structure
may have different material properties or another surface
correction factor should be applied. In this case you have to
define different element sets and you can give the material
and solution properties in this box.
Table
This section of the window "Geometry Cell" displays the
row/column location of the current cell (Current), the total
number of cells (Total) and duplicates (Duplicates) in the
GWS.
Geometry
In this window section, applied loads are related to the local
e~
e~
stress state. Note that the values for and L can be typed
and when the enter key on the keyboard is pressed, the values
are placed in the highlighted cell on the "Geometry Work
Sheet" and the next cell becomes highlighted. (The direction for
going to the next cell to be can be specified by the edit mode in
the "Geometry Work Sheet".)
~
c= e~ / eL
~
The c is the ratio of to L . It is the load influence factor,

relating the calibrated load sequence to the local elastic
stress state. This field is only available for non FEM analysis runs.
e
Result file
The name of the result file where the load case is read from
is displayed in this field, which is only available for FEM
analysis runs.
~
e~
This is the elastic equivalent stress caused by the load L .
This field is only available for non FEM analysis runs.
F-666
Load case
The load case where the FEM results are read from is displayed. This field is only available for FEM analysis runs.
e
~
L
This is a reference load applied to the structure that causes

e~
the stress . The units for this load should be consistent
with those in the calibrated time sequence.
e~
Remark: For a FEM analysis the value of for each node is read from
e~
the result file and only L has to be entered. Hence here the fields c and
e~
are replaced by the result file name and the load case name. Keep in
mind that still the stress concentration factor c is inversely proportional to
e~
L.
Buttons
The following buttons are available:
OK
Selecting this button will accept the changes to the "Geometry Cell" window and close the window. (The window may be
re-displayed by selecting the menu items Options/Table Cell
Window/Show.)
If there are any invalid table entries, a warning message
will appear and the window will remain open for further
editing.
Apply
Selecting this button will apply the changes to the "Geometry Cell" window without closing the window. If there are
any invalid table entries, a warning message will appear.
Close
Selecting this button will close the "Geometry Cell" window
without applying any changes made to the window.
Remark: Changes are transferred to the Geometry Work Sheet only after either OK or Apply is chosen.
Window "Geometry Work Sheet"
F-667

The window "Geometry Work Sheet" defines one FALANCS
job. It lists the input data and parameters of an analysis in
tabluar form. You may change the data via the window "Geometry Cell" and start the analysis from here.
See the chapter Fatigue Analysis with the windows "Geometry Work Sheet" and "Geometry Cell" for information on using
the Geometry Work Sheet and the window "Geometry Cell".
The title bar gives additional information about the type of the
Geometry Work Sheet. First the approach type (stress or
strain) is displayed. If a FEM analysis is done the title bar indicates whether the analysis is proportional or non proportional.
Fig. 149:
Window "Geometry Work Sheet Non FEM"
F-668
Fig. 150:
Window "Geometry Work Sheet FEM"
The window contains a menu bar with the items File, Initialize, Edit, Check, Navigate, Select and Options, an Icon
Bar, a Table Field and several Buttons.
Menu: File
The items in the menu File are to load and save Geometry
Work Sheets.
Fig. 151:
The menu File in the window "Geometry Work Sheet"
FileLoad
This entry corresponds to the entry FileLoad GWS file in
the LMS FALANCS main menu.
FileSave
If a Geometry Work Sheet has already been saved, or has
been loaded and changed, applying this item saves it using
its old file name.
FileSave As
The file selection window is popped up, such that one can
enter a file name and the format the folder is saved in.
F-669
Menu: Initialize
This menu has options that set up the initial "Geometry Work
Sheet" table format. The name of the Job can also be specified
from this menu
Fig. 152:
The menu Initialize in the window "Geometry Work Sheet"
InitializeSingle Channel Per Task

This option initializes the worksheet so that the cells are set
up for performing a single channel fatigue analysis per task.
InitializeIsotropic Multiple Channels (Standard RP)
This option initializes the worksheet so that the cells are set
up for performing a standard rainflow projection analysis
for a multiple channel fatigue analysis. The value of c is
adjusted automatically for the channels, without having any
preferred directionshence the name, isotropic. Currently,
this can be done for up to three load channels. The linear
combinations used here correspond to the standard directions in the LMS TecWare RP-Counting.
InitializeMultiple Channels per Task
This option opens the window "Parameter Definition".
Fig. 153: The window "Parameter Definition"
F-670
In this window, you can specify the Number of Task/Site

Rows per Parameter Variation. This will cause task
rows to be created, all with a value of c equal to one for each
channel. The values of the cells should be edited according
to how you want the fatigue analysis defined. If you leave
duplicate rows, you will be asked to delete them.
InitializeTaskname initialization
This option opens the window "Taskname initialization".
Fig. 154: The window "Taskname initialization"
In this window, you define how the tasks are named automatically.
When choosing one of the check boxes and pressing OK all
tasks in the GWS are renamed accordingly.
When pressing Cancel the tasknames remain unchanged.
InitializeStrain Gage Rosettes
This menu item is only available in the strain-life approach.
It opens the window "Strain gage rosettes":
Fig. 155: Window "Strain gage rosettes"
F-671
Strain gage rosettes results may be mapped for a critical

plane approach. The initialize stain gage rosettes helps the
user to fill the entries in the Geometry Work Sheet. One has
to choose 3 load histories that represent the strain gage
data. The window lets you choose between
0 - 45 - 90
0 - 60 - 120
free choice
rosettes. The entry StrainGageAngles in the section
[Method Parameters] of the configuration file
falancs.ini predefines the entries in the window.
In the text box Number of directions you can specify the
number of directions [2-100] in which the critical plane is
searched for.
Using this initialization, the load histories will get automatically the load type "elastic-plastic strains".
InitializeMethod parameter
This option may be used to change the method parameter
connected to the job. The database parameter selection window is opened to view, edit or change the method parameter
set.
InitializeJob
This sub-menu item displays the "Job Setup Window" in
which any valid system file name can be specified for the
Job Name.
If the job name given is the same as one given previously,
then the results for the previous analysis will be overwritten.
F-672
Menu: Edit
This menu allows the user to quickly change a marked table
area.
Fig. 156:
The menu Edit in the window "Geometry Work Sheet"
Zero
EditZero
Sets selected cells to zero. Applies only to the geometry matrix cells.
The icon Zero and the short cut [Ctrl+z] have the same function.
Cut
EditCut
Copies the entries of the selected cells to the clipboard and
deletes them.
The icon Cut and the short cut [Ctrl+u] have the same function.
This function is not available for the GWS of a FEM-based
fatigue analysis or transient analysis.
Copy
EditCopy
Copy [Ctrl+c]
Copies the entries of the selected cells to the clipboard.
The icon Copy and the short cut [Ctrl+c] have the same
function.
F-673

EditPaste
If the clipboard contains
a single geometry matrix cell
the cell is copied to the currently selected cell
a row
The row is inserted before of after the pointer position,
depending on the value of Insert Before/Insert After.
a geometry matrix column
The column is inserted before of after the pointer position, depending on the value of Insert Before/Insert After.
Paste
The icon Paste and the short cut [Ctrl+p] have the same
function.
EditDelete Row
deletes the row the pointer is positioned in.
EditDelete Column
deletes the column the pointer is positioned in.
EditUndo
undoes the last operation.
EditInsert Before/Insert After
toggles the insert mode
F-674
Menu: Check
Fig. 157:
The menu Check in the window "Geometry Work Sheet"
CheckConsistency with database

The function for comparing the parameters to the contents
of the databases is performed. This function checks,
whether the data sets in the Geometry Work Sheet file exist
in the databases. If they exist, the values for the parameters
are compared to the values in the database and the data set
is highlighted if there are differences. Thus one can check, if
the parameters used are defined in the databases (usually
this should be the case).
CheckFiles
If the GWS folders in ASCII format (*.fal) are modified outside of LMS FALANCS, errors may occur which are not
checked explicitly in the computation or in LMS FALANCS
Batch. To avoid such problems check Geometry Work Sheets
using this menu item.
The following checks are performed on the Geometry Work
Sheet:
Existence of FE-files.
Are the names of the load cases identical to the names
used in FALANCS?
Do the given load case numbers exist in the FE-file?
Are all load cases compatible with respect to the
number of elements and nodes?
Does the number of elements and nodes defined in the
folder coincide with the correct number in the FE-file?
Existence of element set file and element sets.
Existence of load histories (supports also TSD, however a full check of the TSD-file is not done).
F-675
Menu: Navigate
This menu positions the selected cell in the channel area of the
worksheet. Alternatively to using the menu items or the according short cuts, the user can use the mouse button or arrow
keys to accomplish the same task.
Fig. 158:
The menu Navigate in the window "Geometry Work Sheet"
NavigateMove to Left Margin

The cell selection is set to the left most cell in the current
row.
The short cut [Ctrl+l] has the same function.
NavigateMove to Right Margin
The cell selection is set to the right most cell in the current
row.
The short cut [Ctrl+r] has the same function.
NavigateMove to Top of Column
The cell selection is set to the top cell in the current column.
The short cut [Ctrl+t] has the same function.
NavigateMove to End of Column
The cell selection is set to the button cell in the current column.
The short cut [Ctrl+e] has the same function.
F-676
Menu: Select
This menu allows the user to determine the selection mode, in
order to make changes to multiple cells at once.
Fig. 159:
Single
Cell
Multiple
Cells
The menu Select in the window "Geometry Work Sheet"
SelectSingle Cell
Activates a cell by mouse clicking in it. Activating a new
cell, deactivates the last choice. This option has to be used
for entries that have to be unique, as the task name entry.
The icon Single Cell has the same function.
SelectMultiple Cell
Activating a cell adds it to the set of activated cells. To deselect a cell click on it again.
The icon Multiple Cells and the short cut [Ctrl+m] have the
same function.
Single
Column
SelectSingle Column
A single column is selected.
The icon Single Column and the short cut [Ctrl+v] have the
same function.
Single
Row
SelectSingle Row
A single row is selected.
The icon Single Row and the short cut [Ctrl+h] have the
same function.
Single Diagonal
Block of
Adjacent
Cells
Deselect
All
F-677
SelectSingle Diagonal
A diagonal is selected. This can be useful to change the c
values for single channel per task analysis.
The icon Single Diagonal and the short cut [Ctrl+d] have
the same function.
SelectBlock of Adjacent Cells
A block of cells is selected. Select first the upper left cell and
then the lower right cell to select a block of cells.
The icon Block of Adjacent Cells and the short cut [Ctrl+b]
have the same function.
SelectDeselect All
Deselects all selected cells.
The icon Deselect All has the same function.
Remark: Note that in the Geometry Work Cell window only entries can be
changed that are common to all activated cells. If e.g. a solution parameter cell and a material parameter cell are chosen at the same time
nothing can be changed from the Geometry Work Cell window.
F-678
Menu: Options
This menu is for various display options for the worksheet.
OptionsTable Layout
Fig. 160: The menu OptionsTable Layout in the window "Geometry Work Sheet"
The options here are to display the value c as a Decimal

Number or as a Fraction. c is defined as the elastic local
stress divided by the elastic load.
OptionsGeometry Cell Window
Fig. 161: The menu OptionsGeometry Cell Window in the window "Geometry Work Sheet"
Change
visibility of
cell window
These radio buttons display the window "Geometry Cell" or

remove it from the display.
The icon Change visibility of cell window has the same
function.
F-679
OptionCheck for Duplicates
Fig. 162: The menu OptionsCheck for Duplicates in the window

"Geometry Work Sheet"
Selecting On will give an notification if there are duplicate

rows in the worksheet after each change of the Geometry
Work Sheet. Selecting Off will give notification of Duplicates when the OK or Apply are selected. For large Geometry Work Sheets turning this option to On can lead to a remarkable slowdown in editing.
OptionEdit Orientation
Fig. 163: The menu OptionsEdit Orientation in the window "Geometry Work Sheet"
This option is to edit the worksheet on a horizontal (rowwise) or vertical (column-wise) manner, when using the
keyboard accelerators. After applying the new settings in
the window "Geometry Cell", the focus is set to the next cell
in the same row or in the same column
Remark: Setting this option to vertical can be helpful for entering task
names, for examples.
F-680
Icon Bar
Fig. 164:
The icon bar in the window "Geometry Work Sheet"
The function of some menu items is available by an icon. These

are:
Cut
Cut
Copies the entries of the selected cells to the clipboard and
deletes them.
Copy
Copy
Copies the entries of the selected cells to the clipboard.
Paste
Paste
Copies the clipboard to the selected place.
Zero
Single
Cell
Zero
Sets selected cells to zero. Applies only to the geometry matrix cells.
Single Cell
Activates a cell by mouse clicking in it. Activating a new
cell, deactivates the last choice. This option has to be used
for entries that have to be unique, as the task name entry.
Multiple
Cells
Multiple Cells
Activating a cell adds it to the set of activated cells. To deselect click on the cell again.
Single
Row
Single Row
Whole rows are selected.
Single
Column
Single Column
Whole columns are selected.
Single Diagonal
F-681
Single Diagonal
A diagonal is selected. This can be useful to change the c
values for single channel per task analysis.
Block of
Adjacent
Cells
Block of Adjacent Cells

A block of cells is selected. Select first the upper left cell and
then the lower right cell to select a block of cells.
Deselect
All
Deselect All
Deselects all selected cells.
Change
visibility of
cell window
Actual
Contents
Change visibility of cell window

The "Geometry Cell" window is displayed or removed from
the display.
Actual Contents
In the rightmost icon of the Tool Bar the actual contents of
the clipboard is displayed. This display can be either empty
or shows the type of contents, i.e. single cell, row, column,
etc. The layout of the icon changes accordingly.
F-682
Table Field
In the Table Field the input data and selected parameters are
combined according to the analysis which is to be performed.
The layout of the table field for the Non FEM and for the FEM
approach are different (because of the approaches different requirements).
Non FEM Approach
Fig. 165: The table field in the window "Geometry Work Sheet Non
FEM"
The table contains four or more columns:

Task/Site: Number resp. name of the tasks. Tasks
are named automatically by unique numbers, but
may be renamed via the window "Geometry Cell".
SN Curve: the S-N curve or the material name for
the individual tasks.
Solution parameters: the solution parameters for
file1 / channel / calibration ... file n / channel /
calibration: there are as many columns as input
channels. Each column header contains the file name,
the channel name and the channel calibration of an
input channel.
The entries in the channel area specify the coefficients c for the tasks according to the formula
e = c1L1 + ... + c n L n . The coefficient c may be dise

played as a decimal number or as a fraction c = .
eL
F-683
FEM Approach
Fig. 166: The table field in the window "Geometry Work Sheet FEM"
The table contains four or more columns:

Element/Node Set: the element set used in the task.
SN Curve: the S-N curve and the material name for
Solution parameters: the solution parameters for
file1 / channel / calibration ... file n / channel /
calibration: there are as many columns as input
channels. Each column header contains the file name,
the channel name and the channel calibration of an
input channel.
The entries in the channel area specify the used combinations of load case and input channel and the factor e L .used for calibrating the load case
F-684
Buttons
OK
Selecting this button accepts the "Geometry Work Sheet"
window, removes it from the display and starts the job. If
there are no invalid table entries and the job name had not
been previously specified, the "Job Setup Window" will be
displayed in which any valid system file name can be specified.
If the job is accepted, a "Question" window will appear asking for confirmation of deleting the table field after calculations. The options in this window are Yes, No, or Cancel. If
the table field is not deleted, then it can be used and edited
for another fatigue analysis.
After the "Question" window, the "Computation status"
window will appear. This window shows the status of past
and currently running jobs.
When the jobs are completed, the Results sub-menu item
will become available and if Fatigue Sensitive Editing was
chosen, the sub-menu item History reduction will become
available.
Apply
Selecting this button checks for any inconsistencies in the
"Geometry Work Sheet". If the worksheet is accepted the
same procedure as if the OK button had been selected is
done accept that the worksheet window remains visible.
Print
The window "Print" appears where you select a printer device and define the settings for printing the Geometry Work
Sheet.
See the paragraph Printing the Geometry Work Sheet for
further information and an example print.
Cancel
Selecting this button closes the "Geometry Work Sheet"
window and disregards any changes that may have been
made.
Window "History Reduction
F-685

The window "History reduction" is used for selecting a result
task as input channel of the method history reduction.
The window appears after selecting the menu item Non-FEM:
History reduction... in the menu Stress-life Approach or
Strain-life Approach.
One task can be selected if the result was computed by using a
method parameter with the enabled option Fatigue Sensitive
Editing.
Fig. 167:
The window "history reduction"

Result list
In the result list, result folders and their tasks are listed.
F-686
Fig. 168: list of results
When appearing the first time during a session the list contains the results of all successfully performed Non-FEM
processes of this session in the current approach (depending
on the menu item the window was called by: Stress-life
ApproachNon-Fem: history reduction... or Strainlife ApproachNon FEM: History reduction)
You can use the buttons Load... and Remove... to add formerly saved results resp. delete results from the list.
Load...
The directory selection window "Load results" appears
where you select a result file to be added to the result list.
See the paragraph Management of Non-FEM Results for
detailed information on loading results.
Save...
The file selection window "Save results" appears.
detailed information on saving results.
Remove...
The currently selected result folder is removed from the result list. You may reload it by using the button Load.
detailed information.
F-687
Export(csv)
A CSV-file is generated that contains a list of all tasks in
the Upper list box. The list contains the following information on each task:
name of the result folder the task is contained in
name of the task
calculated life time measured in blocks.
You specify the path and name of the CSV-file in the appearing file selection window "Export(csv)...".
See the paragraph Exporting the List of Non-FEM Results
for detailed information.
Export(ASCII)
An ASCII-file is generated that contains a list of all tasks in
name of the task
Down
Up
Down
Use this button to add the currently selected task to the
lower list box. A double click on the task has the same function.
An error message appears if the lower list box contains already an entry. The history reduction is performed on single
tasks only.
Up
Use this button to delete the current entry from the lower
list box. A double click on the entry has the same function.
Lower list box
The task result entered to this list box will be used as input
of the history reduction.
F-688
OK
The selected task is accepted and the window "Damage selection" appears. The window "history reduction" is closed.
A warning appears if the result was computed by using a
method parameter without setting the option Fatigue Sensitive Editing and no damage was calculated.
Apply
The window "Damage selection" appears. The window "history reduction" is kept open for further usage.
A warning appears if the result was computed by using a
method parameter without setting the option Fatigue Sensitive Editing and no damage was calculated.
Cancel
The window "history reduction" is closed.
Help
The online-help to the window "history reduction" is started.
Window "Info"
F-689
Window "Info"
The window "Info" gives detailed information on all jobs listed
in the window "Computation status". You may simply view the
messages or save them in a logfile (*.log) for job documentation.
The window appears after selecting Info in the window
"Computation status".
Fig. 169:
The window "Info"
The window contains a list box and two buttons:

List box
For each job displayed in the window "Computation status"
the following information is listed:
the job name
the approach it was started in
starting time of the job
all error messages and warnings that occurred during
the job up to now
ending state if already finished.
F-690
Close
Save as...
The file selection window "Save Information Messages ..."
appears where you specify a logfile to save the content of
the list box as text file. The default file extension of the logfile is *.log.
Window "Job Setup Window
F-691
Window "Job Setup Window

The "Job Setup Window" appears, when the "Geometry Work
Sheet" window has been left with OK.
In the panel the user can specify any valid system file name.
Fig. 170:
Window "Job Setup Window"

Job Name
In the field the user can specify a valid system file name.
Comment
A comment of up to 80 characters may be input into the
Comment: field.
Start in Batch Mode
If this option is enabled, the job is started in batch mode.
See section Start from the Graphical Worksheet in Part 4
for details.
OK
Selecting the OK button in this window will accept the options.
If the job name given is the same as one given previously,
then the results for the previous analysis will be overwritten.
F-692
Cancel
Selecting this button will cancel the operation and close the
window.
Window "Load History Calibration"
F-693

The window "Load History Calibration" appears, when the
Search button near the display box Calibration in the window
"Geometry Cell" is pressed.
In the window the user can edit the offset and factor. The window also shows the original maximum and minimum values in
the history.
Fig. 171:

History is
This option menu button allows the user to choose the type
of history. The only option for stress-life fatigue analysis is
load. An additional option for strain-life fatigue analysis is
elastic-plastic strain. Superposition is not allowed with the
elastic-plastic strain option because it is non-linear with
load. For elastic-plastic strain type histories the load-notch
relation and the limit load ratio in the Solution Parameter
Set are ignored during the analysis.
F-694
Offset
The offset is the amount of static offset applied to the time
history.
Factor
This is the (calibration) factor that is applied to the time
history.
OK
Selecting this button will accept the "Load History Calibration" window and close it if there are no invalid input values.
Apply
Selecting this button will check and accept the data in the
Load History Calibration window for any invalid input
ranges but will not close the window.
Cancel
Selecting this button will close the "Load History Calibration" window without making any changes.
Help
Selecting this button will display the help information for
this section.
Window "Load History Channel Information"
F-695
Window "Load History Channel

Information"
The window "Load History Channel Information" displays detailed information on load history channels. It is available in
both the Stress-life Approach and the Strain-life Approach. The
current approach is displayed in the window title.
The window appears after
1. selecting load histories in the lower list box of the channel
selection window "Load History Selection" and
2. pressing Info.
Fig. 172:
Window "Load History Channel Information"
F-696
The window displays channel information such as maximum

and minimum, channel length and other information.
The horizontal and vertical sliders on this window can be used
to view all of the information in the window.
Selecting Close will close the window. You can not print this
Info-box.
Window "Test Schedule Segments - Info"
F-697
Window "Test Schedule Segments Info"

The window "Test Schedule Segments - Info" displays detailed
information on test schedule segments. It is available in both
the Stress-life Approach and the Strain-life Approach.
The window appears after
1. selecting segments in the lower list box of the selection window "Test Schedule Segments" and
2. pressing Info.
Fig. 173:
The window "Test Schedule Segment- Info"
F-698
The window displays all available information on the chosen

sequence and test schedule definition file.
The horizontal and vertical sliders on this window can be used
to view all of the information in the window.
Selecting Close will close the window. You can not print this
Info-box.
Window "Options"
F-699
Window "Options"
The window "Options" is used to define general parameters
used in all analyses.
The window is opened by selecting the menu item ConfigurationMethod Parameters... in the LMS FALANCS
main window.
The configuration tool consists of the panels General and
FEM and some buttons.
Panel "General"
Fig. 174: Panel "General"
Number of automatically generated computational

points
Method Parameters
falancs.ini section:
NoOfAutomaticPoints
Parameter name:
Specifies the number of additional generated computation
points in automatic mode.
Load history buffer size
Method Parameters
F-700
BufferSize
Parameter name:
Specifies the number of values of each load history in memory at one time. This value will influence the size of the
scratch files, which are usually given in multiples of the
buffer size.
Maximum memory to use (kB)
Non Proportional FEM
MaxMemoryUsage
Parameter name:
Specifies the amount of random access memory (RAM)
available for FAL/NP damage calculation in kBytes. If you
have to handle many long loading histories and large load
cases, increasing this number leads to better buffering and
may increase the speed of the analysis. Also, if you increase
the next parameter (MaxElementsInTask) you may need to
increase MemMemoryUsage. Be aware that it is crucial that
enough physical memory is actually available to really get
an increase in speed.
Maximum number of elements in one task
MaxElementsInTask
Parameter name:
Specifies the maximum number of elements in one damage
calculation task. The larger this number is the fewer individual damage analysis runs have to be performed. Note
that more elements in a task implies that more memory is
needed.
Window "Options"
F-701
Panel "FEM"
Fig. 175:
Panel "FEM"
Write results into ASCII-list additionally

FEM Postprocessing
Parameter name:
If checked the damage values are not only written to the result file but additionally a ASCII file is written. The file is
written into the same directory as the FEM-result file and
its name is the same as the result file just the extension is
changed to .txt .
The ASCII list is structured into 8 columns: The first two
are integer values giving the element and the node number.
The content of the following six columns is given in the table below:
3rd column
4th column
5th column
6th column
7th column
8th column
Result 1
Result 2
Result 3
Result 1 at top (shells only)
Result 1 at bottom (shells only)
Result 4
These ASCII lists may be used for user specified statistics,

case studies and optimization without having to start an FE
Post-processor.
F-702
Do not use elimination if there are less elements than

Parameter name:
If the number of elements in an analysis is at or below this
value, then RP filtering is not used during an analysis.
Do not use elimination, if original signal is shorter than
Parameter name:
Specifies the minimum signal length to use the RP-filter.
Window "result selection"
F-703

The window "result selection" is used for managing and examining various completed Non-FEM tasks.
The window "result selection" appears after selecting the menu
item Non-FEM: Results... in the menu Stress-life Approach
or Strain-life Approach.
You may
z load formerly saved results
z save results
z export the complete result list into a CSV- or ASCII-file
z examine up to four tasks at a time.
See the chapter Management of Non-FEM Results for detailed
information on these topics.
Fig. 176:
Window "result selection "
F-704

Result list
In the result list, result folders and their tasks are listed.
When appearing the first time during a session the list contains the results of all successfully performed Non-FEM
processes of this session in the current approach (depending
on the menu item the window was called by: Stress-life
ApproachNon-Fem: Results... or Strain-life ApproachNon FEM: Results...).
You can use the buttons Load... and Remove... to add formerly saved results resp. delete results from the list.
The horizontal and vertical sliders can be moved to view the
entire content of the list.
Down
Up
Down
Use this button to add the currently selected task to the
lower list box. A double click on the task has the same function.
A error message appears if the lower list box contains already four entries or the task is already added.
Use this button to delete the current entry from the lower
list box. A double click on the entry has the same function.
Lower list box
The task result entered to this list box will be examined.
Up
F-705
Up to four tasks from several results can be displayed at a

time.
To remove a task entry from the Lower list box, mark it
and click on the Up arrow. Or, simply double click on the
task name.
Load...
The directory selection window "Load results" appears
where you select a result file to be added to the result list.
detailed information on loading results.
Save...
The file selection window "Save results" appears.
detailed information on saving results.
Remove...
The currently selected result folder is removed from the result list. You may reload it by using the button Load.
detailed information.
Export(csv)
A CSV-file is generated that contains a list of all tasks in
name of the task
You specify the path and name of the CSV-file in the appearing file selection window "Export(csv)...".
Export(ASCII)
An ASCII-file is generated that contains a list of all tasks in
F-706
name of the task

OK
Selecting OK will accept the tasks listed in the Lower list
box for graphing and open the window "Results". The window "result selection" is closed.
Apply
As OK without closing the window "result selection".
Cancel
The window "result selection" is closed without displaying
the tasks..
Help
The online-help to the window "result selection" is started.
Window "Setup information"
F-707

The window "Setup Information" displays information on LMS
FALANCS and your display.
The window appears after selecting the menu item Help
Setup....
Fig. 177:
The information is split in to the parts ***** Program *****

and ***** Display *****.
***** Program *****

This part informs about the running process.
Executable: <path>
Name and path of the running executable
Process: <id>
Process id of the running process.
User: <name>
Name of the user that started this LMS FALANCS session.
F-708
Hostname: <name>
Name of the computer running this LMS FALANCS session
Operating system: <name>
Name and version of the operating system on which LMS
FALANCS is running.
Temporary directory: <path>
Directory to which the results are written to if nothing special is given in the result specification sections of the configuration file falancs.ini. See section Settings Specific
to LMS FALANCS: FALANCS.INI.
***** Display *****

This part gives information about the display LMS FALANCS
is running on.
Display: <ip-address>
IP-address of the X-Window system LMS FALANCS is displayed on.
Number of colors: <number>
Number of colors this display can use.
Size: <width x height>
Size of the display.
Window "Stress-life Approach - Stress-life Curve(s)"
F-709
Window "Stress-life Approach Stress-life Curve(s)"

The window "Stress-life Curve(s)" appears after pressing the
button Graphics ... in the database selection window "Selection of Stress-life Data Sheet".
Up to four curves may be plotted at a time. The plot is a graph,
with cycles on the horizontal axis and the physical unit (specified in the Data Sheet) on the vertical axis.
Depending on the curve type (specified in the Data Sheet) the
curves are displayed as SN-curve or as Bastenaire-curve. The
following figure displays two idealized curves as example.
Fig. 178:
Window "Stress-life Curve(s)" on Microsoft Windows
F-710
The window contains the Legend, the Graphic Area and

some Buttons.
Legend
At the top of the window, the legend and the material
names are displayed. The radio buttons select a material for
that the data sheet is opened when pressing Data Sheet.
Graphic Area
The layout of the Graphic Area differs on UNIX and Microsoft Windows. The graphical display and the two option menus
are displayed in both versions. But the zoom icons and the display fields are visible on UNIX only.
Graphic
The material curves are drawn according to the settings in
the option menus logarithmic / linear and amplitude /
max. stress.
logarithmic / linear
This option menu defines the scaling of the vertical axes in
the plot. The effect is either a log-log plot or a log-lin plot.
amplitude / max. stress
Depending on the setting in this option menu either the
amplitudes or the maximum stress values of the material
curves are drawn.
Zoom in
Undo
zoom
Zoom in
By clicking on the icon, the zoom-in feature is enabled. Use
the left mouse button to click on the graph at the upper left
corner of a zoom-box and drag (while keeping the left mouse
button depressed) to the lower right corner of a zoom-box. A
zoomed-in region of the graph is now displayed. Select the
icon again to use the original left and middle mouse button
features.
Undo zoom
The last zoom-in is undone.
Window "Stress-life Approach - Stress-life Curve(s)"
Original
state
F-711
Original state
The graphic is drawn in its original (not zoomed) state.
Cycles Amplitude / Difference Factor
Two display fields are located below the Graphic.
z Numerical values for any location on the plot can be determined by clicking the left mouse button at the desired
location. The coordinate values appear in the display
fields near the bottom of the window. The selected point
is visualized by a circle.
z Clicking and holding the middle mouse button on a particular point and moving the cursor to a new point (while
keeping the middle mouse button pressed) changes the
caption of the display fields to Difference and Factor.
Hence the display fields give the difference and factor
(ratio) from the number of cycles at the first point to the
number of cycles at the second point. The positions of the
first and of the second point are visualized by two vertical lines.
F-712
Buttons
The window contains the following buttons
Close
Refresh Plot
Selecting this button will refresh (redraw) the plot in its
original (not zoomed) state when working on UNIX. On Microsoft Windows the button has no function..
Data Sheet
Selecting this button opens the window "View Stress-life
Data Sheet" so that the material properties can be viewed.
Print
Selecting this button opens the "Print" window so that the
graph can be printed.
Help
Selecting this button will display the help information for
this section.
References, Glossary, Index
F-713
Appendix:

This part contains references to textbooks, the glossary and the
general index to the LMS FALANCS User Manual and the LMS
FALANCS Theory Manual.
F-714
LMS FALANCS User Manual - References, Glossary, Index
References
F-715
References
This chapter contains references on further readings on fatigue
and welding.
General textbooks on fatigue

Fundamentals of Metal Fatigue Analysis, by Bannantine, J. A.,
J. J. Comer, and L. Handrock. Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs,
New Jersey, 1990. ISBN 0-13-340191-X.
Mechanical Behavior of Materials: Engineering Methods for
Deformation, Fracture, and Fatigue by N. E. Dowling, Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1993. ISBN
0-13-579046-8.
Fatigue Design Handbook AE-10. Richard C. Rice, editor. Published by the Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc., 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA. ISBN 0-89883.
Multiaxial Fatigue, by Socie, Darrell F. and Marquis, Gary B.,
Society of Automotive Engineer. ISBN 0-76800-453-5.
ASM Handbook, Vol. 19, "Fatigue and Fracture".ASM International, Materials Park, OH. ISBN 0-87170-385-8.
F-716
General references on fatigue

Product Durability Engineering - Improving the Process, by
Weal, P.,Liefooghe, C., Dreler, K.. Sound and Vibration/January 1997
Numerische Betriebsfestigkeitsanalyse eines PKWSchwenklagers im Rahmen des FEM-Postprocessing, by L.
Jung, V. B. Kttgen, G. Mscher, M. Reiel, G. Zhang.
Deutscher Verband fr Materialforschung und -technik, Arbeitskreis Betriebsfestigkeit, (1997)
Stochastic Reconstruction of Loading Histories from a Rainflow
Matrix, by Dreler, K., Hack, M., Krger, W.. Zeit. f. ang. Math.
U. Mech., 77, n3, 217-226, 1997
Rainflow counting and energy dissipation for hysteresis models
in elastoplasticity, by Brokate, M., Dreler, K., Krejc, P. European Journal of Mechanics, A/Solids, 15, n 4, 705-737, 1996
Fatigue lifetime estimation based on rainflow counted data
using the local strain approach, by Dreler, K., Hack, M.. European Journal of Mechanics, A/Solids, 15 (6), pp. 955-968, 1996
Pseudo Stress and Pseudo Strain Based Approaches to Multiaxial Notch Analysis, by Kttgen, V. B., Barkey, M. E., Socie,
D. F.. Fatigue and Fracture of Engineering Materials and
Structures, Vol. 18 (9) pp. 981-1006, 1995
Tools for fatigue evaluation of non-proportional loading, by
Dreler, K., Kttgen, V. B., Ktzle, H.. In. Proc. Fatigue Design
'95, Sept. 1995, Helsinki
Structural stress-strain analysis of non-proportional loading
suitable for FEM-Postprocessing, by Kttgen, V. B., Barkey,
M. E., Socie, D. F.. In. Proc. Fatigue Design '95, Sept. 1995,
Helsinki
References
F-717
Fatigue of Welds
Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures Part 1.1 General rules
and rules for buildings, European Committee for Standardisation, Brussels, 1992
Fatigue Design of Welded Joints and Components, Recommendations of IIW, R. Hobbacher, The International Institute of
Welding, Cambridge, 1996
The Influence of Plate Thickness on Fatigue Strength of
Welded Joints, A Comparison of Experiments with Prediction
by Fatigue Notch Factors, by V.B. Kttgen, R. Olivier, T. Seeger, in "Steel in Marine Structures", Proc. 3rd Int.ECSC Offshore Conf, Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1987, pp. 303-313
Fatigue Analysis of Welded Connections Based on Local
Stresses, by V.B. Kttgen, R. Olivier, T. Seeger, International
Institute of Welding, Document IIW XIII-1408-91, 1992
Damage at the Large Wind Power Plant GROWIAN Fatigue
Analysis of Critical Welded Connections, by V.B. Kttgen, R.
Olivier, T. Seeger, International Institute of Welding, Document IIW XIII-1497-93, 1993
Rechnergesttzte Auslegung punktgeschweiter Bauteile (in
german) by A. Rupp, V. Grubisic, D. Radaj, DVM Bericht 120
(Fgen im Leichtbau), pp 159-175, 1994
F-718
Glossary
F-719
Glossary
ASTM
American Society for Testing and Materials.
block loading
A time series generated by repeating a shorter time series.
Coffin-Manson-Morrow relation
A damage parameter based on decomposing the elastic and
plastic portions of the total strain amplitude and fitting
them to experimental data.
constant amplitude loading
A load history where all peaks (maxima) are equal and all
valleys (minima) are equal.
compressive strength
The ultimate stress of the material in compression.
crack initiation
The process of producing a small crack in a component of
some definable size, e.g. 0.1 mm in length.
cycle
A cycle is constituted by a completed hysteresis loop in the
stress-strain space.
cyclic hardening exponent (n)
The exponent for plastic strain term in the Ramberg-Osgood
equation that describes the cyclic stress-strain curve. It is
the slope of the log-log plot of plastic strain amplitude vs.
stress amplitude determined from a stabilized cyclic stressstrain test.
F-720
cyclic hardening coefficient (K)

The coefficient for the plastic strain term in the RambergOsgood equation that describes the cyclic stress-strain
curve. It is the intercept on the stress axis that corresponds
to a plastic strain amplitude of 1 on the log-log plot of plastic strain amplitude vs. stress amplitude determined from a
stabilized cyclic stress-strain test.
damage fraction
The amount of damage calculated per cycle.
damage parameter
A formula that relates stress ranges, strain ranges, and
other relevant quantities to fatigue life.
elastic material
A material is said to be elastic if it recovers all deformation
upon releasing the load.
elastic-plastic material
A material is elastic-plastic if there is a combination of recoverable deformation (i.e. elastic strain) and nonrecoverable deformation (i.e. plastic strain). Most metals
behave in this manner after the yield stress is reached.
element
In finite element analysis, a discrete portion of the structure, e.g. a small cube of material in the component.
endurance limit
The stress level below which fatigue failures are not likely
to occur, typically exhibited for most steels. For other alloys,
(e.g. aluminum), a pseudo endurance limit may be defined
which is the stress level that corresponds to a large number
of cycles.
engineering stress
Stresses calculated based on the reference area in the unstrained configuration (i.e. original area before loading).
Glossary
F-721
equivalent stress
A scalar stress value determined from the components of
the stress tensor; often calculated by the von Mises formula.
Eurocode
A European welding code for seam welds.
Fatigue
The process that occurs in a material subjected to fluctuated
stresses and strains leading to permanent structural
changes. Due to these changes at some point or points
cracks may build up or complete fracture may happen to occur after a sufficient number of fluctuations.
fatigue ductility coefficient ( f )
The coefficient for the reversals to failure in the MansonCoffin-Morrow relation for the plastic strain amplitude
term. It is the plastic strain level that corresponds to one
reversal for the curve fit line of plastic strain amplitude vs.
reversals to failure.
fatigue ductility exponent (c)
The exponent for the reversals to failure in the MansonCoffin-Morrow relation for the plastic strain amplitude
term. It is the slope of the line in the log-log fit of plastic
strain amplitude vs. reversals to failure.
fatigue life
The number of loading cycles of a given type that a given
component may sustain before failure of a specified nature
(e.g. crack initiation, rapture) occurs.
fatigue life for p% survival
An estimate of the fatigue life that p% of a given sample
would attain under a given loading.
fatigue notch factor (Kf)
The ratio of the endurance limit of an unnotched material to
the endurance limit of the notched material.
F-722
fatigue strength coefficient ( f )

The coefficient for the reversals to failure in the MansonCoffin-Morrow relation for the elastic strain amplitude term
that is divided by the modulus of elasticity. It is stress level
that corresponds to one reversal for the curve fit line of
stress amplitude vs. reversals to failure.
fatigue strength exponent (b)
The exponent for the reversals to failure in the MansonCoffin-Morrow relation for the elastic strain amplitude
term. It is the slope of the line in the log-log fit of elastic
strain amplitude vs. reversals to failure.
filter width
The value of the hysteresis filter used in deleting small cycles from time histories. Cycles smaller than the filter width
are omitted.
finite element analysis (FEA)
A numerical technique commonly used to calculate the
structural response of components and structures. In this
process, the continuous structure is sub-divided into a discrete (finite) number of small pieces (elements).
flow rule
In plasticity, the formula that relates the plastic strain increment tensor to the current stress state.
fully reversed loading
A load history in which the maximum and minimum load
have the same magnitude but opposite sign.
hardening rule
In plasticity, the formula that relates the evolution of the
yield surface (i.e. motion) in stress space to material properties and the stress history.
high-cycle fatigue
The region of fatigue life that corresponds to a large number
of cycles, typically greater than 105 cycles to failure.
Glossary
F-723
hysteresis filter
In filtering time histories, it is the value that determines
the size of the cycles to delete from the time history.
intermediate principal stress
Of the three principal stresses, the intermediate principal
stress is the stress whose magnitude is less than (or equal
to) the maximum principal stress but greater than (or equal
to) the minimum principal stress.
limit damage sum
The damage value associated with crack initiation of the
component; often 1.0 when using Miners rule to accumulate
damage.
limit load ratio (Kp)
The ratio of the load when the component is fully plastic to
the load when the component first yields.
linear cumulative damage rule
A method of accumulating damage in which the damage calculated from each cycle is added directly.
linearized SWT parameter
A method to convert the strain-life SWT damage parameter
curve to a linear segment on a log-log S-N curve for use in
stress-life analysis.
load influence factor (c)
The quantity (c) that is multiplied by the load so that the local elastic stress results:
e
= c L for a uniaxial stress or
ij = c ij L for the multiaxial case.
load histogram
A plot that indicates the number of cycles at different load
amplitudes for a time history.
load ratio (R)
The ratio between the minimum and the maximum value of
a load cycle.
F-724
load-notch strain relation

A formula or a curve that directly relates applied load (or
nominal stress) to the local strain behavior at a notch.
local stress-strain behavior
The stress-strain behavior at a stress concentrator or notch.
low-cycle fatigue
The region of fatigue life that corresponds to a small number of cycles, typically less than 103 cycles to failure.
maximum principal stress
The principal stress with the largest magnitude.
mean stress influence
The affect on the fatigue life resulting from the presence of
mean stresses.
memory model
A method to track material hysteresis response, or memory
of past loading events.
Miners rule
A damage accumulation method in which the damage fraction from each cycle is assumed to be additive in a linear
manner.
modal contribution factors
The coefficients of the mode shapes as determined in a modal analysis of the structure.
modal superposition
The process of linearly adding mode shapes together (using
modal contribution factors).
morphology
Internal structure, used in this document in relation to
grains or constituents in metals.
Glossary
F-725
multiaxial
A stress state with more than one non-zero stress component. If used in reference to loads, a time series with multiple channels.
multiaxial fatigue
A fatigue process that is sensitive to the effects of multiaxial
stress states.
node
A point in a finite element model at which two or more elements are connected (sometimes referred to as a grid).
nominal stress
A calculated stress value that is typically calculated based
on elastic material behavior and for a reference area. Nominal stresses are usually used for convenience to normalize
loads.
non-local effects
Factors that affect the fatigue behavior of a component such
as surface factors and stress gradients.
non-proportional stresses
Stress component time histories at a point that differ from
each other by phase or other than by just a multiplicative
factor are considered non-proportional, i.e. anything other
than proportional stresses.
notch
See stress concentration.
peak
For a given load history any point where the slope changes
from positive to non-positive. For constant amplitude loading the maximum load.
proportional stresses
Stress component time histories at a point that differ only
by a multiplicative factor are considered proportional.
F-726
pseudo stress
A type of nominal stress determined by elastic calculations,
even if the yield stress of the material is exceeded. The reference area used in the calculations is the same as if the
material were elastic; therefore the pseudo stresses are the
same as the actual stresses in a structure until the material
yields.
quasi-static superposition
Linear combination of elastic stress states.
rainflow counting
A numerical technique that identifies closed hysteresis
loops in the stress-strain response of a material.
rainflow matrix
A matrix representation of the number of occurrences of a
cycle of a certain range with a particular mean load.
rainflow projector
A method of resolving stress components to particular
planes and rainflow counting on the planes.
Ramberg-Osgood relation
An equation used to relate total strain to stress by the use
of Hookes law for the elastic portion of the strain and by a
two-parameter log-log fit of plastic strain and stress for the
plastic strain portion. For fatigue loading, the coefficients
for the plastic strain portion are determined by cyclic load
experiments.
ratchetting
The directional accumulation of plastic strain due to cyclic
loading in one direction with static or cyclic loading in another direction.
ratchetting parameter
In plasticity, a parameter that controls the rate of plastic
strain accumulation in the coupled stress-plastic strain relations.
Glossary
F-727
rate independent
A process that does not depend on the time scale used.
residual stress
Stress in a component due to a manufacturing process such
as welding or bolting.
residue
The unmatched peaks or valleys left over after rainflow
counting a time history.
reversal
The occurrence in a time history where the sign of the slope
(first derivative) changes sign (see: peak, valley)
SAE
Society of Automotive Engineers.
seam weld
A joint made between two plates by a process of arc welding
such as, for example, metal-inert-gas (MIG) or tungsteninert-gas (TIG) welding.
spot weld
A joint made in two sheets of metal by the means of contact
between two (typically cylindrical) electrodes. When current
flows though the electrodes the contact area between the
two sheets melts and then solidifies to bond the sheets.
signed von Mises stress
A scalar stress calculated from the components of the stress
tensor by using the von Mises equivalent stress formula
(which is always positive valued) and giving it the same
sign as the principal stress with the largest magnitude.
SN curve
A plot, usually on log-log scales, that relates nominal stress
or other quantity linearly related to load, to fatigue life,
typically in cycles to crack initiation.
F-728
static failure
The failure of a material or structure by exceeding the ultimate or maximum stress of the material.
strain
The change in length per reference length for a material.
strain-controlled
A region of a material that has deformation or strain controlled to certain levels.
strain-life approach
A fatigue analysis approach in which local strain is taken as
the primary parameter to relate to fatigue life. This approach is able to account for the effects of local plasticity.
stress
The intensity of force; for engineering stress it is the load
divided by the original reference area.
stress concentration factor (Kt )
A dimensionless value that is multiplied to the nominal
stress (Kt) so that the local elastic stress results:
e
= K t S nominal
stress concentration
An area on a structure or component at which elevated
stresses and strains occur, typically due to a change in local
geometry from the surrounding area of the component.
stress gradient
The rate of change of stress with distance.
stress-controlled
A region of material that is controlled by stresses or loads to
certain levels.
stress-life approach
A fatigue analysis approach in which stress is taken as the
primary parameter to relate to fatigue life.
Glossary
F-729
tensile strength
Ultimate stress of a material in tension.
time series
Time histories of load, strain, or other measured value.
true stress
Stresses calculated based on the instantaneous area in the
strain configuration (i.e. the area that changes as the material is loaded).
ultimate stress
The highest stress level a material can sustain based on the
engineering stress-strain curve.
uniaxial stress
A state of stress with only one non-zero stress component.
valley
for a given load history any point where the slope changes
from negative to non-negative. For constant amplitude
loading the minimum load.
variable amplitude loading
A load history in which the amplitude does not remain constant throughout the entire load history.
weld nugget
The melted and solidified volume of material produced
during the spot welding process.
yield criterion
In plasticity, a formula used to determine if the materials
yield stress has been exceeded.
yield function
See yield criterion.
yield stress
The stress level at which the material transitions from elastic deformation to elastic-plastic deformation.
F-730
yield surface
In plasticity, a plot of the yield function in stress space.
yielding
The behavior of a material after the yield stress has been
reached or exceeded.
F-731
LMS FALANCS - General Index

#
A
T-14
T-89
T-86
T-89
T-86
*
*.bdf F-455
*.bof F-454
*.csv F-189
*.dam F-112, F-454
*.fal F-97, F-327, F-674
*.fil F-454
*.fol F-97
*.log F-171, F-305, F-689
*.pch F-454, F-455
*.tsd F-95
*.tsi F-96
*.txt F-189
*.ugd F-417
*.unv F-455, F-485
1
1/number of blocks F-215
method parameter (FEM
Results) F-292
4
4-point
algorithm T-24, T-26, T-24, T26
counting T-24
ABAQUS F-96, F-454, F-491, F626

FE-based output F-493
FEM result file F-429
generating element sets F-496
spot weld analysis F-495
supported analysis types F491
supported elements F-491
supported versions F-491
absolute
elimination threshold
definition T-164
thresholding T-164
absolute elimination threshold
method parameter (NP FEM)
F-289
AFNOR T-24
amplitude
definition T-7
analysis
common analysis steps F-27
documentation F-27, F-162
FEM based analysis
concept F-65
element sets F-65
element sets and point
loads F-66
material F-65
solution parameter F-65
stress results F-66
FEM strain-life analysis
example F-79
FEM stress-life analysis
example F-67
interpreting results F-81
handle channel with different
lengths
Non-FEM strain-life analysis
T
F

F-732
example F-57
Non-FEM stress-life analysis
example F-31
print GWS F-162
save GWS F-25
ANSYS F-19, F-96, F-474, F-604,
F-626
FAQ (where are the results?)
F-614
generating element sets F478, F-480
install toolbar F-595
viewing
results F-478
ANSYSFE-based output F-476
Armstrong-Frederick T-149
ASCII F-625
data format
element sets F-633
load-notch strain curve F631
time series F-629
load file F-95
ASTM T-24, T-26, T-24, T-26
automatic thresholding T-163
axial
material properties T-103
tests T-103
axis
computed points
B
b (fatigue strength exponent) T86
back calculation T-30
backstress T-149
number of backstresses T-149
material parameter F-281
Basquin
SN-curves F-245
Basquin's
equation T-86
exponent T-86
Bastenaire curve F-233
display F-709
SN-curves F-246
batch
command file F-329, F-627
[Calibration] F-392
[Channels] F-387
[ElementSets] F-385
[Job] F-330
[Le] F-397
[LoadCases] F-393
[Material] F-356
[MethodParam] F-333
[SigmaE] F-396
[SNCurve] F-346
[SolParam] F-366
[Tasks] F-332
[TSD] F-391
ASCII format F-327
generate F-327
loading F-96
path specification F-329
mode F-691
processing F-20, F-321
start with shell script F-449
starting F-323
Bergmann T-95
parameter F-255, T-95
block
cycle loading T-9
loading T-9
bulk material T-117
C
c F-24
definition T-14
fatigue ductility exponent T-86
Calc Weld Nugget parameter T173
calculate hot spots
method parameter (Hot Spots)
F-298
Calculate TSD exact
method parameter (General)
F-286
Calculate TSD Exact T-35
T
F

calculation point T-30

calibration F-693, T-120
factor F-694
Geometry Cell F-664
load history
elastic-plastic strain F-693
offset F-694
CAT/FALANCS F-19, F-96, F497, F-626
command window F-499
concept F-498
by materials F-500
by properties F-500
Installation F-593
selection of
FE Element Set Files F500
FE Result Files F-499
viewing results F-501
CDH
spot weld calculation F-472
Chaboche T-149
channel
open F-29
selection F-29, F-121, F-136
Geometry Cell F-664
Chi
Ratchetting parameter
clipboard
in the Geometry Work Sheet
F-161
Clormann/Seeger variant
[Clormann&Seeger1986] T-24,
T-26, T-24, T-26
coefficient
cyclic hardening coefficient F279, T-82
fatigue ductility coefficient F276, T-86
fatigue strength coefficient F276, T-86
influence coefficient c T-14
F-733
load influence coefficient T135, T-137, T-135, T-137

comment
Dang Van data F-237
SN-curves F-237
common analysis steps F-27
channel selection F-29
database selection F-28
file selection F-29
parameter databases F-27
common operations F-117
compatibility condition T-88, T104, T-88, T-104
component
notched T-38
un-notched T-38
compressive strength T-59
SN-curves F-239
computation point factors T-29
computation status F-170
non FEM jobs F-172
nonproportional FEM jobs F173
proportional FEM jobs F-173
computed points
axis
tolerance
type
configuration
[<method>_Output_Name] F422
[Batch Processing] F-444
[Controller_HostTable] F-415,
F-416, F-443
[DataFormats] F-429
[DB
<type>] F-419
[Debugging] F-447
[ERGEBATTR] F-432
[ERGMATATTR] F-432
[FEM Postprocessing] F-411
Converter F-413
ConverterNas F-413
T
F

F-734
FEMOverwriteResults F412
F-412
[FEM-Driver] F-416
CDHHexaOrientation F417
I-DEASGeoFileExtension
F-417
NASTRAN BUFFSIZE F416
NastranCopyBlocks F-416
NastranMAXR F-416
[FLIESSATTR] F-432
[HPGLPLOT]. F-441
[LoadHistoryView] F-445
RF-Matrices F-445
TimeSeries F-445
[MATERIALATTR] F-432
[Messages] F-445
[Method Parameters] F-410
BufferSize F-410
LTS_Principles F-411
RandomSeed F-410
RFMSampleSize F-410
StrainGageAngles F-411
[Non proportional FEM] F-414
AbsoluteElimLimit F-414
MaxElementsInTask F-415
MaxMemoryUsage F-414
F-415
F-415
StrainLifeForAllRuns F414
UseAbsoluteElimLimit F414
[PrintConfiguration] F-447
[PWOEHLATTR] F-432
[Runtime] F-447
[SCHAEDATTR]. F-442
[Spotweld] F-418
KdivSqrtS F-418
[WOEHLERATTR] F-432
falancs.ini F-407
tecware.ini F-447
configuration file F-404
most important settings F-406
syntax F-405
constant amplitude
life curves T-86
loading T-6
correction
factormacroscopic yielding T45
factormicroyielding T-46
factorstress gradient T-43
factorsurface T-49
Goodman T-66
mean shear T-70
mean stress T-66, T-94, T-66,
T-94
seam weld mean stress T-72
shear stress correction T-95
three segments T-66, T-68, T66, T-68
crack
growth T-60
initiation T-3, T-86, T-139, T144, T-3, T-86, T-139, T-144
opening mode T-139
opening parameter T-145
stage II T-139
critical
locations T-79
plane T-120
approch T-144
curve
Bastenaire display F-709
definition of SN-curve F-242
SN-curve display F-709
cycle
constant amplitude loading T-7
cycles to failure T-10
rainflow counting T-8
rainflow cycle counting T-23
sub-cycles T-8
variable amplitude loading T-8
cyclic
constants T-82
hardening
coefficient
definition T-82
exponent
definition T-82
hardening coefficient
hardening exponent
T
F

stress-strain curve T-82
D
damage
accumulation
Haibach/Miner T-76
linear T-10
Liu-Zenner T-76
Miner T-10
Miner elementary T-76
modifications T-76
non-linear T-10
based
data reduction method T18
node elimination technique
T-155
fraction T-10
limit damage sum T-12
parameter T-86, T-94, T-86, T94
axial T-105
Bergmann F-255, T-95
life curve T-11, T-28, T-11,
T-28
modifying factors T-101
linearized Smith-WatsonTopper T-96
Morrow F-256
Morrow type T-97
no mean stress influence
T-96
single amplitude damage
parameter life curves T99
Smith-Watson-Topper T94
original F-255
Torsion F-255
torsional T-105
Vormwald F-256, T-98
damage matrix F-211
damchan.erg F-426
damcoll.asc F-426
dammat.erm F-426
Dang Van F-233
Add F-248
F-735
alpha F-247
comment F-237
Dang Van Type F-237
data representation F-641
data sheet F-233
database F-237
Delete F-248
enable safety factor approach
F-269
List of Multiple Points F-248
Modify F-248
multiple points
Dang Van data F-247
name F-237
Pressure / Shear (tau) F-248
Shear (tau) F-247
simple
Dang Van data F-247
Sort F-248
view mode F-240
Dang Van Type
Dang Van data F-237
data
format
ABAQUS F-626
ANSYS F-626
ASCII F-625, F-629
batch command file Sets
F-627
CAT/FALANCS F-626
element sets F-626, F-633
FUNKTION F-625
Geometry Work Sheet F627
HDS F-625
IBM-I2 F-625
I-DEAS F-626
list of supported formats F625
load-notch strain curve F631
NASTRAN F-626
PK F-625
PK2 F-625
Pro/MECHANICA F-626
RPC-III F-625
STRUKTUR F-625
TDF F-625
UB F-625
T
F

F-736
preprocessing T-19, T-20, T19, T-20

reduction methods T-17
damage based
definition T-18
definition T-17
representation of
Dang Van data F-641
SN-curve F-637
data format F-625
data set
open F-28
operations F-132
define new data set F-146
delete data set F-151
display material data
graphically F-153
display stress-life curve
graphically F-153
load data set F-133
update data set F-149
view and print a data sheet
F-152
data sheet F-231
Dang Van data F-233
SN-curve F-233
database F-131
Dang Van data F-237
data sheet F-233
definition
configuration tool F-509
syntax in falancs.ini F-518
entries
selection
Geometry Cell F-664
format F-525
material data F-528
method parameter F-530
SN-curves F-526
strain-life F-533
stress-life F-532
data sheet F-273
data sheet F-283
FEM Results F-291
General F-285
Hot Spots F-298
LTS F-300
NP FEM F-288
RP Filter F-296
operations
batch restrictions F-399
configuration F-419
operations on data sets
see topic "data set" F-132
parameter F-27
selection F-28
selection of files F-126
SN-curve
data sheet F-233
SN-curves F-237
data sheet F-251
DCT F-509
define
data set F-146
delete
data set F-151
Design life factor F-292
Results) F-292
design point T-29
back calculation T-30
failure probability
life
load level
tolerance
unknown variable
Deviatoric Stress space T-147
diameter
spot weld
definition T-171
Diameter parameter T-173
directory
define temporary directory F601
predefiened input directories
F-602
selection F-120
T
F

discretization T-20, T-22, T-20,

T-22
display
FEM results F-214
load channels F-154
load history channels F-125
material data F-153
Non-FEM results F-198
rainflow matrices F-125
stress-life curve F-153
time series F-155
documentation
of the complete analysis F-27,
F-162
E
E (Youngs Modulus)
E (Young's Modulus) T-85
in batch command file F-362
in Uniform Material Law F-660
EDASWIN
load file F-95
edit
Geometry Work Sheet F-672
effects
mean stress T-94
elastic
modulus T-91
notch stress T-63
shear modulus T-103
strain T-81
stress T-106
elastic-plastic strain T-120
calibration F-693
element
supported elements
ABAQUS F-491
ANSYS F-475
CAT/FALANCS F-497
I-DEAS F-481
NASTRAN F-461
Pro/MECHANICA F-487
element set F-65, F-626
data format F-633
generation
ABAQUS F-496
ANSYS F-478, F-480
CAT/FALANCS
F-737
by materials F-500
by properties F-500
CAT/FALANCS F-503
I-DEAS F-485
PATRAN
by groups F-467
by materials F-469
by properties F-468
Pro/MECHANICA F-489
selection F-144
elimination
process T-163
safety factor
definition T-163
elimination run number
Results) F-292
End linearization at
End linearization at parameter
T-101
endurance limit T-58
cycles value NE F-243, F-244
definition T-58, T-89, T-58, T89
load value SE F-243, F-244
modification T-76
number of cycles T-89
strain at endurance limit T-89
stress at endurance limit T-89
equation
strain-life equation in shear T103
strain-life equation in torsion
T-103
equivalent
strain energy density T-107
stress T-103, T-142, T-103, T142
error messages F-305
save F-689
ESED T-106, T-107, T-108, T106, T-107, T-108
estimate cyclic material
properties F-83
Eurocode T-72
Eurocode 3 T-175, T-179, T-175,
T-179
recommendations F-540
T
F

F-738
Hollow sections F-554

Non-welded details F-544
Transverse butt welds F547
F-545
Welded joints with loadcarrying welds F-551
example
FEM strain-life analysis F-79
FEM stress-life analysis F-67
Non-FEM strain-life analysis
F-57
Non-FEM stress-life analysis
F-31
exit FALANCS F-21, F-97
expert user F-22
exponent
cyclic hardening exponent F279, T-82
fatigue ductility exponent F276, T-86
fatigue strength exponent F276, T-86
F
factor F-694
computation point T-29
Design life factor
Results) F-292
elimination safety factor
method parameter (NP
FEM) F-289
fatigue notch T-38
load influence F-24, T-14, T135, T-137, T-14, T-135, T137
Geometry Cell F-665
macroscopic yielding
correction T-45
microyielding correction T-46
modal contribution F-471
safety factor
Results) F-293
size T-64
size effect T-64
stress concentration F-24, T14, T-38, T-14, T-38

Geometry Cell F-665
stress gradient correction T-43
surface correction T-49
surface roughness T-64
failure mode T-3
high cycle fatigue T-4
low cycle fatigue T-4
static T-59
static failure T-4
FALANCS
exit F-21
output parameter (falancs.ini)
F-422
start F-19
falancs.ini F-407
[<method>_Output_Name] F422
[Batch Processing] F-444
[Controller_HostTable] F-415,
F-443
[DataFormats] F-429
[DB
<type>] F-419
[ERGEBATTR] F-432
[ERGMATATTR] F-432
[FEM Postprocessing] F-411
Converter F-413
ConverterNas F-413
FEMOverwriteResults F412
F-412
[FEM-Driver] F-416
CDHHexaOrientation F417
I-DEASGeoFileExtension
F-417
NASTRAN BUFFSIZE F416
NastranCopyBlocks F-416
NastranMAXR F-416
[FLIESSATTR] F-432
[HPGLPLOT]. F-441
[LoadHistoryView] F-445
RF-Matrices F-445
TimeSeries F-445
[MATERIALATTR] F-432
T
F

[Messages] F-445
[Method Parameters] F-410
BufferSize F-410
LTS_Principles F-411
RandomSeed F-410
RFMSampleSize F-410
StrainGageAngles F-411
[Non proportional FEM] F-414
AbsoluteElimLimit F-414
MaxElementsInTask F-415
MaxMemoryUsage F-414
F-415
F-415
StrainLifeForAllRuns F414
UseAbsoluteElimLimit F414
[PWOEHLATTR] F-432
[SCHAEDATTR]. F-442
[Spotweld] F-418
KdivSqrtS F-418
[WOEHLERATTR] F-432
database definition F-518
[DB
Material] F-518
MethodParam] F-518
SNCurve] F-518
SolpStrain] F-518
SolpStress] F-518
database sections F-518
falbatch
falgws2i F-450
FAQ F-609
fatigue T-3
damage T-10
ductility
coefficient T-86
exponent T-86
life T-3, T-10, T-37, T-86, T106, T-3, T-10, T-37, T-86,
T-106
logarithmic nature T-62
mltiaxial T-139
notch factor T-38
statistical nature of T-51
F-739
strength
coefficient T-86
exponent T-86
test T-51
axial T-103
torsional T-103
Fatigue Analysis with the
windows "Geometry Work
Sheet" and "Geometry Cell" F157
FE-based output
ABAQUS F-493
ANSYS F-476
I-DEAS F-483
NASTRAN F-463
Pro/MECHANICA F-488
FEM
Result 1 F-291
Miner sum F-291
number of blocks F-292
Result 2 F-292
elimination run number F292
N_Design/N F-292
Result 3 F-293
Result 4 F-294
Result with infinite life F-294
Result with static failure F-295
FEM based analyses
strain-life approach
performing a standard
analysis F-79
stress-life approach
performing a standard
analysis F-67
FEM based analysis
concept F-65
element sets F-65
element sets and point loads
F-66
material F-65
stress results F-66
FEM load cases
selection F-138
T
F

F-740
Geometry Cell F-666

FEM Postprocessing
Rainflow projector norm F-219
Rainflow task number F-219
Show elimination run number
F-219
Use logarithmic scale F-215,
F-217
value to indicate endurance
limit F-216
FEM results
damage F-215
Design life factor (Result 2) F217
Load design factor (Result 3)
F-217
NDesign versus N (Result 2)
F-217
sigma versus sigmaDesign
(Result 3) F-217
viewing F-214
file
open F-29
select channel F-136
selection F-29, F-118
from database F-126
file type
Element Sets F-96
FE result file F-96
load history file F-95
test schedule file F-95, F-96
File type
GWS folder F-97
filter width
method parameter (RP Filter)
F-296
filtering algorithm T-155
filterwidth T-158
Findley T-144
flow rule T-148
format
database F-525
material data F-528
SN-curves F-526
strain-life F-533
stress-life F-532
formula
F-276
Ramberg-Osgood relation F279
frequently asked questions (see
FAQ) F-609
fsebackw.buf F-426
fseforw.buf F-426
fsesect.buf F-426
FUNKTION F-625
load file F-95
G
ABAQUS F-496
ANSYS F-478, F-480
CAT/FALANCS F-503
by materials F-500
by properties F-500
I-DEAS F-485
PATRAN
by groups F-467
by materials F-469
by properties F-468
Pro/MECHANICA F-489
Geometry Cell
change
load component F-664
edit GWS F-23
calibration F-664
non FEM fatigue analysis F-24
open F-24
replace load channels F-22
selection
of channels F-664
of database entries F-664
selection of
FEM load cases F-666
visibility F-678
Geometry Work Sheet F-24, F627
change
clipboard F-161
edit tools F-672
Fatigue Analysis with the... F157
T
F

FEM analysis F-24

File
Load F-668
Save F-668
Save as F-668
File->Save F-668
general concepts F-157
general description F-160
Geometry cell
visibility F-678
Initialization F-669
job definition F-671, F-691
load component
calibration F-664
change F-664
loading F-96
navigation F-675
non FEM analysis F-24
open F-24
print F-162, F-684
save GWS F-25
selection F-676
block F-677
column F-676
diagonal F-677
multiple cells F-676
row F-676
single cell F-676
unselect F-677
Some useful techniques F-167
start analysis F-25
Strain Gage Rosettes F-670
table layout F-678
the Geometry Work Sheet
table F-160
GIDAS F-9
Glinka T-106
Goodman T-66
correction T-66
graphical user interface F-90
common operations F-117
concept F-22
define analysis F-7
menus F-93
types of usage F-22
group
element set generation
PATRAN F-467
gwsout.fol F-425
F-741
H
Haibach/Miner T-76
hardening coefficient T-81
cyclic T-82
hardening exponent T-81
cyclic T-82
hardening rule T-148
HAZ T-174
HDS F-625
heat affected zone T-174
help
online help system F-114
high cycle fatigue T-4, T-57, T-4,
T-57
history reduction
fatigue sensitive editing
method parameter
(General) F-287
F-422
History reduction F-226
Hooke's law T-147
hot spot
detection T-165
Hot Spots
hot spot number as result F294
Calculate hot spots F-298
Maximum number F-299
Minimum damage (log) F298
Minimum size F-299
Threshold (log) F-298
F-422
How to
add a column to the GWS F44
add a task to the GWS F-45
change entries in the GWS F41
define a new data set F-146
define the job name for an
analysis F-46
delete elements from a data
set F-151
delete tasks from a GWS F-46
T
F

F-742

properties F-83
load data sets F-133
load element sets F-72
load FE load cases F-69
load FE-result files F-69
load load a stress-life curve F35
load load history channels F32
load material data sets F-58
load method parameters F-38
load node sets F-72
load Non-FEM results F-186
load solution parameters F-36
perform a fatigue calculation
F-93
perform a history reduction F226
print the GWS F-48
remove Non-FEM results from
the result management F188
save Non-FEM results F-187
save the GWS F-47
start the GWS for a FEMbased analysis F-75
start the GWS for a non-FEM
analysis F-40
update a data set F-149
view a data sheet F-152
How to load
FEM element sets F-144
load cases F-139
load history channels F-136
test schedule segments F-142
hysteresis T-81, T-84, T-81, T-84
branch T-83
filter T-20, T-21, T-156, T-20,
T-21, T-156
hysteresis loop T-23
nested T-84
I
IBMI2
load file F-95
IBM-I2 F-625
I-DEAS F-96, F-417, F-455, F463, F-481, F-626

IDX
load file F-95
inelastic stress-strain behavior
T-81
infinite life
Results) F-294
influence
coefficient T-14
factor F-24, T-14
Information messages F-305
save F-689
installation
instructions F-588
storage space F-603
supported OS F-591
Installation
CAT/FALANCS F-593
Windows F-619
installing
ANSYS toolbar F-595
PATRAN tool menu F-598
intermediate principal T-142
T-72, T-175, T-179, T-72, T-175,
T-179
Inverse slope T-59
IWW recommendations F-559
Butt welds, transverse loaded
F-562
Flanges, branches and nozzles
F-582
Lap joints F-580
Longitudinal load-carrying
welds F-569
Non load carrying attachments
F-575
Reinforcements F-581
Tubular joints F-585
Unwelded parts of a
component F-561
T
F

J
Jiang T-147
Jiang model
job F-671, F-691
batch mode F-691
comment F-691
name F-691
save info F-171
state F-172
K
K' T-82, T-85, T-82, T-85
k1
SN-curves F-243
k2
SN-curves F-243
KdivSqrtS parameter T-173
Kf T-38
definition T-38
Kp T-108
Kt
definition T-14
L
life
design point
life curve T-29
constant amplitude life curves
T-86
damage parameter life curve
T-11, T-28, T-11, T-28
results
constant amplitude life
curve F-201, F-212, F213
cumulative load amplitude
histogram F-202
results in blocks F-208
variable amplitude life
curve F-203
weighted results F-207
parameter life curves T-99
stress life curve F-98
F-743
definition F-235
selection F-126
synthetic F-106
variable amplitude life curve
computed points F-266
design point
life points
results
list of life points F-205
lifecrv.asc F-426
LifeStat F-9, T-63
limit damage sum T-12
definition T-10
limit damage sum parameter T12
limit damage sum: F-215
limit load
plasticity T-108
ratio T-111, T-114, T-111, T114
definition T-108
limit load ratio
linear
cumulative damage rule T-10
Miner's rule T-10
linearized SWT parameter T-96
Liu-Zenner T-76
Windows F-617
LMS FALANCS LifeStat F-9
LMS GIDAS F-9
LMS TecWare MultiRain F-11
LMS TecWare RainView F-14
LMS TecWare TimeEdit F-13
display and edit time series F125, F-155
LMS TecWare TimeView F-13
display time series F-125, F155
lnotch.asc F-426
load T-13, T-63, T-13, T-63
amplitude T-7
calibration F-24, F-693
case
get load histories or test
schedules F-124
selection
T
F

F-744
Geometry Cell F-666

data set F-133
elastic-plastic strain F-693
factor F-694
histogram T-28
histories
select channel F-136
influence
coefficient T-135, T-137,
T-135, T-137
factor F-24, T-135, T-137,
T-135, T-137
definition T-14
influence factor F-665
Geometry Cell F-665
level 1 T-29
level k T-29
level of design point
load amplitude T-29
maximum T-7
mean load T-7
minimum T-7
notch strain approximation T106
ESED T-107
Neuber T-106
universal Neuber T-110
Seeger-Beste T-111
notch strain relation T-152
offset F-694
peak T-7
range T-7
R-ratio T-7
valley T-7
loading
block cycle loading T-9
block loading T-9
constant amplitude T-6, T-86,
T-6, T-86
monotonic T-81
multiaxial T-9
non-proportional T-8, T-133,
T-8, T-133
proportional T-8
sequence T-32
uniaxial T-81
uniaxial T-9
variable amplitude T-6
load-notch strain curve
data format F-631

load-notch strain curve file
local
stress state
pseudo stress F-270
strain F-270
stress state
stress-life approach F-268
stress-strain behavior T-81
local stress state
strain-life approach F-270
local time series T-167
Local Time Series F-222
logarithmic nature of fatigue T62
logarithmic scale
Results) F-292
logfile (see Logging) F-451
Logging
additional method information
F-451
Debug information F-451
LMS FALANCS operations F451
logfile F-305, F-689
messages F-305
loop
hysteresis loop T-23
low cycle fatigue T-4
LTS
method F-222
F-301
Generate stress time series
F-300
Generate time series for
forces and moments
(spot weld) F-301
Projection angle F-301
F-422
LTS Tensor Analysis F-224
M
macroscopic yielding T-45
T
F

correction factor T-45

mangement
FEM results F-193
Manson-Coffin-Morrow
equation T-87, T-94, T-87, T94
relation T-88
relationship T-86
formula F-276
Markov counting T-19
Masing T-24, T-81, T-82, T-83, T24, T-81, T-82, T-83
material
CAT/FALANCS F-500
PATRAN F-469
properties F-83
memory T-81
properties
axial T-103
torsional T-103
Material F-65
material data
database format F-528
comment F-275
compressive strength F-277
cyclic hardening coefficient F279
cyclic hardening exponent F279
data sheet F-273
database name F-275
endurance limit F-278
fatigue ductility coefficient F276
fatigue ductility exponent F276
fatigue strength coefficient F276
fatigue strength exponent F276
F-276
measured data F-280
multiaxial model F-281
F-745
name F-275
number of backstresses F-281
number of cycles F-278
Poisson's ratio F-281
Ramberg-Osgood relation F279
Ratchetting parameter F-281
R-ratio F-280
static failure data F-277
strain amplitude F-278
stress amplitude F-278
tensile strength F-277
test type F-280
Young's modulus F-279
max. absolute stress
Results) F-293
max. stress amplitude
Results) F-293
maximal norm quotient
F-289
maximum
definition T-7
principal T-142
parameter T-162
maximum number
F-299
mean load
definition T-7
mean shear correction T-70
mean stress
correction T-66
parameters T-72
effects T-66, T-94, T-66, T-94
mean stress influence
measurements
strain gage T-120
MEDINA F-454, F-463
memory
material memory T-81
model T-82, T-84, T-82, T-84
rules T-24, T-84, T-24, T-84
M1 T-84
T
F

F-746
M2 T-84
M3 T-85
menu
"Action"
in database selection
windows F-127
"Check"
in "Geometry Work Sheet"
F-674
"Configuration"
in "LMS FALANCS" F-113
"Edit"
F-672
"File"
F-668
"Help"
"Initialize"
F-669
"Navigate"
F-675
"Options"
F-678
"Select"
F-676
"Strain-life Approach"
"Stress-life Approach"
"Tools"
menu item
Check
->Consistency with
database F-674
->Files F-674
Edit
->Cut F-672
->Delete Column F-673
->Delete Row F-673
->Insert Before/Insert
After F-673
->Job F-672
->Paste F-673
->Undo F-673
File
->Load F-668
->Save As F-668
Initialize
->Isotropic Multiple
Channels (Standard
RP) F-669
->Job F-671
->Method parameter ...
F-671
->Multiple Channels per
Task F-669
->Single Channel F-669
->Strain Gage Rosettes
F-670
->Taskname initialization
F-670
Navigate
->Move to End of Column
F-675
->Move to Left Margin F675
->Move to Right Margin
F-675
->Move to Top of Column
F-675
Options
->Check for Duplicates
F-679
->Geometry Cell Window
F-678
->Orientation F-679
->Table Layout F-678
Select
->Block of Adjacent Cells
F-677
->Deselect All F-677
->Multiple Cell F-676
->Single Cell F-676
->Single Column F-676
->Single Diagonal F-677
->Single Row F-676
in "LMS FALANCS"
Configuration
->Databases... F-113
->Method Parameters F113
T
F

File
->Open FE Result Files...
F-96
->Open FE Set Files... F96
->Open GWS File... F-96
->Open Load History
Files... F-95
->Open Test Schedule
File... F-95
File->Exit... F-97
Help
>Contents F-114
->Index F-114
->Masterindex F-114
->On-Version F-115
->Overview F-114
->Setup F-115
->FEM: Load Cases... F106
->FEM: Local time series
(LTS) F-105, F-107
->FEM: transient analysis
F-107
->FEM:Fatigue Analysis
F-107
->FEM:Sets... F-106
->Load Histories... F-104
->Materials Data... F-103
->Method Parameters...
F-104
->Non FEM: Fatigue
Analysis F-105
->Non FEM: History
reduction F-106
->Non FEM: LTS Tensor
Analysis F-105
->Solution Parameters...
F-104
->synthetic stress-life
curve F-106
->Test Schedule
Segments... F-105
->FEM: Load Cases... F101
->FEM: Local time series
(LTS) F-102
F-747
->FEM: transient analysis

F-102
->FEM:Fatigue Analysis
F-102
->FEM:Sets... F-101
->Load Histories... F-100
->Method Parameters...
F-99
->Non FEM: Fatigue
Analysis F-100
->Non FEM: History
reduction F-101
->Non FEM: LTS Tensor
Analysis F-100
->Non FEM: Results F101
->Solution Parameters...
F-99
->Stress-life Curves... F98
->Test Schedule
Segments... F-100
Tools
->ABAQUS fil file-> Time
series F-111
->ABAQUS fil files->
FALANCS Element sets
F-109
->ASCII file -> FALANCS
Element sets F-108
->Computation Status F112
->FALANCS .dam ->
MEDINA F-112
->I-DEAS static groups ->
FALANCS Element sets
F-109
->IDEAS unv files -> Time
series F-112
->NASTRAN Punch files > Time series F-110
->Time series ->
ABAQUS input file F111
->Time series ->
NASTRAN bulk data F110
in database selection windows
Action->Define F-127
Action->Erase F-128
T
F

F-748
Action->Uniform Material
Law F-127
Action->Update F-128
->Non FEM: Results F-106
Menu Item
In "Geometry Work Sheet"
File
->Save F-668
[FEM Postprocessing]
result specification F-214
data sheet F-283
FEM Results F-291
General F-285
Hot Spots F-298
LTS F-300
NP FEM F-288
RP Filter F-296
database name F-286
FEM Postprocessing F-81
Miner Sum F-215
Number of blocks F-215
Rainflow projector norm F219
Show elimination run
number F-219
task number F-219
Use logarithmic scale F215, F-217
value to indicate endurance
limit F-216
FEM Results F-291
elimination run number F292
Hot spot number F-294
infinite life indicator F-294
logarithmic scale F-292
max. absolute stress F293
max. stress amplitude F293
Miner sum F-291
N_Design/N F-292
number of blocks F-292
result 1 F-291
result 2 F-292
result 3 F-293
result 4 F-294
RF Norm F-294
safety factor F-293
static failureindicator F-295
Task number F-294
General F-285
compute TSD exact F-286
fatigue sensitive editing F287
number of rainflow bins F286
Geometry Work Sheet
Initialize F-671
Hot Spots F-298
calculate hot spots F-298
maximum number F-299
minimum damage F-298
minimum size F-299
threshold F-298
LTS F-300
generate spot weld time
series F-301
generate strain time series
F-301
generate stress time series
F-300
projection angle F-301
name F-285
NP FEM F-288
absolute elimination
threshold F-289
elimination safety factor F289
maximal norm quotient F289
number of critical planes
F-288
number of directions F-288
tolerance angle F-288
threshold F-289
elimination runs F-290
RP Filter F-296
filter width F-296
select F-135
microyielding T-46
T
F

Miner T-10
elementary T-76
linear cumulative damage rule
T-10
rule modifications T-76
Miner sum
Results) F-291
Miner Sum F-215
minimum
definition T-7
minimum damage
F-298
minimum size
F-299
modal
contribution factor histories F471, T-136
superposition T-133, T-136, T133, T-136
transient analysis
NASTRAN F-471
mode shapes
selection F-138
modified Miner rules T-76
modifying factors
SN curve T-64
monitoring
non FEM jobs F-172
nonproportional FEM jobs F173
proportional FEM jobs F-173
Monitoring F-170
Morrow T-97
parameter F-256, T-97
multiaxial
fatigue T-139
loading T-9
MultiRain F-11
N
n' T-82, T-85, T-82, T-85
N_Design/N F-292
N0
SN-curves F-244
N1
SN-curves F-244
F-749
name
Dang Van data F-237
SN-curves F-237
NASTRAN F-96, F-416, F-455, F461, F-626
modal transient analysis F-471
CDH F-472
natural frequency T-136
navigation
NDesign versus N F-292
NE T-89
SN-curves F-243, F-244
Neuber T-46, T-106, T-108, T110, T-46, T-106, T-108, T-110
node elimination T-155
nominal stress T-13, T-63, T-13,
T-63
non FEM Strain-life Approach
performing a standard analysis
F-57
non FEM Stress-life Approach
performing a standard analysis
F-31
non-expert user F-22
non-linear kinematic hardening
T-147
non-local effects T-37, T-64, T37, T-64
non-proportional
loading T-8, T-133, T-8, T-133
stresses T-139
normalized stress gradient T-42
notch T-79
analysis T-106
load notch strain approximation
T-106
radius T-176
T
F

F-750
strain T-106
stress T-13, T-106, T-13, T106
elastic T-13
npdamage.buf F-427
NS/3 Segments T-68, T-74, T-68,
T-74
NS/Goodman T-66, T-74, T-66,
T-74
NS/None T-74
Nugget SN-Shift
definition T-173
number
of blocks
Results) F-292
of critical planes
FEM) F-288
of cycles
of directions
FEM) F-288
of rainflow bins
method parameter
(General) F-286
parameter T-150
Number of blocks F-215
Number of projection directions
parameter T-161, T-162, T-161,
T-162
O
offset F-694
open
channel F-29
data set F-28
FE Element Set Files F-96
FE Result Files F-96
file F-29
GWS Folder Files F-96
Load History Files F-95
Test Schedule File F-95
opening mode T-139
operating system
operating systems
names of paths and files F622
P
parameter
absolute elimination threshold
T-164
Calc Weld Nugget T-173
Calculate TSD Exact T-34, T35, T-34, T-35
Computation Points
Axis T-30
Points T-30, T-31, T-30, T31
Tolerance T-31
Type T-30
crack opening parameter T145
Design Point
Life T-30
Load Level T-30
Tolerance T-30
Unknown Variable T-29, T30, T-29, T-30
Diameter T-173
Elimination safety factor T-163
End linearization at F-256, T101
for mean stress correction T72
KDivSqrtS T-171, T-173, T171, T-173
Limit damage sum T-12
Limit Damage Sum
maximum norm quotient T-162
Maximum norm quotient T-162
NS/3 Segments T-68, T-74, T68, T-74
NS/Goodman T-66, T-74, T66, T-74
NS/None T-74
Nugget SN-Shift
definition T-173
Number of backstresses F281, T-150
T
F

Number of projection directions

T-161, T-162, T-161, T-162
Ratchetting parameter T-150
Ratchetting parameter Chi F281
Residual Stress T-118
shear parameter T-145
Start linearization at F-256, T101
SW/NS/EC3 High RS T-72
SW/NS/EC3 Low RS T-72
SW/NS/FKM Recommend T72
SW/NS/IIW High RS (cat III) T72
SW/NS/IIW Low RS (cat I) T72
SW/NS/IIW Med RS (cat II) T72
Tolerance Angle T-162
Torsion/1 Segment T-70, T-75,
T-70, T-75
Torsion/2 Segments T-70, T75, T-70, T-75
threshold T-164
threshold T-163
parameter databases F-27
path names F-622
path specification
in batch command file F-329
PATRAN
generating element sets
by groups F-467
by materials F-469
by properties F-468
install tool menur F-598
show results F-469
viewing results F-465
PATRAN Tool Menu F-467
PB T-95
pcoll.asc F-426
peak T-20
definition T-7
peak/valley
filter T-20
filtering T-20
physical unit
SN-curves F-239
F-751
Pias
load file F-95
PJ T-98
PK F-625
PK2 F-625
PK2 View F-625
plastic strain T-81
increment T-149
plasticity model T-147
pncurve.asc F-426
poisson ratio T-95
Poisson's ratio
print
data sheet F-152
datasheets F-177
Geometry Work Sheet F-162,
F-684
graphs F-177
Pro/MECHANICA F-96, F-487, F626
projection angle
method parameter (LTS) F301
property
CAT/FALANCS F-500
PATRAN F-468
proportional
loading T-8
stresses T-139
pseudo stress T-13, T-106, T133, T-13, T-106, T-133
pseudo stress based analysis
T-154
PSWT T-94
original F-255
shear stress correction T-95
Torsion F-255
T
F

F-752
Q
quasi-static superposition T133, T-134, T-133, T-134
R
R03MS T-178
r1ms
model F-538
R1MS T-175, T-178, T-175, T-178
approach T-175
rainflow T-24
counting T-23
cycle counting T-8
definition T-23
matrix T-18
strain-life T-122
projector T-155
rainflow matrix
Non-FEM results (local
stresses) F-209
Rainflow projector norm F-219
RainView F-14
Ramberg-Osgood
relation T-81, T-82, T-88, T81, T-82, T-88
Ramberg-Osgood relation
formula F-279
range
definition T-7
Ratchetting F-281
Ratchetting parameter T-150
rate independent T-20, T-133, T20, T-133
counting methods T-19
rcoll.asc F-426
rcollw.asc F-426
relative Miners Rule F-263
Representative Elements T-160
residual stress T-117
Residual Stress parameter T118
residue T-24
resspec.fol F-426
result
management of FEM results
F-193
management of Non-FEM
results F-183
Result 1
Results) F-291
Result 2
Results) F-292
Result 3
Results) F-293
Result 4
Results) F-294
result specification
in method parameters F-214
resultf.fol F-426
results
constant amplitude life curve
F-201, F-212, F-213
cumulative load amplitude
histogram F-202
damage matrix F-211
design point F-204
FEM based analysis F-81
FEM results
damage F-215
Design life factor (Result 2)
F-217
Load design factor (Result
3) F-217
NDesign versus N (Result
2) F-217
sigmaDesign versus sigma
(Result 3) F-217
list of life points F-205
local stresses (rainflow matrix)
F-209
non FEM Strain-life Approach
F-61
non FEM Stress-life Approach
F-53
results in blocks F-208
variable amplitude life curve F203
viewing FEM results F-214
viewing results
ANSYS F-478
CAT/FALANCS F-501
PATRAN F-465, F-469
T
F

weighted results F-207

reversal point T-20
RF Norm
Results) F-294
rfmat.erm F-426
rfprange.fol F-427
rfproj0.fol F-426
rfproj1.fol F-426
RIGSYS
load file F-95
roughness T-49
RP Filter T-156
RPC-III F-625
load file F-95
rpdirec.buf F-427
rpf%nr.erg F-427
rpfosp%nr.fol F-427
R-ratio
definition T-7
SN-curves F-240
Rupp
generalized Rupps method T169
S
S1
SAE T-24
safety factor
Results) F-293
save
error and information
messages F-689
Geometry Work Sheet F-25,
F-668
job info F-171, F-689
scatter T-51
Schtz T-69
script
tecware F-19
SE
seam welds F-536, F-538, F-559,
T-72, T-174, T-72, T-174
Eurocode 3 T-179
F-753
Eurocode 3 recommendations
F-540
International Institute of
Welding T-179
mean stress correction T-72
R1MS approach T-175
section
[Calibration]
in batch command file F392
[Channels]
[ElementSets]
[Job]
[Le]
[LoadCases]
[Material]
[MethodParam]
[SigmaE]
[SNCurve]
[SolParam]
[Tasks]
[TSD]
Seeger-Beste T-106, T-111, T106, T-111
selection
block F-677
T
F

F-754
column F-676
deselect F-677
diagonal F-677
directory F-120
from database F-126
in the Geometry Work Sheet
F-676
multiple cells F-676
of channels F-121, F-136, F664
of data sets F-133
of database entries F-664
of element sets F-144
of FE Element Set Files F-96
CAT/FALANCS F-500
of FE Result Files F-96
CAT/FALANCS F-499
of FEM load cases F-138
of files F-118
of GWS Folder Files F-96
of Load History Files F-95
of mode shapes F-138
of Test Schedule File F-95
of test schedule sequence F142
row F-676
single cell F-676
unselect F-677
selection of
FEM load cases
Geometry Cell F-666
sfdetgws.fol F-426
sfdetset.tsi F-426
shear
module T-95
parameter T-145
strain-life equation in shear T103
sheet thickness T-171
shell script F-449
falancs F-449
falbatch F-449
falgws2i F-450
tecware F-449
terminal F-450
Show elimination run number F219
signed von Mises T-142

parameter life curves T-99
size T-37, T-64, T-37, T-64
correction
effect T-40, T-101, T-40, T101
factor T-64
of surface treatment T-41
technological T-40
factor T-64
Skalar20
load file F-95
Smith-Watson-Topper
damage parameter T-94
linearized T-96
modification T-95
original F-255
Torsion F-255
SN curve T-11, T-28, T-11, T-28
compressive strength T-59
defining T-58
determination T-63
sheet mode T-173
tensile strength T-59
unit T-59, T-63, T-59, T-63
SN- curve
display F-709
SN Curve Type
SN-curves F-237
SN-curve
data sheet F-233
SN-curves
A(ampl) F-246
A(max) F-246
A1(ampl) F-245
A1(max) F-245
A2(ampl) F-245
A2(max) F-245
B(max) F-246
B1(ampl) F-245
B1(max) F-245
B2(ampl) F-245
B2(max) F-245
C(ampl) F-246
C(max) F-246
comment F-237
compressive strength F-239
T
F

curve definition F-242

database F-237
k1 F-243
k2 F-243
N0 F-244
N1 F-244
name F-237
NE F-243, F-244
Physical Unit F-239
R-ratio F-240
S1 F-242, F-244
SE F-243, F-244
SE(ampl) F-245, F-246
SE(max) F-245, F-246
SN Curve Type F-237
Tensile Strength F-239
view mode F-240
SN-curves F-233
B(ampl) F-246
axis F-266
comment F-253
damage mean stress influence
factor F-256
damage parameter F-255
damage residual stress F-256
data sheet F-251
strain-life F-533
stress-life F-532
database name F-253
design point F-264
different channel lengths F263
End linearization at F-256
failure probability F-264
F-268
life F-264
limit damage sum F-263
limit load ratio F-255
load level F-265
load-notch strain curve F-254
file F-255
mean stress correction F-257
damage accumulation F259
Limit R F-259
name F-253
F-755
size correction F-262

spot welds F-260
calculate damage in nugget
F-260
diameter F-260
Start linearization at F-256
surface correction F-262
tolerance F-265, F-267
type F-267
unknown variable F-264
Solution Parameters F-65
spot weld F-66, T-169
ABAQUS F-495
ANSYS F-477
CDH approach F-472
diameter T-171
I-DEAS F-484
NASTRAN F-472
spot welds
start
analysis from Geometry Work
Sheet F-25
batch processing F-323
FALANCS F-19
Start
Windows F-619
Start linearization at
Start linearization at parameter
T-101
Starting FALANCS
ANSYS F-478
CAT/FALANCS F-500
PATRAN F-469
state of job F-172
static failure T-4, T-58, T-59, T-4,
T-58, T-59
Results) F-295
statistical
nature of fatigue T-51
size effect T-44
strain
at endurance limit T-89
elastic T-81
permanent T-81
plastic T-81
T
F

F-756
plastic strain increment T-149

recoverable T-81
strain amplitude
strain gage rosette T-120
strain-controlled T-79, T-153, T79, T-153
strain-life
approach T-3, T-4, T-79, T152, T-3, T-4, T-79, T-152
equation T-87
input data F-87
stress
concentration T-79
factor F-24, T-38
definition T-14
Geometry Cell F-665
elastic notch T-13, T-63, T-13,
T-63
gradient T-42
mode shapes T-136
nominal T-13, T-63, T-13, T-63
non-proportional T-139
normalized stress gradients T43
proportional T-139
pseudo T-13, T-106, T-13, T106
stress at endurance limit T-89
stress amplitude
stress concentration factor F665
stress life curve F-98
definition F-235
selection F-126
stress-controlled T-153
stress-life
approach T-3, T-4, T-57, T-3,
T-4, T-57
input data F-86
stress-life curve
Dang Van safety factor
analysis F-233
data representation
SN-curve F-637
SN-curve F-233
stress-strain
curve
Masing model T-83
memory model T-84
cyclic stress-strain curve T-82
inelastic behavior T-81
STRUKTUR F-625
load file F-95
superposition
quasi-static T-134
supported analysis types
ABAQUS F-491
ANSYS F-475
CAT/FALANCS F-497
I-DEAS F-481
NASTRAN F-461
Pro/MECHANICA F-487
Supported Data Formats F-625
supported elements
ABAQUS F-491
ANSYS F-475
CAT/FALANCS F-497
I-DEAS F-481
NASTRAN F-461
Pro/MECHANICA F-487
supported versions
ABAQUS F-491
ANSYS F-475
CAT/FALANCS F-497
I-DEAS F-481
NASTRAN F-461
Pro/MECHANICA F-487
surface
correction
effect T-37, T-49, T-101, T-37,
T-49, T-101
layer T-118
roughness T-37, T-49, T-64,
T-37, T-49, T-64
factor T-64
SW/NS/EC3 High RS T-72
SW/NS/EC3 Low RS T-72
SW/NS/FKM Recommend T-72
SW/NS/IIW High RS (cat III) T-72
SW/NS/IIW Low RS (cat I) T-72
SW/NS/IIW Med RS (cat II) T-72
SWT T-94
syntax
T
F

database definition in
falancs.ini F-518
synthetic stress life curve F106, F-651
T
table layout
task number
as FEM result F-219
Task number
Results) F-294
TDF F-625
load file F-95
Technological size effects T-40
tecware
script F-19
shell script F-449
falancs F-449
falbatch F-449
falgws2i F-450
logfile (see Logging) F-451
terminal F-450
TecWare
installation structure F-403
tecware.ini F-447
[Debugging] F-447
[PrintConfiguration] F-447
[Runtime] F-447
list of printers F-181
temporary directory F-601
tensile strength T-59
SN-curves F-239
terminal F-450
test schedule
segments F-142
sequence F-142
test schedules T-32
segments T-32
Thin surface layer F-256
thin surface layer model T-117
three segment mean stress
correction T-68
threshold
absolute thresholding T-164
F-298
F-757
time series
generate spot weld time series
method parameter (LTS)
F-301
generate strain time series
F-301
generate stress time series
F-300
TimeEdit F-13
TimeView F-13
tolerance
computed points
design point
tolerance angle
F-288
Tolerance Angle T-162
torsion
strain-life equation in torsion
T-103
Torsion/1 Segment T-70, T-75,
T-70, T-75
Torsion/2 Segments T-70, T-75,
T-70, T-75
torsional
material properties T-103
tests T-103
transient analysis T-133
Transient Analysis F-225
TSD
compute exact
method parameter
(General) F-286
type
computed points
U
UB F-625
ultimate stress
definition T-58
uniaxial loading T-9
uniform material law F-83, T-91
Uniform Material Law F-659
Universal Binary
T
F

F-758
load file F-95

unv2tsi F-485
update
data set F-149
threshold T-164
definition T-163
F-289
Use logarithmic scale F-215, F217
elimination runs
F-290
user
experience F-22
expert user F-22
non-expert user F-22
V
valley T-20
definition T-7
Value to indicate endurance limit
F-216
variable amplitude
loading T-6, T-76, T-6, T-76
variable amplitude life curve
design point
version
of LMS FALANCS F-115
view
data sheet F-152
load channels F-154
viewing
FEM results F-214
results
ANSYS F-478
CAT/FALANCS F-501
PATRAN F-469
viewing results
PATRAN F-465
von Mises T-103
Vormwald parameter T-98
W
welds
Eurocode 3 T-179
geometry T-176
International Institute of
Welding T-179
MIG welding T-174
R1MS approach T-175
seam welds F-536, F-559, T174
Eurocode 3
recommendations F-540
Hollow sections F-554
Non-welded details F544
Transverse butt welds F547
Welded attachments with
non load carrying welds
F-549
F-545
Welded joints with loadcarrying welds F-551
fatigue analysis F-536, F540, F-559
Eurocode 3
recommendations F540
IIW recommendations F559
R1MS approach F-538
IIW recommendations
Butt welds, transverse
loaded F-562
Flanges, branches and
nozzles F-582
Lap joints F-580
Longitudinal load-carrying
welds F-569
Non load carrying
attachments F-575
Reinforcements F-581
Tubular joints F-585
Unwelded parts of a
component F-561
R1MS approach F-538
spot weld
ABAQUS F-495
T
F

ANSYS F-477
CDH approach F-472
I-DEAS F-484
NASTRAN F-472
spot welds F-66, T-169
wildcards F-622
window
"CAT/FALANCS command
window" F-499
"Computation status" F-645
"Constant Amplitude Lifecurve(s) / Stress-strain
curve(s)" F-647
"Creation of synthetic SN
curves" F-651
"Damage matrix" F-211
"Damage Selection" F-655
"Database Configuration Tool"
F-513
"Define Material Data Sheet"
F-274
"Define Method parameter" F285
"Define Solution Parameter
Set" F-252
"Define Stress-life Data Sheet"
F-236
"Estimation Based on Uniform
Material Law" F-659
"Exit LMS FALANCS" F-661
"Export (ASCII)" F-119
"Export (csv)" F-119
"Geometry Cell" F-663
"Geometry Work Sheet" F-667
"History reduction" F-685
"Info" F-689
"Job Setup Window" F-691
"Life points" F-205
"List of Printers" F-180
"Load Geometry Work Sheet"
F-119
"Load History Calibration" F693
"Load History Channel
Information" F-695
"Load History File Selection"
F-119
"Load History Selection" F-121
"Load Results" F-121
F-759
"Load-notch strain relation" F212

"Options" F-699
"P constant amplitude life
curve" F-213
"Print"
in Microsoft Windows F177
in Unix F-180
"RAINFLOW Matrix" F-209
"Result directory selection" F121
"result selection" F-703
"Results in blocks" F-208
"Results" F-199
"Save as" F-119
"Save Information Messages"
F-119
"Save results" F-119
"Selection of component file"
F-119
"Selection of element sets" F122
"Selection of load cases" F122
"Selection of Material Data
Sheets" F-126
"Selection of Method
Parameter Sets" F-126
"Selection of result file" F-119
"Selection of Solution
Parameter Sets" F-126
"Selection of Stress-life Data
Sheets" F-126
"Setup information" F-707
"Stress-life Approach - Define
Stress-life Data Sheet" F235
"Stress-life Approach - Stresslife Curves" F-709
"Test Schedule Definition" F118
"Test Schedule Segments Info" F-697
"Test Schedule Segments" F122
"Weighted Results" F-207
Window
"Design Point" F-204
T
F

F-760
Y
yield T-79
criterion T-147
function T-147
surface T-148
yielding T-79
Young's modulus T-91
T
F


Falancs User en

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Falancs User en

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

LMS FALANCS User

LMS FALANCS Documentation

LMS FALANCS User Manual

LMS FALANCS features and benefits

LMS FALANCS features and benefits

LMS FALANCS User Manual

z Speed of calculation enables practical design troubleshooting.

Overview of the LMS FALANCS documentation

Overview of the LMS FALANCS

LMS FALANCS User Manual (this manual)

LMS FALANCS User Manual

cation parts are only available for examples with simple

LMS FALANCS User Manual

Part 6 Reference Interfaces to Finite Element Tools

Part 1 Purpose of LMS FALANCS and related tools

Virtual Prototyping for Durability........................................... F-3

Part 2 First Steps

Introduction to LMS FALANCS............................................... F-19

LMS FALANCS User Manual

File selection.............................................................................. F-29

Part 3 Reference Graphical User Interface

Overview ....................................................................................... F-91

Menu: Configuration............................................................... F-113

LMS FALANCS User Manual

The Data Sheet for Method Parameters ............................. F-283

Part 4 ReferenceBatch Mode Interface

Starting a Batch Process......................................................... F-323

Differences between Interactive and Batch

Part 5 Reference General Settings

System Level and User Specific Settings............................ F-403

Part 6 ReferenceInterfaces to Finite Element Tools

Overview on Supported Interfaces ...................................... F-459

LMS FALANCS User Manual

Generating Element Sets ....................................................... F-503

Shared or Private Databases ................................................. F-507

Part 8 Seam Weld Databases

Seam Weld Database Types .................................................... F-537

Installation Instructions ......................................................... F-589

LMS FALANCS User Manual

UNIX Systems......................................................................... F-591

Part 10 Frequently Asked Questions

What is the polarity (sign) of load channels?..................... F-611

Part 11 LMS FALANCS for Microsoft Windows

LMS FALANCS for Microsoft Windows ............................... F-619

Appendix: File Formats

Directory names........................................................................ F-623

Appendix: Data Representations of Stress-Life Curves and Dang

Appendix: Windows in LMS FALANCS

Window "Computation status" ............................................... F-645

LMS FALANCS User Manual

Window "Creation of synthetic SN curves"......................... F-651

Appendix: References, Glossary, Index

References .................................................................................. F-715

Display of a rainflow matrix: "bubbles" and "3D solid

LMS FALANCS User Manual

Window "Starting FALANCS tool: IDEAS unv file

The GWS of a FEM - fatigue analysis................................F-159

LMS FALANCS User Manual

The area Element in the window "Define Solution

Table of Illustrations F-xxvii

Links to the description of supported elements.................F-461

F-xxviii LMS FALANCS User Manual

Window "Strain gage rosettes" ...........................................F-670